Sa4047 S70HN NFM 010

INTRODUCTION 1
SA4047S70HNNFM010
FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW
AIR SUBSYSTEM OPERATORS MANUAL HELLENIC NAVY MODEL S70B HELICOPTERS
DATA ENTRY DATA DISPLAY
PAGE ORGANIZATION 4 AND DETAILS
ASW SENSOR SUBSYSTEM
SYSTEM OPERATION
ESM SYSTEM OPERATION
SURFACE 8 SEARCH RADAR
DATA LINK SYSTEM
INDEX AND FOLDOUTS
THIS DOCUMENT IS THE PROPERTY OF UNITED TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION AND IS DELIVERED ON THE EXPRESS CONDITION THAT IT IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED REPRODUCED IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR USED FOR MANUFACTURE FOR ANY OTHER THAN UNITED TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION WITHOUT ITS WRITTEN CON SENT; AND THAT NO RIGHT IS GRANTED TO DISCLOSE OR SO USE ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN SAID DOCUMENT. THIS RESTRICTION DOES NOT LIMIT THE RIGHT TO USE INFORMATION OBTAINED FROM ANOTHER SOURCE. COPYRIGHT
C
1994 SIKORSKY AIRCRAFT CORPORATION
FG1321
SA
30 APRIL 2003
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010
RESERVED
FC2512
SA
3 (Reverse Blank)
ORIGINAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No. CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5.
SCOPE ................................................................................................. MISSION OVERVIEW ........................................................................... CREW RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................................................... STATION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................................................... REFERENCE MATERIAL..........................................................................
1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1
CHAPTER 2 - FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW
2.1. 2.2. 2.2.1. 2.2.2. 2.2.3. 2.2.4. 2.2.5. 2.2.6. 2.2.7.
INTRODUCTION................................................................................... SYSTEM FUNCTIONS............................................................................ Tactical Processing Function................................................................... Control and Display Function................................................................. Communication Function ....................................................................... Navigation Function .............................................................................. Stores Management Function ................................................................. Sensor Function .................................................................................... System Management and Control Function .............................................
2-1 2-1 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-4
CHAPTER 3 - DATA ENTRY/DATA DISPLAY
3.1. 3.2. 3.2.1. 3.2.2. 3.2.3. 3.2.4.
INTRODUCTION................................................................................... DATA ENTRY........................................................................................ CDU Keyset .......................................................................................... CDU Display......................................................................................... CDU Display Layout .............................................................................. CDU Page Selection ..............................................................................
3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1
ORIGINAL
Page No. 3.2.5. 3.2.6. 3.2.7. 3.3. 3.3.1. 3.3.2. 3.3.3. 3.3.4. 3.3.5. 3.3.6. 3.3.7. 3.3.8. 3.3.9. CDU Data Entry .................................................................................... Display Control Panel............................................................................ Multifunction Slew Control ..................................................................... DATA DISPLAY ..................................................................................... CDU Pages ........................................................................................... Primary Flight Display ........................................................................... Navigation Displays .............................................................................. EICAS .................................................................................................. Status, Monitor, and Test Displays.......................................................... Tactical Displays ................................................................................... Alerts and Annunciations....................................................................... ASO Displays ....................................................................................... Test Displays......................................................................................... 3-1 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-10
CHAPTER 4 - PAGE ORGANIZATION AND DETAILS
4.1. 4.2. 4.2.1. 4.2.2. 4.2.3. 4.2.4. 4.2.5. 4.2.6. 4.2.7. 4.2.8. 4.2.9. 4.2.10. 4.2.11. 4.2.12. 4.2.13.
INTRODUCTION................................................................................... PAGE ORGANIZATION AND DETAILS .................................................. Index Page Group................................................................................. Position Page ........................................................................................ Integrated Navigation Page Group ........................................................ Flight Plan Page Group ......................................................................... Direct-To Page ...................................................................................... Edit Page Group ................................................................................... Data Page Group ................................................................................. Steer Page Group ................................................................................. Communication Page Group.................................................................. Navigation Page Group ........................................................................ IFF Page Group .................................................................................... Status Page Group ................................................................................ Mission Page Group .............................................................................
4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-2
ORIGINAL
Page No. CHAPTER 5 - ASW SENSOR SUBSYSTEM
5.1. 5.2. 5.2.1. 5.2.2. 5.2.3. 5.2.4. 5.2.5. 5.2.6. 5.2.7. 5.2.8. 5.2.9. 5.3. 5.3.1. 5.3.2. 5.3.3. 5.3.4. 5.3.5. 5.3.6. 5.3.7. 5.4. 5.4.1. 5.4.2. 5.4.3. 5.4.4. 5.4.5. 5.4.6.
INTRODUCTION................................................................................... SONAR EQUIPMENT ............................................................................ Sonar Display ....................................................................................... Sonar Control Unit ................................................................................ Cursor Control Device ........................................................................... Cable Interface Power Supply ................................................................ Sonar Dome Control ............................................................................. Reeling Machine ................................................................................... Sonar Interface Unit .............................................................................. Submersible Unit................................................................................... Cable and Reel Assembly ...................................................................... OPERATION......................................................................................... Sonar Operator Bit Procedures .............................................................. Lower ................................................................................................... Sound Velocity Profile ........................................................................... Passive Mode........................................................................................ Active Mode ......................................................................................... Underwater Voice Communication ......................................................... Raise.................................................................................................... TACTICAL CAPABILITIES ....................................................................
5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-2 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-7 5-7 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-9 5-10
Tactical Data ........................................................................................ Cable Angle ......................................................................................... Data Recording (Provisional).................................................................. Dip FTP ................................................................................................ CBIT ..................................................................................................... Data Link Management of Sonar Contacts ..............................................
CHAPTER 6 - SYSTEM OPERATION
6.1.
INTRODUCTION...................................................................................
6-1
ORIGINAL
Page No. 6.2. 6.2.1. 6.2.2. 6.2.3. 6.2.4. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5. 6.6. 6.6.1. 6.6.2. 6.7. 6.8. 6.9. 6.10. 6.10.1. 6.10.2. 6.11. 6.12. 6.12.1. 6.13. 6.14. CDU, MFD, SCU, AND SONAR DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT .... CDU Display Brightness Adjustment........................................................ MFD Display Brightness Adjustment........................................................ SCU Display Brightness Adjustment ........................................................ Sonar Display Brightness Adjustment...................................................... ICS AND MONITORED AUDIO VOLUME ADJUSTMENT......................... VOR AND MARKER BEACON AUDIO VOLUME ADJUSTMENT .............. CREW INTERCOMMUNICATION (ICS) .................................................. RADIOS ............................................................................................... V/UHF and HF Radios Channelization ................................................... Configuration and Assignment............................................................... DATA TRANSFER-PREFLIGHT ................................................................. AUDIO MONITORING.......................................................................... STATUS MONITORING ......................................................................... STORES................................................................................................ ASC Station Inventory ........................................................................... Bomb Racks.......................................................................................... FUEL CONFIGURATION........................................................................ SYSTEM START AND INITIALIZATION.................................................... Initial Time and Date ............................................................................. INITIATED BUILT-IN TEST (IBIT)............................................................... SONAR TESTS ...................................................................................... 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-2 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-3 6-3 6-3 6-3 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-4
CHAPTER 7 - ESM SYSTEM OPERATION
7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.3.1. 7.3.2. 7.3.3. 7.3.4.
INTRODUCTION................................................................................... SYSTEM INTERFACES............................................................................ SYSTEM OPERATION............................................................................ ESM Operational Software Program ...................................................... Tune Table............................................................................................ Emitter Parameter File ........................................................................... ESM Status ...........................................................................................
7-1 7-1 7-1 7-1 7-1 7-1 7-2
ORIGINAL
Page No. 7.3.5. 7.3.6. 7.3.7. 7.3.8. 7.3.9. 7.3.10. 7.3.11. 7.3.12. 7.3.13. 7.3.14. 7.3.15. Emitter Report and Emitter ID ................................................................. Data Management ................................................................................ Navigation Data ................................................................................... Emitter Geo-location.............................................................................. CDU Commands ................................................................................... ESM MP Control ................................................................................... Manual Emitter Classification ................................................................. ESM Warning Tones ............................................................................. Annunciations....................................................................................... Physical Countermeasures Capability ..................................................... ESM Zeroize......................................................................................... 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4
CHAPTER 8 - SURFACE SEARCH RADAR
8.1. 8.1.1. 8.1.2. 8.1.3. 8.1.4. 8.1.5. 8.1.6. 8.1.7. 8.1.8. 8.1.9. 8.1.10. 8.2. 8.2.1. 8.2.2. 8.2.3. 8.3. 8.3.1. 8.3.2.
INTRODUCTION................................................................................... Track-While-Scan (TWS) ....................................................................... Frequency Agility (FA)........................................................................... Constant False Alarm Rate (CFAR) ......................................................... Scan Integration.................................................................................... Sensitivity Time Control (STC)................................................................. Pulse Compression ................................................................................ Automatic Gain Control (AGC) .............................................................. Automatic Antenna Stabilization ............................................................ Selectable Receiver Noise Threshold....................................................... Built-in Test (BIT) Capability ................................................................... EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................... Signal Processor ................................................................................... Receiver-Transmitter .............................................................................. Antenna ............................................................................................... OPERATION......................................................................................... Radar Display....................................................................................... Built-In-Test (BIT) Operation....................................................................
8-1 8-1 8-1 8-1 8-1 8-1 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-6
ORIGINAL
Page No.
CHAPTER 9 - DATA LINK COMMUNICATION SET, LINK-11
9.1. 9.2. 9.2.1. 9.2.2. 9.3. 9.3.1. 9.3.2. 9.3.3. 9.3.4. 9.3.5. 9.3.6. 9.3.7. 9.3.8. 9.3.9. 9.3.10. 9.3.11. 9.3.12. 9.3.13. 9.3.14. 9.3.15. 9.3.16. 9.4. 9.4.1. 9.4.2.
INTRODUCTION................................................................................... EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................... Data Link Processor............................................................................... Data Terminal Set ................................................................................. DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................... Track Numbers ..................................................................................... Data Link Reference Point (DLRP)............................................................ Gridlock ............................................................................................... Link-11 Network Control ....................................................................... Network Load Control ........................................................................... Network Track Management.................................................................. Track Alert Control................................................................................ Conflict Management ............................................................................ IFF/SIF Reporting .................................................................................. EW Coordination.................................................................................. ASW Aircraft Status Reporting............................................................... EW Intelligence..................................................................................... Weapon / Engagement Status Reporting................................................ Command Orders ................................................................................. DTS Parameters .................................................................................... Link-11 Loop Test .................................................................................. OPERATION......................................................................................... Initialization.......................................................................................... Data Link Menu ....................................................................................
9-1 9-1 9-1 9-1 9-1 9-1 9-3 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-11 9-11 9-11 9-11 9-12 9-12 9-12 9-13
10
ORIGINAL
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Page No.
CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER 2 - FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW
Figure 2-1. Figure 2-2.
Mission Avionic System Functions........................................................... Subsystems Tested with CBIT and IBIT .....................................................
2-3 2-6
CHAPTER 3 - DATA ENTRY/DATA DISPLAY
Figure 3-1. Figure 3-2. Figure 3-3. Figure 3-4. Figure 3-5. Figure 3-6. Figure 3-7. Figure 3-8. Figure 3-9. Figure 3-10. Figure 3-11. Figure 3-12. Figure 3-13. Figure 3-14. Figure 3-15. Figure 3-16. Figure 3-17. Figure 3-18. Figure 3-19. Figure 3-20.
Latitude/Longitude Entry Examples ......................................................... CDU Key Functions ............................................................................... Communication Radio Page................................................................... V/UHF Control Page ............................................................................. COMSEC Control Page ......................................................................... CDU Symbolic Aids............................................................................... DCP Control Functions........................................................................... Summary of Displayed Data .................................................................. Primary Flight Display with HSI .............................................................. PFD Arc Map Display............................................................................ PFD Hover Display ................................................................................ PFD Cable Angle Display ...................................................................... 360 Map Display.................................................................................. Plan Map Display ................................................................................. EICAS Display ...................................................................................... Status Display ....................................................................................... Digital I/O Monitor Display................................................................... Discrete I/O Monitor Display................................................................. Analog I/O Monitor Display.................................................................. Top Level Symbols and Modes ...............................................................
3-2 3-11 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30
11
ORIGINAL
Page No. Figure 3-21. Figure 3-22. Figure 3-23. Figure 3-24. Figure 3-25. Figure 3-26. Figure 3-27. Figure 3-28. Figure 3-29. Figure 3-30. Figure 3-31. Figure 3-32. Figure 3-33. Figure 3-34. Figure 3-35. Figure 3-36. Figure 3-37. Figure 3-38. Figure 3-39. Figure 3-40. Figure 3-41. Figure 3-42. Figure 3-43. Figure 3-44. Figure 3-45. Figure 3-46. Figure 3-47. Function Icons ....................................................................................... Tactical Symbols ................................................................................... Pattern and Waypoint Symbols.............................................................. Object Modifiers ................................................................................... Tactical Plot Top Level Symbol Menu ...................................................... Radar Top Level Symbol Menu............................................................... FLIR Top Level Symbol Menu .................................................................. FLIR Main Menu.................................................................................... FLIR Navigation Display ........................................................................ FLIR Attack Page ................................................................................... ESM Top Level Symbol Menu ................................................................. Idle Mode Display................................................................................. Surveillance (SURV) Display................................................................... Detect and Classify Display.................................................................... A-Scan FM (AFM) Display ..................................................................... Passive Combination Display ................................................................. Acoustic Performance Prediction (APP) Display ....................................... Communications Mode (COMM) Display................................................ Test Mode Display................................................................................. System Condition Display ...................................................................... FMS CDU Annunciations ....................................................................... FMS CDU Scratchpad Messages ............................................................ Mission Processor CDU Annunciations.................................................... Mission Processor CDU Scratchpad Messages......................................... Mission Processor MFD Annunciations.................................................... FLIR Menu Structure............................................................................... Tactical Aids and Track Menus Structure ................................................ 3-31 3-42 3-46 3-47 3-48 3-49 3-50 3-51 3-53 3-55 3-56 3-57 3-59 3-62 3-65 3-67 3-71 3-74 3-75 3-76 3-77 3-84 3-95 3-99 3-103 3-106 3-107
CHAPTER 4 - PAGE ORGANIZATION AND DETAILS
Figure 4-1. Figure 4-2.
Page Organization ............................................................................... Index 1 Page ........................................................................................
4-3 4-11
12
ORIGINAL
Page No. Figure 4-3. Figure 4-4. Figure 4-5. Figure 4-6. Figure 4-7. Figure 4-8. Figure 4-9. Figure 4-10. Figure 4-11. Figure 4-12. Figure 4-13. Figure 4-14. Figure 4-15. Figure 4-16. Figure 4-17. Figure 4-18. Figure 4-19. Figure 4-20. Figure 4-21. Figure 4-22. Figure 4-23. Figure 4-24. Figure 4-25. Figure 4-26. Figure 4-27. Figure 4-28. Figure 4-29. Figure 4-30. Figure 4-31. Figure 4-32. Figure 4-33. Figure 4-34. Index 2 Page ........................................................................................ Start 1 Page ......................................................................................... Start 2 Page ......................................................................................... Start 3 Page ......................................................................................... Chart Datums Page ............................................................................... Fuel Configuration Page ........................................................................ Position Page ........................................................................................ INU/GPS/D Integrated Navigation Page................................................ INU Integrated Navigation Page ............................................................ INU Navigation Data Page.................................................................... GPS Integrated Navigation Page............................................................ GPS Satellite Data Page ........................................................................ FMS GPS Integrated Navigation Page .................................................... Vertical Gyro/Directional Gryo Navigation Data Page............................ Update Page ........................................................................................ Flight Plan Page (Initial Display) ............................................................. Flight Plan Page (Scrolled from Initial Display) ........................................ Flight Plan Page Accessed with the DIR Key ............................................ Duplicate Identifiers Page ...................................................................... Flight Plan Page with Discontinuity ......................................................... Flight Plan Waypoint A Page................................................................. Flight Plan Edit 1 Page .......................................................................... Flight Plan Edit 2 Page .......................................................................... Intercept A Page ................................................................................... Intercept B Page.................................................................................... Hold Page ............................................................................................ Patterns 1 Page..................................................................................... Patterns 2 Page..................................................................................... Circle MFP Page ................................................................................... Racetrack MFP Page.............................................................................. Figure Eight MFP Page .......................................................................... Closed Random Pattern MFP Page 1 ...................................................... 4-12 4-13 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-17 4-18 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-27 4-28 4-30 4-33 4-34 4-36 4-37 4-38 4-42 4-43 4-44 4-46 4-47 4-52 4-53 4-54 4-56 4-58 4-60
13
ORIGINAL
Page No. Figure 4-35. Figure 4-36. Figure 4-37. Figure 4-38. Figure 4-39. Figure 4-40. Figure 4-41. Figure 4-42. Figure 4-43. Figure 4-44. Figure 4-45. Figure 4-46. Figure 4-47. Figure 4-48. Figure 4-49. Figure 4-50. Figure 4-51. Figure 4-52. Figure 4-53. Figure 4-54. Figure 4-55. Figure 4-56. Figure 4-57. Figure 4-58. Figure 4-59. Figure 4-60. Figure 4-61. Figure 4-62. Figure 4-63. Figure 4-64. Figure 4-65. Figure 4-66. Closed Random Pattern MFP Page 2 ...................................................... Closed Random Pattern MFP Page 3 ...................................................... FMS Approach Page ............................................................................. Initial Approach Fix (IAF) Select Page..................................................... Visual Approach Page .......................................................................... Tactical Approach Page ........................................................................ Markpoint List Page............................................................................... Data Page ............................................................................................ Ident Data Page .................................................................................... Standard Instrument Departures (SIDS) Page........................................... SID Transitions Page.............................................................................. Standard Terminal Arrival Routes (STARS) Page...................................... STAR Transitions Page........................................................................... Impromptu Page 1 ................................................................................ Impromptu Page 2 ................................................................................ Impromptu Page 3 ................................................................................ Ladder Page ......................................................................................... Sector Page .......................................................................................... Expanding Square Page ........................................................................ SAR Freeze/Resume Page ..................................................................... Track Space Page ................................................................................. User Waypoint List Page ....................................................................... User Waypoint Page ............................................................................. Off Route Waypoint List 1 Page ............................................................. Off Route Waypoint List 2 Page ............................................................. Tactical Flight Plan Page........................................................................ Lateral Steer Page ................................................................................. Vertical Steer Page................................................................................ Alternate Flight Plan Page...................................................................... Alternate Flight Plan Climb Initialization Page ......................................... Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Initialization Page............................................ Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Summary Page................................................ 4-62 4-63 4-64 4-65 4-66 4-68 4-70 4-71 4-74 4-75 4-77 4-79 4-81 4-83 4-85 4-86 4-87 4-90 4-92 4-94 4-95 4-97 4-98 4-100 4-101 4-102 4-103 4-104 4-105 4-106 4-108 4-110
14
ORIGINAL
Page No. Figure 4-67. Figure 4-68. Figure 4-69. Figure 4-70. Figure 4-71. Figure 4-72. Figure 4-73. Figure 4-74. Figure 4-75. Figure 4-76. Figure 4-77. Figure 4-78. Figure 4-79. Figure 4-80. Figure 4-81. Figure 4-82. Figure 4-83. Figure 4-84. Figure 4-85. Figure 4-86. Figure 4-87. Figure 4-88. Figure 4-89. Figure 4-90. Figure 4-91. Figure 4-92. Figure 4-93. Figure 4-94. Figure 4-95. Figure 4-96. Figure 4-97. Figure 4-98. Alternate Flight Plan Leg A Page ............................................................ Alternate Flight Plan Leg B Page ............................................................ Alternate Flight Plan Leg C Page ............................................................ Alternate Flight Plan Waypoints Page..................................................... Alternate Flight Plan Catalog 01-08 Page............................................... Alternate Flight Plan Load/Save Page .................................................... GPS SA/AS Page ................................................................................. Flux Valve Control Page ........................................................................ Flux Valve Calibration Page .................................................................. Navigation Configuration 1 Page .......................................................... Navigation Configuration 2 Page .......................................................... Navigation Configuration 3 Page .......................................................... Communication Radio Page................................................................... V/UHF Control Page ............................................................................. V/UHF Presets Page.............................................................................. V/UHF Presets xx Page ......................................................................... Airport Frequency Page......................................................................... V/UHF Havequick Setup Page ............................................................... V/UHF MWOD Entry Page ................................................................... V/UHFx FMT Load Page ....................................................................... HF Control Page ................................................................................... HF Presets Page .................................................................................... HF Preset xx Page ................................................................................. COMSEC Control Page ......................................................................... Civil navigation (CNAV) Page ............................................................... VOR/ILS Control Page .......................................................................... CNAV Radio Information Page .............................................................. TACAN Control Page ............................................................................ ADF Control Page ................................................................................. IFF Control Page ................................................................................... IFF Mode 1/2/3/C Page ...................................................................... IFF Mode 4 Page .................................................................................. 4-112 4-115 4-117 4-119 4-120 4-121 4-122 4-123 4-124 4-125 4-126 4-127 4-129 4-131 4-132 4-133 4-134 4-135 4-136 4-137 4-138 4-139 4-140 4-141 4-142 4-143 4-144 4-145 4-145 4-146 4-147 4-148
15
ORIGINAL
Page No. Figure 4-99. Figure 4-100. Figure 4-101. Figure 4-102. Figure 4-103. Figure 4-104. Figure 4-105. Figure 4-106. Figure 4-107. Figure 4-108. Figure 4-109. Figure 4-110. Figure 4-111. Figure 4-112. Figure 4-113. Figure 4-114. Figure 4-115. Figure 4-116. Figure 4-117. Figure 4-118. Figure 4-119. Figure 4-120. Figure 4-121. Figure 4-122. Figure 4-123. Figure 4-124. Figure 4-125. Figure 4-126. Figure 4-127. Figure 4-128. Figure 4-129. Figure 4-130. Data Loader Load/Save Page ................................................................ System Status Page ............................................................................... FMS Status Page ................................................................................... CDU Status Page .................................................................................. Data Loader Status Page ....................................................................... Communications Status Page ................................................................. V/UHF Status Page ............................................................................... HF Status Page ..................................................................................... Navigation Sensor Status Page .............................................................. EGI Status Page .................................................................................... ADC Status Page .................................................................................. FV Status Page...................................................................................... Doppler Status Page.............................................................................. DCU System Status Page ....................................................................... DCU Status Page .................................................................................. DEC Status Page ................................................................................... Rotor Overspeed Status Page................................................................. MFD System Status Page ....................................................................... Pilot Inboard MFD Status Page............................................................... CNAV Status Page................................................................................ VOR Status Page .................................................................................. ADF Status Page ................................................................................... IFF Status Page ..................................................................................... TACAN Status Page .............................................................................. EGI Install Page .................................................................................... Zeroize Page ........................................................................................ Mission Start Page ................................................................................ Tactical Plot Page.................................................................................. FTN Pool Page...................................................................................... PIM Page.............................................................................................. Data Link PIM Page............................................................................... PIM Data 1/3 Page .............................................................................. 4-149 4-150 4-151 4-152 4-153 4-154 4-155 4-156 4-157 4-158 4-159 4-160 4-161 4-162 4-163 4-164 4-165 4-166 4-167 4-168 4-169 4-170 4-171 4-172 4-173 4-176 4-177 4-178 4-179 4-180 4-180 4-181
16
ORIGINAL
Page No. Figure 4-131. Figure 4-132. Figure 4-133. Figure 4-134. Figure 4-135. Figure 4-136. Figure 4-137. Figure 4-138. Figure 4-139. Figure 4-140. Figure 4-141. Figure 4-142. Figure 4-143. Figure 4-144. Figure 4-145. Figure 4-146. Figure 4-147. Figure 4-148. Figure 4-149. Figure 4-150. Figure 4-151. Figure 4-152. Figure 4-153. Figure 4-154. Figure 4-155. Figure 4-156. Figure 4-157. Figure 4-158. Figure 4-159. Figure 4-160. Figure 4-161. Figure 4-162. PIM Data 2/3 Page .............................................................................. PIM Data 3/3 Page .............................................................................. Fuel Advisory Page ............................................................................... Fuel Advisory Config Page .................................................................... Mission Data Loader/Recorder Page ...................................................... Mission Zeroize Page ............................................................................ Mission Control Page ............................................................................ Weapon Summary Page ....................................................................... ASC Station Load Page ......................................................................... ASC Weapon Control Page (Empty)....................................................... Weapon Control Page (MK 46 CIRCLE).................................................. Torpedo Depth Page ............................................................................. Torpedo Ceiling Page............................................................................ Torpedo Mode Page ............................................................................. Torpedo Arm Select Page ...................................................................... ASC Weapon Control Page (MK 46 SNAKE) ......................................... Torpedo Course Load Page.................................................................... ASC Weapon Control Page (MK 46 HATS) ............................................ Torpedo Depth/Ceiling Page ................................................................. 119B Missile Page ................................................................................ 119B Setup (1/2) Page ......................................................................... 119B Setup (2/2) Page ......................................................................... 119B Missile Mode Page....................................................................... 119B Missile Training Page ................................................................... Launch Panel Simulation Training Page .................................................. Training Complete Page ........................................................................ M299 Hellfire Page............................................................................... Octal Codes Page ................................................................................. Bomb Rack Status Page ......................................................................... ESM Control Page................................................................................. Tone Control Page ................................................................................ Tote Page ............................................................................................. 4-182 4-183 4-184 4-185 4-186 4-187 4-187 4-188 4-189 4-190 4-191 4-193 4-194 4-195 4-196 4-197 4-199 4-201 4-203 4-204 4-206 4-207 4-209 4-210 4-211 4-211 4-212 4-214 4-217 4-218 4-219 4-220
17
ORIGINAL
Page No. Figure 4-163. Figure 4-164. Figure 4-165. Figure 4-166. Figure 4-167. Figure 4-168. Figure 4-169. Figure 4-170. Figure 4-171. Figure 4-172. Figure 4-173. Figure 4-174. Figure 4-175. Figure 4-176. Figure 4-177. Figure 4-178. Figure 4-179. Figure 4-180. Figure 4-181. Figure 4-182. Figure 4-183. Figure 4-184. Figure 4-185. Figure 4-186. Figure 4-187. Figure 4-188. Figure 4-189. Figure 4-190. Figure 4-191. Figure 4-192. Figure 4-193. Figure 4-194. Track Summary Page ............................................................................ Track Summary Page (LRO) ................................................................... Track Miscellaneous Page (Air Category System Track) ........................... Track Miscellaneous Page (Surface Category System Track) ..................... Track Miscellaneous (Sub-Surface Category System Track)....................... Track Miscellaneous Page (LRO)............................................................. Marker Page......................................................................................... Marker Page (LRO) ............................................................................... ASW Contact Page ............................................................................... ASW Contact Page (LRO)...................................................................... ESM Contact Page ................................................................................ ESM Contact Page (LRO) ....................................................................... Link Object Intelligence Page ................................................................. Link Object Intelligence Page (LRO) ........................................................ Link Object IFF Page ............................................................................. Link Object IFF Page (LRO) .................................................................... Graphics Index Page............................................................................. Vector (Static/Moving) Page .................................................................. Vector (Slaved 1) Page.......................................................................... Vector (Slaved 2) Page.......................................................................... Circle (Static/Moving) Page................................................................... Circle (Slaved) Page .............................................................................. Circle (Expanding) Page ........................................................................ Tactical Aids Index Page ....................................................................... Attack Page (MK46, AGM114, or AGM119) ......................................... Intercept Page....................................................................................... CPA Page............................................................................................. Radar Control Page .............................................................................. Radar Mode Page................................................................................. FLIR Control Page.................................................................................. Link Setup Page .................................................................................... Link Parameters Page ............................................................................ 4-221 4-223 4-224 4-225 4-226 4-227 4-228 4-230 4-231 4-232 4-233 4-234 4-235 4-237 4-238 4-239 4-240 4-241 4-242 4-243 4-244 4-245 4-246 4-247 4-248 4-249 4-250 4-251 4-253 4-254 4-256 4-257
18
ORIGINAL
Page No. Figure 4-195. Figure 4-196. Figure 4-197. Figure 4-198. Figure 4-199. Figure 4-200. Figure 4-201. Figure 4-202. Figure 4-203. Figure 4-204. Figure 4-205. Figure 4-206. Figure 4-207. Figure 4-208. Figure 4-209. Figure 4-210. Figure 4-211. Figure 4-212. Figure 4-213. Figure 4-214. Figure 4-215. Figure 4-216. Figure 4-217. Figure 4-218. Figure 4-219. Figure 4-220. Figure 4-221. Figure 4-222. Figure 4-223. Figure 4-224. Figure 4-225. Figure 4-226. Filter Settings Page................................................................................ Sector Filter Page .................................................................................. Geographic Filter Page ......................................................................... Gridlock Page....................................................................................... Link Reception Quality Page .................................................................. Link Message Page (Update DLRP) ......................................................... Link Message Page (TN Conflict) ............................................................ Link Message Page (Position Conflict) ..................................................... Link Message Page (Change Data Order)............................................... Link Message Page (Information Difference Report) ................................. Link Message Page (Command Message) ............................................... Link Message Page (Battle Damage Report) ............................................ Link Message Page (W/ES) ................................................................... Link Message Page (Own Helo Controlling Unit Report)........................... Mission Status 1 Page ........................................................................... Mission Data Loader Status Page ........................................................... Pilot Mission Processor Status Page ........................................................ Copilot Mission Processor Status Page .................................................... TSO Mission Processor Status Page ........................................................ Mission Status 2 Page ........................................................................... Sonar Status Page................................................................................. ESM Status Page................................................................................... Radar Status Page................................................................................. FLIR Status Page.................................................................................... DLP Status Page .................................................................................... DTS Status Page.................................................................................... Mission Status 3 Page ........................................................................... CMDS Status Page ................................................................................ MCS Status Page .................................................................................. ASC Status Page................................................................................... M299 Hellfire Status Page ..................................................................... Model Aircraft Page.............................................................................. 4-258 4-259 4-260 4-261 4-261 4-262 4-263 4-264 4-265 4-266 4-267 4-268 4-269 4-270 4-271 4-272 4-273 4-274 4-275 4-276 4-277 4-278 4-279 4-280 4-281 4-282 4-283 4-284 4-285 4-286 4-287 4-288
19
ORIGINAL
Page No. Figure 4-227. Figure 4-228. Figure 4-229. Figure 4-230. Debug Page ......................................................................................... Bus Analyzer Setup Page....................................................................... Bus Analyzer Data Page........................................................................ Bus Analyzer Status Page ...................................................................... 4-290 4-291 4-292 4-293
CHAPTER 5 - ASW SENSOR SUBSYSTEM
CHAPTER 6 - SYSTEM OPERATION
Figure 6-1. Figure 6-2. Figure 6-3. Figure 6-4. Figure 6-5. Figure 6-6. Figure 6-7. Figure 6-8.
ICS Station Capabilities ......................................................................... V-UHF and HF Radios Configuration and Assignment Preflight Procedure. VOR/ILS Configuration and Assignment Preflight Procedure .................... TACAN Configuration and Assignment Preflight Procedure...................... ADF Configuration and Assignment Preflight Procedure........................... System Status Display Procedure ............................................................ System Reset Procedure ......................................................................... IBIT Procedure.......................................................................................
6-5 6-7 6-8 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-16 6-21
CHAPTER 7 - ESM SYSTEM OPERATION
CHAPTER 8 - SURFACE SEARCH RADAR
Figure 8-1.
Radar Menu Structure ...........................................................................
8-3
CHAPTER 9 - DATA LINK COMMUNICATION SET, LINK-11
Figure 9-1. Figure 9-2. Figure 9-3.
Identity Conflict for Network Tracks ........................................................ Data Link Initialization Default Values..................................................... Data Link Menu Structure.......................................................................
9-8 9-14 9-16
20
ORIGINAL
RECORD OF CHANGES Change No. and Date of Change Date of Entry Page count Verified by (Signature)
21 (Reverse Blank)
ORIGINAL
TEMPORARY REVISION SUMMARY The following Temporary Revisions have been canceled or previously incorporated in this manual: TEMPORARY REVISION NUMBER(S) REMARKS/PURPOSE
The following Temporary Revisions have been incorporated in this Change/Revision: TEMPORARY REVISION NUMBER(S) REMARKS/PURPOSE
Temporary Revisions Outstanding - to be maintained by the custodian of this manual:
TEMPORARY REVISION NUMBER(S)
ORIGINATOR/DATE (or DATE/TIME GROUP)
PAGE AFFECTED
REMARKS/PURPOSE
23 (Reverse Blank)
ORIGINAL
SUMMARY OF APPLICABLE TECHNICAL DIRECTIVES CHANGE NUMBER DESCRIPTION DATE VISUAL IDENTIFICATION
NOTE: Information relating to the following technical directives has been incorporated in this manual. SUMMARY OF APPLICABLE TECHNICAL DIRECTIVES CHANGE NUMBER DESCRIPTION VISUAL IDENTIFICATION
NOTE: Information relating to the following applicable technical directives will be incorporated in a future change.
25 (Reverse Blank)
ORIGINAL
GLOSSARY
8-PSK ABDR AC ACRT ADC ADF ADI ADLP ADU AFCC AFCS AFM AGC AGL AHRS AIU ALP ALU AM AME AMTP ANDVT APB APP ARINC ASC
Octal Phase Shift Keying All Beam Doppler Range Alternating Current Armament Controller Receiver/ Transmitter Air Data Computer Automatic Direction Finder Attitude Director Indicator Airborne Data Link Processor Audio Distribution Unit Advanced Flight Control Computer Automatic Flight Control System A-Scan Frequency Modulation Automatic Gain Control Above Ground Level Attitude and Heading Reference System Antenna Interface Unit Arming and Launch Panel Antenna Logic Unit Amplitude Modulation AM Equivalent Avionics Maintenance Test Program Advanced Narrow Band Digital Voice Terminal Activate Pushbutton Acoustic Performance Prediction Aeronautical Radio Incorporated Armament System Controller
ASM ASO ASU ASUW ASW ATTP AVT AVTR B/C B/R BBC BC BIT BOC BPSK BUD CAD CANTCO CANTPRO CARP CAS CBIT CCD CCM CDU CFAR CIP CIPS CLEW
Air to Surface Missile Acoustic Sensor Operator Antenna Switching Unit Anti-Surface Unit Warfare Anti-Submarine Warfare Automatic Transmission Threshold Percentage Automatic Video Tracker Acoustic Video Tape Recorder Back Course Bearing/Range Backup Bus Controller Bus Controller Built-In Test Bottom of Climb Binary Phase Shift Keying Buildup Detector Cartridge Activated Device Cannot Comply Cannot Process Computed Air Release Point Crew Alert System Continuous Built-In Test Cursor Control Device Counter Countermeasures Control Display Unit Constant False Alarm Rate Circle Intercept Point Cable Interface Power Supply Conventional Link 11 Waveform
27
ORIGINAL
CMDS CNAV COMM COMSEC CPA CPCI CRP CRT CSC CSCI CSP CTR CW D/R DA DC DCL DCP DCU DEC DG DLP DLRP DM DME DOA DP DSP DTS DTU EDAC
Countermeasures System Civil Navigation Communication
Dispensing
EFC EGI EHE EIA EICAS EMCON EPF ESD ESM ETA ETD ETE EW FA FAB FAF FFK FL FLIR FM FMS FMT FOV FTN FTP FV GAI
Expect Further Clearance Embedded GPS INU Estimated Horzontal Error Electronic Industries Alliance Engine Instrument And Crew Alert System Emissions Control Emitter Parameter File Electrostatic Discharge Electronic Support Measures Estimated Time Of Arrival Estimated Time Of Departure Estimated Time En Route Electronic Warfare Frequency Agility Fixed Action Button Final Approach Fix Fixed Function Key Flight Level Forward Looking Infrared Frequency Modulation Flight Management System Frequency Managed Training Field Of View Force Track Number Fly-To Point Flux Valve Gimbal Angle Indicator
Communications Security Closest Point of Approach Computer Program Configuration Item Closed Random Pattern Cathode Ray Tube Communication System Controller Computer Software Configuration Item Commence Search Point Center Continuous Wave Doppler/Range Drift Angle Dome Control Declination Display Control Panel Data Concentrator Unit Digital Engine Controller Directional Gyro Data Link Processor Data Link Reference Point Data Mile Distance Measuring Equipment Direction Of Arrival Display Processor Digital Signal Processor Data Terminal Set Data Transfer Unit Error Detection And Correction
GEO/COORD Geographic Coordinate GP GPS GPS/A/H GPS/D/H GS Graphics Processor Global Positioning System GPS/Airspeed/Heading GPS/Doppler/Heading Ground Speed
28
ORIGINAL
HAR HAVCO HCA HCU HELRAS HF HMR HPB hr HSI HVR I/O IAF IAS IBIT ICS ID IFF IFOBRL ILS INAV INB INU IR klb Kyds L-INBD L-OTBD L/L LAP LED LEMA
Hydraulic Auxiliary Raise Have Complied Hook Capture Area Hand Control Unit Helicopter Long Range Active Sonar High Frequency Homing Hook Pushbutton Hour Horizontal Situation Indicator Hover Input/Output Initial Approach Fix Indicated Air Speed Initiated Built-In Test Intercommunication System Identification Identification, Friend Or Foe In-Flight Operable Bomb Rack Lock Instrument Landing System Integrated Navigation Inbound Inertial Navigation Unit Infrared Kilopounds Kiloyards Left Inboard Left Outboard Latitude/Longitude Local Area Processing Light Emitting Diode Linear Electromechanical Actuator
LESW LF LF/ADF LIB LOAL LOB LOBL LOC LOP LOS LRD LRO LRU LS LSB MAHP MAP MC MCS MDA MDL MDR/L MFD MFOV MFP MAGR MHz min MLA MLV MOT MP MPB
Link 11 Single-Tone Waveform Low Frequency Low Frequency Automatic Direction Finder Left Inboard Lock-On After Launch Left Outboard Lock-On Before Launch Localizer Local Operations Plot Line Of Sight Laser Rangefinder/Designator Link Receive Only Line Replaceable Unit Line Select Lower Sideband Missed Approach Holding Point Missed Approach Point Mission Computer Missile Control System Minimum Descent Altitude Mission Data Loader Mission Data Recorder/Loader Multifunction Display Medium FOV Mission Flight Pattern Miniature Airborne GPS Receiver Megahertz Minute Missile Launch Adapter Memory Loader Verifier Mark On Top Mission Processor Mode Pushbutton
29
ORIGINAL
MSC MSL MVAR MWOD NATO NCS ND NDB NFOV Nm NRT NRU NTGS NTN NTQ OFP OR PAL PCA PCMCIA PCT PCU PDI PEP PFD PIM PKT POSSUB POST PPOS PPSN PRI
Multifunction Slew Control Mean Sea Level Magnetic Variation Multiple Words Of the Day North Atlantic Treaty Organization Net Control Station Navigation Display Non-Directional Beacon Narrow FOV Nautical Mile Non-Realtime Navigation Receiver Unit Naval Tactical Grid System Network Track Number Network Track Quality Operational Flight Program Off Route Phase Alternation Line Point Of Closest Approach Personal Computer Memory Card International Association Preliminary Contact Tote Power Control Unit Position Display Item Peak Envelope Power Primary Flight Display Position and Intended Movement Picket Station Possible Submarine Power On Self Test Present Position Present Position Pulse Repetition Interval
PTT PU PW QPSK R-INBD RAM RF RGB RIB ROD RPID RPU RQ RR RT RU RWY SA/AS SAR SCU SID SIF SIU SLEW SRA SSB SSD SSR STAR STC SU SURV SVP
Push-To-Talk Participating Unit Pulse Width Quadrature Phase Shift Keying Right Inboard Random Access Memory Radio Frequency Red-Green-Blue Right Inboard Range of the Day Reference Point Identifier Receiver Processor Unit Reception Quality Reporting Responsibility Remote Terminal Reporting unit Runway Selective Availability/ Spoofing Search and Rescue Sonar Control Unit Standard Instrument Departure Selective Identification Feature Sonar Interface Unit Single-Tone Link 11 Waveform Shop Replaceable Assembly Single Side Band System Status Display Surface Search Radar Standard Route Terminal Arrival Anti-
Sensitivity Time Control Submersible Unit Surveillance Sound Velocity Profile
30
ORIGINAL
TACAN TACDS TACP TAS TCN TDB TFP TKE TN TNAV TOC TOD TOD TSO TTG TWD TWS UHF UQC
Tactical Air Navigation Threat Adaptive Countermeasures Dispensing System Tactical Plot True Air Speed TACAN Tactical Database Tactical Flight Plan Track Angle Error Track Number Time Navigation Top Of Climb Time Of Day Top of Descent Tactical Sensor Operator Time To Go Threat Warning Display Track-While-Scan Ultra High Frequency Underwater Voice Communication
USB UTC UWT V/UHF VAB VG VHF VNAV VOR/ILS
Upper Sideband Universal Time, Coordinated Underwater Telephone VHF and UHF Variable Action Button Vertical Gyro Very High Frequency Vertical Navigation VHF Omni-Directional RadioRange / Instrument Landing System VOR/Localizer Voice Operated Switching Weapon/Engagement Status Wide FOV Will Comply Word Of The Day Weight On Wheels Weapon Replaceable Assembly
VOR/LOC VOX W/ES WFOV WILCO WOD WOW WRA
31 (Reverse Blank)
ORIGINAL
PREFACE
SCOPE The information contained in this manual originates from contractor sources. This manual should be read thoroughly and understood by all flight crew personnel. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS The following applicable publications complement this manual: Manual No. SA4047-S70HN-NFM-000 SA4047-S70HN-NFM-500 SA4047-S70HN-NFM-700 SA4047-S70HN-NFM-800 Title Flight Manual Pilots Pocket Checklist Functional Checkflight Checklist Aircrew Pocket Checklist
CAUTION
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES The following definitions apply to WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and NOTES found throughout the manual.
WARNING
An operating procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed or followed.
An operating procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in damage to equipment if not carefully observed or followed. Note An operating procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which is essential to emphasize. WORDING
UPDATING THE MANUAL To ensure that the next edition of this manual contains the latest procedures and information, a review conference will be held as necessary. YOUR RESPONSIBILITY Operator manuals are kept current through an active manual change program. Any corrections, additions, or constructive suggestions for improvement of its content should be submitted by routine or urgent change recommendation, as appropriate, at once. CHANGE SYMBOLS Revised text is indicated by a black vertical line in either margin of the page, like the one printed next to this paragraph. The change symbol shows where there has been a change. The change might be material added or information restated. A change symbol in the margin by the chapter number and title indicates a new or completely revised chapter.
The concept of word usage and intended meaning which has been adhered to in preparing this manual is as follows: 9Shall9 has been used only when application of a procedure is mandatory. 9Should9 has been used only when application of a procedure is recommended. 9May9 and 9need not9 have been used only when application of a procedure is optional. 9Will9 has been used only to indicate futurity, never to indicate any degree of requirement for application of a procedure.
33 (Reverse Blank)
ORIGINAL
TACTICAL CHANGE RECOMMENDATION
DATE __________________
TO BE FILLED IN BY ORIGINATOR AND FORWARDED TO MODEL MANAGER FROM (originator) TO (Model Manager) Complete Name of Manual/Checklist Recommendation (be Specific) Revision/Change Date Unit Unit Section/Chapter Page Page/Para
[CHECK IF CONTINUED ON BACK Justification
Signature Address of Unit or Command
Rank
Title
TO BE FILLED IN BY MODEL MANAGER (Return to Originator) FROM TO REFERENCE (a) Your Change Recommendation Dated_________________ [ Your Change Recommendation Dated_________________is acknowledged. It will be held for action of the review conference planned for_________________ to be held at_________________. [ Your Change Recommendation Dated_________________is reclassified URGENT and forwarded for approval to_________________. DATE
35
ORIGINAL
FC2313
SA
36
ORIGINAL
37 (Reverse Blank)
ORIGINAL
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
1.1. SCOPE The Air Subsystem Operators Manual discusses the operational procedures the pilot, copilot, tactical sensor operator (TSO), and acoustic sensor operator (ASO) must perform in carrying out the missions of the mission avionic system. Although the pilot, copilot, TSO, and ASO each have their own specific roles in carrying out the mission, there are some instances when their duties are identical. Some duties are shared, and in those cases, the interaction/coordination required is discussed. 1.2. MISSION OVERVIEW The primary mission is antisubmarine warfare (ASW) and anti-surface unit warfare (ASUW). The secondary mission is search and rescue (SAR), and medical evacuation. 1.3. CREW RESPONSIBILITIES Refer to SA4047-S70HN-NFM-000 for descriptions of the pilot, copilot, TSO, and ASO responsibilities. 1.4. STATION DESCRIPTIONS Refer to SA4047-S70HN-NFM-000 for descriptions of the pilot, copilot, TSO, and ASO stations. 1.5. REFERENCE MATERIAL
The reference materials required to complete discussions in this manual are listed as follows:
Manual No. SA4047-S70B6-ATM-000 SA4047-S70HN-NFM-000 SA4047-S70HN-NFM-800
Title Avionics Test Manual Flight Manual Aircrew Pocket Checklist
1-1 (Reverse Blank)
ORIGINAL
CHAPTER 2
Functional Overview
2.1. INTRODUCTION This chapter provides a brief overview of the functions performed by the mission avionic system. 2.2. SYSTEM FUNCTIONS The mission avionic system consists of five major hardware subsystems: tactical data management subsystem, communication subsystem, navigation subsystem, armament subsystem, and sensor subsystem. The tactical data management subsystem consists of the following equipment: a. Two pilot, two copilot, and one TSO multifunction displays (MFDs) b. Pilot and copilot display control panels (DCPs) c. Pilot, copilot, and TSO multifunction slew controllers (MSCs) d. Pilot, copilot, and TSO control display units (CDUs) e. Mission and flight management system (FMS) data transfer units (DTUs) f. Data link processor (DLP) g. Data terminal set (DTS) h. Data encryption device (provisional) i. Data encryption device control panel (provisional) j. Hi-8 acoustic video tape recorder (AVTR) (provisional) k. Red-green-blue (RGB) to phase alternation line (PAL) video converter (provisional) l. No. 1 and No. 2 air data computers (ADCs) m. Mission and flight management MIL-STD-1553B data buses b. V/UHF secure speech processing unit No. 1 and No. 2 (provisional) c. d. e. f. Two V/UHF/L band antennas Antenna switching unit (ASU) Two antenna logic units (ALUs) HF (high frequency) radio set The communication subsystem consists of the following equipment: a. V/UHF (very high frequency and ultra high frequency) radio No. 1 and No. 2
g. HF COMSEC (communications security) basic terminal unit (provisional) h. i. HF COMSEC module (provisional) HF antenna
j. Pilot, copilot, TSO, and ASO communication system control panels k. l. m. n. Audio distribution unit (ADU) Two navigation receiver units (NRUs) TSO audio junction box Mission system control panel
The navigation subsystem consists of the following equipment: a. Doppler radar navigation set friend or foe)
b. IFF (identification, receiver/transmitter c. d. e.
IFF mode 4 transponder computer (provisional) Lower IFF antenna Upper V/UHF/L Band Antenna
2-1
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 f. TACAN (tactical air navigation) navigation set g. Upper TACAN antenna h. Lower V/UHF/L Band Antenna i. Radio navigation system (direction finder) j. Radar altimeter receiver/transmitter k. Pilot and copilot radar altimeter indicators a. l. Two radar altimeter antennas b. m. Low frequency automatic direction finder set (LF/ADF) n. LF/ADF antenna o. No. 1 and No. 2 VOR/ILS (VHF omni-directional radio-range / instrument landing system) receivers p. Glideslope antenna g. q. Marker beacon antenna h. r. Two VOR/LOC (VOR/localizer) antennas i. s. Embedded GPS (global positioning system) INU (inertial navigation unit) (EGI) t. GPS antenna u. Digital flux valve (FV) v. Directional gyro (DG) w. Compass control panel x. Flux valve y. Vertical gyro (VG) The armament subsystem consists of the following equipment: a. Armament system controller (ASC) b. Emergency control panel c. Armament control panel d. Select jettison panel j. k. Sonar interface unit (SIU) Sonar reel and cable assembly Submersible unit Cable interface power supply (CIPS) Sonar cable reeling machine c. d. e. f. Cursor control device (CCD) Sonar dome control (DC) Sonar display Cable angle control panel Sonar cable angle control panel Sonar control unit (SCU) e. f. g. h. Three BRU-14/A bomb racks Auxiliary arming panel Hellfire missile launcher Penguin missile control system
The sensor subsystem consists of the following equipment:
l. Electronic support measures (ESM) receiver processor unit (RPU) m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. ESM antenna interface unit (AIU) Four ESM antenna interferometer arrays ESM threat warning display (TWD) ESM recorder/loader Radar receiver/transmitter Radar signal processor Radar antenna/pedestal Forward looking infrared (FLIR) electronics unit FLIR hand control unit (HCU)
2-2
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 v. FLIR turret unit (TU) Foldout FO-1 illustrates how the hardware subsystems interconnect. The interconnected hardware subsystems perform seven major functions. Figure 2-1 shows the functional relationship. Paragraphs 2.2.1 through 2.2.7 describe each of the functions. 2.2.1. Tactical Processing Function. The tactical processing function controls and displays the tactical situation and advisory data. The tactical processing function performs functions which maintain mission history, manage track data, provide attack aids, perform fuel management computations, and maintain data received via the data link. 2.2.2. Control and Display Function. The avionics system includes integrated controls and display interface for the four aircrew members: pilot, copilot, TSO, and ASO. 2.2.3. Communication Function. The communication function manages and controls radio tuning and mode control, audio distribution, underwater communications, UHF, VHF, HF radio communications and Identification Friend or Foe (IFF) communications. 2.2.4. Navigation Function. The navigation function performs functions which determine and maintain aircraft position, attitude, heading and velocities; perform guidance using TACAN, VOR/ILS, low frequency direction finding, and VHF/UHF direction finding; and perform fly-to-point guidance. 2.2.5. Stores Management Function. The stores management function performs functions which maintain stores inventories, manage ordnance mode settings, and control the launch or jettison of stores. 2.2.6. Sensor Function. The sensor function consists of the search radar, ESM, acoustic sensor, and infrared (IR) emission detection functions. The search radar function controls the radar and displays the radar contacts and data. The ESM function displays the ESM contacts. The IR emission detection function is supported by the integration of a FLIR sensor. The acoustic sensor function detects, localizes, classifies, and tracks underwater targets. This function provides the means for deploying
CONTROL AND DISPLAY FUNCTION
SENSOR FUNCTION
COMMUNICATION FUNCTION
NAVIGATION FUNCTION
STORES MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
TACTICAL PROCESSING FUNCTION
TO AND FROM ALL OTHER FUNCTIONS
SYSTEM MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL FUNCTION
FG0835
SA
Figure 2-1.
Mission Avionic System Functions
2-3
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 and controlling a dipping submersible unit. The acoustic sensor function also allows for the processing and displaying of acoustical and environmental prediction data. 2.2.7. System Management and Control Function. The system management and control function is performed by special purpose computers integrated on two MIL-STD-1553B multiplex data busses. There are three types of special purpose computers which provide the avionics system with its integrated functionality: MFDs, ASC, and CDUs. The mission MFDs provide integrated system management, tactical processing, and mission MIL-STD-1553B data bus (mission data bus) control functions. The ASC provides integrated stores presetting, launch, and jettison functions. The CDUs provide navigation functions, flight management system (FMS) MIL-STD1553B data bus (FMS data bus) control functions, and external communications (radios) control functions. 2.2.7.1. Data Bus Communications and Control. Avionic system equipment communicates via two dual redundant MIL-STD-1553B data buses: the FMS data bus and the mission data bus. On the FMS data bus, communication takes place between the CDUs with either CDU 1 (copilot CDU) or CDU 2 (pilot CDU) acting as bus controller (BC) and the other acting as a remote terminal (RT). Only CDU 1 and CDU 2 are bus control capable. CDU 3 (TSO CDU) functions only as an RT and receives page displays. The bus control capable CDU (CDU 1 or CDU 2) that is not functioning as BC is designated as the backup bus controller (BBC). The BBC receives nonvolatile memory updates, page displays, and status reporting. On the mission data bus, CDUs 1, 2 and 3 always function as RTs. The copilot, pilot, and TSO mission processors (MP) communicate via the mission data bus with either the copilot or pilot MP acting as the BC and the other acting as a remote terminal (RT). Only the copilot and pilot MPs are bus control capable. The TSO MP only functions as an RT. Upon cold start initialization of the MP, the copilot MP assumes bus control if it does not sense bus activity within 500 milliseconds and the pilot MP assumes bus control if it does not sense bus activity within 800 milliseconds. The bus control capable MP (copilot or pilot) that is not functioning as BC is designated as the BBC. The current BC MP maintains bus control through a continuous built-in test (CBIT) failure of the MP (BBC MP must see no activity on bus to take control), however it will give up bus control upon initiated built-in test (IBIT). 2.2.7.2. Initialization. The system initialization function allows an orderly start-up of the avionics system upon application of power. When power is applied to the ASC, CDUs, and MFDs, the following functions are performed: a. The BC mission MFD initiates mission data bus communications. b. The BC CDU initiates FMS data bus communications. c. The mission MFDs resume operation and restore the tactical plot and stores configuration from the point of last shutdown. d. The CDUs resume operation and restore the communications, waypoint, and flight plan configuration. e. The primary flight MFDs (pilot and copilot outboard) resume operation and restore the last active operational state. The initialization function resets the data base to a desired set of conditions. The CDU generates menus which allow the operator to reset certain functions within the avionics system. The following functions are performed: a. The CDU performs IBIT on the following equipment: CDUs, Doppler, EGI, HF radio, TACAN, MFDs, FLIR sensor, and V/UHF radios. b. The CDU generates menus which allow the entry of magnetic variation, zulu time, date, aircraft present position, aircraft course, and aircraft speed. c. The mission MFDs initialize the tactical data base.
d. The BC MP performs IBIT on the ASC and provides the results to the CDU for display. e. The MP generates menus on the CDU which allow the entry of tactical plot grid center, base ship present position, and position and intended movement (PIM) for the base ship. 2.2.7.3. Redundancy Management. In order to aid in mission performance in the event of a subsystem failure, redundancy is provided for certain system functions. 2.2.7.3.1. CDU Redundancy Management. The avionics system provides redundancy of system functions that are performed by the CDUs. The CDUs execute identical but operationally independent programs, thus performing redundant navigation and communication
2-4
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 control processing in the event of a single CDU failure. Either CDU 1 or CDU 2 can operate as the BC for the FMS data bus. In the event that the CDU which is currently in control of the FMS data bus fails, the BBC CDU assumes control of the FMS data bus without operator intervention and within 500 milliseconds. 2.2.7.3.2. MFD Redundancy Management. The avionics system provides redundancy of system functions that are performed by the mission MFDs. The mission MFDs execute identical but operationally independent programs, thus performing redundant mission processing in the event of a single mission MFD failure. A mission MFD operates as the BC for the mission data bus. In the event that the mission MFD which is currently in control of the mission data bus fails, the BBC MFD assumes control of the mission data bus without operator intervention and within 500 milliseconds. 2.2.7.3.3. Attitude and Heading Redundancy Management. The avionics system provides redundancy for aircraft heading, pitch, and roll data. The CDU receives heading from the EGI and the directional gyro. It also receives attitude from the EGI and the vertical gyros. The CDU uses the EGI as the primary source for heading and attitude. In the event that the CDU determines that the EGI has failed or is not providing valid data, the CDU will revert to the heading and attitude data from the directional gyro and a vertical gyro respectively. 2.2.7.3.4. VOR/ILS Redundancy Management. Two independent VOR/ILS receivers are integrated into the avionics system which allows the operator to manually select one VOR/ILS receiver in the event that the other one has failed. The VOR/ILS receiver source for MFD PFD guidance data is selected via the NAV source selector on the DCPs. 2.2.7.3.5. V/UHF Redundancy Management. The avionics system includes two independent V/UHF radios and two independent V/UHF radio antennas. The V/UHF redundancy management function provides the operators with the ability to select one V/UHF radio in the event the other is failed. Either the upper mounted or lower mounted antenna can be selected for the desired line of sight transmission and reception. V/UHF receiver selection for monitoring and external communications is done via the stations communication system control panel. 2.2.7.4. System Status Monitoring. The avionics system provides continuous built in testing to inform the crew of the status of equipment during flight, initiated built in testing to be conducted as part of preflight checks, and avionics maintenance test program (AMTP) for troubleshooting by maintenance crews. 2.2.7.4.1. Continuous Built In Test. The avionics system provides status monitoring for avionics that support CBIT. The CDUs and mission MFDs maintain and determine the status of this equipment once every second within the CBIT function. This status is a go/no go criteria. The CDUs will report the equipment as passed or failed based on the reported status from the device. In the case of the mission equipment, the status is determined by the mission MFDs and is reported to the CDU for status reporting. The results of the CBIT are viewed via menus on the CDUs. The CBIT function also provides the operators with the ability to selectively disable certain avionics equipment. When the operator selects to disable certain avionics equipment, failure alerts and status indications for the disabled equipment are inhibited from display on the CDUs. Changes in equipment status will generate an equipment status change alert on the CDUs. Figure 2-2 lists the subsystems tested with CBIT. 2.2.7.4.2. Initiated Built In Tests. The avionics system provides IBITs for avionics equipment that have the ability to perform operator-initiated, interruptive, built in tests. The CDUs and mission MFDs generate menus to display the results of equipment IBIT. Results of IBIT consist of either a pass or fail indication. The CDU performs IBIT for equipment on the FMS data bus. The mission MFDs perform IBIT for equipment on the mission data bus. Upon operator selection, the CDUs or mission MFDs signal the selected equipment to perform IBIT via the MIL-STD-1553B data bus or via discrete interfaces. IBIT test of the ASC will not be performed while the aircraft is airborne if the aircraft master arm switch is on. Figure 2-2 lists the subsystems tested with IBIT. 2.2.7.4.3. Avionics Maintenance Test Program. The CDUs and mission MFDs provide an AMTP which performs subsystem unique maintenance tests which aid in detection of hardware failures. Reporting of failures is at the unit level. These tests can only be activated when aircraft weight is on wheels (on the deck). The CDUs and mission MFDs generate menus which allow the operator to initiate AMTP tests and to display the test results. AMTP functions are provided for the following avionics equipment: a. MCS reports contents of MCS nonvolatile memory where status data is recorded via mission MIL-STD1553B data bus b. FLIR sensor status reported via mission MIL-STD1553B data bus
2-5
ORIGINAL
SYSTEM FMS
SUBSYSTEM DLDR CDU1 CDU2 CDU3 V/UHF1 V/UHF2 HF VOR1 VOR2 ADF IFF TACAN CPLT OUTBRD CPLT INBRD PLT INBRD PLT OUTBRD EGI DPLR ADC1 ADC2 FV DCU1 DCU2 DEC1 DEC2 RTR OVRSPD MSN DLDR P-MP C-MP T-MP SONAR ESM RADAR FLIR DLP DTS CMDS MCS M299 ACS
CBIT U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
IBIT U U U U U U U
COMM
CNAV
U U U U U U U
MFD
NAV
DCU
U U
MISSION
U U U U U U
U U
Figure 2-2.
Subsystems Tested with CBIT and IBIT to exercise and conduct all avionics system functions with the exception of penguin training. Penguin missile training mode is activated by the operator via CDU menus generated by the mission MFDs. In the penguin training mode,
2.2.7.5. System Mode Management. The avionics system provides two modes of operation; normal operating mode and penguin missile training mode. The normal operating mode provides the operators the ability
2-6
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 the mission MFDs generate menus which replicate the ASC armament menus and the armament control panel, in order to allow operator training in the setup and launch of the penguin missile without the need for a missile control system (MCS) or an armed ASC. The ASC, armament control panel, and MCS are excluded from the process for safety purposes. If electrical power is applied to the MCS or the actual aircraft master arm is selected on the armament control panel by one of the operators, training mode is deactivated without additional operator intervention and the system is returned to the normal operating mode. 2.2.7.6. Tactical Surveillance. Tactical surveillance functions aid the crew in detecting contacts using on-board sensors. These functions include sonar, radar, radio frequency emitter detection capabilities and infrared emitter detection capabilities. 2.2.7.6.1. Sonar Detection. The ASO operator transfers contact information from the dipping sonar subsystem to the mission MFDs. Operator selected contact data is transferred via the mission data bus. The specific contact data transferred depends on the mode. In passive mode, only bearing data is transferred. In active mode, both range and bearing are transferred. The mission MFDs display up to 32 sonar contacts on the mission MFD tactical plot. The sonar system outputs processed sonar audio via an analog interface to the ICS. 2.2.7.6.2. Radar Detection. The surface search radar transmits and receives X-band energy, via the chin mounted radar antenna array, to detect and track surface and air targets and detect strong storm clouds. The radar antenna is tilt stabilized based on pitch and roll synchro inputs provided by the copilot vertical gyro. The operator controls the radar via CDU menus which are generated by the mission MFDs and by pull-down menus on the mission MFD when radar display mode is active. Operator CDU key selections are passed to the mission MFDs. Operator inputs are forwarded by the mission MFDs to the radar system via the mission MIL-STD-1553B data bus. 2.2.7.6.3. RF Emitter Detection. The RF emitter detection function includes an ESM which detects, identifies, sorts, and localizes (bearing only, and under certain conditions, bearing and distance) RF emitters. The ESM makes use of the CDUs and mission MFDs for mode selection and control. A separate TWD is located at the center of the instrument panel for display of RF emitter threats. The ESM subsystem stores the emitter parameters in emitter files. These files are provided to the mission MFDs via the mission data bus. The mission MFDs display ESM bearings on the mission MFD tactical plot. The ESM receives blanking pulses from search radar, radar altimeter, TACAN, and IFF. 2.2.7.6.4. IR Emitter Detection. The IR emitter detection function includes a FLIR sensor which detects and localizes IR emitters for classification and identification. The FLIR sensor makes use of the CDUs, mission MFDs, MSC, and HCU for mode selection and control. FLIR imagery is provided to the mission MFDs via RS-170 video interface. The pilot, copilot and TSO can designate a geographic position or tactical symbol on the mission MFD tactical plot for pointing the FLIR turret line of sight (LOS). Once designated, the FLIR turret LOS will automatically slew to the designated geographic position or tactical symbol position. Primary control of the FLIR is provided to the copilot via menus on the mission MFD FLIR display. Copilot control of these menus are provided by a dedicated FLIR HCU located at the copilot station. Backup control of the FLIR is provided to the pilot, copilot and TSO via CDU and MP pull-down menus. Backup slew control for the FLIR is provided to the pilot, copilot and TSO, via the MSC slew. A dedicated laser arming switch is provided in the cockpit to allow the copilot to arm the laser. 2.2.7.7. Data Extraction. Mission events can be stored to a mission data recorder/loader (MDR/L) for postflight playback via a mission support program installed on a personal computer. The following mission events are stored to the MDR/L: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. Navigation Data Intercept Fuel Advisory Fly-To Point Ambient Conditions Data Link Reference Point (DLRP) Tracks ASW Contacts Weapons Dynamic Tactical Markers Static Tactical Markers
2-7
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 l. PIM Marker m. Special Marker n. Waypoints o. Vectors p. Circles q. System Status r. BIT Status s. Annunciation t. Marked Events u. Display Settings v. Software Version Number w. Aircraft Identification x. Date y. Radar Parameters ASW contacts are stored upon acknowledgment by an operator via the MSC. Each stored mission event, including ASW contacts, contains a time tag. The time tag facilitates coordination during playback between mission support program reconstruction of tactical data and playback of recorded sonar video. 2.2.7.8. Data Storage and Retrieval. Flight and mission data is stored on and retrieved from removable cartridges inserted in the FMS and mission data loaders. The data loaders are accessed by the BC CDU via the FMS and mission data buses respectively. 2.2.7.9. Data Link. The data link system is used to exchange digital information among airborne, landbased, and shipboard tactical data systems. The data link system consists of a data link processor, a data terminal set, a data encryption device, and a data encryption device control panel. The DLP receives and transmits control and system initialization parameters to the BC MFD via the mission data bus. The DLP also manages all data link messaging. The DTS is used to convert digital information from the DLP via the data encryption device, to audio tones which are modulated, converted to RF, and transmitted by either the HF or V/UHF radios. The DTS also receives data link messages from the radios and passes them to the DLP where they are disassembled and the local DLP databases are updated. The DLP then passes the messages to the BC MFD via the mission data bus. The DTS receives control data from the BC MFD via the mission data bus. 2.2.7.10. Acoustic and Manual Contact Tracking. The mission MFDs provide the capability to create and maintain up to 64 system tracks. The mission MFDs generate menus which provide the operators with the capability to assign acoustic or manual contacts to a new or existing system track. Manual contacts include contacts created by the operators based on visual range and bearing estimates. The mission MFDs determine the tracks course and speed based on the position and time of contacts that have been assigned to the track. A tracks course and speed are calculated by using a 9two point fix9 method or by a 9least squares9 method, depending on the available fix history. The two point fix method selection will result in the mission MFDs performing track course and speed computations using the two contacts assigned to the track, while least squares will result in the mission MFDs performing track course and speed calculations based on least squares approximation for a set of fix history points. 2.2.7.11. Radar Contact Tracking. Up to 20 radar contacts can be tracked. Of the 20 tracks, the system can track up to four at a given beam pattern azimuth and up to five airborne tracks. One airborne track is equivalent to four surface tracks. For example, if one airborne track is active, the system can track up to 16 surface tracks. Airborne tracks with velocities up to 300 kts can be tracked. In order to track radar contacts, the radar requires aircraft heading, velocity (speed vector), and position data. This navigation data is provided to the radar by the mission MFDs via the mission data bus. Once a radar contact has been detected the operator can designate it for tracking by the radar. The operator designates the contact by moving the cursor, via the MSC slew, to the desired radar return and selecting track control commands via mission MFD pull-down menus. The radar displays the tracks on the mission MFD radar plot display. The radar formats the radar contact track data into radar track files and provides these files to the mission MFDs via the mission data bus. The mission MFDs use the radar track files to create tactical symbols representing the radar tracks and displays the radar track symbols on the mission MFD tactical plot display. 2.2.7.12. RF Emitter Contact Tracking. The mission MFDs receive emitter contact track files from the ESM
2-8
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 via the mission MIL-STD-1553 data bus. These emitter contact track files can be displayed on the mission MFDs in tabular form by selecting ESM display mode via pull-down menus. The mission MFDs allow the operator to display up to 32 ESM contacts on the tactical plot. Bearing lines are displayed for initial contacts, however, if the ESM reports both bearing and range, both the bearing and range will be displayed on the tactical plot. 2.2.7.13. IR Emitter Contact Tracking. The copilot can track IR contacts using either a centroid or an area tracking technique. When tracking an IR contact, the copilot can offset the FLIR turret LOS from the IR contact LOS provided that the target limits (edges) remain within 80% of the field of view (FOV). The copilot can determine slant range to an IR contact by performing laser ranging. When an IR contact is being tracked by the FLIR, the system displays the FLIR reported position on the mission MFD tactical plot. FLIR tracking data can be provided to external tactical data systems via the data link system. 2.2.7.14. Tactical Aids. The mission MFDs generate a tactical plot and tactical symbols for display on the pilot, copilot, and TSO mission MFDs. The tactical plot provides a graphical representation of the tactical situation. 2.2.7.15. Penguin Missile Attack Aids. The mission MFDs generate attack aids for display on the mission MFDs which aid the operator in setting the modes for the penguin missile. When the operator chooses to perform a penguin attack and selects the target track, the mission MFDs sends the track data, including target position and velocity, to the MCS via the mission data bus. The MCS estimates the missile trajectory based on the manual, straight, dog left, dog right, or designated waypoint firing modes and the target track position and velocity (speed vector). The MCS provides the missile trajectory parameters to the mission MFDs via the mission data bus for generating the attack aids display. The mission MFDs generates a missile trajectory display for display on the mission MFD tactical plot. In addition to the missile trajectory display, the mission MFDs generate alphanumerics for display on the tactical plot. The alphanumerics include the estimated missile flight time, estimated percentage of missile maximum range, missile alignment status, launch envelope alerts, and target validity. 2.2.7.16. MK-46 Torpedo Attack Aids. The mission MFDs can generate torpedo attack aids for attacking a system track or a radar track. The mission MFDs generate CDU menus which allow the operator to specify the track for the attack. The mission MFDs use the position, course, and speed of the designated track to calculate a weapons release point and guidance information to the weapons release point. The operator can select to receive guidance information for a circle attack or a snake attack. For circle attack, the mission MFDs calculate and displays a weapon release point on the mission MFD tactical plot. For snake attack, the mission MFDs calculate and display a bearing line with minimum, maximum, and recommended launch ranges on the mission MFD tactical plot. These ranges are fixed at 1000, 2500, and 1500 yards respectively. Display guidance information to the weapons release point is displayed on the MFD PFD. 2.2.7.17. Hellfire Missile Attack Aids. The pilot, copilot and TSO can display Hellfire missile attack aids on their mission MFD tactical plot. The MFDs generate alphanumerics and tactical symbology for display on the tactical plot. The alphanumerics and tactical symbology include remote designator location, seeker viewing cone, laser reflection cone, and launch alerts. 2.2.7.18. External Stores Inventory. The armament system controller generates CDU menus which allow the operator to specify the stores located on the external stores stations (left outboard, left inboard, and right inboard). The left inboard and right inboard external stores can be specified as fuel tanks or MK-46 Mod1, Mod2, or Mod5 torpedoes. The left outboard external store can be specified as a fuel tank, a MK-46 Mod1, Mod2, or Mod5 torpedo, an AGM-119B Penguin Mk2 Mod7 missile, or an M-299 Hellfire missile launcher. The stores interface includes discretes which allow the ASC to determine the type of store located at the station. If there is a disagreement between the operators stores selection and the stores type sensed by the ASC, an alert is displayed on the CDUs. When a store is launched or jettisoned, the ASC updates the stores configuration. 2.2.7.19. Torpedo Management. MK-46 mod 1, 2, and 5 torpedoes can be carried at the external stores stations. The ASC generates CDU menus which allow the operator to mode the torpedoes. The ASC also generates the discrete signals required to mode the torpedoes. 2.2.7.20. Penguin Missile Management. The AGM-119B penguin MK2 Mod7 missile can be loaded onto the left outboard weapons station when a missile launch adapter (MLA) is attached to the left outboard pylon. Control of the missile is provided via a MCS, which is mounted on the MLA. The operator controls power to the MCS via the MCS switch on the auxiliary arming panel. The missile includes an inertial platform which must be aligned prior to launch. The MCS performs the alignment based on aircraft heading and velocity data pro-
2-9
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 vided to it by the mission MFDs via the mission data bus. The mission MFDs generate CDU menus which allow the operator to preset the missile. The presets are passed from the mission MFDs to the MCS via the mission data bus. 2.2.7.21. Hellfire Missile Management. The operators can set the launch trajectory for up to four Hellfire missiles. Launch trajectories include lock-on before launch (LOBL), lock-on after launch (LOAL) high, LOAL low, and LOAL direct. 2.2.7.22. Fuel Management. The pilot and copilot MFDs monitor the internal and external fuel tanks via data concentrator units (DCUs). The pilot and copilot MFDs can display the fuel quantity in each tank and the composite fuel quantity. The mission MFDs provide estimated remaining time on station. The mission MFDs also estimate the bingo fuel time and generate alerts when bingo fuel time is reached. 2.2.7.23. External Stores Launch. Each external stores station is fitted with a BRU-14A bomb rack. The ASC provides the analog interfaces required to control each bomb racks in-flight operable bomb rack lock (IFOBRL), linear electromechanical actuator (LEMA), and nose and tail arming solenoids. The ASC generates CDU menus which allow the operators to select a station for launching and allow the operators to display the status of the bomb rack. Arming and launch is performed using the aircraft master arm switch and launch button located on the armament control panel. 2.2.7.24. Stores Jettison. The avionics system provides the necessary controls for jettisoning stores (torpedoes, the penguin missile, hellfire launcher, and/or external fuel tanks) from the aircraft. The crew can select station-selective jettisoning of external stores or emergency jettisoning of all stores. Operator selection for jettison of one of the external stores is provided on the selective jettison panel. Upon operator initiation, the ASC deactivates the bomb rack arming solenoids and fires the auxiliary unlock cartridge activated device (CAD) on the selected BRU-14 stores rack. The ASC then fires the secondary release CAD to open the hooks and release the store. Operator selection for emergency jettison of all external stores is provided on the emergency jettison panel. Upon operator initiation, the ASC deactivates all rack arming solenoids and sequentially fires the auxiliary unlock CAD and secondary release CAD on each bomb rack. The inboard stores are released prior to releasing the left outboard store. 2.2.7.25. UHF/VHF Communication. UHF/VHF AM/FM communications is provided by two AN/ARC232 radios. The CDU generates menus which allow the operators to control the radios. The radio modes include active frequency control (which can be selected by channel preset or can be entered manually), AM/FM (amplitude modulation/frequency modulation) control, guard receiver control, squelch control, and maritime offset control. The CDUs control the radios via the FMS data bus. Transmit/receive and monitor control are provided by communication system control panels located at each operators station. The CDU also generates menus which allow the operator to assign one radio to the top antenna and one radio to the bottom antenna. The CDU controls the switching via an antenna switching unit. The avionics system has provisions for installation of two KY-58 secure speech encryption/decryption units that provide secure V/UHF speech/data communications capability. Each radio is paired with one secure speech encryption/decryption unit. The secure speech encryption/decryption units accept secure keys via the discrete lines into the key loading connector(s) on the secure speech encryption/decryption units using a KYK-13 secure key loader. Selection of the active code is done at the secure speech encryption/decryption unit face panel. The CDU commands the radios to wide band mode when crypto mode is selected by the operator and narrow band when plain mode is selected. Received RF energy is demodulated in the radio and passed via an analog signal interface to the secure speech encryption/decryption unit when in wide band mode or to the ICS when in narrow band mode. Received V/UHF audio is decrypted in the secure speech encryption/decryption unit, and then passed to the ICS for audio distribution via analog interfaces. When in wide band mode (crypto), outgoing V/UHF audio is passed from the ICS to the secure speech encryption/decryption unit via analog interfaces. The signal is encrypted by the secure speech encryption/decryption unit and passed via an analog interface to the associated radio for modulation and transmission. When in narrow band mode (plain), outgoing V/UHF audio is passed from the ICS via an analog interface, directly to the associated radio for modulation and transmission. The secure speech encryption/decryption units can be zeroized via a zeroize switch on the mission system control panel. 2.2.7.26. HF Communication. The HF radio provides two-way, AM equivalent (AME) and single side band (SSB) radio communications in the HF band. Control commands are entered by CDU generated menus and are passed to the HF radio via the FMS data bus. These control commands include tuning, squelch control, power level, and sideband/AME mode/ on/standby selection. Trans-
2-10
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 mit audio is routed from the ICS to the HF radio via an analog interface where it is modulated and transmitted. Received audio is demodulated and sent to the ICS as an analog signal. Provisions for installation of an advanced narrow band digital voice terminal (ANDVT) are provided. When an ANDVT is installed, the pilot, copilot, TSO, and ASO are provided the capability for secure HF communications. 2.2.7.27. Position Determination. The primary means for determining aircraft position is provided by the EGI. The EGI estimates the aircraft position and velocities and provides those estimates to the CDU via the FMS data bus. Independent of the EGI, the CDU determines the aircraft position by integrating the aircraft velocity vector with respect to time. The velocity vector is determined from sensor and operator inputs. The best available sensors are utilized for the calculation. The CDU aircraft position estimate is calculated using Doppler velocities from the FMS data bus, aircraft heading via the directional gyro, and aircraft initial position from either the operator or the EGI. When the EGI is available and is providing valid position estimates, the CDU position estimate is automatically updated with the EGI position estimate. If the EGI is not available or is not providing valid position estimates, the CDU position estimate continues without EGI position updates. Aircraft altitude is calculated relative to mean sea level via pressure altitude from the air data transducers and relative to ground level via the radar altimeter. Wind is determined as the error between the aircraft velocities and true airspeed. True airspeed is calculated by the air data system using outside air temperature, indicated airspeed, and pressure altitude. If Doppler data is not available, the CDU aircraft position estimate is determined from directional gyro heading, the last calculated wind vector, and true airspeed. The CDU generates menus which allow the operators to display aircraft position in either latitude and longitude earth coordinates, or north and east grid coordinates. The grid coordinate system is a flat coordinate system. The CDU determines the grid coordinates by mapping the earth coordinates onto a plane which is tangent to the earth coordinate system at a grid center point which is specified by the operator. 2.2.7.28. Position Update. Aircraft position updates can be made by marking on top (MOT) a known location. The CDU provides the operator with the ability to compensate for aircraft navigation system drift. The CDU generates menus which allow the operators to update the aircraft position based on reference marks or TACAN fixes. 2.2.7.28.1. Reference Mark Updates. The mission MFDs generate pull-down menus which allow the operator to enter up to 15 reference marks. Once entered, the CDU allows the operator to update the aircraft position by performing a mark on top. The operator performs a reference mark on top by selecting the reference mark and entering the current range and bearing to the mark on top via the CDU. 2.2.7.28.2. TACAN Updates. The CDU generates menus which allow the operator to enter the position of a TACAN station. If a TACAN station has been entered and guidance to the station is available from the TACAN, the CDU allows the operator to update the aircraft position based on the entered TACAN position and the range and bearing to the TACAN station. 2.2.7.29. Attitude and Heading. Control of the EGI is provided by CDU generated menus. Control of the directional gyro is provided by a stand-alone compass control panel. The EGI provides heading and attitude for mission avionics (TACAN, ESM, radar, and pilot and copilot MFDs). The directional gyro and vertical gyros provide heading and attitude respectively for the advanced flight control computer (AFCC) and also provide backup heading and attitude to the pilot and copilot MFDs. The CDU generates menus which allow the operator to use the CDU magnetic variation estimate or to manually enter magnetic variation and allow the operator to apply the magnetic variation to display true heading on the pilot and copilot MFDs. 2.2.7.30. Guidance. The system provides a guidance function to fly-to points (FTP), TACAN stations, direction finding stations, VOR/ILS stations, attack points, and SAR points. 2.2.7.30.1. FTP Guidance. The CDU calculates course, distance, time-to-go, and alerts for geographic dip point, moving intercept, and SAR FTPs. FTP guidance may only be terminated by performing a Direct - To another waypoint besides a pattern fix. The pattern waypoint and pattern parameters remain as defined as one of the five history waypoints to allow the pattern to be flown. 2.2.7.30.1.1. Geographic FTP. The CDU generates menus for entering geographic FTPs and calculates guidance information for the highest priority FTP. The course to the FTP is calculated as a flat earth angle between the FTP and the aircraft and is converted to relative bearing by subtracting true heading. The commanded heading to the FTP is a function of the course and wind vector. Once an FTP is captured, guidance is
2-11
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 provided to the next FTP in sequence. Guidance data is displayed on the pilot and copilot MFDs and CDUs. 2.2.7.30.1.2. Dip Point FTP. The CDU can provide guidance to a dip point. The CDU calculates a circle intercept point (CIP) downwind of the dip point. The aircraft is then guided to the CIP and then on to the dip point. Guidance data is displayed on the pilot and copilot MFDs and CDUs. 2.2.7.30.1.3. Moving FTP. The CDU can provide guidance to a FTP that is referenced to a moving object. The course to the FTP is calculated as a flat earth angle between the FTP and the aircraft and is converted to relative bearing by subtracting true heading. The operator can enter FTPs via CDU menus. Guidance data is displayed on the pilot and copilot MFDs and CDUs. 2.2.7.30.1.4. Intercept FTP. The CDU can provide guidance to an intercept FTP derived from the track of a moving object. The course to the FTP is calculated as a flat earth angle between the FTP and the aircraft and is converted to relative bearing by subtracting true heading. The operator can enter FTPs via CDU menus. Guidance solutions are provided on the pilot and copilot MFDs and CDUs. 2.2.7.30.1.5. SAR FTP. The CDU can calculate a sector search or expanding square search pattern and calculate guidance information to the SAR FTPs. Guidance solutions are provided on the pilot and copilot MFDs and CDUs. 2.2.7.30.2 TACAN. The pilot and copilot MFDs input guidance data from the TACAN and makes it available for display to the operator via the MFD PFD. TACAN data is received by the pilot and copilot MFDs via an ARINC-582 serial interface. The CDU generates menus which allow the operators to store and recall the TACAN channel, X/Y channel selection, and latitude/longitude position for up to four TACAN stations. The TACAN is controlled by CDU generated menus. Guidance solutions are provided on the pilot and copilot MFDs. 2.2.7.30.3 Direction Finding. The avionics system includes functions which provide guidance to VHF, UHF, and LF (low frequency) transmitters. 2.2.7.30.3.1 VHF/UHF Direction Finding. Bearing to a VHF/UHF transmitter can be determined by the DF-301E direction finder and a V/UHF radio. RF radio signals are received by the direction finder antenna, processed, and converted as a 3-wire synchro output to the pilot and copilot MFDs. The CDU displays the bearing to the VHF or UHF transmitter on the pilot and copilot MFDs. 2.2.7.30.3.2. Low Frequency Automatic Direction Finding (LF/ADF). The avionics system provides the ability to determine bearing to a selected low frequency transmitter via the ARN-149 LF/ADF. The operator controls the mode and frequency for the LF/ADF via CDU menus. The LF/ADF antenna receives RF signals from an external transmitter and passes the signal to the receiver via an RF coaxial link, along with analog signals containing the bearing information. The receiver provides analog audio output to the ICS for distribution. The CDU displays the bearing to the emitter on the pilot and copilot MFDs. 2.2.7.31. VOR / ILS. Two VOR/ILS receivers provide VHF omni-range and instrument landing guidance. The CDU generates menus which allow the operator to control the VOR/ILS receivers. The VOR/ILS receivers are controlled via the FMS data bus. The guidance mode for the VOR/ILS receivers (VOR or ILS) is determined by the frequency selected by the operator. In VOR mode, the receivers determine VOR bearing for display on the pilot and copilot MFDs. In ILS mode, the receivers determine glide slope deviation and localizer deviation for display on the pilot and copilot MFDs. The VOR/ILS receivers detect marker beacons and generate audio and visual warnings. Marker beacon indicators are displayed on the pilot and copilot MFDs.
2-12
ORIGINAL
CHAPTER 3
Data Entry/Data Display

3.1. INTRODUCTION This chapter explains the process of entering and accessing data using the CDUs and MFDs. This chapter also describes the types of data displayed and provides examples of each. 3.2. DATA ENTRY The CDUs and MFDs serve as operator interfaces to the mission avionic system. Each CDU consists of a display, keyset, and self-contained electronics. The keyset and display allow the operator to display CDU pages, select operations, and enter data. Each mission MFD utilizes an MSC as the primary operator interface device. An MSC is a hand operated device used to move a cursor on the MFD and select and initiate control functions. There are three CDUs, three MSCs, and five MFDs. The pilot, copilot, and TSO stations each contain a CDU and an MSC. The pilot and copilot stations each contain both an inboard and an outboard MFD. The TSO station contains one MFD. The outboard MFDs are the primary locations for display of the primary flight display (PFD). The inboard MFDs are the primary locations for display of the EICAS (engine instrument and crew alert system), navigation, and tactical displays. The inboard MFDs also provide a redundant PFD display capability. The inboard MFDs and the TSO MFD also operate as mission displays. The pilot and copilot MFDs receive digital inputs from their on-side DCP. The DCPs control settings for the PFD and navigation display formats of the MFDs. 3.2.1. CDU Keyset. The CDU keyset consists of 8 line select (LS) keys and 59 fixed function keys. The LS keys are used to: a. Access lower level pages b. Toggle modes of a function c. Enter data in the associated field d. Copy data into the scratchpad e. Execute a function. Figure 3-2 describes the function of each fixed function key. Foldout FO-2 provides an illustration of the CDU. 3.2.2. CDU Display. The CDU display provides the operator display pages for accessing, entering, and modifying data. Top level pages are selected using dedicated fixed function keys on the CDU. Refer to the CDU illustration in foldout FO-2 for the following discussion. 3.2.3. CDU Display Layout. The CDU display has eight lines of twenty-two characters each. Lines 1, 3, 5, and 7 are data lines with an LS key on both the right and left sides of the field. Line 2 is reserved for the page title. Line 4 is an information line. Line 6 is reserved as an annunciation line. Line 8 is used as a scratchpad for holding keypad entries and scratchpad messages. 3.2.4. CDU Page Selection. CDU pages are selected by pressing an LS key or a dedicated fixed function key. For example, if the COM key on the CDU is pressed, the page shown in Figure 3-3 appears on the display. (The data that appears adjacent to the right side LS keys varies according to the current settings.) Lower level pages can be accessed from the left side LS keys. For example, pressing line select key LS1 adjacent to the V1 display cue, accesses the v/uhf1 control page (Figure 3-4). Pressing the up arrow key on the CDU causes the display to return to the comm page. The up/down symbol shown on line 8 of the comm page indicates that vertical up and down page scrolling is possible. When the down key on the CDU is pressed, the comsec page (Figure 3-5) is displayed. Pressing the up arrow key on the CDU returns the display to the comm page. Refer to Figure 3-6 for the CDU symbolic aids used to indicate what entries can be made, what functions are on or engaged, and what selections are possible. 3.2.5. CDU Data Entry. Alphanumeric keystrokes are held in the scratchpad prior to executing a data entry. Pressing any alphanumeric key causes the corresponding character to appear left justified in the scratchpad. The CLR key is used to clear the contents of the scratchpad. The first press of the CLR key clears the last character entered. Additional presses of the CLR key deletes one character at a time. Pressing and holding the CLR key clears the entire contents of the scratchpad.
3-1
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 Pressing a line select key enters the contents of the scratchpad into the field associated with that key. An invalid entry for scratchpad entries that have a bounded range or condition generates an 9INVALID ENTRY9 CDU scratchpad alert. Functions that are inhibited generate a 9NOT AVAILABLE9 CDU scratchpad alert. scratchpad messages are listed in Figures 3-42 and 3-44. 3.2.5.1. Position. Positional data can be entered into the scratchpad in three formats: latitude/longitude, bearing/range, and naval tactical grid system (NTGS) coordinate. Latitude and longitude can be entered in the following formats: a. Degrees and minutes: NddmmWdddmm b. Degrees, minutes, and tenths/ hundredths/ thousandths of minutes: Nddmm.mWdddmm.m Nddmm.mmWdddmm.mm Nddmmm.mmWdddmm.mmm c. Degrees, minutes, and seconds: NddmmssWdddmmss d. Degrees, minutes, seconds, and tenths of seconds: Nddmmss.sWdddmmss.s Latitude and longitude can be entered using any combination of the formats listed above. The initial leading zero in longitude degrees and the trailing zero(s) after any decimal point are optional entries. A minimum entry of degrees and minutes (4 digits) is required for a valid latitude or longitude. Examples of valid latitude and longitude entries are given in Figure 3-1. Identifier/bearing/distance waypoints are entered as a valid identifier, followed by a 9/9, followed by a bearing, followed by a 9/9, followed by a distance (e.g., CID/230/15). Valid bearing entries (i.e., 000.0 to 360.0 inclusive, with tenths of a degree optional) require three digits optionally followed by tenths of a degree, optionally followed by a 9T9 for true north reference or a 9M9 for magnetic north reference. If the operator attempts to enter a bearing as magnetic and the waypoint does not have a declination or magnetic variation (i.e., no magnetic variation tables were entered into the system when the waypoint was entered or generated), a 9NO MAG VAR9 scratchpad message will be displayed and the bearing entry will require a true value (e.g., 350T). Course or track is entered in the range 0 to 360 degrees. An entry of 360 is interpreted as 0. Valid distance entries assume units that are consistent with the operator selected GEO/COORD (geographic coordinate) reference unless the entry is followed by an optional identifier. If 9L/L9 or 9NTGS9 is the selected GEO/COORD reference, nautical miles is the assumed distance unit. When the state of the GEO/COORD reference is changed, distances will be converted to the proper units. Entries may be followed by a 9K9 for kilometer reference or an 9N9 for nautical mile reference. Valid distance entries (in units of kilometers or nautical miles) allow up to four digits followed by a decimal point and
Entry N4201.915W913856 S0500W2413.4 N0934.1E9723 N434212.8E12352 S2343.08E123528 N9000W1795959.9 S895959.9E18000 Figure 3-1.
Interpretation N42 01.915 W091 38 569 S05 00 W024 13.400 N09 34.100 E097 23 N43 42 12.89 E123 52 S23 43.080 E012 35 289 N90 00 W179 59 59.99 S89 59 59.99 E180 00
Latitude/Longitude Entry Examples
3-2
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 one additional digit (e.g. 9999.9). The maximum distance entry is 9999.0 kilometers or 5399.5 nautical miles. Range data is entered in the range 0 to 5399.5 nautical miles. NTGS entries are made by first entering a color code to designate the desired quadrant, followed by the easting in data miles, followed by a slash, 9/9, and then the northing field. The color codes are 9R9 for red, 9W9 for white, 9B9 for blue, and 9G9 for green, where 9R9 is the upper left quadrant (negative easting, positive northing), 9W9 is the upper right quadrant (positive easting, positive northing), 9B9 is the lower right quadrant (positive easting, negative northing), and 9G9 is the lower left quadrant (negative easting, negative northing). The easting field and the northing field contain up to 6 characters including the decimal point. The numeric entries for these fields are from 000.00 to 999.998 data miles. (999.999 is a valid number for display purposes, but not for data entry). The decimal point is optional if whole data miles are desired. Leading zeros are optional for both eastings and northings. As an illustrative example, the entry [B5/4 ] is displayed as B005.000/004.000 which represents a location 5 data miles east of the naval grid origin and 4 data miles south of the naval grid origin. While L/L display format is active, NTGS coordinate entries are displayed in latitude/ longitude coordinates. Actuation of the position line select key on a CDU page with a blank scratchpad puts the position display item (PDI) position into the scratchpad in the format that is current (L/L or NTGS). 3.2.5.2. Speed. Speeds are entered in the range 0 to 999 knots. If the entered value exceeds the size allocation for a particular CDU page, 9***9 is displayed. 3.2.5.3. Time and Date. Time of day is entered in the order of hours-minutes-seconds (e.g. 235959). Three to six digits are acceptable with seconds and leading zeros being optional. The exception is leg duration on the hold page, where three to four digit entries are allowed and omitting the seconds is not optional. For leg duration, zero hours is assumed. Dates are entered in the order of day-month-year in any of the following formats: 93112929, 931/12/929, or 931.12.92. The year is interpreted as 920xx9 whenever 9xx9 is less than 82. 3.2.5.4. Force Track Numbers. Force track number (FTN) entries on CDU pages are either for referencing an object to another object (e.g. slaving a circle to an object by entering the objects FTN) or for changing an objects FTN (e.g. changing a system tracks FTN to a specific value for reporting on the data link). For local objects with FTNs (objects that are created on the tactical plot and not received via the data link), FTNs are automatically assigned in the range of 000018 to 077778. Link FTNs are automatically assigned in the range of 102008 to 177768 and can be changed by the operator. FTN entries can be summarized as follows: Reference FTN entry: for those line selects that allow entering a FTN to reference an object, the valid entry range is 000018 to 177768. FTN entry: For those line selects which allow modification of a link FTN assignment, the valid entries are 100008 and the range 102008 to 177768. FTN entries that are duplicates of existing FTNs prompts the message 9DUP FTN XXXXX9 to appear in the scratchpad, where XXXXX represents the duplicate FTN. 3.2.5.5. PDI Deletion. Deletion of a PDI or PDI reference from a CDU page is performed by entry of a minus sign (-) in the position or FTN field for markers and in the FTN field for other PDIs. If the page is for a system track with a track update mode of radar auto or radar priority auto, a radar delete command is issued for that system track. The following items can be deleted from their CDU pages: a. System tracks, with the exception of tracks designated as emergency or force tell, or tracks with FLIR as the sensor source ASW contacts, with the exception of ASW contacts designated as emergency or force tell, or data link ASW contacts Markers, with the exception of markers designated as emergency or force tell or data link markers (including data link PIMs and waypoints), or data link reference point, or PIM designated as emergency or force tell Data link PIMs Circles Vectors
b.
c.
d. e. f.
An attempt made to delete a PDI that cannot be deleted prompts the 9INVALID ENTRY9 CDU scratchpad alert to be displayed. Upon deletion of an object used as a reference, all objects referencing that object are deleted.
3-3
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 3.2.6. Display Control Panel. The DCPs provide control of on-side PFD and navigation display (ND) parameters. The DCP transmits pilot control adjustments and selections to the on-side outboard MFD which transfers the data to the other MFDs as required. A PFD or ND must be displayed on one of the on-side displays or DCP inputs will be ignored. The DCP consists of single function bearing knobs and concentric multifunction knobs with push button actions for other functions. Foldout FO-2 provides an illustration of the DCP. DCP control selections are summarized in Figure 3-7. 3.2.7. Multifunction Slew Control. The MSC is a thumb-operated force control used to direct the movement of the cursor symbol on the display and to select cells in the icon template and menu. It is sensitive to force applied in the X and Y axes to provide cursor movement throughout the display area. Application of force causes the cursor to move in the direction of the force: up for forward pressure, down for rearward pressure, and left and right for corresponding left and right pressure. 3.2.7.1. Hook Pushbutton. The hook pushbutton (HPB) is the primary control for top level function/pull down menu selection and hook verification. Top level function or pull down menu selection occurs when the cursor is located within the icon template and menu area. When selecting a top level function, pressing the HPB will: a. Activate the selected function b. Remove the icon template display from the MFD screen and display pull down menu selections (when appropriate) c. Cause the selected top level function icon to be displayed in the active selection display area at the bottom on the MFD screen. When selecting a pull down menu mode the HPB will: a. Activate the selected mode b. Replace the menu with the next menu or return the cursor control to the MFD c. Cause the selected mode to be displayed in the active selection display area at the bottom of the MFD screen. To hook a display item or location on the display screen, position the cursor symbol over the designated area and press the HPB. This action commands the system to select the display item closest to the center of the hook capture area (HCA). The HCA is 38 of an inch in diameter. System determination that there is no display item within the HCA will cause the cursor symbol to pulse, thereby designating a location. When more than one display item is located within the hook capture area, the display item closest to the center of the HCA will pulse. Actuating the HPB again will cause the system to deselect the current display item and select the next closest display item, causing it to pulse. This sequencing process is used to cycle through each display item within the HCA until the desired display item is identified. To designate a location, not a display item, this sequence is continued until the cursor symbol is identified. Any portion of a line or circle which is displayed within the HCA will be sufficient to hook the entire circle or line. 3.2.7.2. Activate Pushbutton. The activate pushbutton (APB) provides action or command activation control. Pressing the APB commands the system to act on the function or item selected by the HPB. A hook verification is performed before any specific function is recognized. If no valid hook verification is present, the annunciation 9HOOK VERIFY9 is displayed on the MFD upon APB actuation. The HOOK VERIFY annunciation is removed from the display by pressing the HPB. 3.2.7.3. Mode Pushbutton. The mode pushbutton (MPB) primary function is to provide immediate access to the icon template or menu selection area without slew controller movement. Pressing the MPB will: a. b. c. Cause the cursor symbol to maintain present location on the display screen Return the icon template display to the MFD screen Cause the current top-level function selection to be indicated by reverse video.
The slew controller is used to slew through the icon template area and the HPB is used to select the desired function. Pressing the MPB prior to complete menu selection will recall the previous menu, providing the capability to modify previous menu selections. Pressing the MPB while the 9INVALID OPN9 alert is displayed will clear the alert and recall the previous menu. 3.3. DATA DISPLAY
The CDUs, MFDs, sonar display and SCU present various types of displays. Figure 3-8 lists the types of displays presented and identifies the equipment that displays each type. Paragraphs 3.3.1 through 3.3.9 describe the various displays. Refer to Flight Manual (SA4047-S70HN-NFM-000 ) for equipment descriptions.
3-4
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 3.3.1. CDU Pages. CDU pages provide the operator selections for accessing, entering, and modifying information. Paragraphs 3.2.1 through 3.2.5 discuss the function, structure, and use of CDU pages. Chapter 4 provides a detailed description of the CDU pages available. 3.3.2. Primary Flight Display. The PFD is available on all four cockpit MFDs. The PFD is the default display for the outboard MFDs (MFD 1 and MFD 4). The PFD consists of a vertical situation display with flight instruments, a flight director, essential engine instruments, and one of four selectable horizontal situation displays. The PFD is organized into the following sub-areas. Figure 3-9 shows PFD organization. a. Vertical situation display with attitude director indicator (ADI), airspeed indicator, barometric altitude indicator, vertical velocity indicator, and integrated flight indicator. b. Radar altitude indicator, represented on the PFD by a round dial analog indicator and a digital readout and includes the display of selected radio altitude, preselected radio altitude, and a decision height (DH) alert. c. Horizontal situation display consisting of one of the four displays (HSI/map/hover/cable angle). d. Engine instrument power pod which provides a representation of a reduced set of EICAS parameters on the PFD page. These parameters are represented by tapes, scales and indicators, and readouts. The four selectable horizontal situation displays are: a. HSI - Traditional horizontal situation indicator (HSI) with a 360 degree compass rose. Figure 3-9 shows the PFD HSI display. b. Arc Map - 80 degree sector map displaying flight plan route and navigation sensor display. Figure 3-10 shows the PFD arc map display. c. Hover - Modified HSI with hovering flight data. Figure 3-11 shows the PFD hover display. d. Cable Angle - provides pilots information critical to operations involving dipping the sonar sensor into the water. Figure 3-12 shows the PFD cable angle display. 3.3.3. Navigation Displays. The navigation displays provide flight plan information and a limited set of other flight data with a 360 degree compass view. Two navigation displays are available: the 360 map and the plan map. Each ND is supported by the crew alert system (CAS) pop-up window feature. 3.3.3.1. 360 Map. The 360 map presents position and map data for FMS flight plans, waypoints, and other navigation information on a 360 degree horizontal situation display. The 360 map includes a radar altimeter indicator and a vertical deviation indicator to the right of the compass rose. Figure 3-13 shows the 360 map display. 3.3.3.2. Plan Map. The plan map display provides a basic 360 degree flight plan display oriented to north. Flight plan data is displayed on the plan map with the aircraft symbol in the center of the range ring display. The orientation of the aircraft symbol reflects the helicopters heading. Figure 3-14 shows the plan map display. 3.3.4. EICAS. The EICAS display is available on all four cockpit MFDs. The EICAS display is the default display for the inboard MFDs (MFD 2 and MFD 3). The EICAS display integrates engine, main transmission, main rotor instruments, and a crew alert system into a single display format. The EICAS display provides rotor speed, gas turbine speed, power turbine speed, engine data, transmission data, fuel data, cautions, and advisories. Figure 3-15 shows the EICAS display. 3.3.5. Status, Monitor, and Test Displays. The status, monitor, and test displays are used to view system input/output (I/O) status, built-in test (BIT) status, and display test formats. These formats are only available on the ground. 3.3.5.1 Status Display. The status display is the default display. It is accessed by simultaneously pressing the CONT+ and CONT- keys in the lower right hand corner of the MFD. The status display provides internal hardware BIT results, BIT monitoring data, software load designations (software part numbers), and an elapsed time indicator. Figure 3-16 shows the status display. 3.3.5.2. Monitor Displays. The monitor displays indicate the status of digital, discrete, and analog inputs and outputs to the MFD. The display is selected by pressing the I/O bezel key on the status display. Subsequent pressing of the I/O key cycles the display to the analog then digital pages before returning to the discrete page. Paging keys are provided to page through multiple page displays in each category. Figure 3-17 shows the
3-5
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 digital I/O monitor display. Figure 3-18 shows the discrete I/O monitor display. Figure 3-19 shows the analog I/O monitor display. 3.3.5.3. Test Pattern Displays. Eight test patterns are provided to assist in the detection of display faults such as stuck pixels, and to assess graphics performance. The test patterns are selected via the PTRN bezel key on the status display. Selection between the different patterns is done using the scroll keys. The eight test patterns are white, black, red, blue, green, checkerboard, color bar, and gray shade. 3.3.6. Tactical Displays. The tactical displays are available on the inboard cockpit MFDs (MFD 2 and MFD 3) and the TSO MFD (MFD 5). The tactical displays are the default displays for the TSO MFD. The tactical displays aid the crew in detecting and tracking contacts using onboard sensors. The tactical displays are supported by the CAS pop-up window feature. Four types of tactical displays are provided on the MFDs: 1. Tactical Plot 2. Radar 3. FLIR 4. ESM Figure 3-20 shows the top level symbols and modes. Figures 3-21, 3-22, 3-23, and 3-24 describe the use of each symbol. Paragraphs 3.3.6.1. through 3.3.6.4. describe each of the tactical displays. 3.3.6.1. Tactical Plot. The mission MFDs generate a tactical plot for display on the pilot, copilot, and TSO mission MFDs. The tactical plot provides a graphical representation of the tactical situation. The mission MFDs generate the following tactical symbols: a. Own Aircraft b. Base Ship c. Tracks d. Datum e. Snake Attack Bearing Line f. Fly-To Points g. Sonar Passive Contacts s. t. u. Radar Tracks ESM Emitters VHF/UHF DF Bearing Line and Bearing h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. Sonar Active Contacts Boats Manual Contacts Weapons Release Point Intercept Point Circle Survivor Own Aircraft Position History Reference Marks Hook Cursor Vectors
Figure 3-25 shows the tactical plot top level menu. The hook symbol is always present and can be positioned on any of the above symbols to select that symbol for additional action such as deletion, position correction, or display centering. The aircraft, cursor, intercept point, or snake attack bearing line cannot be erased. Symbology sets can be decluttered and displayed by operator selection. The scale is operator selectable in the range from 0.5 to 128 Nm/inch. The center of the plot can be moved to the current position of the hook or a selected symbol. 3.3.6.2. Radar Display. The surface search radar outputs electronic industries alliance (EIA) RS-343 raster video which includes the processed radar return video and an information tableau. This video is displayed on the mission MFDs, and is overlaid with an MFD generated cursor, when the mission MFD is in radar display mode. The mission MFD display mode is selected by the operator via mission MFD pull-down menus and is controlled by the mission MFD. The video displayed on the mission MFDs is switched between mission MFD generated video and radar generated video within the mission MFD. The mission MFD radar display includes radar video, range/bearing cursor, heading marker, range rings, and target tracking information.
3-6
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 The display stabilization can be either ground stabilized or aircraft stabilized. In the ground stabilized mode, the display is oriented true north up. In the aircraft stabilized mode, the display can be oriented true north up or aircraft heading up. The mission MFD radar display can be set off-center when the radar is in sector scan or continuous scan mode. Detailed tracking information can be displayed for a specific track by hooking and verifying a track. The detailed tracking data includes track range, bearing, course, and speed. Activation and deactivation of the frequency agility, scan integration, and constant false alarm rate (CFAR) radar functions are provided on the mission MFD radar display via MFD pull-down menus. To select a function the cursor is moved over a function selection within the pull-down menus using the MSC which is interfaced directly to the mission MFD via an analog interface. The functions are activated using an MSC fixed function key selection, which is passed from the mission MFD to the radar, via the mission MIL-STD-1553B data bus. Figure 3-26 shows the radar top level menu. 3.3.6.3. FLIR Display. FLIR imagery is displayed on the mission MFDs. FLIR imagery is displayed through 360 degrees of azimuth. Displayed elevation is from -105 to 60 degrees for wide FOV, -105 to 30 degrees for medium FOV, and -105 to 25 degrees for narrow FOV with the exception of those areas which are blocked by aircraft structure or the FLIR turret. FLIR imagery can be displayed in a wide FOV (22.5 by 30 degrees) for detection of IR emitters or a narrow FOV (1.26 by 1.68 degrees) for classification and identification of emitters. A third intermediate FLIR image FOV (5 by 6.67 degrees) is also provided. The FLIR image can be magnified to either a 2:1 or 4:1 ratio and displayed in either white hot or black hot video presentation. The gain and level for FLIR imagery can be set manually or automatically. Control and display for gain and level are provided via the HCU or the CDU menus. The pilot, copilot, or TSO can also stop the IR image update on the mission MFD FLIR display. The pilot, copilot, or TSO can designate a geographic position or tactical symbol on the mission MFD tactical plot for pointing the FLIR turret LOS. Once designated, the FLIR turret LOS will automatically slew to the designated geographic position or tactical symbol position. The copilot can track the IR contacts using either a centroid or an area tracking technique. When tracking an IR contact, the copilot can offset the FLIR turret LOS from the IR contact LOS, provided that the target limits (edges) remain within 80% of the FOV. Slant range to an IR contact is determined by laser ranging. The position of IR contact being tracked by the FLIR is displayed on the mission MFD tactical plot. Figure 3-27 shows the FLIR top level symbol menu. Figure 3-28 shows the FLIR main menu. Figure 3-29 shows the FLIR navigation display. Figure 3-30 shows the FLIR attack page. 3.3.6.4. ESM Display. The ESM provides the emitter report and ID report data to the bus controller mission processor which then stores this data in the tactical database (TDB). The ESM display, which is built by the mission processor, is a tabular list of the emitter files stored in the tactical database. The table can be either a list of the highest priority beam for each track (track list) or a list of all beams from a single track (beam list). Display page types are selectable via a pull down menu. An emitter can be deleted from the tactical database by the mission processor upon receipt of a drop emitter report command from the ESM. Upon the TDB deletion of an emitter, that track record is deleted from the tabular list and the remainder of the emitter records shift up one row. Figure 3-31 shows the ESM top level symbol menu. 3.3.7. Alerts and Annunciations. Alerts and annunciations provide operators with status indications of specific aircraft functions. Methods of alerting the crew include: annunciations and scratchpad messages displayed on the CDU, local MP annunciations displayed on the mission MFDs, and a 9MSG9 annunciation on a MFD primary flight display. The CDU alerts the crew of equipment failures, degraded operations, system modes of operation, and operator entry errors via the CDU annunciation line and scratchpad. Annunciations on the CDU annunciation line are displayed on all CDUs. Scratchpad messages are only displayed on the CDU causing the condition. CDU annunciations are categorized as clearable or non-clearable. Clearable annunciations are cleared from the annunciation line upon any operators actuation of the CLR fixed function key with a blank scratchpad. Actuation of the CLR fixed function key, while a non-clearable annunciation is displayed, repositions the annunciation to the bottom of the annunciations 9stack9 and displays the next annunciation as applicable. A non-clearable annunciation will exist in the stack until the condition causing the
3-7
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 annunciation no longer exists. The BC MP appends a plus sign to the right of the annunciation text on the CDU annunciation line when there is more than one mission annunciation in the annunciation stack. The plus sign flashes if there are any unacknowledged annunciations in the stack. Some CDU annunciation initiating conditions also set a CDU alert indicator (MSG) on the HSI on the MFDs primary flight display. This alert indicator is provided to direct the operators attention to the CDU when a degraded operation annunciation is present. When the CDU alert is set, the 9MSG9 (message) annunciation on the HSI flashes for five seconds and then comes on steady. The MSG annunciation is removed from the HSI when the message is cleared on the CDU or the initiating condition is resolved. Local MP annunciations are displayed on the mission MFDs. Each mission MFD displays the highest priority unacknowledged local MP annunciation in the alert/annunciation section of the display. Local MP annunciations are categorized as either reset-on-clear or non reset-on-clear. If a non reset-on-clear annunciation is displayed, the annunciation is acknowledged when the MSC is operating in the tactical display area and the hook push button is pressed. If a reset-on-clear annunciation is displayed, the annunciation is reset when the MSC is operating in the tactical display area and the hook push button is pressed. Figure 3-41 through 3-45 describe the annunciations and scratchpad messages displayed on the CDU and the local MP annunciations displayed on the mission MFDs. 3.3.8. ASO Displays. The sonar set has two different data display units: a SCU and a sonar display. The SCU displays the default or selected sonar set control settings. The SCU display is configured into five field types: menu title, selections, readout display, data entry, and BIT active flag. The menu title field indicates the currently selected menu. The selection field displays parameter names and associated selected values. The readout field displays readout parameter and value. The data entry field displays variable action button (VAB) inputs. The BIT active flag field displays the word 9BIT9 when BIT mode is selected. The sonar display provides the ASO with sonar set generated idle, passive, active, communication (COMM), acoustic performance prediction (APP), and built in test displays. The displays consist of targets, alphanumerics, and a cursor. The cursor can be positioned by the ASO using the forcestick on the CCD. Positioning the cursor over an active target, or passive noise line, causes related information to be displayed on the sonar display. The sonar display presents the following sonar display types: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Idle Mode Surveillance (SURV) Detect and Classify A-Scan FM Passive Combination Acoustic Performance Prediction (APP) Communication (COMM) Mode Test Mode System Condition
Paragraphs 3.3.8.1 through 3.3.8.8. describe each of these displays. 3.3.8.1. Idle Mode Display. The idle mode display is comprised of an all-text main data panel, and a side data panel containing the deployment display (hover meter). It also allows the ASO to view important sonar system information, including cable angle data, as well as projector and receiver array status. The idle mode display is used whenever the submersible unit is lowered or raised. Figure 3-32 shows an idle mode display and describes the types of information displayed. 3.3.8.2 Surveillance (SURV) Display. The surveillance display is available only when operating in the active mode. It is comprised of a main data panel (All Beam Doppler Range display) and one non-acoustic side data panel (Preliminary Contact Tote (PCT)). The all beam Doppler range display allows the ASO to identify strong and consistent returns with interesting Doppler characteristics. By 9hooking9 possible sonar contacts with the point cursor, the ASO can generate a list of preliminary contacts, then display data in text format on the PCT side data panel display. The main panel display provides a logarithmic Doppler scale and a linear range scale. The logarithmic scale allows for discrimination of the low Doppler echoes. The Doppler/range display information is obtained by combining all active beams and plotting all exceedances as to Doppler and range. The bearing, range, Doppler, and normalized amplitude of the echo under the cursor is readout at the bottom of the display for
3-8
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 CW pulses. This display is not available for FM pulses. The PCT side data panel display provides for storage of up to 8 preliminary contacts. Each contact shown in the tote includes Doppler, Doppler variance, bearing, bearing variance, range and signal level. These values are periodically updated, as new contact information becomes available. A maximum of 8 preliminary contacts can be displayed at one time. The PCT display is can be selected as the side panel display for all active and passive displays, except for the acoustic performance prediction display. Figure 3-33 shows a surveillance display and describes the types of information displayed. 3.3.8.3. Detect and Classify Display. The detect and classify display is available only when operating in the active mode. It is comprised of a main data panel (Bearing Range display) and one of three side data panels (Doppler Range display, A-Scan FM display, Preliminary Contact Tote display). The detect and classify display is used for initial search, localization, tracking and attack operations. The range vertical scale, which is common for both data panels, is in either kiloyards or nautical miles, increasing upward from zero to a maximum range set by ASO selection. The horizontal axis of the bearing range display is echo bearing, which increases from the left starting at 180 degrees azimuth to center position, then increasing from center to 180 degrees azimuth. The horizontal axis of the Doppler range side panel display is range rate, in knots. When the range scale is changed, by ASO selection, the display range scale will not change until the beginning of the next ping. The range rate limits of the Doppler/range display are selectable between 66, 616, and 636 knots. Bearing, range, Doppler, and normalized amplitude of the 9hooked9 cursor location are shown at the bottom of the display. For FM pulses, bearing, range, and normalized amplitude are shown for the 9hooked9 location. The normalized amplitude is a consistent indicator of the signal strength of the echo, normalized over the different pulse types. Figure 3-34 shows a detect and classify display and describes the types of information displayed. 3.3.8.4. A-Scan FM (AFM) Display. The AFM display is one of the selectable side data panel displays of the detect and classify display. Its an A-Scan type display which shows either single-pulse or multi-pulse FM data, with range presented across the horizontal axis and amplitude presented across the vertical axis. The AFM display provides the ASO with the ability to correlate the pulse-to-pulse structure of a suspected target in FM MultiPulse (FMMP) with the aid of a correlation divider or observe the single pulse FM echo structure. There are three transmit time aligned amplitude vs. time displays showing the energy detected and normalized amplitude structure of the range gate for the beam selected in the bearing range main display. The range gated and time aligned beams on either side of the selected beam are displayed above and below the selected beams A-Scan. The range gate shown in the A-Scan is of a time as short as possible, but consistent with the selected pulse time, echo lengths and range scale. Figure 3-35 shows an AFM side panel display and describes the types of information displayed. 3.3.8.5. Passive Combination Display. The passive combination display is available only when operating in the passive mode. It is comprised of one upper data panel (Bearing Frequency Indicator display), one lower data panel (Bearing Time Record display), and one of three side data panels (Narrowband Automatic Line Integration display, DEMON Automatic Line Integration display, Preliminary Contact Tote). The passive combination display is used for passive discrimination of targets gained during active sonar searches, and for passive searches in tactical situations that do not permit use of active sonar. It allows the ASO to discriminate potential contacts in frequency, time, bearing and amplitude. The passive combination display is only available, when the submersible unit receive array is open. The display and detection processing is halted, if the array arms are closed. Figure 3-36 shows a passive combination display and describes the types of information displayed. 3.3.8.6. Acoustic Performance Prediction (APP) Display. The APP display is a sub-display group that can be selected when operating in either the active or passive modes. It is comprised of one main data panel (Range of the Day display), and one of two selectable side data panels (Sound Velocity Profile display, Prediction Parameter display). The APP display assists the ASO in determining acoustic performance, under measured conditions, for active and passive sonar operations. The range of the day display provides a visual presentation of the current acoustic conditions, including signal excess, as a function of range and depth. The signal excess is coded as color and a legend specifying the coding is displayed at the bottom. Using the point cursor, the ASO can 9hook9 a position, which will move the depth and range cursors to that location. Information describing range, depth, signal excess and sound velocity is then displayed along the bottom of the display screen for the cursor position. The data taken by the temperature and pressure sensors within the submersible unit, during raise or lower operations is converted to a SVP and displayed in the side data panel, when selected. The ASO can select for the data storage of three SVPs, and associated salinities. Also the ASO has the capability of selecting, writing and erasing
3-9
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 stored SVPs. Salinity values, which are used in the computation of the SVP, can be entered by the ASO or a default value is used. The depth scale auto-ranges to the maximum depth of the SVP data. Figure 3-37 shows a APP display and describes the types of information displayed. 3.3.8.7. Communication Mode (COMM) Display. The Communication mode display is comprised of a single data panel that displays text data concerning the operation of the UWT transducer. No acoustic data is presented. Figure 3-38 shows a communication mode display and describes the types of information displayed. 3.3.8.8. System Condition Display. The system condition display is comprised of six main data panels (System Condition, SU condition, SIU condition, CIPS condition, DC/RM condition, and SCU condition), that are selectable by the ASO. Each provides text messages concerning operating status and faults for specific system components. Figure 3-40 shows a system condition display and describes the types of information displayed. 3.3.9. Test Displays. Test displays appear on the MFDs, CDUs, and sonar display. Figure 3-39 shows the test mode display which shows the overall system status and IBIT. CDU test displays are used for maintenance purposes. Refer to SA4047-S70B6-ATM-000 for a further description of these displays.
3-10
ORIGINAL
KEY NAME 0 through 9 keys A through Z keys . key - key
FUNCTION Initiate entry of numeric data as prompted by CDU menus. Initiate entry of alphabetic data as prompted by CDU menus. Initiate entry of a decimal point. Initiate entry of a dash. Also, where applicable, entering a 9-9 in the scratchpad and pressing a line select key adjacent to a valid deletion field will either delete the operator entered data or set the default value. Initiate entry of a forward slash. Also used for entering identifier/bearing/distance waypoints, latitude/longitude coordinates, and NTGS coordinates where the values are separated by a 9/9 when entered. Used for page and line scrolling when available. Pressing the down arrow key causes the CDU to scroll vertically through the pages in sequence until the last page is reached. Pressing the down arrow key when the last page is displayed usually causes the first page to be displayed. Pressing the up arrow key causes the CDU to scroll through the pages in reverse sequence until the first page is reached. Pressing the up arrow key when the first page is displayed usually causes the last page to be displayed. Lateral scrolling is done by pressing the left or right arrow keys. The arrow keys are repeating keys which will cause continuous scrolling until the key is released. Line scrolling is similar to vertical page scrolling except that only one new line is displayed for each press of the up or down arrow keys. Used with numeric keys to define direction. Entered as prompted by menus on CDU. Used to access the communication radio (comm) page. Used to clear the contents of the scratchpad. The first press clears the last character entered. Additional presses deletes one character at a time. Used to access the civil navigation radio (cnav) page. Used to access the index 1 (index 1) page. This page contains an index of additional functions not available via other top-level keys. Used to access the system status (system status) page. Used to access the mission (msn ctrl) page. Used to write the helicopters present position into the scratchpad regardless of the current page displayed. Used to access the data page (from-to data) which is used to generate 9what if?9 scenarios for computations defined by two flight plan legs, or present position and a selected TO waypoint. Figure 3-2. CDU Key Functions (Sheet 1 of 2)
/ key
Arrow keys
N, S, E, W keys COM key CLR key NAV key IDX key STAT key MSN key MARK key DATA key
3-11
ORIGINAL
KEY NAME STR key
FUNCTION Used to access the lateral steer (lnav steer) page and vertical steer (vnav steer) page. The lateral steer page is accessed directly by pressing the STR key. The vertical steer page is accessed by vertically scrolling from the lateral steer page. Used to access the flight plan edit 1 (fpln edit 1) page. Used to access the flight plan (fpln) page with the active waypoint in data line 2. Used to access the flight plan (fpln) page with the ability to modify the flight plan to define and immediately execute a new great circle course directly to a waypoint. The direct-to waypoint may be a future waypoint in the flight plan, a history waypoint, a waypoint from the scratchpad, or a waypoint generated as an offset from present position. Used to access the last integrated navigation page accessed on that CDU except after a cold start, in which case the INU/GPS integrated navigation (INAV) page will be displayed. Used to access the IFF control (iff control) page. Used to access the position (position) page. If the scratchpad contains a four digit code with each digit of the code in the range of 0 to 7, pressing this key will transfer the code from the scratchpad to the mode 3/A code and data line brackets on the IFF mode 3 page. If the scratchpad is empty when this key is pressed, the CDU will initiate an IFF mode 3 ident and the annunciation line will display 9ident9 for 3 seconds. Used to access lower level pages, toggle modes of a function, enter data in the associated field, copy data into the scratchpad, or execute a function. For certain functions the line selects are used for selecting mode and for input of numeric values used by the mode. If the scratchpad is blank, pressing the line select will toggle the mode. If the scratchpad is not blank, pressing the line select will not toggle the mode. Figure 3-2. CDU Key Functions (Sheet 2 of 2)
EDIT key FPLN key DIR key
INAV key
IFF key PSN key M3 key
Line select keys
3-12
ORIGINAL
[ 2 4 3 . 0 0 0 AM ] c omm V 2 DF C [ 118 . 000 ] V 1 GD
BRT
HF L K 1 1 C A [ [
8 . 0000 ] ]
FQ0387
SA
Figure 3-3.
Communication Radio Page
] PRE SE T S APR T [ v / uh f 1 c t r l MODE : TR T O P : AN T SQL : ON H A VE QU I CK
BRT
MAR I T I ME : I N T L O F F : L K 1 1 [ ]
FQ0388
SA
Figure 3-4.
V/UHF Control Page
3-13
ORIGINAL
V1 : PL A I N
C I P HE R : V 2 c om s e c
BRT
P L A I N : HF ]
FQ0389
SA
Figure 3-5.
COMSEC Control Page
3-14
ORIGINAL
V NAV
F UEL [
428 ]k lb
e x a mp l e : E NROU T E
s ymb o l s
W I ND [ << * ACCE P T [
/ ] s t a tus >>+ RE JECT ]
Pushing the line select key will access the page indicated by the label. Pushing the line select key will select the item or enable the mode. * Function is on or enabled.
Reference is degrees true (indicated by "T" symbol). Check (as in check status for equipment failures).
[ ]
No computed data is available or power is off. Data entry is possible / required. Vertical page or line scrolling is possible. Lateral and vertical page scrolling is possible.
:
O
Alternate selection among modes (toggle). Reference is degrees magnetic north.
FT2135
SA
Figure 3-6.
CDU Symbolic Aids
3-15
ORIGINAL
CONTROL NAME BRG 1 BRG 2 BARO/FD ALT
FUNCTION Selects FMS 1/2, TACAN, VOR, ADF, or OFF for MFD HSI No. 1 bearing pointer. Selects FMS 1/2, TACAN, VOR, ADF, or OFF for MFD HSI No. 2 bearing pointer. Used for setting barometric altimeter pressure or preselecting a barometric altitude. Placing the outer knob to BARO and rotating the inner knob adjusts the altimeter barometric setting in 0.01 inch Hg increments. Placing the outer knob to FD ALT and rotating the inner knob adjusts the preselected barometric altitude to the AFCC for flight director operation. Barometric altitude data is fed back from the AFCC for display above the barometric altimeter on the MFD PFD. Selects VOR/ILS, back course (B/C), FMS 1/2, or FM homing (HMR) as the navigation source. Adjusts the pointer/course deviation indicator to select course/track. Pressing the CRS knob slews the selected course to the bearing of the selected navigation source. Used to select time data readout. Rotating the DATA knob cycles between blank (off), TTG (time to go), and ETA (estimated time of arrival) readouts on the HSI/map display. Controls HSI/map display heading bug. Rotating the HDG knob on either DCP sets the heading bug on both the pilots and copilots MFDs. Pressing the HDG knob slews the heading bug to the current helicopter heading. Figure 3-7. DCP Control Functions
NAV CRS DATA
HDG
3-16
ORIGINAL
DISPLAY CDU Displays System Start CDU Navigation Flight Plan Guidance and Steering Alternate Flight Plan Navigation Sensor Communication Radio Control Navigation Radio Control IFF Transponder Control FMS Data Loader/Recorder Status Monitoring Failure Alerting Initiated Built In Test System Zeroization Mission Start Mission Data Loader/Recorder Mission Test Mission Control Mission Status MFD Displays Primary Flight PFD HSI PFD Arc Map PFD Hover PFD Cable Angle Navigation EICAS Status Figure 3-8.
CDU
MFD 1, 4
MFD 2, 3
MFD 5
SONAR DISPLAY
SCU
TWD
U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
U U U U U U U
U U U U U U U
Summary of Displayed Data (Sheet 1 of 2)
3-17
ORIGINAL
DISPLAY Tactical TACP Radar FLIR ESM Sonar Displays Idle Mode Surveillance A-Scan FM Detect and Classify Passive Combination Acoustic Performance Prediction Communications Mode Test Mode System Condition Sonar Operation Sonar Test Figure 3-8.
CDU
MFD 1, 4
MFD 2, 3
MFD 5
SONAR DISPLAY
SCU
TWD
U U U U
U U U U U
U U U U U U U U U U U Summary of Displayed Data (Sheet 2 of 2)
3-18
ORIGINAL
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
ADI
BAROMETRIC ALTIMETER
VSI
ADC 1 ATT 1
FD1 HDG
20 20 10 9
MOT
VAPP 13900 ALT
99 00
4 3 2 1 0
IAS 0
240 220
20 4 40 60 10
MM
1 2 3
DH
10 10 20
133 80 2 200 100 180 120 160 14

N NR N P 97 P 1 2
8 7
20 139 00 80 6 ALT 5 4
PIT
20
ROL
EIC
01
DCU 1 02
30.15 IN
RAIN TTG
1 2 3 4
S T A T
108
110 105 100 95
108
HDG TRU1 047 VOR2 68.3 NM 105 DG
OFST
E
0: 12. 3
GS
15 50
1 2 75 0
APPR
TCN
19 R MSG
FMS1
15
DTK
19.3 NM
33
HDG
3 4
10
FUEL
12
685
TGT 1 NG 1
90
685
TGT 2 NG 2
1950
RA
250 RALT
30
051
FOXX1
M
21 24
V1 12 FLOPS 123.500 PT PFD ND HS1
POWER POD
HSI / ARC MAP / HOVER / CABLE ANGLE (HSI SHOWN)
Figure 3-9.
Primary Flight Display with HSI
3-19
102
102
0.8 NM
V2 TOWER 123.200 CT EIC TAC
RADAR ALTIMETER
FQ0390
SA
ORIGINAL
ADC 1 ATT 1
13900 ALT
99 00
4 3 2 1 0
IAS 0 20 40 240 60 4 220 133 80 2 200 100 180 120 160 14 EIC
01
N NR N P 97 P 1 2
20 10
MM
20 10 9 0 1 20 2 3
DH
10 10 20
8 7
139 00
80
PIT
20
ROL
6 ALT 4 5
30.15 IN
DCU 1 02
1 2 3 4
S T A T
108
110 105 100 95
108
HDG TRU1 047 VOR2 68.3 NM 105 DG
RAIN TTG
OFST
0: 12. 3
GS
15 50
1 2 75 0
ENRT
TCN
19 R
E
19.3 NM
FUEL
HDG
3 4
MA35L CV35L
MSG
FMS1
DTK
10
685
TGT 1 NG 1
90
685
TGT 2 NG 2
1950
RA
250 RALT
R N G
FOXX1
20
051
FOXX1
102
102
0.8 NM
V1 12 FLOPS 123.500 PT PFD ND MAP
FQ0391
SA
Figure 3-10.
PFD Arc Map Display
3-20
ORIGINAL
ADC 1 ATT 1
13900 ALT
99 00
4 3 2 1 0
IAS 0
240 220
20 20 4 40 60 10
MM
20 10 9 0 1 2 3
DH
10 10 20
133 80 2 200 100 180 120 160 14

N NR N P 97 P 1 2
8 7
20 139 00 80 6 ALT 5 4
PIT
20
ROL
EIC
01
DCU 1 02
30.15 IN
HDG
TRU1
1 2 3 4
S T A T
108
110 105 100 95
108
105 DG
047
3
FOXX1 GS
15 50
1 2 75 0
30
HDG
19 R
6
3 4
FUEL
MSG
M E
BRG 051 RNG
10
685
TGT 1 NG 1
90
685
TGT 2 NG 2
1950
RA
250 RALT 0.5
12
R N G
102
102
24
0.8 NM
DOP TEST
Figure 3-11.
PFD Hover Display
3-21
V1 12 FLOPS 123.500 PT PFD ND HOVER
VEL
21
FQ0392
SA
ORIGINAL
ADC 1 ATT 1
13900 ALT
99 00
4 3 2 1 0
IAS 0
240 220
20 20 4 40 60 80 10 10
MM
20 10 9 0 1 2 3
DH
10 20
133
2
8 7
200 100 180 120 160 14
20 139 00 80 6 ALT 4 5
30.15 IN
PIT
20
ROL
EIC
01
108
N NR N P 97 P 1 2
DCU 1 02
1 2 3 4
S T A T
110 105 100 95
108
HDG
TRU1
105 DG
355
3
TTR
14:20
GS
15 50
30
HDG
75 19 R
FUEL
MSG
M
BRG 051
3 75 4 ALERT 10 0
1 2
685
TGT 1 NG 1
90
685
TGT 2 NG 2
1950
RA
250 RALT 0.5 CABLE ALERT
21
RNG 384 YDS FT CABLE
R N G
24
102
102
1260
12
Figure 3-12.
PFD Cable Angle Display
3-22
V1 12 FLOPS 123.500 PT PFD ND CABLE
FQ0393
SA
ORIGINAL
TRU1
VOR2
HDG
68.3 NM
102
DG
3
047
6
OFST
RAIN
TTG
0: 12. 3
GS
15
19 R
E
TCN1
CV36L
N
19.3 NM
MA35L CV35L
12
1 3 50 208 4 ALERT 10 0
250 RALT 100 RALTP
R N G
33
FOXX1
MSG
FMS1
15
ENRT DTK ENRT
30
FOXX1
40 CV34L
S W
0.8 NM
CC AN SC L
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX C A X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX S X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX
PFD
ND
MAP
Figure 3-13.
3-23
21
24
PAGE 2 OF 3 EIC TAC
FQ0394
SA
360 Map Display
ORIGINAL
CV36L
CV36L MA35L CV35L FOXX1

R N G
MSG
CC AN SC L
160 CV34L CV33L 320

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX C A X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX S X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX
PAGE 2 OF 3
00
PFD
ND
PLAN
EIC
TAC
FQ0395
SA
Figure 3-14.
Plan Map Display
3-24
ORIGINAL
XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
123 100 100.8 800 103 100 100.8 100 100 845 102.8 120 147
NG
TGT
NP1
NG
NP2
DCU 1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X TGT NG 0 P T
XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
1 T P
XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
103
XMSN
128
XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
LINBD
1 MAIN 2
RINBD
A D V
XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
120
FUEL
TOTAL
120
1680
XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
C X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX T X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX N X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X XX
PAGE 2 OF 3
PAGE 2 OF 3 EIC TAC
00
PFD
ND
FQ0396
SA
Figure 3-15.
EICAS Display
3-25
ORIGINAL
OFF
I/O
PTRN
BRT
DISPLAY STATUS
PROCESSOR
DISPLAY PROCESSOR PROCESSOR FLASH SRAM ARINC 429 SRAM NVM BACKPLANE PROCESSOR
INTERFACE
I B I T
DISPLAY
BACKLIGHT CONTROL LAMP THERMAL LCD CONTROL THERMAL GRAPHICS PROCESSOR FLAME BUFFER DISPLAY LIST MEMORY SRAM CURSOR STATIC FILL MERGE POWER SUPPLY TEST VOLTAGES FAN
AC INPUT ADC SIGNAL GROUND DC INPUT ADC SIGNAL GROUND DISCRETE INPUT DISCRETE OUTPUT ARINC 453 VIDEO 1553
LUM
OFP: FIXED: CHAR:
XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX
ETI:
XXXX
PFD
ND
EICAS
TAC
CONT
FQ0397
SA
Figure 3-16.
Status Display
3-26
ORIGINAL
OFF
I/O
PTRN
DIG
BRT
DIGITAL I / O MONITOR
BUS ADC 1 IN ADC 2 IN DCP IN DPF BUS A DPF BUS B DCU 1 IN DCU 2 IN EGI 1 IN BUS STATUS IN ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE PITCH ROLL HDG VH VH EGI 2 IN ACTIVE PITCH 123.4 DEG NORMAL
PAGE 1 OF 3 LUM
PARAMETER STATUS I B I T
PARAMETER
VALUE
123.4 DEG 123.4 DEG 123.4 DEG 123.4 KTS 123.4 KTS
NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL
P A G E
PFD
ND
EICAS
TAC
CONT
FQ0398
SA
Figure 3-17.
Digital I/O Monitor Display
3-27
ORIGINAL
OFF
I/O
PTRN
DISC
BRT
DISCRETE I / O MONITOR
SIGNAL ADC REV ATT 1 VALID ATT 180 INDEX ATT REV DCU REV DF ENGAGED DF VALID DG MODE DH ALERT FM HOMER ENGAGED FM HOMER VALID FMS REV HDG REV HDG 2 VALID MSC LFT B IN / OUT IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN STATE TRUE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE
PAGE 1 OF 2 LUM
I B I T
P A G E
PFD
ND
EICAS
TAC
CONT
FQ0399
SA
Figure 3-18.
Discrete I/O Monitor Display
3-28
ORIGINAL
OFF
I/O
PTRN
ANLG
BRT
ANALOG I / O MONITOR
SIGNAL CABLE LAT CABLE LON DF / OTP1 FM HOM L / R HDG 2 MSC L / R MSC U / D PITCH 1 PITCH 2 RAD ALT ROLL 1 ROLL 2 IN / OUT IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN VALUE 12.3 DEG 12.3 DEG 123.4 DEG 12.3 DEG 123.4 DEG 12.3 V 12.3 V 123.4 DEG 123.4 DEG 1234.5 FT 123.4 DEG 123.4 DEG VALIDITY VALID VALID INVALID VALID VALID INVALID VALID VALID VALID INVALID VALID VALID
I B I T
P A G E
LUM
PAGE 1 OF 2
PFD
ND
EICAS
TAC
CONT
FQ0400
SA
Figure 3-19.
Analog I/O Monitor Display
3-29
ORIGINAL
?
TACP RADAR ESM FLIR INC DEC 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 HELO CURSOR LOP DLRP MODE FOV IMAGE FIXED MOVING SLAVE 1 SLAVE 2 NEW EXISTING TRK DES REPOSITION UPDATE SIM TRK TRK DES PRI TRK REPOSITION
SPL
SPL
?
MARKERS GRAPHICS TRK HIST ESM CONTACT ASW CONTACT ATTACK AIDS RESET CPA INTERCEPT SONAR ATTACK ALERT SQUAWK STRANGLE GRID LOCK FILTER CORR DECORR CONTROL UPDATE BURST FIXED MOVING SLAVED EXPAND MODE PROCESS DISPLAY ANTENNA
B C
?
CDU
P
TACP
CDU TACP
?
FQ0401
SA
Figure 3-20.
Top Level Symbols and Modes
3-30
ORIGINAL
ICON
CIRCLE
FUNCTION Circle - HPB selection of the circle icon displays the submenu: FIXED (default), MOVING, SLAVED, and EXPANDING. HPB selection of FIXED, followed by a HPB then APB of a position, sets the circle center. A strobe is displayed from the circle center to the cursor position and the temporary strobe bearing/range display is enabled. A subsequent HPB then APB sets the circle radius, displays the circle, and removes the temporary strobe and temporary strobe bearing/range display. HPB selection of MOVING, followed by a HPB then APB of a position, sets the circle center. A strobe is displayed from the circle center to the cursor position and the temporary strobe bearing/range display is enabled. A subsequent HPB then APB sets the circle radius, displays the circle, removes the temporary strobe and temporary strobe bearing/range display, and prompts the display of the CDU menu page for the associated circle. HPB selection of SLAVED, followed by a HPB then APB of a PDI, sets the circle center reference. A strobe is displayed from the circle center to the cursor position and the temporary strobe bearing/range display is enabled. A subsequent HPB then APB of a position sets the circle center relative to the circle center reference. The strobe is then displayed from the designated center point to the cursor position. A subsequent HPB then APB sets the circle radius, displays the circle, and removes the temporary strobe and temporary strobe bearing/range display.
NFM219
SA
CDU ESM
CDU
NFM226
SA
CDU ESM - HPB selection of this icon prompts the display of the ESM control CDU page.
DATA LINK
Data Link - HPB selection of the data link control icon displays the submenu: ALERT> SQUAWK STRANGLE GRIDLOCK FILTER> CORR DECORR CONTROL> CONTROL> UPDATE> BURST Refer to Chapter 9 for a detailed description of data link system operation. Figure 3-21. Function Icons (Sheet 1 of 11)
NFM222
SA
3-31
ORIGINAL
ICON
DECLUTTER
FUNCTION Declutter - HPB selection of this icon displays the submenu: MARKERS, GRAPHICS, TRK HIST, ESM CONTACT, ASW CONTACT, ATTACK AIDS, and RESET. Active declutter selections are shown in green. Display rendering for the active selected PDIs is inhibited. HPB selection of an item toggles the declutter selection between active and inactive. HPB selection of RESET sets all of the active declutter selections to inactive. Delete - HPB selection of the delete icon allows the operator to designate a single PDI for deletion. HPB then APB actuation causes the selected PDI to be deleted from the database and any objects that are referenced to the selected PDI to be deleted as well. If the selected item is a system track with a track update mode of radar auto or radar priority auto, a radar delete command is issued for the associated system track. The following items can be deleted: System tracks, with the exception of tracks designated as emergency or force tell, or tracks with FLIR as sensor source Tentative Targets ASW contacts, with the exception of ASW contacts designated as emergency or force tell, or data link ASW contacts Markers, with the exception of markers designated as emergency or force tell, data link markers (including data link PIMs and waypoints), data link reference point, PIM designated as emergency or force tell, data link PIMs, circles, and vectors
NFM220
SA
DELETE
X
NFM213
SA
FLIR
FLIR - HPB selection of the FLIR control icon displays the submenu (Figure 3-46.): MODE > FOV > IMAGE > Refer to Flight Manual (SA4047-S70HN-NFM-000) for a detailed description of FLIR system operation.
NFM224
SA
FLIR CUED POINT
NFM206
SA
FLIR Cued Point - This function is used to point the FLIR turret LOS to a PDI, waypoint, or geographic position. HPB selection of the FLIR cued point icon, followed by a HPB then APB selection of a PDI, waypoint, or geographic position sets the FLIR cued point. The FLIR cued point symbol is displayed around the cued point object or position. Fly-To Point - This function is used to designate a selected tactical object or position as a tactical fly-to point. HPB selection of the fly-to point icon sets the fly-to point to the selected PDI or geographic position.
FLYTO POINT
NFM221
SA
Figure 3-21.
Function Icons (Sheet 2 of 11)
3-32
ORIGINAL
ICON
MODE SELECT
FUNCTION Mode Select - HPB selection of this icon displays the mode select menu: TACP, RADAR, ESM, and FLIR. The currently selected mission display mode is displayed in green. HPB of a mode sets the mission display mode to the selected value and initiates rendering of the associated display. Move - HPB selection of the MOVE icon causes the symbol template to move to the other side of the display.
SA
NFM208
SA
MOVE
NFM217
NEXT ESM PAGE
Next ESM Page - HPB selection of the next ESM page icon toggles between ESM emitter table page 1 and 2, allowing display of the first 16 emitters and the second 16 emitters.
NFM228
SA
PROMOTE TO TACTICAL PLOT
Promote To Tacplot - HPB selection of the promote to tactical plot icon followed by a HPB then APB of an ESM emitter track promotes or unpromotes the emitter track to the tactical plot display.
TACT
NFM227
SA
PROTECT/UNPROTECT
NFM225
SA
Protect/Unprotect - This function is used to protect or unprotect an ESM emitter on the ESM tabular display. A protected emitter is protected from being replaced by a new one with a higher priority provided the emitter remains active. The ESM system will drop a protected emitter from the tabular display and issue a drop track message for lack of detection. Note: Since the number of emitters in the ESM tabular display is limited, a newly detected emitter would be prevented from being reported from the ESM if the tabular display was filled with higher priority and/or protected emitters. HPB selection of the protect/unprotect icon, followed by a HPB then APB of an ESM emitter, toggles the protection status of that emitter between protected and unprotected. The emitter record number indicates a 9P9 next to each track number that is designated as protected. There is no limit to the number of protected emitters.
QUERY/AMPLIFY
NFM209
SA
Query/Amplify - When in tactical plot mode, HPB selection of the query/amplify icon, followed by a HPB then APB of a PDI, sends a CDU page request for the selected item. HPB selection of a cursor position sends the cursor latitude and longitude to the CDU scratchpad. When in ESM mode, HPB selection of the query/amplify icon, followed by a HPB then APB selection of an emitter number, amplifies the selected emitter beam. The next APB selection turns off amplification and sets the ESM emitter table page to the previous page. A MPB selection turns off amplification and sets the ESM emitter table page to previous page and displays the icon menu. Note: If simultaneous query/amplify functions are initiated at different MFDs the data displayed on an MFD may correspond to the others request. Figure 3-21. Function Icons (Sheet 3 of 11) 3-33
ORIGINAL
ICON
RADAR
FUNCTION Radar - HPB selection of the radar control icon prompts the display of the radar control CDU page and displays the submenu: MODE PROCESS DISPLAY ANTENNA Refer to Chapter 8 for a detailed description of radar system operation.
NFM223
SA
RECENTER
NFM210
SA
Recenter - If the mission display mode is tactical plot, HPB selection of this icon displays the submenu: HELO (default), CURSOR, LOP, and DLRP. The current tactical plot center status is displayed in green. HPB selection of one of these menu items sets the tactical plot center to that item. If HELO is selected, the center is set to current mission latitude and longitude. If CURSOR is selected, followed by a HPB then APB of a cursor position, the center is set to the cursor position. If LOP is selected, the center is set to the local operations plot (LOP) position. If DLRP is selected, the center is set to the data link reference point position. If the mission display mode is radar, HPB selection of the recenter icon followed by a HPB then APB selection of a PDI or cursor position, invokes the radar recenter command to center the radar display to the PDI or cursor position.
SCALE SELECT
NFM216
SA
Scale Select - This function allows the operator to change the tactical plot scale or the radar display range. In tactical plot mode, the scale represents the horizontal distance from one edge of the tactical display to the opposite edge of the tactical display. In radar mode, the scale represents the distance from the center of the display to the top edge of the display. HPB selection of the scale icon displays the submenu: INC DEC 256 (default) 128 64 32 16 8 4 The current scale text is displayed in green. In tactical plot mode, HPB selection of a scale number (4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256) sets the tactical plot scale to the selected value. HPB selection of scale INC or DEC, increments or decrements the tactical plot scale by one value. In radar mode, HPB selection of a scale number sets the radar display range to the selected value. Actuation of HPB upon selection of scale INC or DEC increments or decrements the associated radar display range by one value. Figure 3-21. Function Icons (Sheet 4 of 11)
3-34
ORIGINAL
ICON
FUNCTION Special Markers - HPB selection of the special markers icon displays a submenu with the following selections:
SPECIAL MARKERS
SPL
NFM215
SA
B C
NFM273
SA
HPB selection of a marker type other than datum, followed by a HPB then APB of a cursor position, generates a marker of the selected marker type at the cursor position, and displays the marker page associated with the selected marker. HPB selection of a datum marker type, followed by a HPB then APB of a cursor position, generates a datum type marker at the cursor position, and displays the marker page associated with the selected marker. HPB selection of a datum marker type, followed by a HPB then APB of a subsurface system track, generates a datum type marker at the track fix history position, and displays the marker page associated with the selected marker. Figure 3-21. Function Icons (Sheet 5 of 11)
3-35
ORIGINAL
ICON
STROBE
FUNCTION Strobe - The strobe function is available in the tactical plot and radar modes and functions the same for both modes. Radar strobe operation is only allowed in north up radar orientation mode. A second independent temporary strobe is used for creation of vectors, circles, patterns, and bearings. The strobe function is used to assist in the determination of range and bearing between a designated origin and designated end point or cursor position. A line (strobe) is displayed from the origin to the end point or cursor position. The strobe bearing/range display reflects the range and bearing of the current end point or cursor position from the designated origin. HPB selection of the strobe icon allows the operator to define either a tactical plot strobe or radar strobe. HPB then APB designates the cursor location or a PDI as the strobe origin point. A line from the origin point to the cursor is displayed and the strobe bearing/range display reflects the range and bearing of the current cursor position from the designated origin. Further slew control manipulation causes the displayed line to follow the cursor position, and the strobe bearing/range display to reflect the current cursor position with respect to the designated origin. The next HPB then APB designates the cursor position or PDI as the end point of the strobe. The origin and the end point of the strobe may be fixed locations (latitude/longitude) or dynamic PDIs. In the case that one or both of the points are moving, the strobe line is maintained between the two points at a 1 Hz rate. Reselection of the strobe symbol while the strobe is displayed de-activates the function and removes the strobe and the associated bearing and range readout from the display. Figure 3-21. Function Icons (Sheet 6 of 11)
NFM211
SA
3-36
ORIGINAL
ICON
TACTICAL AIDS
FUNCTION Tactical Aids - Selection of this icon displays the submenu: CPA, INTERCEPT, SONAR, and ATTACK > (Figure 3-47.). CPA - HPB selection of CPA deactivates any active CPA or INTERCEPT process and allows the operator to define a closest point of approach (CPA). HPB then APB of two tracks selects them for CPA calculation. Optionally, HPB then APB of one track then an APB, selects the track and own helicopter for CPA calculation. INTERCEPT - HPB selection of INTERCEPT deactivates any active CPA or INTERCEPT process and allows the operator to define an intercept. HPB then APB of two tracks selects them for intercept calculation. Optionally, HPB then APB of one track then an APB, selects the track and own helicopter for intercept calculation. SONAR - HPB selection of SONAR followed by a HPB then APB of a cursor position sets the sonar dip position to the cursor position and sets the tactical flight plan guidance mode to sonar dip. ATTACK > - HPB selection of ATTACK > displays the submenu: AGM-119, AGM-119 WPT, AGM-114, AGM-114 RMT, MK-46 >, and CANCEL. HPB selection of AGM-119 terminates the current attack, causes the left outboard (LOB) arm page to be displayed on the CDU, and allows the operator to perform an AGM-119 attack. APB sets the attack type to AGM-119 and the Penguin missile mode to manual. Optionally, HPB then APB of a track with a track update mode of radar auto or radar priority auto sets the attack target PDI and sets the attack type to AGM-119. HPB selection of AGM-119 WPT, followed by a HPB then APB of a cursor location, sets the Penguin missile mode to the designated waypoint and sets the Penguin designated waypoint location to the cursor location. HPB selection of AGM-114 terminates the current attack, causes the LOB arm page to be displayed on the CDU, and allows the operator to perform an AGM-114 attack. APB sets the attack type to AGM-114. Optionally, HPB then APB of a system track or link receive only (LRO) track, sets the attack target PDI to the selected system track or LRO track and sets the attack type to AGM-114. HPB selection of AGM-114 RMT, followed by a HPB then APB of a track, sets the PDI modifier FTN for laser designator to the designated track FTN. HPB selection of MK-46 displays the submenu: LOB, LIB (left inboard), and RIB (right inboard). Selection of one of the three weapon stations when the weapon type for the associated station is MK-46/1, MK-46/2, or MK-46/5, terminates the current attack, and causes the appropriate arm page to be displayed on the CDU. HPB then APB of a system track or LRO track sets the attack target PDI to the selected system track or LRO track and sets the attack type to MK-46. HPB selection of CANCEL sets the attack type to 9none9. Figure 3-21. Function Icons (Sheet 7 of 11) 3-37 ORIGINAL
NFM214
SA
ICON
TENTATIVE TARGET
FUNCTION Tentative Target - HPB selection of the tentative target icon displays the submenu: NEW and EXISTING (default). HPB selection of NEW allows the operator to generate a tentative target. HPB then APB actuation of a cursor position designates the cursor position to be used as the new tentative target position. Optionally, HPB then APB of an ESM contact or an ASW contact designates the tentative target source. (The source must be an ASW or ESM bearing.) New tentative targets are represented by the tentative target symbol and are assigned the next available force track number. HPB selection of EXISTING allows the operator to generate a tentative target. HPB then APB actuation of a cursor position designates the cursor position to be used as the new tentative target position. HPB then APB of an ESM contact or an ASW contact designates the tentative target source. HPB then APB of an existing tentative target creates a new tentative target at the new tentative target position with the FTN of the existing tentative target. Existing tentative targets are represented by the tentative target symbol but are associated with existing tentative targets and have the same FTNs. Figure 3-21. Function Icons (Sheet 8 of 11)
NFM207
SA
3-38
ORIGINAL
ICON
TRACK
FUNCTION Track - If the mission display mode is tactical plot (TACP), selection of the track icon displays the submenu: TRK DES, REPOSITION, UPDATE, and SIM TRK (Figure 3-47.). If the mission display mode is RADAR, selection of this symbol displays the submenu: TRK DES >, PRI TRK, and REPOSITION. These submenu functions are described below. Tactical Plot Track/TRK DES - If the mission display mode is TACP, HPB selection of TRK DES allows the operator to generate a new system track based on tentative targets. HPB then APB of a tentative target activates the track identification CDU page associated with the system track. Optionally, HPB then APB of additional tentative targets with the same FTN as the first tentative target may be designated. The function is completed by an additional APB. Upon designation of all associated tentative targets, the MP writes the designated tentative targets to the tactical/mission data base as the track fix history for the associated system track, deletes all tentative targets with the same FTN as the first tentative target hooked, and replaces the deleted tentative target symbols with the track symbol. Radar Track/TRK DES - If the mission display mode is radar, HPB selection of TRK DES displays the submenu: AIR FAST, AIR SLOW, and SURFACE. HPB selection of any of these TRK DES types, followed by a HPB then APB of a position issues a radar track designate command with associated track command type (AIR FAST, AIR SLOW, or SURFACE) and cursor position, initiates a new system track with the next available FTN, and activates the track identification CDU page associated with the system track. Radar Track/PRI TRK - HPB selection of PRI TRK allows the operator to designate a single radar system track as the radar priority auto track. HPB then APB of a system track that has a track update mode of radar auto or radar priority auto issues the radar priority track command. Track/REPOSITION - If the mission display mode is tactical plot or radar, HPB selection of REPOSITION allows the operator to reposition a track. HPB then APB of the system track to be repositioned followed by a HPB then APB of the new position sets the track position to the new position. Tactical Plot Track/UPDATE - HPB selection of UPDATE allows the operator to update a system track. HPB then APB of the system track to be updated followed by a HPB then APB actuation of a position adds the associated position to the track position history. Tactical Plot Track/SIM TRK - SIM TRK is only available in tactical plot display mode. HPB selection of SIM TRK allows the operator to generate a new system track at a designated location. HPB then APB of a cursor position activates the track identification CDU page for the system track, writes the designated position to the tactical/mission data base as the track fix history for the associated system track, and sets the track update mode to simulated (manual). Figure 3-21. Function Icons (Sheet 9 of 11)
NFM212
SA
3-39
ORIGINAL
ICON
VECTOR
FUNCTION Vector - This function allows the operator to define four types of vectors: FIXED, MOVING, SLAVE 1, and SLAVE 2. A FIXED vector is one where both ends of the vector are geographically fixed. A MOVING vector is a dynamic vector where the ends of the vector are defined and the course and speed at which the vector moves is set. A SLAVE 1 vector is a dynamic vector whose movement is slaved to an existing PDI. A SLAVE 2 vector is a dynamic vector whose start and end points are PDIs or operator designated points. HPB selection of the vector icon displays the submenu: FIXED, MOVING, SLAVE 1, SLAVE 2. These submenu functions are described below. Vector/FIXED - HPB selection of FIXED allows the operator to define a fixed vector. HPB then APB of a position sets the vector start point to the selected position and enables the temporary strobe bearing/range display. A strobe line will be displayed from the origin to the cursor position. HPB then APB of a position sets the vector end point to the selected position and removes the temporary strobe bearing/range display. Vector/MOVING - HPB selection of MOVING allows the operator to define a moving vector. HPB then APB of a position sets the vector start point to the selected position and enables the temporary strobe bearing/range display. A strobe line will be displayed from the origin to the cursor position. HPB then APB of a position sets the vector end point to the selected position, removes the temporary strobe bearing/range display, and prompts the display of the CDU menu for the associated vector. Vector/SLAVE 1 - HPB selection of SLAVE 1 allows the operator to define a vector slaved to one PDI. HPB then APB of a PDI designates the vector start point reference, causes a strobe line to be displayed from the designated PDI to the cursor, and enables the temporary strobe bearing/range display. HPB then APB of a position identifies the vector start point relative to the vector start point reference and re-designates the origin of the strobe line to the new vector origin. HPB then APB of a position identifies the vector end point relative to the vector end point reference, and disables the temporary strobe bearing/range display. Vector/SLAVE 2 - HPB selection of SLAVE 2 allows the operator to define a vector slaved to two PDIs. HPB then APB of a position or PDI sets the vector start point reference. A strobe is displayed from the origin point to the cursor position and the temporary strobe bearing/range display is enabled. HPB then APB of a position or PDI sets the vector end point reference, displays the vector, removes the temporary strobe, and removes the temporary strobe bearing/range display. Figure 3-21. Function Icons (Sheet 10 of 11)
NFM218
SA
3-40
ORIGINAL
ICON
VIEW
FUNCTION View - The view function within ESM and radar display modes is not the same. In ESM display mode, if view mode is active, HPB then APB selection of an emitter number causes additional information on that emitter to be displayed. In radar display mode, if view mode is active, HPB then APB selection of a system track that has a track update mode of radar auto or radar priority causes the selected radar system track to be verified. Maximum Value - HPB selection of this symbol sets the selected parameter to the maximum value.
NFM237
SA
MAXIMUM VALUE
NFM229
SA
COARSE INCREASE
Coarse Increase - HPB selection of this symbol increases the selected parameter by a large amount.
NFM230
SA
FINE INCREASE
Fine Increase - HPB selection of this symbol increases the selected parameter by a small amount.
NFM231
SA
FINE DECREASE
Fine Decrease - HPB selection of this symbol decreases the selected parameter by a small amount.
NFM232
SA
COARSE DECREASE
Coarse Decrease - HPB selection of this symbol decreases the selected parameter by a large amount.
NFM233
SA
MINIMUM VALUE
Minimum Value - HPB selection of this symbol sets the selected parameter to the minimum value.
NFM234
SA
DEFAULT
DEF
NFM235
SA
Default Value - HPB selection of this symbol sets the selected parameter to the default value.
Figure 3-21.
Function Icons (Sheet 11 of 11)
3-41
ORIGINAL
SYMBOL
UNKNOWN AIRBORNE CRAFT
MEANING Airborne craft, unknown threat affiliation. This symbol is displayed as yellow on black.
NFM175
SA
FRIENDLY/SPECIAL AIRBORNE CRAFT
Airborne craft, friendly or special threat affiliation. This symbol is displayed as cyan on black.
NFM176
SA
HOSTILE AIRBORNE CRAFT
Airborne craft, hostile threat affiliation. This symbol is displayed as red on black.
NFM177
SA
UNKNOWN SURFACE CRAFT
Surface craft, unknown threat affiliation. This symbol is displayed as yellow on black.
NFM178
SA
FRIENDLY/SPECIAL SURFACE CRAFT
Surface craft, friendly or special threat affiliation. This symbol is displayed as cyan on black.
NFM179
SA
HOSTILE SURFACE CRAFT
Surface craft, hostile threat affiliation. This symbol is displayed as red on black.
NFM180
SA
UNKNOWN/PENDING SUBSURFACE CRAFT
Sub-surface craft, unknown or pending threat affiliation. This symbol is displayed as yellow on black.
NFM181
SA
FRIENDLY SUBSURFACE CRAFT
Sub-surface craft, friendly threat affiliation. This symbol is displayed as cyan on black.
NFM182
SA
Figure 3-22.
Tactical Symbols (Sheet 1 of 4)
3-42
ORIGINAL
SYMBOL
HOSTILE SUBSURFACE CRAFT
MEANING Sub-surface craft, hostile threat affiliation. This symbol is displayed as red on black.
NFM183
SA
ASW FIX
ASW Fix - This marker type is generated via the special markers function.
NFM189
SA
ASW SEARCH CENTER
ASW Search Center - This marker type is generated via the special markers function.
NFM238
SA
BRIEF CONTACT
B C
NFM191
SA
Brief Contact - This marker type is generated via the special markers function.
CHARTED WRECK
Charted Wreck - This marker type is generated via the special markers function.
NFM236
SA
CLOSEST POINT OF APPROACH
NFM194
SA
Closest Point of Approach (CPA) - This symbol is displayed at the CPA of each of the two tracks (track 1 and track 2) selected for CPA/Intercept calculation. Typically, track 1 is own helicopter. The CPA for two objects is defined as the location on each respective track where the tracks are closest to each other given their present speed and direction. Data Link Reference Point (DLRP) - This symbol indicates the fixed geographic reference point to which all positional information is related for tactical data exchange.
DATA LINK REFERENCE POINT
D
NFM198
SA
DATUM
Datum - This marker type is used to identify any location on the tactical display. This marker type is generated via the special markers function.
NFM201
SA
Figure 3-22.
3-43
ORIGINAL
SYMBOL
ESM CONTACT FIX
MEANING ESM Contact (Fix) - This symbol is displayed at the ESM emitter position. For bearing ESM emitter types with ESM emitter tactical display status set to auto-promoted or manually promoted, a bearing line is drawn from the ESM emitter position to the extent of the display.
NFM190
SA
INTERCEPT
NFM195
SA
Intercept - This symbol is displayed at the intercept point of the two tracks (track 1 and track 2) selected for CPA/Intercept calculation. Typically, track 1 is own helicopter. An intercept point is defined as the location on the projected track of track 2, where the two tracks meet if track 1 proceeds directly to that point while maintaining its present speed. Man in Water - This marker type is generated via the special markers function.
MAN IN WATER
NFM196
SA
MINE
Mine - This marker type is generated via the special markers function.
NFM202
SA
OWN HELO
NFM188
SA
Own Helicopter - This symbol is displayed at the current own helicopter position. The own helicopter leader indicates course and speed. The length of track leaders is proportional to the speed. The scaling of the leader is 200 knots per inch. Penguin Missile Waypoint.
PENGUIN MISSILE WAYPOINT
NFM274
SA
POSITION AND INTENDED MOVEMENT
Position and Intended Movement (PIM) - This marker type is generated via the special markers function.
NFM199
SA
REFERENCE POINT
Reference Point - This marker type is generated via the special markers function.
NFM200
SA
Figure 3-22.
3-44
ORIGINAL
SYMBOL
RENDEZVOUS
MEANING Rendezvous - This marker type is generated via the special markers function.
NFM204
SA
RESCUE POINT
R
NFM205
SA
Rescue Point - This marker type is generated via the special markers function.
SEARCH POINT
Search Point - This marker type is generated via the special markers function.
NFM203
SA
SINKER
Sinker - This marker type is generated via the special markers function.
NFM192
SA
TRACK POSITION HISTORY

NFM184
SA
Track Position History - This symbol is used to display the position history of a system track. The position history consists of the ten most recent results of the position updates. Waypoint - This symbol is an FMS flight plan waypoint and is displayed at the FMS flight plan waypoint position.
WAYPOINT
IDEN
NFM193
SA
WEAPONS RELEASE POINT

NFM197
SA
Weapons Release Point - This symbol is displayed at the release point of a MK-46 torpedo, AGM-114 Hellfire missile, or AGM-119 Penguin missile.
Figure 3-22.
3-45
ORIGINAL
SYMBOL
AIRPORT
USAGE Airport - Used for airport type waypoints.
NFM147
SA
CIRCLE FIX
NFM154
SA
Circle Fix - Used for circle fix waypoints.
CRP/SAR FIX
NFM155
SA
CRP/SAR Fix - Used for closed random pattern (CRP) and SAR pattern fix waypoints. Figure Eight Fix - Used for figure eight fix waypoints. Holding Pattern - Used for holding pattern fix waypoints. When a holding pattern symbol is displayed, it is oriented at an angle equal to the corresponding FMS holding pattern azimuth value. Intersection - Used for intercept or PCA waypoints. NDB - Used for NDB (non-directional beacon) waypoints. Racetrack Fix - Used for racetrack fix waypoints.
FIG. 8 FIX
NFM153
SA
HOLDING PATTERN
NFM151
SA
INTERSECTION
NFM148
SA
NDB
NFM146
SA
RACETRACK FIX
NFM152
SA
RUNWAY
NFM149
SA
Runway - Used for runways or missed approach points (MAP). The runway symbol is rotated to reflect the airport runway azimuth. When a runway symbol is displayed, the runway symbol is oriented at an angle equal to the corresponding FMS runway azimuth value.
Figure 3-23.
Pattern and Waypoint Symbols (Sheet 1 of 2)
3-46
ORIGINAL
SYMBOL
CRP/SAR
NFM150
SA
USAGE Search Point - Used for CRP or SAR pattern points other than the CRP fix or SAR commence search point (CSP). VOR - Used for VOR waypoints.
VOR
NFM144
SA
VORTAC
NFM145
SA
VORTAC - Used for TACAN, VOR/DME, or VOR/TAC waypoints.
Figure 3-23.
Pattern and Waypoint Symbols (Sheet 2 of 2)
OBJECT MODIFIER ! * 0-9 A D E F L M N P R S VR XXXXX
DESCRIPTION Force Tell To Be Transmitted Radar Track Quality Acoustic Contact Data Link ESM Contact FLIR Laser Designator Emergency (Mayday) Track Lost Radar Priority Auto Radar Auto Simulated Vector Identifier Track FTN
USAGE Contacts, Markers, Waypoints, PIM, System Tracks, LRO Tracks Contacts, Markers, Waypoints, PIM, System Tracks, LRO Tracks System Tracks ASW Contacts LRO Tracks, ASW Contacts, ESM Contacts, Markers, PIM Contacts LRO Tracks, System Tracks System Tracks, LRO Tracks Contacts, Markers, Waypoints, PIM, System Tracks, LRO Tracks System Tracks LRO Tracks, System Tracks LRO Tracks, System Tracks LRO Tracks, System Tracks, ASW Contacts, ESM Contacts, Markers, PIM Vector LRO Tracks, System Tracks Figure 3-24. Object Modifiers
3-47
ORIGINAL
SPL
DLRP
256
XXX / YYY.Ynm
ALERT & ANNUNCIATION TACP 23:59:23
XXX / YYY.Ynm
XXX / YYY.Ynm
FQ0402
SA
Figure 3-25.
Tactical Plot Top Level Symbol Menu
3-48
ORIGINAL
AIRCRAFT
HEADING GND SPEED ALTITUDE TARGET RANGE BEARING COURSE SPEED QUALITY
### DEG ### KTS #### FT
###.# ### ### ### #
NM DEG DEG KTS
RADAR STATUS RADAR RANGE DISPLAY SCALE RANGE RINGS 100 NM 100 NM 50 NM
CONTROLS: TRACK FA CFAR SCAN INTG FAULTS
OFF OFF OFF
DLRP
ALERT & ANNUNCIATION RADAR 23:59:23
FQ0403
SA
Figure 3-26.
Radar Top Level Symbol Menu
3-49
ORIGINAL
LASING ALERT BOX
FLIR STATUS
000
DETECTOR FOV POLARITY SERVO STATUS DISPLAY PROCESSING
COOLING WIDE WHT SLEW 78/98
30 LP LASE RNG
9/9/99 15:35:59
ATTACK PAGE
MODE [DIR] NEXT MSL RESET LOHR CIG [>25] CCM [ON] DES [AUT] .X TRK [AUTO]
MISSLE SEEKER
60
LAUNCH MODE SKIP RESET LAUNCHER CLOUD CEILING DESIGNATE MODE AVT MODE WEAPON STATUS
+02
WPN ARM
ELEVATION GAI MISSLE SEEKER STATUS

120 READY TO LASE LASER ARMED TOF 18 UOB HNG LIB UIB
TRACK GATE
ALERT & ANNUNCIATION FLIR 23:59:23
FQ0404
SA
Figure 3-27.
FLIR Top Level Symbol Menu
3-50
ORIGINAL
MAIN LOS MODE STOW SCAN REL SCAN REL SCAN REL SCAN REL SCAN TRUE SCAN TRUE SCAN TRUE SCAN TRUE BORESIGHT GRAY SCALE OFF ON TRACK MODE POINT AREA AUTO
SW VXX.YY GAIN / LEVEL LAP LINEAR RAYLIEGH MANUAL XXX / XXX
15 15 30 30 15 15 30 30
SLOW FAST SLOW FAST SLOW FAST SLOW FAST
NULL SERVO DRIFT SELECT NULL DRIFT
5
[LASER CODE] X X X X VIDEO BEHIND MENU OFF ON LASER SELECT FIRST PULSE LAST PULSE
10
MISSILES ON
6
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
7
FQ0386
SA
INDEX NUMBER 1 LOS Mode Stow Scan Boresight 2 3
INDICATION Group title.
FUNCTION
Commands gimbals to standby position and shuts down video. Commands gimbals to perform predefined scan patterns. Commands FLIR to perform FLIR/LASER boresight. Software Version. Group title. Perform local area processing (LAP) on display video to internally adjust the video signal dynamic range according to the LAP algorithm. Use linear transform for display video processing. Use Rayliegh transform for display video processing. Use commanded gain and level for display video processing. Group title. Commands the FLIR to remove the electrical offsets from the rate feedback.
Software Version Gain/Level LAP
Linear Rayliegh Manual 4 Null Servo Drift Select Null Drift
Figure 3-28.
FLIR Main Menu (Sheet 1 of 2) 3-51
ORIGINAL
INDEX NUMBER 5
INDICATION Video behind Menu on/off Group title.
FUNCTION
Enables/disables the video when the menus are displayed. Commands the LASER receiver to process the first or last pulse returned. Group title. Current LASER Code. Indicates if the missile power status is on. Group title. Operate tracker in point for acquire. Switch to correlation if acquire is not successful. Operate tracker in edge centroid mode to track a point target. Operate the tracker in correlation mode to track an area. Group title. Turns on or off the grayscale in the FLIR output video. Used for optimizing the display brightness and contrast. Figure 3-28. FLIR Main Menu (Sheet 2 of 2)
6 7
LASER Select LASER Code XXXX
8 9
Missile Power Track Mode Auto Point Area
10
Grayscale on/off
3-52
ORIGINAL
1 15
80
14
COOLING WIDE WHT SLEW 78 / 98
41 LASING RNG MSLS ON
13
7
60
12
0 20
8
N40 O25 55" E135 O55 19" BRG 045 O RNG 12, 062Y
11 10
120 READY TO LASE LASER ARMED
9
FQ0384A
SA
INDEX NUMBER 1 2
INDICATION LASER Mask Azimuth GAI Position
FUNCTION Indicates the extent of the LASER mask area by its position on the scale. Indication of the FLIR LOS. Position of carat indicates FLIR LOS in the FOR. Number indicates bearing of FLIR LOS in true or magnetic. Displays the current aircraft heading in true or magnetic. Displays the current heading reference. Indication of FLIR field of regard. Indicator represents +/180 degrees. Displays missile power status from armament controller receiver/transmitter (ACRT) if Hellfire is enabled. Indicates tracker gate position. The symbol has four corners. The corners flash when tracker indicates coast. The automatic video tracker (AVT) point track corners hug the target. AVT area track corners indicate the extent of correlation area.
3 4 5 6 7
Aircraft Heading Heading Reference Azimuth Gimbal, Angle Indicator, Gimbal Angle Indicator (GAI) Scale Missile Power Track Gate
Figure 3-29.
FLIR Navigation Display (Sheet 1 of 2)
3-53
ORIGINAL
INDEX NUMBER 8
INDICATION Target Data - BRG Target Data - RNG
FUNCTION Indicates the true bearing of the LOS. Indicates the slant range to the LOS intersection with the earth. The indication assumes spherical earth (sea level if barometric altitude). Provides FLIR estimate of target latitude. Provides FLIR estimate of target longitude. Defines the limits of the next smallest FOV. Appears in wide FOV (WFOV), medium FOV (MFOV), narrow FOV (NFOV), and 2X views. In 1:1 aspect ratio indicates extents of center 511 pixels of FLIR video. Indicates LRD status. Displays FLIR LRD boresight prompts. Indication of FLIR LOS in the field of regard. Indication represents + 60 to -105 when mounted ball down and +105 to -60 when mounted ball up. Indicates optical LOS of the FLIR. Indicates detector cool down status. Indicates the current focal FOV and zoom status. Indicates current display polarity (white hot or black hot). Indicates the present LOS pointing mode and gimbal status. Indicates the display processing mode or the manual gain and level. Lasing Alerts.
Target Data - Latitude Target Data - Longitude 9 FOV Limit
10 11 12
Laser Rangefinder/Designator (LRD) Status FLIR-LASER Boresight Status Elevation GAI
13 14
LOS Reticle FLIR Status - Detector FLIR Status - FOV FLIR Status - Polarity FLIR Status - Servo Status FLIR Status - Display Processing
15
Alert Box Figure 3-29.
FLIR Navigation Display (Sheet 2 of 2)
3-54
ORIGINAL
80 41 COOILNG WIDE WHT SLEW 78 / 98
2
12 / 24 / 97 15:35:58
LASING RNG MODE (DIR NEXT MSL RESET LCHR CIG [>25] DES [AUT] :X TRK [AUTO] WPN ARM
60
0 20
120 READY TO LASE LASER ARMED
TOF 18 UOB HNG LIB UIB
BRG 045O RNG 12, 062Y O N40 25 55" E135O55 19"
ATO ENABLE SO ENABLE
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
WRA X FAIL WRA X OVHT
FQ0385
SA
INDEX NUMBER 1 2
INDICATION Missile Seeker Attack Page Tableau - Launch Mode Attack Page Tableau - Skip Attack Page Tableau - Reset Launcher Attack Page Tableau - Cloud Ceiling Attack Page Tableau - Designate Mode Attack Page Tableau - AVT Mode
FUNCTION Indicates current LOS of missile seeker in wide and medium view only. Missile launch mode. Control to skip the next missile. Control to reset the missile launcher. Sets the cloud ceiling for missile launch. Control for missile to set LASER designation method. Also contains the LASER code letter. Control for AVT mode. Indicates weapon and ACRT status. Allows the mission computer to display status messages. Indicates the rail position for each missile symbol. Indicates current status for each missile.
3 4 5 6
Weapon Status Mission Computer (MC) Alert Field Missile Rail Position Missile Status
Figure 3-30.
FLIR Attack Page
3-55
ORIGINAL
?
CDU
P
TACP
EMIT # / BEAM # TIME LAST ID 1: ID 2: ID 3: ID 4: ID 5: AOA AZ ERR RANGE RANGE ERR (%)
FREQ MIN (GHz) FREQ MAX (GHz) PULSE WD (msec) PRI TYPE PRI (msec) PRI DEV (%) STAGGER FRAME RT (msec) SCAN (sec) AMP (DBM) LOCATION
1 OF 2 EMIT FTN PRIORITY BEAM ID FREQ (GHz) PRF (KHz) AOA AZ ERR
PFD
ND
ESM
23:59:32
RCL
EICAS
TAC
FQ0405
SA
Figure 3-31.
ESM Top Level Symbol Menu
3-56
ORIGINAL
OVERRIDE DISPLAY FIELD
FAULT DISPLAY FIELD
OPERATIONAL STATUS DISPLAY FIELD
SIU SOFTWARE VERSION CIPS SOFTWARE VERSION
IDLE MODE SIU SOFTWARE VERSION: XX.X CIPS SOFTWARE VERSION: XX.X DSP SOFTWARE VERSION: XX.X PBIT: PASSED CBIT: NO FAULT DEFAULTS: LOADED PROCSG: INITIALIZED
HOVER FORE
HOVER METER
DSP SOFTWARE VERSION

PBIT STATUS CBIT STATUS SYSTEM DEFAULTS STATUS PROCSG STATUS SU DEPTH INDICATOR
LEFT
RIGHT
CABLE ANGLE LOCATION
AFT DEPTH CPO
CABLE PAYOUT INDICATOR SU DEPTH MAXIMUM INDICATOR
0550
0610
CABLE PAYOUT MAXIMUM INDICATOR CABLE PAYOUT VALUE BOTTOM PROXIMITY INDICATOR BOTTOM FAULT INDICATOR
SU:SUBMERGED RCVR: OUT PROJ: OUT

BTM PROX 86.4 FT BTM FAULT
SU DEPTH VALUE
SU STATUS INDICATOR
PROJECTOR DEPLOYMENT STATUS INDICATOR
RECEIVER DEPLOYMENT STATUS INDICATOR
FG1680
SA
Figure 3-32.
Idle Mode Display (Sheet 1 of 2)
3-57
ORIGINAL
ITEM TEXT DISPLAY AREA
FUNCTION Displays messages related to sonar set configuration (SIU software version, CIPS software version, and DSP software version), power-on BIT status (PASSED, FAULT), continuous BIT status (NO FAULT, FAULT), system defaults status (NOT LOADED, LOADED), and PROCSG status (NOT INITIALIZED, INITIALIZED). Indications of cable payout and cable angle, submersible unit (SU) status and bottom faults. An indication of cable angle deviation from vertical by indicating longitudinal and lateral cable displacement. A visual indication of cable payout in relation to the cable payout maximum indicator. A visual indication of SU depth in relation to the SU depth maximum indicator. A visual indication of submersible unit maximum depth in relation to the SU depth indicator. Provides a numeric indication of cable payout in feet. A visual indication of cable payout maximum in relation to the cable payout indicator. A numeric indication of cable payout in feet. Displays in the event of a bottom proximity condition during SU deployment and provides a numeric indication of SU height in feet above the bottom. Displays in the event of a bottom fault during SU deployment. Indicates current SU projector deployment status. Displays IN, OUT, TRANS (in transit), or NOT AVAILABLE. Indicates current SU receiver deployment status. Displays IN, OUT, TRANS (in transit), or NOT AVAILABLE. Indicates current SU deployment status. Displays SUBMERGED or NOTSUB (not submerged). Figure 3-32. Idle Mode Display (Sheet 2 of 2)
HOVER METER CABLE ANGLE LOCATION CABLE PAYOUT INDICATOR SU DEPTH INDICATOR SU DEPTH MAXIMUM INDICATOR SU DEPTH VALUE CABLE PAYOUT MAXIMUM INDICATOR CABLE PAYOUT VALUE BOTTOM PROXIMITY INDICATOR
BOTTOM FAULT INDICATOR PROJECTOR DEPLOYMENT STATUS INDICATOR RECEIVER DEPLOYMENT STATUS INDICATOR SU STATUS INDICATOR
3-58
ORIGINAL
DOPPLER SCALE
OVERRIDE INDICATORS 16 8 4 2 1 0.5
FAULT INDICATORS 0 0.5 1 2 4
OP PARAM INDICATORS 8 16 25.0

1.
DISPLAY INTEGRATION ICONS

PRELIMINARY CONTACT TOTE (PCT) SIDE DATA PANEL
ALL BEAM DOPPLER RANGE DISPLAY
6 2 5
CONTACT ICONS
20.0
7 15.0
3
PCT REFERENCE INDICATORS
4 10.0
8 5.00
BRG: XXX.X RNG:XX.X
DOP:XX.X CL AMP: XX.X
0.00 PNG: XX OF YY
2. BRG: XXXvXX.X RNG: XXX DOP: XX OPN AMP: XXX 3. BRG: XXXvXX.X RNG: XXX DOP: XX OPN AMP: XXX 4. BRG: XXXvXX.X RNG: XXX DOP: XX OPN AMP: XXX 5. BRG: XXX RNG:XXX FRQ: XXXX.X AMP: XXX 6. BRG: XXXvXX.X RNG: XXX DOP: XX CLS AMP: XXX 7. BRG: XXXvXX.X RNG: XXX DOP: XX OPN AMP: XXX OLD 8. BRG: XXXvXX.X RNG: XXX DOP: XX OPN AMP: XXX
BEARING INDICATOR
RANGE INDICATOR
DOPPLER INDICATOR
POINT CURSOR
AMPLITUDE INDICATOR
PING STATUS INDICATOR
RANGE SCALE
FG1681
SA
Figure 3-33.
Surveillance (SURV) Display (Sheet 1 of 3)
3-59
ORIGINAL
ITEM ALL BEAM DOPPLER RANGE DISPLAY
FUNCTION A main data panel showing B-scan type display of active sonar data, with range presented across the vertical axis, and Doppler displayed across the horizontal axis. Echo returns of closing Doppler are plotted to the right of the centerline; returns with opening Doppler are plotted to the left of the centerline. Doppler frequency value converted to knots. Doppler scale division is operator selectable from -6 to 6 kts, -16 to 16 kts, or -36 to 36 kts, in twelve equally-spaced increments (six open, six closed). A side panel display, that provides a means of monitoring and maintaining contact data for up to eight contacts. When a contact is 9hooked9, data associated with the contact is displayed in the PCT, and a Reference Indicator is displayed next to the associated contact on the all beam Doppler range (ABDR) display. Data shown in the PCT display includes bearing (and variance), range, Doppler count (and variance for display integration) and amplitude. Doppler direction is indicated by the annotations OP (opening) and CL (closing). PCT data is updated on each ping. On updates, existing data is appended with NOC (no correlation) or OLD (old data) when these conditions exist. The PCT display can be operator selected ON or OFF in the SURV display mode. Contact range, from dip-point, in nm or kyds, from zero to the maximum range in five equally spaced increments, for the currently selected range scale. An indication of the current ping and the total number of pings selected from 0 to 31, in the current ping sequence. If there is no ping sequence currently in operation, the ping status indicator is blanked. An indication of the normalized amplitude, from 0 to 99.9, of a 9hooked9 echo. If no echo has been 9hooked9, the amplitude indicator is blanked. Provides a means of 9hooking9 contacts of interest or selecting audio beams of interest. An indication of the Doppler, from 36.0 OP (opening) to 36.0 CL (closing) of a 9hooked9 echo. If no echo has been 9hooked9, the Doppler indicator is blank. An indication of the range location, from 0.0 to 59.9 nm (or 0.0 to 119.8 kyds), of a 9hooked9 echo. If no echo has been 9hooked9, the range indicator is blank. An indication of the bearing location, from 0.0 to 359.9 degrees, of a 9hooked9 echo. If no echo has been 9hooked9, the bearing indicator is blank. Each number corresponds to the associated listing in the PCT display, for 9hooked9 contacts. Surveillance (SURV) Display (Sheet 2 of 3)
DOPPLER SCALE
PRELIMINARY CONTACT TOTE (PCT) DISPLAY
RANGE SCALE
AMPLITUDE INDICATOR
POINT CURSOR DOPPLER INDICATOR
RANGE INDICATOR
BEARING INDICATOR
Figure 3-33.
3-60
ORIGINAL
ITEM CONTACT ICONS
FUNCTION Visual indications of sonar contacts. Contact icons are positioned such that their center points are located at the pixel which most closely maps to the actual range and bearing for the selected display range scale. Shape, size intensity and color coding of contact icons correspond to the intensity of acoustic energy returned from the target. An indication of sonar contacts in display integration mode. The color of display integration icons correspond to the number of echos returned from the target. Surveillance (SURV) Display (Sheet 3 of 3)
Figure 3-33.
3-61
ORIGINAL
AUDIO BEAM INDICATOR
BEARING SCALE
OVERRIDE INDICATORS 180 270
FAULT INDICATORS 000 6 090
OP PARAM INDICATORS 180 6 25.0 3 6 0 3 6
DOPPLER SCALE
BEARING RANGE (BR) DISPLAY
20.0 5 5
DOPPLER RANGE DISPLAY
15.0
CONTACT ICONS
3 10.0
2
5.00
BRG: XXX.X RNG:XX.X
DOP:XX.X CL AMP: XX.X
0.00 PNG: XX OF YY
BEARING INDICATOR
RANGE INDICATOR
DOPPLER INDICATOR
AMPLITUDE INDICATOR
POINT CURSOR
RANGE SCALE
FG1682
SA
Figure 3-34.
Detect and Classify Display (Sheet 1 of 3)
3-62
ORIGINAL
ITEM BEARING RANGE (BR) DISPLAY
FUNCTION B-Scan type main display depicting active sonar data, with bearing presented across the horizontal axis, and range presented across the vertical axis. The display presents sonar contacts from CW, FM, Display Integrated (PTP) CW or FM, and FM Multi-Pulse (FMMP) correlation data. Contact bearing, from 0.0 to 359.9 degrees, in twelve equally-spaced increments, spanning from 180 degrees to 180 degrees. Doppler frequency value converted to knots. Doppler scale division is operator-selectable from -6 to 6 knots, -16 to 16 knots, or -36 to 36 knots, in twelve equally-spaced increments (six open, six close). Provides visual indications of sonar contacts in display integration mode. The color of display integration icons correspond to the number of echos returned from the target. B-Scan type side data panel display depicting active sonar data, with Doppler expansion rate (converted to knots) presented across the horizontal axis, and range presented across the vertical axis. Echo returns of closing Doppler are plotted to the right of the centerline; returns with opening Doppler are plotted to the left of the centerline. Contact range, from dip-point, in nm or kyds, from zero to the maximum range, in five equally spaced increments, for the currently selected range scale. An indication of the current ping and the total number of pings selected from 0 to 31, in the current ping sequence. If there is no ping sequence currently in operation, the ping status indicator is blanked. Provides a means of 9hooking9 contacts of interest, and of positioning the audio beam indicator. An indication of the normalized amplitude, from 0 to 99.9, of a 9hooked9 echo. If no echo has been 9hooked9, the amplitude indicator is blanked. An indication of the Doppler, from 36.0 OP (opening) to 36.0 CL (closing) of a 9hooked9 echo. If no echo has been 9hooked9, the Doppler indicator is blanked. An indication of the range location, from 0.0 to 59.9 nm (or 0.0 to 119.8 kyds), of a 9hooked9 echo. If no echo has been 9hooked9, the range indicator is blank. Detect and Classify Display (Sheet 2 of 3)
BEARING SCALE DOPPLER SCALE
DOPPLER RANGE DISPLAY
RANGE SCALE
POINT CURSOR AMPLITUDE INDICATOR
DOPPLER INDICATOR
RANGE INDICATOR
Figure 3-34.
3-63
ORIGINAL
ITEM BEARING INDICATOR
FUNCTION An indication of the bearing location, from 0.0 to 359.9 degrees, of a 9hooked9 echo. If no echo has been 9hooked9, the bearing indicator is blank. Provides an indication of the 9hooked9 audio beam. Echoes within the 9hooked9 beam are displayed on the DR display when selected. A side panel display, that provides a means of monitoring and maintaining contact data for up to eight contacts. When a contact is 9hooked9, data associated with the contact is displayed in the PCT, and a Reference Indicator is displayed next to the associated contact on the all beam Doppler range (ABDR) display. Data shown in the PCT display includes bearing (and variance), range, Doppler count (and variance for display integration) and amplitude. Doppler direction is indicated by the annotations OP (opening) and CL (closing). PCT data is updated on each ping. On updates, existing data is appended with NOC (no correlation) or OLD (old data) when these conditions exist. The PCT display can be operator selected ON or OFF in the SURV display mode. Visual indications of sonar contacts. Contact icons are positioned such that their center points are located at the pixel which most closely maps to the actual range and bearing for the selected display range scale. Shape, size intensity and color coding of contact icons correspond to the intensity of acoustic energy returned from the target. Each number corresponds to the associated listing in the PCT display, for 9hooked9 contacts. Detect and Classify Display (Sheet 3 of 3)
AUDIO BEAM INDICATOR PRELIMINARY CONTACT TOTE (PCT) DISPLAY
CONTACT ICONS
Figure 3-34.
3-64
ORIGINAL
0.12NM
34.5NM
+0.12NM
1.0NM
34.5NM
+1.0NM 0.75NM
LEFT BEAM
FM DIVIDERS 34.5NM VERTICAL CURSOR
FM DIVIDERS
CENTER (HOOKED) BEAM RIGHT BEAM
VERTICAL CURSOR +0.75NM
VERTICAL CURSOR
POINT CURSOR
COR12: 88.5 COR13: 78.3 COR23: 60.5 CDOP: NA EXTNT: NA
POINT CURSOR AFM MINITOTE
POINT CURSOR COR12: 88.5 COR13: 78.3 COR23: 60.5 CDOP: NA EXTNT: NA AFM MINITOTE
AFM MINITOTE
CDOP: NA EXTNT:
SINGLE PULSE FM
FM ZOOM NOT AVAILABLE FM MP DIVIDERS NOT AVAILABLE EXTENT COMPUTE AVAILABLE DOPPLER COMPUTE NOT AVAILABLE
MUTLIPULSE FM
FM ZOOM DISABLED FM MP DIVIDERS ENABLED COMPUTE INDICES NOT AVAILABLE
MUTLIPULSE FM
FM ZOOM ENABLED FM MP DIVIDERS ENABLED COMPUTE INDICES NOT AVAILABLE
0.12NM
34.5NM
+0.12NM
1.0NM
34.5NM
+1.0NM 0.75NM
LEFT BEAM
COMPUTE INDICES 34.5NM
CENTER (HOOKED) BEAM RIGHT BEAM
+0.75NM
COMPUTE INDICES
POINT CURSOR
POINT CURSOR COR12: NA COR13: NA COR23: NA
POINT CURSOR
CDOP: NA EXTNT:
AFM MINITOTE
CDOP: EXTNT:
AFM MINITOTE
CDOP: EXTNT:
AFM MINITOTE
SINGLE PULSE FM
FM ZOOM NOT AVAILABLE FM DIVIDERS NOT AVAILABLE EXTENT COMPUTE AVAILABLE DOPPLER COMPUTE NOT AVAILABLE
MUTLIPULSE FM
FM ZOOM DISABLED FM DIVIDERS DISABLED EXTENT COMPUTE AVAILABLE DOPPLER COMPUTE AVAILABLE
MUTLIPULSE FM
FM ZOOM ENABLED FM DIVIDERS DISABLED EXTENT COMPUTE AVAILABLE DOPPLER COMPUTE AVAILABLE
FG1683
SA
Figure 3-35.
A-Scan FM (AFM) Display (Sheet 1 of 2)
3-65
ORIGINAL
ITEM LEFT BEAM CENTER (HOOKED) BEAM RIGHT BEAM POINT CURSOR VERTICAL CURSOR FM DIVIDERS
FUNCTION Displays FM data for the left beam immediately adjacent to the FM display (hooked beam). Displays FM data from the hooked beam at the center of the range gate cursors. Displays FM data for the right beam immediately adjacent to the FM display (hooked beam). Provides a means of positioning the vertical cursor, FM dividers and compute indices. Used in conjunction with the point cursor to obtain measurements of specific lines of amplitude on the AFM display. Used in conjunction with the point cursor to incrementally move the beam and range gated data field examine data from other areas. Available only in the FMMP mode by ASO selection, FM dividers are disabled when compute indices are enabled. Used in conjunction with the point cursor to perform Doppler and target extent computations. If only two points within the AFM display are selected, EXTNT (target extend) is calculated; if three points within the AFM display are selected CDOP (computed Doppler) is calculated. CDOP calculation is available only in the FMMP mode. Displays correlated FM content data (FM Dividers enabled) or Computed Doppler/Target Extent calculations (Compute Indices enabled). Figure 3-35. A-Scan FM (AFM) Display (Sheet 2 of 2)
COMPUTE INDICES
AFM MINI-TOTE
3-66
ORIGINAL
NARROWBAND DATA
FINE BEARING COLOR LEGEND
COLOR CODED FINE BEARING
BFI BEARING SCALE BEARING FREQUENCY INDICATOR (BFI) DISPLAY BFI BEARING CURSOR BFI FREQUENCY CURSOR
BFI / NB ALI FREQUENCY SCALE
FAULT INDICATOR 180
OVERRIDE INDICATOR 090
OP PARAM INDICATOR AMP / FREQUENCY 100 180 0 50 2000
NB ALI AMPLITUDE SCALE
BEARING / FREQUENCY 270 000
1760
ASCAN NB ALI OR DEMON ALI (OP SELECT)
1520
1
1280
BEARING CORRELATION
HARMONIC DIVIDERS
1040
BTR TIME CURSOR
BTR BEARING SCALE
NARROW BAND (NB) ENERGY
180
270
000
090
180 800 20 MIN

15 10 5
NB ALI AMPLITUDE INDICATOR NB ALI BEARING INDICATOR NB ALI FREQUENCY INDICATOR NB ALI HARMONIC DIVIDER FUNDAMENTAL INDICATOR
BEAM SELECT FOR AMP / FREQ
AMPA: XX BRGA: XXX.X FRQA: XXXX.X DIV FUN: XXXX.X
BEARING TIME RECORD (BTR) DISPLAY
BRG: 55.2
FRQ: XXXX.X
TIME: 12.4
0 MIN AMPF: 83.8 AMPT: 35
BEARING INDICATOR
FREQUENCY INDICATOR
TIME INDICATOR
POINT CURSOR
AMPLITUDE TIME / BEARING CROSSING INDICATOR
BTR TIME SCALE
AMPLITUDE FREQUENCY / BEARING CROSSING INDICATOR
FG1684
SA
Figure 3-36.
Passive Combination Display (Sheet 1 of 4)
3-67
ORIGINAL
ITEM BEARING FREQUENCY INDICATOR (BFI) DISPLAY BFI BEARING SCALE A-SCAN NB ALI/DEMON ALI
FUNCTION B-scan type main display depicting broadband (BB) and narrowband (NB) acoustic data, with bearing presented across the horizontal axis, and frequency presented across the vertical axis. Contact bearing, from 0.0 to 359.9 degrees, in twelve equally-spaced increments, spanning from 180 degrees to 180 degrees. A-SCAN NB ALI. A-scan type side data panel display showing ALI data for a single audio beam selected from the BFI or BTR display, with amplitude presented across the horizontal axis, and frequency presented across the vertical axis. DEMON ALI. A-scan type side data panel display showing ALI data for a single audio beam selected from either the BFI display or the BTR display with amplitude presented across the horizontal axis, and frequency (representing the entire passive frequency band width 800 hertz to 2000 hertz) presented across the vertical axis.
BFI HARMONIC DIVIDERS
Operator selectable indicators that determine if an ALI line harmonically relates to other displayed data lines. Harmonic dividers are shown only when selected by the ASO. Provides a means of positioning the bearing cursor and frequency cursor or bearing cursor and time cursor. An indication of the time location (pixel time) from 0.0 to 19.9 minutes, of the time cursor on the BTR display. An indication of the frequency location (pixel frequency), in hertz, of the frequency cursor on the BFI and ALI displays. An indication of the bearing location, from 0.0 to 359.9 degrees, of the bearing course on the BFI and BTR displays. B-scan type lower data panel display depicting the time record of acoustic data, with bearing presented across the horizontal axis, and elapsed time presented across the vertical axis. Used in conjunction with the point cursor to determine the corresponding time data for any point on the BTR display. Used in conjunction with the point cursor to mark or investigate the frequency of any given point of displayed acoustic data. Used in conjunction with the point cursor to mark or investigate the bearing of displayed acoustic data. Placement of the bearing cursor determines the displayed audio beam for the NB ALI and DALI side panel displays. The audio beam selected is indicated by two dashed vertical lines associated with the bearing cursor. A color coded bearing legend is located at the top of the bearing cursor. Colors from the legend are applied to the NB ALI display to aid in determining bearing. Passive Combination Display (Sheet 2 of 4)
POINT CURSOR TIME INDICATOR FREQUENCY INDICATOR BEARING INDICATOR BEARING TIME RECORD DISPLAY
BTR TIME CURSOR BFI FREQUENCY CURSOR BFI BEARING CURSOR
Figure 3-36.
3-68
ORIGINAL
ITEM DEMON AUTOMATIC LINE INTEGRATION (DALI) DISPLAY
FUNCTION A-scan type display showing ALI data for a single audio beam selected from either the BFI display or the BTR display with amplitude presented across the horizontal axis, and frequency (representing the entire passive frequency band width 800 hertz to 2000 hertz) presented across the vertical axis. Provides a means of monitoring and maintaining contact data for up to eight contacts. When a contact is 9hooked9, data associated with the contact is displayed in the PCT, and a PCT reference indicator is displayed next to the associated contact on the BFI display. Data shown in the PCT display includes bearing (and variance), range, Doppler count (and variance for display integration) and amplitude. Doppler direction is indicated by the annotations OP (opening) and CL (closing). PCT data is updated on each ping. On updates, existing data is appended with NOC (no correlation) or OLD (old data) when these conditions exist. An indication of the normalized amplitude from 0 to 100 at the intersection of the frequency cursor and the bearing cursor on the BFI display. An indication of the normalized amplitude from 0 to 100 at the intersection of the time cursor and the bearing cursor in the BTR display. Contact frequency representing the passive frequency range in hertz in five equally-spaced increments. Small cluster or blip representing returned narrowband data. Vertical line of varying thickness, stability, and intensity representing returned broadband data. Contact bearing, from 0.0 to 359.9 degrees in twelve equally-spaced increments spanning from 180 degrees to 180 degrees. Elapsed contact time from 0 to 20 minutes in four equally-spaced (five minute) increments. Zoom function allows close examination of a five minute section of the 20-minute display range. Used in conjunction with the point cursor to investigate the bearing of a specific acoustic data line. Placement of the bearing cursor determines the displayed audio beam for the NB ALI and DALI side panel displays. The audio beam selected is indicated by two dashed vertical lines associated with the bearing cursor. Vertical line of varying thickness, stability, and intensity representing returned broadband data. Amplitude of ALI frequency lines in four equally-spaced increments. Contact frequency representing the passive frequency range in hertz in five equally-spaced increments. NB ALI frequency scale is the same as that selected for the BFI display. Passive Combination Display (Sheet 3 of 4)
PRELIMINARY CONTACT TOTE (PCT) DISPLAY
AMPLITUDE, FREQUENCY/BEARING CROSSING INDICATOR AMPLITUDE, TIME/BEARING CROSSING INDICATOR BFI FREQUENCY SCALE BFI NARROWBAND ICONS BFI BROADBAND ICONS BTR BEARING SCALE BTR TIME SCALE
BTR BEARING CURSOR
BTR BROADBAND ICONS NB ALI AMPLITUDE SCALE NB ALI FREQUENCY SCALE
Figure 3-36.
3-69
ORIGINAL
ITEM NB ALI FREQUENCY CURSOR NB ALI FINE BEARING DATA LINES NB ALI HARMONIC DIVIDERS NB ALI AMPLITUDE INDICATOR NB ALI BEARING INDICATOR NB ALI FREQUENCY INDICATOR NB ALI HARMONIC DIVIDER FUNDAMENTAL INDICATOR DALI AMPLITUDE SCALE DALI FREQUENCY SCALE DALI FREQUENCY CURSOR DALI DATA LINES DALI HARMONIC DIVIDERS
FUNCTION Allows measurement of the amplitude bearing and frequency of ALI fine bearing data lines. ALI data lines originating from the single audio beam selected in the BFI display. Data lines are color coded according to the BFI bearing cursor ledgend to indicate the fine bearing from which they validate. Determine if an ALI line is harmonically related to other displayed data lines. Harmonic dividers are shown only when selected by the ASO. An indication of the normalized amplitude from 0 to 100 of the peak picked signal selected by the NB ALI frequency cursor. An indication of the bearing from 0.0 to 359.9 degrees of the peak picked signal selected by the NB ALI frequency cursor. An indication of the frequency in hertz of the peak picked signal selected by the NB ALI frequency cursor. Shows the operator-selected frequency for the harmonic divider fundamental from 0 to the high passive frequency in the BFI and NB ALI displays. Amplitude of DALI frequency lines in eight equally-spaced increments. Contact frequency representing the full passive frequency range in hertz in five equally-spaced increments. Allows measurement of the amplitude and frequency of DALI data lines. DALI data lines originating from the single audio beam selected in the BFI or BTR display. Operator selectable indicators that determine if an DALI line harmonically relates to other displayed data lines. Selection of harmonic dividers while in the DALI mode will not display the dividers on the BFI display. An indication of the normalized amplitude from 0 to 100 of the peak picked signal selected by the DALI frequency cursor. An indication of the frequency in hertz of the peak picked signal selected by the DALI frequency cursor. Shows the operator-selected frequency for the harmonic divider fundamental from the low passive frequency to the high passive frequency in the DALI display. Shows the operator-selected frequency for the upper DEMON frequency from the low passive frequency to the high passive frequency to be used in the demodulation of modulated low frequency signals. Passive Combination Display (Sheet 4 of 4)
DALI AMPLITUDE INDICATOR DALI FREQUENCY INDICATOR DALI HARMONIC DIVIDER FUNDAMENTAL INDICATOR DALI UPPER FREQUENCY INDICATOR
Figure 3-36.
3-70
ORIGINAL
ROD RANGE CURSOR ROD RANGE SCALE
ROD / SVP DEPTH SCALE
OVERRIDE INDICATORS 0 15
FAULT INDICATORS 30 45
OP PARAM INDICATORS 60 0 4800 4950
SVP SOUND VELOCITY
ENTERED SUBMERSIBLE UNIT DEPTH
SOUND VELOCITY PROFILE (SVP) DISPLAY
ROD DEPTH CURSOR
200
400
RANGE OF THE DAY (ROD) DISPLAY
SVP DEPTH CURSOR
600 USR1:DEF1 USR2:DATA USR3:DEF3 NEW:NA 800 PRED:DATA SV:XXXX
25 20 15 10
RNG: XXX.X
DEPTH: XXXX SE:XX
SVP MINITOTE
ROD SIGNAL EXCESS LEGEND
RANGE INDICATOR
DEPTH INDICATOR
SIGNAL EXCESS INDICATOR
ROD POINT CURSOR
SOUND VELOCITY INDICATOR
FG1683
SA
Figure 3-37.
Acoustic Performance Prediction (APP) Display (Sheet 1 of 3)
3-71
ORIGINAL
ITEM RANGE OF THE DAY (ROD) DISPLAY
FUNCTION A main data panel display, that is a color-coded graphical representation of computed signal excess variations within an area of operation, based on the last acoustic prediction calculation. Range, in nm or kyds, is displayed across the horizontal axis. Depth, in feet, is displayed across the vertical axis. Used in conjunction with the point cursor to select the depth of a location of interest. Range, in nm or kyds, corresponding to the full range (0 to maximum range) of the currently selected range selection. Range scale division is dependent on the current range selection. Used in conjunction with the point cursor to select the range of a location of interest. Depth, in feet, from 0 to the maximum bottom depth selected by the ASO, in five major and five minor equally spaced divisions. An indication of sound velocity, in ft/sec, spanning the velocity range from minimum velocity to maximum velocity, in five equally-spaced increments. One of two selectable side data panel displays, that is a graphical representation of sound velocity, in ft/sec, is displayed across the horizontal axis. Depth, in feet, is displayed across the vertical axis. The second of two side panel display, that presents the ASO-selected parameters used to calculate APP ROD. Data shown in the prediction parameter display includes the prediction mode (ACTIVE or PASSIVE), transmitter/receiver depth (in feet), transmitter power level (in dB), active pulse width (in sec) and shape or frequency (in Hz), active target strength (in dB), bottom type (from 1 to 9), bottom depth (in feet), salinity (in ppt) and sea state (from 0 to 6). Used in conjunction with the point cursor to obtain the precise sound velocity value associated with a particular depth. provides a visual indication of ASO-selected velocity profile, either pre-defined (DEF1, DEF2, DEF3) or user generated (DATA). Also indicates when new data form the submersible unit is available, and whether calculated ROD/SVP data is available. An indication of the sound velocity, from 4600 to 5200 ft/sec, of a 9hooked9 location. If no location has been 9hooked9, indicates the sound velocity at the location of the point cursor.
ROD DEPTH CURSOR ROD RANGE SCALE
ROD RANGE CURSOR ROD DEPTH SCALE (ROD COMPUTED) SVP SOUND VELOCITY
SOUND VELOCITY PROFILE (SVP) DISPLAY PREDICTION PARAMETER DISPLAY (Not shown)
SVP DEPTH CURSOR SVP MINI-TOTE
SOUND VELOCITY INDICATOR
Figure 3-37.
Acoustic Performance Prediction (APP) Display (Sheet 2 of 3)
3-72
ORIGINAL
ITEM ROD POINT CURSOR SIGNAL EXCESS INDICATOR DEPTH INDICATOR
FUNCTION Used in conjunction with ROD range cursor and ROD depth cursor. Provides a means of 9hooking9 locations of interest. An indication of the signal excess, from 0 to 50 dB, of a 9hooked9 location. If no location is 9hooked9, indicator is blank. An indication of the depth location, from 0 to the maximum depth in feet, of a 9hooked9 location. If no location has been 9hooked9, indicator is blank. An indication of the range location, from 0.0 to 59.9 nm (or 0.0 to 119.8 kyds) of a 9hooked9 location. If no location has been 9hooked9, range indicator is blank. A color-coded legend which indicates the signal excess, in dB, associated with each color block shown in the ROD display. Depth in feet from 0 to 200, 400, 800, or 1600 in five major equally spaced divisions based on the deepest selected SVP reading. Maximum depth is the deepest available value. Acoustic Performance Prediction (APP) Display (Sheet 3 of 3)
RANGE INDICATOR
ROD SIGNAL EXCESS LEGEND SVP DEPTH SCALE
Figure 3-37.
3-73
ORIGINAL
CBIT STATUS INDICATOR SU STATUS INDICATOR
OVERRIDE INDICATORS
FAULT INDICATORS
OP PARAM INDICATORS
COMM MODE CBIT: RUNNING
PROJECTOR DEPLOYMENT STATUS INDICATOR RECEIVER DEPLOYMENT STATUS INDICATOR TRANSMIT STATUS INDICATOR
SU: SUBMERGED PROJ: OUT RCVR: OUT XMT: AVAILABLE CHRG: 98%
PTT: RX
BATTERY CHARGE INDICATOR
PUSHTOTALK INDICATOR
FG1686
SA
ITEM CBIT STATUS INDICATOR SU STATUS INDICATOR PROJECTOR DEPLOYMENT STATUS INDICATOR RECEIVER DEPLOYMENT STATUS INDICATOR TRANSMIT STATUS INDICATOR BATTERY CHARGE INDICATOR PUSH-TO-TALK (PTT) INDICATOR
FUNCTION Indicates the current status of continuous BIT (CBIT). Displays either RUNNING, FAULT or NOT AVAILABLE. Indicates deployment status of the submersible unit (SU). Displays either SUBMERGED, NOT SUBMERGED or NOT AVAILABLE. Indicates SU projector deployment status. Displays either IN, OUT, TRANS (in transit), or NOT AVAILABLE. Indicates receiver deployment status. Displays either IN, OUT, TRANS (in transit), or NOT AVAILABLE. Indicates transmit (XMT) status. Displays either AVAILABLE or UNAVAILABLE. Indicates submersible unit percent battery charge or NOT AVAILABLE. Indicates status of push-to-talk. Displays RT (receive), TX (transmit), or NOT AVAILABLE.
Figure 3-38.
Communications Mode (COMM) Display
3-74
ORIGINAL
OVERRIDE INDICATORS
FAULT INDICATORS
OP PARAM INDICATORS
SYSTEM STATUS OPERATING MODE SUBMERGED IDLE NO BATTERY UPLINK OFF ON ARMS IN PROJS IN
SYSTEM CONDITION CIPS SIU DC DEGRADED RM READY SU SCU READY READY READY READY
DATA SOURCE SOUNDER
SU OFF
FG1687
SA
ITEM IBIT STATUS INDICATOR
FUNCTION Indicates the current status of operator initiated BIT (IBIT). Displays either RUNNING, COMPLETED NO FAULT, or COMPLETED FAULT.
Figure 3-39.
Test Mode Display
3-75
ORIGINAL
OVERRIDE INDICATORS
FAULT INDICATORS
OP PARAM INDICATORS
SYSTEM STATUS OPERATING MODE SUBMERGED IDLE NO BATTERY UPLINK OFF ON ARMS IN PROJS IN
SYSTEM CONDITION CIPS SIU DC DEGRADED RM READY SU SCU READY READY READY READY
DATA SOURCE SOUNDER
SU OFF
FG1687
SA
ITEM SYSTEM STATUS DISPLAY AREA SYSTEM CONDITION DISPLAY AREA
FUNCTION Displays plain-text messages indicating system operating status and fault conditions. Displays plain-text messages indicating unit operating status and fault conditions.
Figure 3-40.
System Condition Display
3-76
ORIGINAL
ANNUNCIATION
INITIATING CONDITION EGI indicates that it is aligning.
RESET BY:
NOT CLEARABLE
CDU ALERT
align
Clear key or improved alignment status or enabling nav mode. Clear key. Clear key or alignment resumed. HSI deviations change to terminal, en route, or oceanic mode. U
align fail align suspend approach
EGI indicates that an alignment was requested, but not completed. EGI indicates that an alignment is currently suspended. Given for the following conditions: v For a GPS approach mode, ten seconds after flashing 9approach9 annunciation is activated and the HSI deviations are set for approach mode. v Flight sequence mode transitions or manually selected to approach and the ten second flashing 9approach9 annunciation is not active.
approach
2 Nm from a GPS approach final approach fix (FAF). HSI deviations are set for approach transition mode. The selected navigation source is GPS/A/H (GPS, airspeed, and heading), and the GPS, airspeed, and heading are invalid. Bank limit is other than 25; and a refuel pattern is activated, or a holding pattern fix is passed for the first time, or within 30 Nm of the FAF/runway extension point or airport for the first time. When the position of the pilot selected navigation solution transitions from greater than 30 Nm to less than 30 Nm from the FAF/runway extension point. Figure 3-41.
Ten seconds after initiation or HSI deviations change to terminal, en route, or oceanic mode. Selection of a source other than GPS/A/H, or transition of the GPS solution out of dead reckoning mode. Clear key or bank limit changed.
backup
U bank limit
U baroset
Clear key.
FMS CDU Annunciations (Sheet 1 of 7)
3-77
ORIGINAL
ANNUNCIATION
INITIATING CONDITION Loss of GPS use as an integrated navigation (INAV) source.
RESET BY:
NOT CLEARABLE
CDU ALERT
U gps
Clear key or reobtaining GPS or selecting an INU only INAV solution. Clear key. Clear key or upgrade in position index. Correction in airspeed or clear key. U U U
U hf cipher U nav error U speed
An attempt made to use an invalid combination of modes. Downgrade in 95% probable error. During a TNAV (time navigation), ground speed (or indicated air speed (IAS) for pattern) deviates from the guidance solutions groundspeed (or IAS for pattern) by the designated amount entered on the Navigation Configuration page (three second filter). Detected failure of an LRU or interface signal (three second filter). An invalid cipher frequency commanded to V/UHF radio, or an attempt made to use an invalid combination of modes. CDU software versions incompatible or strapping discretes do not match. EGI indicates that degraded navigation mode can be achieved with the current alignment. Closed random pattern is currently being executed. Generated at 3 Nm from a course reversal procedure execution.
U status Uvx cipher1
Clear key or STAT key. Clear key.
U U
Uversion
Replace or power down unit with incorrect version. Clear key or improved alignment status or enabling nav mode. Closed random pattern cancelled. Removed when any of the following conditions are true: v Switch to capturing the inbound leg of the course reversal (either concluding the course reversal or terminating the course reversal). (continued next page)
coarse align
crp active crs reversal
U U
Figure 3-41.
FMS CDU Annunciations (Sheet 2 of 7) 3-78 ORIGINAL
ANNUNCIATION
INITIATING CONDITION
RESET BY:
NOT CLEARABLE
CDU ALERT
v FAF or IAF (Initial Approach Fix) is not the active waypoint (except when the course reversal is active and the approach is removed so that the original IAF/FAF waypoint is still active but no longer a part of a defined approach, the procedure will be completed). v Prior to active course reversal, hold pattern at the active waypoint is either enabled (active waypoint is IAF) or attached (active waypoint is FAF). v Direct-To is selected to any waypoint (except a MAP). v Aircraft departs the 3 Nm region around the IAF or FAF before crossing the inbound course bisector (course reversal execution is not attained). db truncated Upon auto transfer of the cartridge contents, if the navigation database reference point identifier (RPID) list is greater than the navigation database RPID limit. Loss of data loader due to cold start or data loader failure transient of more than three seconds, removal of the cartridge, or the clear key. Selection of a source other than GPS, or transition of the GPS solution out of dead reckoning mode. U
dead reckon
The selected navigation source is the FMS GPS INAV, and the solution is dead reckoning.
Figure 3-41.
3-79
ORIGINAL
ANNUNCIATION
INITIATING CONDITION Cross-side communication lost between DCUs. A discontinuity is the active waypoint.
RESET BY:
NOT CLEARABLE
CDU ALERT U
dcux xsd fail discontinuity
Clear key. Delete the discontinuity, delete the associated waypoint, insert a waypoint between the discontinuity and the associated waypoint, or direct-to any waypoint. Automatically reset by the Doppler when the condition no longer exists. EGI no longer reports battery fail condition or the clear key. Clear key. U
doppler mem
When Doppler status indicates MEM (memory) mode is enabled.
egi battery
EGI indicates a battery fail condition. EGI is still responding on the MILSTD-1553 bus while its input power on discrete indicates a power off condition. EGI echo state doesnt match its commanded state. EMCON (emissions control) discrete is detected by the FMS. On power up, if time is not available and crew has not entered time or if bus control is switched with time not valid. Active hold is cancelled by deletion of the 9H9 attribute. EGI adjusted its slaved magnetic heading with a 10 degree or more heading bias. Hold is currently being executed. IFF M3 ident has been selected when in NORM. Figure 3-41.
egi ctrl fail
egi mode fail
EGI echo state matches its commanded state or the clear key. EMCON discrete is no longer detected by the FMS. Clear key or entry of time or return of valid time. Hold fix is crossed. Clear key only. U U U
emcon
enter utc
exiting hold hdg correction
hold active ident
Hold cancelled. Displayed for 3 seconds only.
3-80
ORIGINAL
ANNUNCIATION
INITIATING CONDITION IFF M3 ident has been selected when in STBY. Impromptu pattern is currently being executed. An intercept is currently the flight plan TO waypoint. GPS SA/AS (selective availability/anti-spoofing) keys will expire in 2 hours in EGI. Ladder pattern is currently being executed. Failure passing data to/from the data cartridge. Password has been entered locking the system. The IFF replies to a Mode 4 interrogation and annunciation (ANN or AUD) is enabled on the IFF Mode 4 page.
RESET BY:
NOT CLEARABLE
CDU ALERT
iff norm imp active intr active key alert
Displayed for 3 seconds only. Impromptu cancelled. pattern U U
Deletion of intercept point via direct-TO. Clear key or entry of new keys passing time test. Ladder pattern cancelled. Clear key. Entry of correct password or zeroizing the system. Automatically reset by the IFF when the condition no longer exists or annunciation is not enabled (OUT) on the IFF Mode 4 page. Automatically reset by the IFF when the condition no longer exists. Clear key or selection of a different navigation solution. Clear key or enabling nav mode. Clear key or approach removed from flight plan. Navigation mode switched to a solution with valid GPS data, or databased approach is disabled, or MAP is not the TO and FAF is in history or deleted.
ldr active load fail locked
mode 4 reply
mode 4 caution
IFF not responding to a Mode 4 interrogation. FMS arbitrator is the selected navigation solution and the arbitration changes states. EGI indicates that the inertial has completed alignment. Insertion of a minimum descent altitude (MDA) type approach into the flight plan. Active when the following conditions are true: v Within 3 Nm from the databased FAF or the databased MAP is the TO. (continued next page) Figure 3-41.
nav change
nav ready no appr vnav
no gps appr
3-81
ORIGINAL
ANNUNCIATION
INITIATING CONDITION v An approach is enabled. v Navigation mode set to a nonGPS based solution.
RESET BY:
NOT CLEARABLE
CDU ALERT
no keys zero
Failure to zeroize GPS SA/AS keys in the EGI. Stored heading alignment commanded but no stored heading is available in the EGI. The intercept solution for the active waypoint is the point of closest approach (PCA). Sector pattern is currently being executed. Nav sensors auto reconfigured due to commanded in-air alignment requires operational GPS. Expanding square pattern is currently being executed. Tactical flight plan pattern is currently being executed. Current magnetic variation data is more than 6 months old. Current system date is greater than the navigation database effectivity period. In AUTO or FLYOVER sequencing mode when TTG is one minute before sequencing into a discontinuity or the TTG is less than one minute when the waypoint preceding a discontinuity becomes the TO waypoint.
Clear key or subsequent successful clear of keys. Clear key.
no stored hdg
pca intercept
Clear key or non-PCA intercept solution becomes available. Sector pattern celled. Clear key. canU
sct active sensor config
sqr active tfp active update magvar
Expanding square pattern cancelled. Tactical flight plan canceled. Clear key or load new magnetic variation data. Clear key or load new navigation database. Clear key or delete the discontinuity; delete the associated waypoint; insert a waypoint between the discontinuity and the associated waypoint; (continued next page)
U U
update nav db
verify proc
Figure 3-41.
3-82
ORIGINAL
ANNUNCIATION
RESET BY:
NOT CLEARABLE
CDU ALERT
remove the related SID (standard instrument departure), STAR (standard terminal arrival route), approach, or direct-to any waypoint; or the discontinuity becomes the active waypoint. v/uhfx battery1 V/UHF x indicates a battery fail condition (limited to once per cold start). V/UHF x indicates a failure during the attempted loading of HaveQuick data, MWODs (multiple words of the day), or FMTs (frequency managed training). Coordinate reference toggled to NTGS when datum 47 is not the selected datum. Active waypoint is passed and sequencing is inhibited. Incorrect GPS SA/AS key received. Aircraft cross track deviation exceeds crew entered specified threshold (with three second filter). V/UHF x no longer reports a battery fail condition or the clear key. Clear key.
vx load fail1
wgs-84 config
Clear key.
wpt passed wrong key
Clear key, or sequence waypoint. Clear key or entry of correct GPS SA/AS key. Clear key or aircraft is maneuvered to bring the cross track deviation within the threshold or the deviation threshold is expanded. Disable 9UTC DISPLAY9 on the start 1 page. U
xtk alert
XXXX:XX2 KEY: 1 2 -
9UTC DISPLAY9 enabled on the start 1 page.
9x9 represents the associated V/UHF radio: 1 or 2. 9XXXX:XX9 represents the UTC time (e.g., 90810:409).
Figure 3-41.
3-83
ORIGINAL
MESSAGE - 1000 FT MINIMUM ADD ALTN BEFORE?
INITIATING CONDITION Attempt made to enter a vertical navigation (VNAV) or alternate flight plan altitude less than -1000 ft. An alternate flight plan has been selected to be added to the flight plan.
RESET BY: Clear key. Clear key or insertion of the alternate flight plan into the flight plan. Clear key.
AIR ALIGN ACTIVE
A toggle to 9OUT9 is attempted on either the GPS or the Doppler on the Nav Config page when an in-air alignment is in progress. Attempt made to insert more than 60 legs into the alternate flight plan. Attempt made to: v Enter a VNAV parameter at the missed approach point (MAP) or visual runway extension waypoint. v Delete the 9V9 attribute at the MAP of an approach or the 9RWXND9 waypoint of a visual approach. v Attach a Hold to an IAF (with a databased holding pattern), MAP, or missed approach holding point (with a databased holding pattern). v Attach a pattern to an IAF (with a databased holding pattern), FAF/runway extension point, MAP, or missed approach holding point (with a databased holding pattern). v Insert an offset when an approach waypoint is the active waypoint. v Enter a waypoint between the FAF/runway extension point and MAP. v Perform a direct-to to the MAP. v Enter an approach into the flight plan when an approach is already inserted.
ALTN FPLN FULL APPROACH DEFINED
Clear key. Clear key.
Figure 3-42.
FMS CDU Scratchpad Messages (Sheet 1 of 11)
3-84
ORIGINAL
MESSAGE APPROACH IS ACTIVE
INITIATING CONDITION Attempt made to: v Delete or remove the approach from the flight plan during execution (MAP is the active waypoint). v Modify the flight plan course or approach parameters when a MAP is the active waypoint. v Modify the sequencing mode when the MAP is the active waypoint and before the MAP has been overflown (TO to FROM transition) for the first time. v Insert a present position (PPSN) hold or insert a waypoint at the active waypoint when the MAP is the active waypoint.
RESET BY: Clear key.
ATTACH CRP AT?
A closed random pattern (CRP) without a defined fix has been selected for insertion into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. A hold has been selected for insertion into the flight plan. An impromptu pattern without a defined fix or CSP has been selected for insertion into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. A ladder pattern without a defined fix or CSP has been selected for insertion into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. A sector pattern without a defined fix or CSP has been selected for insertion into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. An expanding square pattern without a defined fix or CSP has been selected for insertion into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. An attempt made to enter a identifier/bearing/range for the VOR/TCN mode on the Update pages when an identifier does not have an elevation. An attempt made to ident by pressing the M3 function key and Mode 1, Mode 2, and Mode 3/A are all toggled 9OUT9. An attempt made to ident by pressing the M3 function key and the IFF bus status is 9NGO-T9.
Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key.
or
ATTACH HOLD AT? ATTACH IMP AT?
or or
ATTACH LDR AT?
or
ATTACH SCT AT?
or
ATTACH SQR AT?
or
U IDENT ELEVATION
U IFF MODES
Clear key.
U IFF POWER
Clear key.
Figure 3-42.
3-85
ORIGINAL
MESSAGE U INU MODE UPOWER U POWER/EMCON ENGAGE
INITIATING CONDITION Attempt made to align an INU that is not in orient or standby mode. Attempt made to control EGI equipment when discrete indicates off. Attempt made to perform a system test and the EGI ON discrete indicates the EGI is off and the EMCON discrete is enabled. A request for display or operation that cannot be provided due to failure or the LRU is under test. Attempt made to enter a mode when the currently tuned frequency does not permit that mode or an attempt made to use an invalid combination of modes. The V/UHF is in HOM (homing) mode when attempting to SEND TIME. Attempt made to access the data cartridge while data is currently being up/down-loaded. Request to load the alternate flight plan 9XXXXXXXX9 into the CDU from the data cartridge. Request to add a new user waypoint to the database. Request to remove a pattern from the alternate flight plan. Request to replace the existing GPS, tactical, or visual approach. Request to clear the data cartridge.
RESET BY: Clear key. Clear key. Clear key.
U STATUS U Vx FREQUENCY/MODE1
CARTRIDGE IN USE CONF LOAD XXXXXXXX
Clear key. Clear key, reselect entered alternate flight plan. Clear key or select 9Add9. Clear key or reselect 9ALTN FPLN9. Clear key or reselected 9FPLN MOD9. Clear key or reselect 9CARTRIDGE9. Clear key or reselect 9COM9. Clear key or reselect 9CLR ALL9. Clear key or reselect 9FPLN/ALTN9. Clear key or reselect 9GPS9.
CONFIRM ADD CONFIRM ALTN RMV
CONFIRM APPR RPLACE
CONFIRM CLEAR CART
CONFIRM CLEAR COM CONFIRM CLEAR FAILS CONFIRM CLEAR FPLNS
Request to clear COM presets. Request to clear all fail counts and check marks. Request to clear flight plan and alternate flight plans. Request to clear GPS SA/AS availability/anti-spoofing) keys. (selective
CONFIRM CLEAR GPS
Figure 3-42.
FMS CDU Scratchpad Messages (Sheet 3 of 11) 3-86 ORIGINAL
MESSAGE CONFIRM CLEAR IFF CONFIRM CLEAR PTS
INITIATING CONDITION Request to clear IFF mode codes. Request to clear the markpoint and waypoint lists.
RESET BY: Clear key or reselect 9IFF9. Clear key or reselect 9MKPTS/WPTS9. Clear key or reselect 9INITIATE TEST9. Clear key or reselect 9EMER9. Clear key or reselect 9ERASE ALTN9. Clear key or reselect 9ERASE FLT/DATA9. Clear key or reselect 9ERASE FPLN9. Clear key or reselect 9FPLN RMV9. Clear key or reselect 9HOLD PPSN9. Clear key or reselect 9LOAD ALMANAC9. Clear key, reselect 9LOAD9, or reselect entered alternate. Clear key or reselect 9LOAD COM9. Clear key or reselect 9LOAD FLT/DATA9.
CONFIRM EGI TEST
Request to initiate BIT on EGI.
CONFIRM EMER IFF CONFIRM ERASE ALTN
Request to put IFF into emergency mode. Request to erase alternate flight plan.
CONFIRM ERASE DATA
Request to erase flight data (Start 3 page).
CONFIRM ERASE FPLN
Request to erase flight plan (Start 3 page).
CONFIRM FPLN RMV
Request to remove a hold, FMS approach, SID, STAR, pattern, or intercept from the flight plan. Request to hold at present position.
CONFIRM HOLD PPSN
CONFIRM LOAD ALMNAC
Request to load the GPS almanac data.
CONFIRM LOAD ALTN
Request to load the alternate flight plan into the CDU from the data cartridge.
CONFIRM LOAD COM
Request to load communications data into the CDU from the data cartridge. Request to load flight data (Start 3 page).
CONFIRM LOAD DATA
Figure 3-42.
3-87
ORIGINAL
MESSAGE CONFIRM LOAD PTS
INITIATING CONDITION Request to load markpoint and waypoint lists into the CDU from the data cartridge. Request to replace existing information on the user waypoint database. Request to renumber the flight plan.
RESET BY: Clear key or reselect 9LOAD MKPT/WPT9. Clear key or select 9Add9. Clear key or reselect 9RENUMBER9. Clear key or reselect 9REPLACE FPLN9. Clear key or reselect 9RVRS ALTN9. Clear key or reselect 9SAVE ALMANAC9. Clear key or reselect 9SAVE9. Clear key or reselect 9SAVE COMM9. Clear key or reselect 9SAVE MKPT/WPT9. Clear key or reselect 9SAVE STAT9. Clear key or reselect the line select key. Clear key or reselect the line select key. Clear key or reselect 9SYSTEM9. Clear key or reselect 9INITIATE TEST9.
CONFIRM OVERWRITE CONFIRM RENUMB FPLN
CONFIRM RPLACE FPLN
Request to replace the flight plan with the alternate (Start 3 and Altn Fpln pages). Request to reverse the alternate flight plan.
CONFIRM RVRSE ALTN
CONFIRM SAVE ALMNAC
Request to save the selected GPS almanac data.
CONFIRM SAVE ALTN CONFIRM SAVE COMM
Request to save the alternate flight plan to the data cartridge. Request to save communications data into the data cartridge from the CDU. Request to save markpoint and waypoint lists to the data cartridge. Request to save system status to the data cartridge.
CONFIRM SAVE PTS
CONFIRM SAVE STATUS
CONFIRM SID RPLACE
Request to replace a SID in the flight plan.
CONFIRM STAR RPLACE
Request to replace a STAR in the flight plan.
CONFIRM SYSTEM TEST CONFIRM TX RF SAFE
Request to initiate test on all LRUs controlled by the FMS. Request to initiate an IBIT on the HF radio.
Figure 3-42.
3-88
ORIGINAL
MESSAGE CONFIRM USE GPS
INITIATING CONDITION Attempt made to initiate an air align on the Start 2 page when GPS is set to 9OUT9 on the Navigation Configuration 1 page. Request to zeroize the system.
RESET BY: Clear key or reselect 9INITIATE9. Clear key or reselect 9ZERO ALL9. Clear key.
CONFIRM ZERO ALL
CRP IS ACTIVE
Attempt made to delete or modify the closed random pattern fix or delete mission flight pattern (MFP) attribute or modify the flight plan course or an attempt made to insert a present position (PPOS) hold or insert a waypoint at the active waypoint during pattern execution. Attempt made to apply course edit greater than 90 from the current inbound course while in automatic or flyover leg sequence mode. Attempt made to delete the active waypoint, modify the flight plan course, or an attempt made to insert a PPSN hold, or insert a waypoint at the active waypoint during course reversal execution. Prompt for access to Data page.
CRS CHANGE >90
Clear key.
CRS RVRSL IS ACTIVE
Clear key.
DATA FOR?
Clear key or valid waypoint selection. Clear key.
DCU IBIT ACTIVE
Attempt made to command second data concentrator unit (DCU) related IBIT while another DCU related IBIT is active. Access of CRP page from the Direct - To Flight Plan page.
DIRECT TO CRP?
Clear key or selection of CRP point for Direct To. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key.
DISCONTINUITY DUPLICATE CALLSIGN DUPLICATE USER WPT
Attempt made to enter a course to waypoint when a discontinuity is the active waypoint. A call sign has been entered that is already defined for another preset definition. Attempt made to assign a user waypoint identifier with the 9/9 function when the same identifier already exists in the user waypoint data base. Attempt made to initiate MWOD LOAD or FMT LOAD when the entered list is not complete. Attempt made to RESET TOD without a date entered on the V/UHF HaveQuick Setup page.
ELEMENT OMITTED ENTER DATE
Figure 3-42.
3-89
ORIGINAL
MESSAGE EMCON ENGAGED
INITIATING CONDITION Attempt made to change TACAN mode or IFF power mode when the EMCON (emissions control) switch is engaged. Attempt made to change V/UHF or HF modes when set to emergency configuration. Attempt made to toggle between CLIMB and DESCNT when no vertical angle or rate has been entered. Attempt made to enter a magnetic track or toggle to a magnetic track when a target fix has not been entered on the Intercept A page. Attempt made to insert an intercept, MFP, computed air release point (CARP) (if applicable), or approach into the flight plan when defining parameters have not been entered. Attempt made to enter an alternate flight plan parameter prior to entering the waypoint or an attempt made to enter a flight plan course when no TO exists. Direct-To is made to the FAF/runway extension point of an approach.
EMER/GUARD ENGAGED ENTER ANGLE OR RATE
ENTER FIX
Clear key.
ENTER PARAMETERS
Clear key.
ENTER WAYPOINT
Clear key.
FINAL APPR CRS XXX
Clear key or selecting LS1 on the Flight Plan page CRS entry. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key.
FL005 FT MINIMUM FPLN FULL FREEZE IS ACTIVE FV CAL ACTIVE
Attempt made to enter a VNAV (vertical navigation) or alternate flight plan flight level less than 500 ft. Attempt made to insert more than 60 waypoints into the flight plan. Attempt made to change the sequence mode on the flight plan page when a SAR pattern is frozen. Attempt made to command second flux valve into calibration while the other flux valve calibration is active. Attempt made to accept an update to the integrated navigation solution when GPS is emitting good data. Attempt made to perform a ground only operation during flight. Attempt made to change the HF radio while the HF radio is in IBIT. Attempt made to attach a pattern on a waypoint with a hold attached or an attempt made to insert an offset when a holding fix is the TO waypoint.
GPS IS VALID GROUND ONLY HF BUSY HOLD DEFINED
Clear key. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key.
Figure 3-42.
MESSAGE HOLD IS ACTIVE
INITIATING CONDITION Attempt made to delete the holding fix or modify the flight plan course or insert a PPOS hold or insert a waypoint at the active waypoint during hold execution. Attempt made to initiate an IFF mode test while another IFF mode test is in operation. Attempt made to delete or modify the Impromptu fix (or CSP) or delete MFP attribute or modify flight plan course or insert a PPSN hold or insert a waypoint at the active waypoint during pattern execution. A closed random pattern with a defined fix has been selected for insertion into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. An impromptu pattern with a defined fix (or CSP) has been selected for insertion into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. An intercept has been selected for insertion into the flight plan. A ladder pattern with a defined fix (or CSP) has been selected for insertion into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. A sector pattern with a defined fix (or CSP) has been selected for insertion into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. A SID has been selected for insertion into the flight plan. An expanding square pattern with a defined fix (or CSP) has been selected for insertion into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. A STAR has been selected for insertion into the flight plan. A GPS databased approach has been selected for insertion into the flight plan. A tactical approach has been selected for insertion into the flight plan. A visual approach has been selected for insertion into the flight plan. Attempt made to enter VNAV parameters for or attach a hold or pattern to a point defined as an intercept.
IFF IN TEST IMP IS ACTIVE
INSERT CRP BEFORE?
Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key valid insert. Clear key.
or
INSERT IMP BEFORE?
or
INSERT INTR BEFORE? INSERT LDR BEFORE?
or or
INSERT SCT BEFORE?
or
INSERT SID BEFORE? INSERT SQR BEFORE?
or or
INSERT STAR BEFORE? INSRT G-APR BEFORE? INSRT T-APR BEFORE? INSRT V-APR BEFORE? INTERCEPT DEFINED
or or or or
Figure 3-42.
MESSAGE INTR IS ACTIVE
INITIATING CONDITION Attempt made to delete the intercept from the flight plan during execution (current TO) or an attempt made to modify the flight plan course when an intercept is the TO waypoint. Attempt made to delete the intercept or approach attributes, history waypoint (if only one exists), intercept, or MFP parameters when in the flight plan or alternate flight plan. Attempt made to insert scratchpad data which does not pass format or range tests, an attempt made to select a function when insufficient data has been entered, or an attempt made to select a non waypoint entry to call up the Data page. Attempt made to toggle Mode 4 to 9ON9 when the Mode 4 computer kit is not installed. Attempt made to delete or modify the ladder fix (or CSP) or delete MFP attribute or modify flight plan course or insert a PPSN hold or insert a waypoint at the active waypoint during pattern execution. Attempt made to toggle COMSEC mode or Link-11 mode when Link-11 mode is active for a given radio. Attempt made to replace the active flight plan while the alternate flight plan is in the process of being loaded. Attempt made to insert more than 10 intercepts into the flight plan. Attempt made to insert more than 20 patterns into the alternate flight plan. Attempt made to insert more than 20 patterns into the flight plan. Attempt made to access data loader data when no cartridge is installed. Attempt made to enter a HaveQuick FMT when no FMTs are loaded. Attempt made to enter a NTGS coordinate when no grid center is defined Attempt made to enter magnetic referenced input (course, bearing, or track) without magnetic variation tables.
INVALID DELETION
Clear key.
INVALID ENTRY
Clear key or selecting a line key for which the entry is allowed. Clear key. Clear key.
KIT NOT INSTALLED LDR IS ACTIVE
LK11 IS ACTIVE
Clear key.
LOAD IN PROGRESS
Clear key.
MAX INTRS IN FPLN MAX PTRNS IN ALTN MAX PTRNS IN FPLN NO CARTRIDGE NO FMTS LOADED NO GRID CENTER NO MAG VAR
Clear key. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key.
Figure 3-42.
3-92
ORIGINAL
MESSAGE NO MWODS LOADED NO TOD NOT AVAILABLE NOT STORED PATTERN DEFINED
INITIATING CONDITION Attempt made to enter a HaveQuick net when no MWODs are loaded. Attempt made to enter a HaveQuick MWOD net when the radio does not have TOD. Attempt made to press an unused function key. Entry not found in database. Attempt made to attach a hold, or pattern at a point defined to be a pattern, an attempt made to insert an offset when a MFP fix is the TO waypoint, or an attempt made to modify the pattern fix when the pattern has been inserted in the flight plan or alternate flight plan. Attempt made to insert a waypoint between noninserted waypoints in the flight plan when the alphanumeric 9Z9 is already in use at the associated waypoint. Attempt made the following immediately after data cartridge has been removed and reinserted or a data loader failure transient of more than 3 seconds occurs while the data cartridge is already inserted: v Select a SID or associated runway and no SID is currently in the working copy. v Select a STAR or associated runway and no STAR is currently in the working copy. v Select a databased GPS approach from the FMS Approach page and no databased GPS approach is currently in the working copy. v Select a visual approach from the FMS Approach page and no databased GPS approach is currently in the working copy. v Select an IAF or insert a GPS approach and no databased GPS approach is currently in the working copy. v Insert a visual approach and no visual approach is currently in the working copy.
RESET BY: Clear key. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key.
RENUMBER FPLN
Clear key.
RE-SELECT ARPT
Clear key or entry of four letter airport identifier on SID, STAR, or FMS Approach page.
Figure 3-42.
3-93
ORIGINAL
MESSAGE SCT IS ACTIVE
INITIATING CONDITION Attempt made to delete or modify the sector fix (or CSP) or delete MFP attribute or modify flight plan course or insert a PPSN hold or insert a waypoint at the active waypoint during pattern execution. Access the Alternate Flight Plan Catalog page from the Start 3 page. Attempt made to access SID Transitions page without both SID and RWY (runway) selected. Attempt made to access STAR Transitions page without both STAR and RWY selected. Attempt made to toggle Mode C to 9ON9 when Mode 3/A is set to 9OUT9 on the IFF page. An invalid preset call sign is in the scratchpad when attempting to select a radio call sign. Attempt made to delete or modify the expanding square fix (or CSP) or delete MFP attribute or modify flight plan course or insert a PPSN hold or insert a waypoint at the active waypoint during pattern execution. Attempt made to delete the tactical flight fix or insert a waypoint at the active waypoint during pattern execution. Communications time operation being performed. Attempt made to add a user waypoint when the user waypoint database is full. Attempt made to toggle between CLIMB and DESCNT when a VNAV is active. Attempt made to request a V/UHF sequence while another sequence is in progress for the same radio. Attempt made to enter SID or STAR with more than 30 waypoints. Attempt made to enter an NTGS coordinate when WGS-84 is not the selected datum.
SELECT ALTN LOAD SELECT SID/RWY
Clear key or select alternate. Clear key or selecting a SID or RWY. Clear key or selecting a STAR or RWY. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key.
SELECT STAR/RWY
SET M3/A ON SIGN NOT FOUND SQR IS ACTIVE
TFP IS ACTIVE
Clear key.
TIME OP IN PROCESS USER WPT LIST FULL VNAV IS ACTIVE V/UHF BUSY WPT MAX EXCEEDED WRONG DATUM KEY: 1 -
Clear key. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key. Clear key.
9x9 represents the associated V/UHF radio: 1 or 2.
Figure 3-42.
ANNUNCIATION
RESET ON CLEAR
NOT CLEARABLE
CDU ALERT U U U
adlp dbase 90% autosquawk off awaiting dlrp
ADLP (airborne data link processor ) data base is 90% full. The mission processor set the ADLP auto squawk control to off since all track numbers are used. The BC MP displays this annunciation until a valid DLRP has been accepted during automatic DLRP assignment. CMDS stores are low. MDR/L data set not written to the MDR/L due to positional information in the data set being outside the reportable range. Link reception quality is 3 or less. Any of the following conditions are true: v Cross load of the tactical data base between the mission processors failed and tactical data base edit operation was aborted. v RT MP (usually the TSO MP) is not issuing a cross load request when the BC MP determines that the default database should be used. U
Ucm stores U dlrp
U U
U link quality U mp dbase sync
U U
U U
U mp version
The mission processor software version numbers of the remote terminal and bus controller mission processors are not the same. CMDS is operating in the semi-automatic mode and is ready for the pilot or copilot to initiate dispensing by pushing the CMDS switch on the collective stick grip aft. A decorrelation of XXXXX has occurred where XXXXX is the FTN. 80% capacity of D/L data base has been reached. ADLP 100% forwarding limit is reached or the MP attempts to write a data link object to the LRO database and the write fails. Figure 3-43. U U
cm dispnsr rdy
decorr XXXXX d/l dbase 80% d/l msg lost
U U
Mission Processor CDU Annunciations (Sheet 1 of 4)
3-95
ORIGINAL
ANNUNCIATION
RESET ON CLEAR U
NOT CLEARABLE
CDU ALERT U
d/l msg rcvd
Received data link messages are stored to a received data link message queue in the BC MP. Upon storing a message to the queue, this annunciation notifies the operator that a data link message has been received. The data link message received annunciation is automatically cleared if the operator has viewed all new data link messages. The data link message is maintained in the tactical data base so that it is available to all operators. While viewing messages, retrieval of messages from the queue removes the message from the queue so that multiple operators cannot operate on the same message. The message will be put back at the bottom of the queue depending on the action taken by the operator. If 20 messages are queued, the 21st message displays the 9d/l msg lost9 CDU mission annunciation. 100% capacity of ESM data base has been reached. Following an emitter update that impacts the number of emitter records in the TDB, the BC MP determines if the number of emitter records in the TDB is greater than or equal to 26 but less than 32 and the 9esm dbase 80%9 CDU mission annunciation is displayed. If the number of emitters is 32, then the 9esm dbase 100%9 CDU mission annunciation is displayed. 80% capacity of ESM data base has been reached. Following an emitter update that impacts the number of emitter records in the TDB, the BC MP determines if the number of emitter records in the TDB is greater than or equal to 26 but less than 32 and the 9esm dbase 80%9 CDU mission annunciation is displayed. If the number of emitters is 32, then the 9esm dbase 100%9 CDU mission annunciation is displayed. Navigation data not being received by the ESM at the expected rate. The ESM file directory was not successfully read or no status was received following a BC MP request to retrieve a ESM tune table or emitter parameter file. The MP determined that a emitter report for a 33rd emitter exists which will not be released to the tactical data base. Figure 3-43.
esm dbase 100%
esm dbase 80%
esm degraded esm dir error
U U
esm emitter lost
Mission Processor CDU Annunciations (Sheet 2 of 4) 3-96 ORIGINAL
ANNUNCIATION
RESET ON CLEAR
NOT CLEARABLE
CDU ALERT U
esm initialize
The bus controller mission processor is currently initializing the ESM. The bus controller mission processor resets this annunciation when ESM mode command status transitions from initializing to standby. ESM load error was detected or no ESM tune table/emitter parameter file load response message was received following a BC MP request to load ESM tune table/emitter parameter file. ESM data recorder is stopped. An over temperature condition exists in the FLIR turret unit or the FLIR electronics unit. FTN XXXXX is already in use, where XXXXX is the track number. Excluding reserve fuel, insufficient fuel is available to return to specified destination. A new hostile link object is received or an information difference report is received with a hostile identity. ASC LOB (left outboard) station load inventory input is M299 and store identity is not M299. An over temperature condition exists in the laser rangefinder/designator and needs time to cool down. An over temperature condition exists in the M299 Hellfire missile launcher. An over current condition exists in the M299 Hellfire missile launcher and missile status at M299 station 1, 2, 3, or 4 is set to 9fail9. Any of the following conditions are true: v FMS navigation mode is EGI and EGI bus status is NGO-T (bus A and B failed) and the bus controller CDU bus status is NGO-T. Navigation data source is other than FMS or EGI. v FMS navigation mode is FMS and EGI bus status is NGO-T and the bus controller CDU bus status is NGO-T. Navigation data source is other than FMS or EGI. Figure 3-43. Mission Processor CDU Annunciations (Sheet 3 of 4) U U
esm load error
esm rec stop flir hot ftn XXXXX used fuel alert hostile XXXXX
U U U U U
invalid m299 lrd hot
U U
m299 hot m299 overld
U U
mp nav fail
3-97
ORIGINAL
ANNUNCIATION
RESET ON CLEAR
NOT CLEARABLE
CDU ALERT U
mp nav revert
Any of the following conditions are true: v FMS navigation mode is EGI and EGI bus status is NGO-T (bus A and B failed) and the bus controller CDU bus status is not NGO-T. Navigation data source is FMS. v FMS navigation mode is FMS and EGI bus status is not NGO-T and the bus controller CDU bus status is NGO-T. Navigation data source is EGI.
net sync rcvd
The Link-11 system is in net sync mode and successfully received the net sync transmission and synchronized its time base with the net sync signal. No radio assigned to data link. The automatic transmission threshold percentage (ATTP) of network track numbers (NTN) has been reached. ADLP auto squawk maximum is XX%. An over temperature condition exists in the M299 Hellfire missile launcher power conditioning unit (PCU). The fuel quantity is less than the operator specified or default (300 lbs) reserve fuel quantity. FMS selected datum is not set to 47 (WGS-84). ASC master arm is set to armed while the MCS is on and in Penguin training mode. BC MP determined that the FMS tactical flight plan is inactive since the BC CDU did not respond to BC MP request for tactical flight plan data status. Track xxxxx had a radar track quality of 7 for 4 track file updates, where xxxxx represents the FTN associated with the track. Figure 3-43.
no d/l radio ntn block XX%
U U
pcu hot
reserve fuel set datum 47 set mcs off tfp inactive
U U U U U U
trk xxxxx lost
Mission Processor CDU Annunciations (Sheet 4 of 4)
3-98
ORIGINAL
MESSAGE BREAK ENGAGE
INITIATING CONDITION Attempt made to set the attack type to the attack selection specified by LS1, while the selected system track is not the target and the own helicopter weapon/engagement status is investigate, assigned, weapon assigned, ready to fire, or firing. Attempt made to access the data cartridge while data is currently being up loaded or down loaded. Requested function is not permitted during current missile mode. A subsystem has failed CBIT. LS key adjacent to INIT label on ESM control page was selected. Operator must select this key again to begin ESM initialization. Entered FTN is a duplicate of an existing FTN, where XXXXX represents the duplicate FTN. There is no entry in the scratchpad. Use or key to increment/ decrement FLIR focus by 5. Use or key to increment/ decrement FLIR focus by 50. Use the MFD pull-down menu to increase or decrease FLIR focus in the range of 2025 through 3000 for medium FOV or 3025 through 4000 for narrow FOV. This annunciation is removed upon page exit, or if the operator changes the FOV from medium or narrow FOV to wide FOV, or if the FLIR mode is changed to stow. There is no entry in scratchpad. Use or key to increment/ decrement FLIR gain by 1. Use the MFD pull-down menu to increase or decrease FLIR gain in the range of 0 through 255. This annunciation is removed upon page exit or if the operator changes the mode from manual to automatic or stow. There is no entry in scratchpad. Use or key to increment/ decrement FLIR level by 1. Use the MFD pull-down menu to increase or decrease FLIR level in the range of 0 through 255. This annunciation is removed upon page exit or if the operator changes the mode from manual to automatic or stow. Attempt made to perform IBIT during flight. Attempt made to initiate Hellfire IBIT while DC-2 power is applied to the launcher. Attempt made to initiate IBIT of ASC while ASC master arm is on.
CARTRIDGE IN USE CHANGE MSL MODE U STATUS CONFIRM ESM INIT DUP FTN XXXXX FLIR FOCUS
FLIR GAIN
FLIR LEVEL
GROUND ONLY IBIT INHIBIT IBIT INHIBIT - MA ON
Figure 3-44.
Mission Processor CDU Scratchpad Messages (Sheet 1 of 4)
3-99
ORIGINAL
MESSAGE INVALID ENTRY
INITIATING CONDITION Attempt made to do any of the following: v Insert scratchpad data which does not pass format or range tests. v Select a function when insufficient data has been entered. v Select a non-waypoint entry to call up the data page. v Delete a PDI that cannot be deleted. This annunciation is removed by clear key or selecting a line key for which the entry is allowed.
LOAD ERROR LOAD FAIL MASTER ARM ON MCS PRESENT
Last attempted ASC configuration change was not correctly processed. Cartridge was removed while a mission data recorder/loader restore operation was in progress. Attempt made to turn on Penguin training mode while master arm is on. A station load error exists after a ASC station load inventory check was performed by the BC MP. This annunciation is removed by pressing the LS key with the 9*9 or pressing the ASC station load inventory selection LS key equal to the station load error alert present in the scratchpad or pressing the CLR fixed function key. A station load error exists after a ASC station load inventory check was performed by the BC MP. This annunciation is removed by pressing the LS key with the 9*9 or pressing the ASC station load inventory selection LS key equal to the station load error alert present in the scratchpad or pressing the CLR fixed function key. Attempt made to initiate Penguin training launch while master arm is off, MCS missile ready status is 9not ready9, or Penguin training launch command is already on. Attempt made to turn on Penguin training mode while missile is present. Requested function is not permitted while MCS is in missile training mode. A station load error exists after a ASC station load inventory check was performed by the BC MP. This annunciation is removed by pressing the LS key with the 9*9 or pressing the ASC station load inventory selection LS key equal to the station load error alert present in the scratchpad or pressing the CLR fixed function key. Attempt made to access data loader data when no cartridge is installed.
MK 46 PRESENT
MSL NOT READY
MSL PRESENT NO TRNG MSL TRAINING M299 PRESENT
NO CARTRIDGE
Figure 3-44.
Mission Processor CDU Scratchpad Messages (Sheet 2 of 4) 3-100 ORIGINAL
MESSAGE NO IBIT - BBC NA NO MCS PRESENT
INITIATING CONDITION IBIT is not allowed at this time. A station load error exists after a ASC station load inventory check was performed by the BC MP. This annunciation is removed by pressing the LS key with the 9*9 or pressing the ASC station load inventory selection LS key equal to the station load error alert present in the scratchpad or pressing the CLR fixed function key. A station load error exists after a ASC station load inventory check was performed by the BC MP. This annunciation is removed by pressing the LS key with the 9*9 or pressing the ASC station load inventory selection LS key equal to the station load error alert present in the scratchpad or pressing the CLR fixed function key. A station load error exists after a ASC station load inventory check was performed by the BC MP. This annunciation is removed by pressing the LS key with the 9*9 or pressing the ASC station load inventory selection LS key equal to the station load error alert present in the scratchpad or pressing the CLR fixed function key. Attempt made to press an unused function key. When in TACP mode on the MFD, selection of QUERY/AMPLIFY then selection of a PDI sends a CDU partial page request (scratchpad position only) to the BC MP to display the cursor latitude and longitude in the CDU scratchpad. Requested function is not permitted without ASC control at this CDU station. This annunciation is removed by pressing the LS key adjacent to the 9STN9 label. There is no entry in scratchpad. Use or key to increment/ decrement radar CFAR value by 1. Use the MFD pull-down menu to increase or decrease the radar CFAR value in the range of 0 through 255. This annunciation is removed upon page exit. There is no entry in scratchpad. Use or key to increment/ decrement radar gain by 1. Use the MFD pull-down menu to increase or decrease radar gain in the range of 0 through 31 to set radar gain. This annunciation is removed upon page exit. There is no entry in scratchpad. Use or key to increment/ decrement radar noise value by 1. Use the MFD pull-down menu to increase or decrease radar noise value in the range of 0 through 255. This annunciation is removed upon page exit. There is no entry in scratchpad. Use or key to increment/ decrement radar STC by 1. Use the MFD pull-down menu to increase or decrease radar STC in the range of 0 through 7. This annunciation is removed upon page exit.
NO MK 46 PRESENT
NO M299 PRESENT
NOT AVAILABLE Page Pop: Lat and Long
PRESS STN FOR CTRL
RADAR CFAR
RADAR GAIN
RADAR NOISE
RADAR STC
Figure 3-44.
3-101
ORIGINAL
MESSAGE RADAR TILT
INITIATING CONDITION There is no entry in scratchpad. Use or key to increment/ decrement radar antenna tilt by 0.1. Use the MFD pull-down menu to increase or decrease radar antenna tilt in the range of -15.0 through 15.0 in increments of 0.1. This annunciation is removed upon page exit. Cartridge was removed while a mission data recorder/loader save operation was in progress. There is no entry in scratchpad. Use or key to increment/ decrement radar antenna sector width by 1. Use the MFD pull-down menu to increase or decrease radar antenna sector width in the range of 60 and 300. This annunciation is removed upon page exit. Attempt made to transition the ADLP mode from DISABLED while a DLP loop test is in progress. Requested function is not permitted while altitude hold is on. Requested function is not permitted with ASC aircraft master arm off. Requested function is not permitted while MCS is off.
SAVE FAIL SCTR WD
TEST IN PROGRESS TURN OFF ALT HOLD TURN ON MA TURN ON MCS
Figure 3-44.
3-102
ORIGINAL
ANNUNCIATION
RESET ON CLEAR U
BREAK ENGAGE
Attempt made to set the attack type while the selected system track is not the target and the own helicopter weapon/engagement status is investigate, assigned, weapon assigned, ready to fire, or firing. Attempt made to activate the constant false alarm rate function when in weather radar mode. Message light is active or the mission CDU annunciation table contains an unacknowledged mission CDU annunciation. The tracks are diverging or the CPA solution is outside the tactical grid or CPA has been achieved. The calculated closest point of approach for the designated PDIs is outside the currently selected display area. Attempt made to select a radar range scale too small to maintain the current off-center position. The display scale and radar range are both set to the minimum valid display scale value. Attempt made to increase the display scale beyond which the radar range covers. Selection of a display range that is greater than the selected radar range is prohibited. Attempt made to select a display scale that is too small (while the radar range is not too small) to maintain the current off-center position. The display scale is set to the minimum allowable value. Action caused the data base to be exceeded for the selected function. Attempt made to activate the frequency agility function while weather radar mode is active. FMS flight plan failed since valid flight plan data has not been received for 5 seconds or more. The BC MP will delete all FMS flight plan waypoint records in the database. Excluding reserve fuel, insufficient fuel is available to return to specified destination. Ground stabilization has caused four radii of offcentering on a given display scale. (Alerts operator to select the next higher range scale.) Five radii is maximum allowable offset on any given range scale. Mission Processor MFD Annunciations (Sheet 1 of 3)
CFAR NOT ALLOWED CHECK CDU
CPA NOW CPA OFF DISPLAY DISPLAY SCALE DEFAULT
DISPLAY SCALE TOO LARGE
DISPLAY SCALE TOO SMALL
EXCEED FA NOT ALLOWED FLT PLAN FAIL
FUEL ALERT GND STAB ERROR
Figure 3-45.
3-103
ORIGINAL
ANNUNCIATION
RESET ON CLEAR U
HOOK VERIFY ILLEGAL AIRCRAFT UP MODE ILLEGAL OFF CENTER ILLEGAL PRIORITY START ILLEGAL PRIORITY STOP ILLEGAL RANGE/RPM ILLEGAL SECTOR WIDTH ILLEGAL TRACK START ILLEGAL TRACK STOP INTERCEPT OFF DISPLAY INVALID GRIDLOCK
A function is active, a cursor entry is required, and a position or PDI has not been hooked. Attempt made to change radar display orientation to HDG UP while radar is in ground stabilized mode. Attempt made to off-center the display more than five radii on any given display scale. Attempt made to select a track ID that does not exist when starting a priority track. Invalid target selected to stop priority track or attempt made to stop a priority track when no priority track exists. Attempt made to place the radar in fast sweep mode while radar range is greater than 50 Nm. Attempt made to enter a sector scan width less than 45 degrees or greater than 300 degrees. Invalid target selected as track or attempt made to enter a 21st track into the system. Invalid target selected to stop track or attempt made to delete a stop track ID that does not exist. The calculated intercept for the designated PDI is outside the currently selected display area. The grid coordinate difference between the two selected tracks is greater than 15 Nm for the north or east components. Attempt made to perform an invalid operation. Hellfire missile 1 through 4 timer hot is greater than 30 minutes. The BC MP created a new track FTN and assigned a FLIR track to a tactical database track. An intercept solution cannot be determined or no intercept solution is available. Attempt made to select a smaller radar range scale while display is off centered to the maximum allowed for the currently selected radar and display range scales. Radar has reverted to the default radar range. MP terminated DTS short broadcast processing because own helicopter navigation data (latitude/longitude) is invalid or DTS failed to report within 15 seconds that short broadcast is complete. Mission Processor MFD Annunciations (Sheet 2 of 3) 3-104
INVALID OPN MSL SEEKER SCAN LIMIT NEW FLIR TRACK NO INTERCEPT RADAR RANGE DEFAULT
RETRY TRANSMISSION
Figure 3-45.
ORIGINAL
ANNUNCIATION
RESET ON CLEAR
SCAN INT NOT ALLOWED STC NOT ALLOWED TEST IN PROGRESS
Attempt made to activate the scan integration function while weather radar mode is active. Attempt made to activate the sensitivity time control function while weather radar mode is active. Attempt made to transition the ADLP mode from DISABLED while a DLP loop test is in progress. Mission Processor MFD Annunciations (Sheet 3 of 3) U
Figure 3-45.
3-105
ORIGINAL
MODE FOV STOW SCAN SLAVE MSC SLAVE MANUAL FWD NARROW NARROW 2X NARROW 4X MEDIUM WIDE IMAGE
GAINLVL A/C BRG MANUAL AUTO FOCUS INTENSITY FREEZE POLARITY
GAIN 15 DEG 30 DEG LEVEL BLK HOT WHT HOT FAST SLOW LAP LINEAR RALEIGH
DEF
FG1688
SA
Figure 3-46.
FLIR Menu Structure
3-106
ORIGINAL
CPA INTERCEPT SONAR ATTACK TRK DES REPOSITION UPDATE SIM TRK AGM119 AGM119 WPT AGM114 AGM114 RMT MK46 CANCEL AIR FAST AIR SLOW SURFACE TRK DES PRI TRK REPOSITION
LOB LIB RIB

FG1689
SA
Figure 3-47.
Tactical Aids and Track Menus Structure
3-107 (Reverse Blank)
ORIGINAL
CHAPTER 4
Page Organization and Details

4.1. INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the organization of CDU pages in the mission avionic system and the functions each page performs. 4.2. PAGE ORGANIZATION AND DETAILS The mission avionic system CDU pages are organized into 13 groups. Each group is accessed from a fixed function key (FFK) on the CDU. Figure 4-1 identifies the FFKs that access each group, shows the structure of pages in each group, and references the figures that describe specific page details. Paragraphs 4.2.1 through 4.2.13 provide a brief description of each page group. 4.2.1. Index Page Group. The index page group includes pages for displaying and/or modifying initialization parameters and placing the system in a state of readiness. The IDX key on the CDU provides access to the index pages. 4.2.2. Position Page. The position page displays the present position, track angle, ground speed, wind velocity and direction, static air temperature, and magnetic variation. It is used to enter wind speed, wind direction, and magnetic variation. The PSN key on the CDU provides access to the position page. 4.2.3. Integrated Navigation Page Group. The integrated navigation page group includes pages for selecting INU mode and alignment type and displaying INU, GPS, and DG/VG data. The INAV key on the CDU provides access to the integrated navigation pages. 4.2.4. Flight Plan Page Group. The flight plan page group includes pages that allow the operator to define an active flight plan or an inactive alternate flight plan. The FPLN key on the CDU provides access to the flight plan pages. 4.2.5. Direct-To Page. The direct-to page allows the operator to modify the flight plan to define and immediately execute a new great circle course to a waypoint. The DIR key on the CDU provides access to the direct-to page. 4.2.6. Edit Page Group. The edit page group includes pages that allow the operator to modify an active flight plan or an inactive alternate flight plan. Additional pages lists user waypoints, defines markpoints and mark on top points, and displays tactical flight plan waypoints defined by the mission computer. The EDIT key on the CDU provides access to the edit pages. 4.2.7. Data Page Group. The data page group includes a page for generating 9what if?9 scenarios for computations defined by two flight plan legs or present position and a selected TO waypoint. Another page displays waypoint identifier data. The DATA key on the CDU provides access to the data pages. 4.2.8. Steer Page Group. The steer page group includes pages for displaying navigation data that the FMS computes from navigation sources. The STR key on the CDU provides access to the steer pages. 4.2.9. Communication Page Group. The communication page group includes pages for controlling and configuring the V/UHF radios, HF radio set, and COMSEC equipment. Additional pages enters Havequick parameters, modifies the FMT list, loads the FMT list into each radio, and displays airport frequencies, communication type, and sectorization data. The COM key on the CDU provides access to the communication pages. 4.2.10. Navigation Page Group. The navigation page group includes pages for tuning the civil navigation radios, selecting TACAN and ADF modes, and adjusting marker beacon sensitivity. The NAV key on the CDU provides access to the navigation pages. 4.2.11. IFF Page Group. The IFF page group includes pages for selecting IFF mode and entering IFF codes. The IFF key on the CDU provides access to the IFF pages. 4.2.12. Status Page Group. The status page group includes pages for displaying both overall and detailed status of devices monitored by the FMS and MC. The STAT key on the CDU provides access to the status pages.
4-1
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 4.2.13. Mission Page Group. The mission page group includes pages for controlling and configuring the mission system sub-systems and equipment. The MSN key on the CDU provides access to the mission pages.
4-2
ORIGINAL
KEY IDX
PAGE Index 1 ............................................................................................ Index 2......................................................................................... Model Aircraft ........................................................................... Debug....................................................................................... Bus Analyzer Setup .................................................................... Bus Analyzer Data ..................................................................... Bus Analyzer Status ................................................................... Start 1 .......................................................................................... Fuel Configuration ..................................................................... Chart Datums ............................................................................ Start 2 .......................................................................................... Flux Valve Control...................................................................... Flux Valve Calibration............................................................. Start 3 .......................................................................................... Data Loader Load/Save................................................................. Navigation Configuration 1 ........................................................... Navigation Configuration 2 ........................................................... Navigation Configuration 3 ........................................................... GPS SA/AS .................................................................................. Zeroize ......................................................................................... Mission Zeroize ......................................................................... Mission Start ................................................................................. Tactical Plot ............................................................................... FTN Pool................................................................................ PIM ........................................................................................... Data Link PIM ............................................................................ PIM Data 1/3............................................................................ PIM Data 2/3............................................................................ PIM Data 3/3............................................................................ Fuel Advisory ............................................................................ Figure 4-1. Page Organization (Sheet 1 of 8)
FIGURE 4-2 4-3 4-226 4-227 4-228 4-229 4-230 4-4 4-8 4-7 4-5 4-74 4-75 4-6 4-99 4-76 4-77 4-78 4-73 4-124 4-136 4-125 4-126 4-127 4-128 4-129 4-130 4-131 4-132 4-133
4-3
ORIGINAL
KEY
PAGE Fuel Advisory Config.................................................................. Mission Data Loader/Recorder....................................................... EGI Install .....................................................................................
FIGURE 4-134 4-135 4-123 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-23 4-20 4-24 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-31 4-32 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-36 4-30 4-48 4-49
PSN INAV
Position ............................................................................................ INU/GPS/D Integrated Navigation .................................................... INU Integrated Navigation ................................................................ INU Navigation Data ........................................................................ GPS Integrated Navigation................................................................ GPS Satellite Data............................................................................. FMS GPS Integrated Navigation ........................................................ Vertical Gyro/Directional Gryo Navigation Data ................................ Update............................................................................................. Flight Plan (Initial Display) .................................................................
FPLN
Flight Plan (Scrolled From Initial Display)............................................ Flight Plan Waypoint A..................................................................
DIR EDIT
Flight Plan Accessed with the DIR Key ................................................ Flight Plan Edit 1 .............................................................................. Intercept A .................................................................................... Intercept B..................................................................................... Hold ............................................................................................. Patterns 1 ..................................................................................... Circle MFP................................................................................. Racetrack MFP ........................................................................... Figure Eight MFP ....................................................................... Closed Random Pattern MFP 1.................................................... Closed Random Pattern MFP 2.................................................... Closed Random Pattern MFP 3.................................................... Patterns 2 ..................................................................................... Impromptu 1.............................................................................. Impromptu 2.............................................................................. Figure 4-1. Page Organization (Sheet 2 of 8)
4-4
ORIGINAL
KEY
PAGE Impromptu 3.............................................................................. Ladder ...................................................................................... Sector ....................................................................................... Expanding Square ..................................................................... Track Space............................................................................... FMS Approach.............................................................................. Initial Approach Fix (IAF) Select.................................................. Visual Approach........................................................................ Tactical Approach ...................................................................... Standard Instrument Departures (SIDS) ........................................... SID Transitions ........................................................................... Standard Terminal Arrival Routes (STARS) ....................................... STAR Transitions......................................................................... SAR Freeze/Resume ...................................................................... User Waypoint List ........................................................................ User Waypoint .......................................................................... Tactical Flight Plan ......................................................................... Alternate Flight Plan ...................................................................... Alternate Flight Plan Climb Initialization ...................................... Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Initialization ......................................... Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Summary............................................. Alternate Flight Plan Leg A ......................................................... Alternate Flight Plan Leg B.......................................................... Alternate Flight Plan Leg C ......................................................... Alternate Flight Plan Waypoints .................................................. Alternate Flight Plan Catalog 01-08 ............................................ Alternate Flight Plan Load/Save.................................................. Flight Plan Edit 2 .............................................................................. Markpoint List ............................................................................... Off Route Waypoint List 1.............................................................. Figure 4-1. Page Organization (Sheet 3 of 8)
FIGURE 4-50 4-51 4-52 4-53 4-55 4-37 4-38 4-39 4-40 4-44 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-54 4-56 4-57 4-60 4-63 4-64 4-65 4-66 4-67 4-68 4-69 4-70 4-71 4-72 4-25 4-41 4-58
4-5
ORIGINAL
KEY
PAGE Off Route Waypoint List 2.............................................................. Duplicate Identifiers........................................................................... Flight Plan With Discontinuity ............................................................
FIGURE 4-59 4-21 4-22 4-42 4-43 4-61 4-62 4-79 4-80 4-81 4-82 4-83 4-84 4-85 4-86 4-87 4-88 4-89 4-90 4-91 4-92 4-93 4-94 4-95 4-96 4-97 4-98 4-100 4-101 4-102
DATA
Data ................................................................................................ Ident Data.....................................................................................
STR
Lateral Steer ..................................................................................... Vertical Steer ....................................................................................
COM
Communication Radio ....................................................................... V/UHF Control.............................................................................. V/UHF Presets ........................................................................... V/UHF Presets xx ................................................................... Airport Frequency ...................................................................... V/UHF Havequick Setup ............................................................ V/UHF MWOD Entry ............................................................. V/UHFx FMT Load ................................................................. HF Control .................................................................................... HF Presets ................................................................................. HF Preset xx........................................................................... COMSEC Control ..........................................................................
NAV
CNAV .............................................................................................. VOR/ILS Control ........................................................................... Civil Navigation Radio Information ............................................. TACAN Control ............................................................................. ADF Control..................................................................................
IFF
IFF Control ....................................................................................... IFF Mode 1/2/3/C ....................................................................... IFF Mode 4 ...................................................................................
STAT
System Status.................................................................................... FMS Status.................................................................................... CDU Status ................................................................................... Figure 4-1. Page Organization (Sheet 4 of 8)
4-6
ORIGINAL
KEY
PAGE Data Loader Status ........................................................................ Communications Status .................................................................. V/UHF Status ............................................................................ HF Status................................................................................... Navigation Sensor Status ............................................................... EGI Status ................................................................................. ADC Status................................................................................ FV Status ................................................................................... Doppler Status ........................................................................... DCU System Status ........................................................................ DCU Status................................................................................ DEC Status ................................................................................ Rotor Overspeed Status .............................................................. MFD System Status ........................................................................ Pilot Inboard MFD Status ............................................................ CNAV Status ................................................................................. VOR Status................................................................................ ADF Status ................................................................................ IFF Status................................................................................... TACAN Status............................................................................ Mission Status 1 ............................................................................ Mission Data Loader Status ........................................................ Pilot Mission Processor Status...................................................... Copilot Mission Processor Status ................................................. TSO Mission Processor Status ..................................................... Mission Status 2 ............................................................................ Sonar Status .............................................................................. ESM Status ................................................................................ Radar Status .............................................................................. FLIR Status ................................................................................. Figure 4-1. Page Organization (Sheet 5 of 8)
FIGURE 4-103 4-104 4-105 4-106 4-107 4-108 4-109 4-110 4-111 4-112 4-113 4-114 4-115 4-116 4-117 4-118 4-119 4-120 4-121 4-122 4-209 4-210 4-211 4-212 4-213 4-214 4-215 4-216 4-217 4-218
4-7
ORIGINAL
KEY
PAGE DLP Status ................................................................................. DTS Status ................................................................................. Mission Status 3 ............................................................................ M299 Hellfire ............................................................................ CMDS Status ............................................................................. MCS Status................................................................................ ASC Status ................................................................................
FIGURE 4-219 4-220 4-221 4-157 4-222 4-223 4-224 4-137 4-138 4-158 4-159 4-139 4-140 4-141 4-142 4-143 4-144 4-145 4-146 4-147 4-148 4-149 4-150 4-151 4-153 4-152 4-162 4-186 4-154
MSN
Mission Control................................................................................. Weapon Summary ........................................................................ Octal Codes .............................................................................. Bomb Rack Status ...................................................................... ASC Station Load .......................................................................... ASC Weapon Control (Empty)........................................................ Weapon Control (MK 46 Circle)..................................................... Torpedo Depth ........................................................................... Torpedo Ceiling ......................................................................... Torpedo Mode ........................................................................... Torpedo Arm Select.................................................................... ASC Weapon Control (MK 46 Snake) ............................................ Torpedo Course Load ................................................................. ASC Weapon Control (MK 46 HATS) ............................................. Torpedo Depth/Ceiling ............................................................... 119B Missile ................................................................................. 119B Setup (1/2).......................................................................... 119B Missile Mode .................................................................... 119B Setup (2/2).......................................................................... Tote .............................................................................................. Tactical Aids Index ..................................................................... 119B Missile Training ............................................................. Figure 4-1. Page Organization (Sheet 6 of 8)
4-8
ORIGINAL
KEY
PAGE Attack (MK46, AGM114, or AGM119) ................................... Intercept................................................................................. Closest Point Of Approach (CPA)............................................. Launch Panel Simulation Training ............................................ Training Complete .................................................................. Track Summary.......................................................................... Track Miscellaneous (Air Category System Track)...................... Track Miscellaneous (Surface Category System Track) ............... Track Miscellaneous (Sub-Surface Category System Track) ........ Link Object IFF.................................................................... Link Object IFF (LRO)........................................................... Track Miscellaneous (LRO)....................................................... Link Object Intelligence ........................................................... Link Object IFF.................................................................... Link Object IFF (LRO)........................................................... Link Object Intelligence (LRO) .................................................. Marker...................................................................................... ASW Contact ............................................................................ Link Object Intelligence ........................................................... Link Object IFF ....................................................................... ESM Contact.............................................................................. Link Object Intelligence...................................................................... Link Object IFF.................................................................................. Graphics Index .......................................................................... Vector (Static/Moving) ............................................................ Circle (Static/Moving)............................................................. Circle (Slaved)........................................................................ Circle (Expanding).................................................................. Vector (Slaved 1) ....................................................................... Vector (Slaved 2) ....................................................................... Figure 4-1. Page Organization (Sheet 7 of 8)
FIGURE 4-187 4-188 4-189 4-155 4-156 4-163 4-165 4-166 4-167 4-177 4-178 4-168 4-175 4-177 4-178 4-176 4-169 4-171 4-175 4-177 4-173 4-175 4-177 4-179 4-180 4-183 4-184 4-185 4-181 4-182
4-9
ORIGINAL
KEY
PAGE ESM Control ................................................................................. Tone Control .............................................................................. Radar Control ............................................................................... Radar Mode .............................................................................. FLIR Control .................................................................................. Link Setup ..................................................................................... Link Parameters ......................................................................... Filter Settings ............................................................................. Sector Filter............................................................................ Geographic Filter ................................................................... Gridlock .................................................................................... Link Reception Quality ................................................................... Link Message (Update DLRP) .......................................................... Link Message (TN Conflict)............................................................. Link Message (Position Conflict) ...................................................... Link Message (Change Data Order) ............................................... Link Message (Information Difference Report) .................................. Link Message (Command Message) ................................................ Link Message (Battle Damage Report) ............................................. Link Message (Weapon/Engagement Status) ................................... Link Message (Own Helo Controlling Unit Report) ........................... Track Summary (LRO) ....................................................................... Marker (LRO).................................................................................... ASW Contact (LRO) .......................................................................... ESM Contact (LRO) ........................................................................... Figure 4-1. Page Organization (Sheet 8 of 8)
FIGURE 4-160 4-161 4-190 4-191 4-192 4-193 4-194 4-195 4-196 4-197 4-198 4-199 4-200 4-201 4-202 4-203 4-204 4-205 4-206 4-207 4-208 4-164 4-170 4-172 4-174
4-10
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: index 1 FUNCTION: Accesses FMS and mission pages.
ACTIVATION: By pressing the IDX key or by vertical scrolling from the Index 2 page. LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 FMS START FMS DATA LOADER NAV CONFIG GPS SA/AS MSN START DATA LOADER MSN TEST LOCK / ZERO DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Accesses the FMS Start 1 page (Figure 4-4). Accesses the FMS Data Loader page (Figure 4-99). Accesses the Navigation Configuration 1 page (Figure 4-76). Accesses the GPS Selective Availability / Anti-Spoof (SA/AS) page (Figure 4-73). Accesses the Mission Start page (Figure 4-125). Accesses the Mission Data Loader page (Figure 4-135). Accesses the Test pages. Refer to SA4047-S70B6-ATM000. Accesses the Zeroize page (Figure 4-124). Accesses the Index 2 page (Figure 4-3) and wraps around. Figure 4-2. Index 1 Page
4-11
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: index 2 FUNCTION: Accesses the Bus Analyzer Setup page (Figure 4-228), the Model Aircraft page (Figure 4-226), and the Debug page (Figure 4-227). ACTIVATION: By vertical scrolling from the Index 1 page (Figure 4-2). LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE MONITOR FUNCTION Actuation with 9MONITOR9 in the scratchpad accesses the Bus Analyzer Setup page (Figure 4-228). From that point on until power down or until a different CDU becomes bus controller, 9MONITOR9 will be displayed adjacent to LS1 and actuation will access the Bus Analyzer Setup page (Figure 4-228). If the system is powered down or a different CDU becomes bus controller, the 9MONITOR9 will be blanked and LS1 will become inoperative. Actuation with weight on wheels (WOW) accesses the Model Aircraft page (Figure 4-226). Else, actuation displays the 9GROUND ONLY9 scratchpad message. -
LS2
MODEL
LS3 thru LS5, LS7 and LS8 LS6
Blank
DEBUG
Actuation with 9DEBUG9 in the scratchpad accesses the Debug page (Figure 4-227). From that point on until power down or until a different CDU becomes bus controller, 9DEBUG9 will be displayed adjacent to LS6 and actuation will access the Debug page (Figure 4-227). If the system is powered down or a different CDU becomes bus controller, the 9DEBUG9 will be blanked and LS6 will become inoperative. Accesses the Index 1 page (Figure 4-2). Figure 4-3. Index 2 Page
4-12
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: start 1 FUNCTION: (Figure 4-8). Displays and enters location, date, time, and datum. Accesses the Fuel Configuration page
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS1 on the Index 1 page (Figure 4-2) or by vertical scrolling from the Start 2 page (Figure 4-5) or the Start 3 page (Figure 4-6). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the initialization position. Actuation with a position (entered as any location but always displayed as a latitude/longitude in WGS-84 datum) in the scratchpad enters that position. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the displayed position into the scratchpad. LS2 FREEZE Actuation with an arrow freezes the position displayed on data line 1 for display on subsequent CDU power on and initialization. Actuation with a 9*9 discontinues the freeze function on the position displayed on data line 1. LS3 [ ] Displays the date. Manually entered date will be overwritten by GPS date once the GPS receiver time data is valid. Actuation with a date in the scratchpad enters that date for the system date. Actuation with a blank in the scratchpad copies the date into the scratchpad. LS4 LS6 FUEL UTC DISPLAY Accesses the Fuel Configuration page (Figure 4-8). Actuation when an arrow is displayed changes the arrow to a 9*9 and displays universal time coordinated (UTC) time on the annunciation line in the form xxxx:xx. Actuation when an 9*9 is displayed changes the 9*9 to an arrow and blanks the display of UTC time on the annunciation line. Figure 4-4. Start 1 Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-13
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS7 [ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays the time. Manually entered time will be overwritten by GPS UTC time once the GPS receiver time data is valid. Actuation with a time in the scratchpad enters that time for the system time. The display at LS7 defaults to blanks when the system time has not been entered or the GPS time has not been acquired. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the time into the scratchpad.
LS8
DATUM[
Displays the number of the selected datum. Actuation with a chart number in the scratchpad enters that datum as the system datum. The datum default is 47 (WGS-84). Actuation with 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the datum to the default. Actuation with a blank scratchpad accesses the Chart Datums page (Figure 4-7) for the datum number displayed.
Figure 4-4.
Accesses the Start 3 page (Figure 4-6). Accesses the Start 2 page (Figure 4-5). Start 1 Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-14
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: start 2 FUNCTION: Selects INU alignment types, initializes INU alignment, toggles INU AUTO NAV on/off, and accesses the Flux Valve Control page (Figure 4-74). ACTIVATION: By scrolling from the Start 1 page (Figure 4-4) or the Start 3 page (Figure 4-6). LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE LAND or SEA FUNCTION Toggles between 9LAND9 or 9SEA9. The 9LAND9 or 9SEA9 selection affects the available alignment types selectable via LS2. The default is the last selected state. This toggle also controls the Doppler land/sea mode. Toggles through the available selections of INU alignment types of the EGI. Possible alignment types are 9GC9 (gyrocompass), 9SH9 (stored heading), 9GPS9, 9AIR9 (in-air), 9AIR-G9 (in-air with GPS aiding), and 9AIR-D9 (in-air with Doppler aiding). The availability of the various types are controlled by the 9LAND9/9SEA9 selection of LS1 and by whether the helicopter is airborne or not. Displays the EGI identifier and the current INU mode for the EGI. The possible modes are 9OFF9, 9ON9, 9HOLD9, 9AHRS9, 9ALN9, 9C-ALN9, 9RDY9 and 9NAV9. Initializes the GPS and starts INU alignment. Initialization (including alignment) of the EGI is complete when the INU portion of the EGI is commanded to the NAV mode and the EGIs current INU mode transitions from 9RDY9 to 9NAV9. Toggles the AUTO NAV function between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When AUTO NAV is selected to 9ON9, the INU is automatically commanded to navigate (9NAV9) mode when the current INU mode is in the navigate ready (9RDY9) state. If NAV mode is active, the AUTO NAV selection will be blank. Accesses the Flux Valve Control page (Figure 4-74). Accesses the Start 1 page (Figure 4-4). Accesses the Start 3 page (Figure 4-6). Figure 4-5. Start 2 Page
LS2 LS6
and
ALN TYPE
info line
LS3 LS7
and
INIT
LS4 LS8
and
AUTO NAV
LS5 -
FV CTRL
4-15
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: start 3 FUNCTION: Loads an alternate flight plan, erases flight plan and FMS flight data, accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Catalog 01-08 page (Figure 4-71), replaces a flight plan with an alternate plan, and loads the FMS with flight data stored on the data loader cartridge. ACTIVATION: By scrolling from the Start 1 page (Figure 4-4) or the Start 2 page (Figure 4-5). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and DISPLAY CUE xx/xx/xx TO xx/xx/xx FUNCTION Displays the effective period of the navigation database that is stored on the data loader cartridge. If no database is available (no cartridge, no database on cartridge, or a data loader failure), dashes are displayed. Displays the label or number of the last alternate loaded in the CDU. The display is updated if a different alternate is loaded from the Alternate Flight Plan Load/Save page (Figure 4-72). If the alternate flight plan is zeroized via the zeroize function, the display adjacent to LS2 is blank. Actuation with a alternate flight plan number or label in the scratchpad and with that alternate on the data cartridge, prompts the 9CONF LOAD XXXXXXXX9 scratchpad message, where XXXXXXXX is the label or number of the entered flight plan. Actuation again with that alternate flight plan available on the data cartridge confirms and loads the alternate flight plan into the CDU and copies the number or label into the brackets on data line 2. With a blank scratchpad, LS2 is inoperative. LS3 LS4 LS6 LS7 ERASE FPLN ERASE FLT/DATA ALTN CATLG FPLN REPLACE Erases the flight plan. Confirmation is required to complete the operation. Erases the FMS flight data. Confirmation is required to complete the operation. Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Catalog 01-08 page (Figure 4-71) for selection of an alternate flight plan. Actuation replaces the flight plan with the alternate plan. Confirmation is required to complete the operation. Loads the FMS with flight data stored on the data loader cartridge. Confirmation is required to complete the operation. Accesses the Start 2 page (Figure 4-5). Accesses the Start 1 page (Figure 4-4). Figure 4-6. Start 3 Page
LS2
LS8
FLT/DATA LOAD
4-16
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: chart datums FUNCTION: Selects chart datums for navigation solutions.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS8 on the Start 1 page (Figure 4-4). LS KEY LS1, LS3, LS4 LS5 LS8 LS2, and DISPLAY CUE (associated datum) FUNCTION Displays the chart datums in numerical order. Selects the associated datum to be used as the reference frame for navigation solutions and accesses the Start 1 page (Figure 4-4). Accesses additional chart datum pages in the order of decreasing datum number with wrap around from the beginning of the chart datums list to the end of the chart datums list. Accesses additional chart datum pages in the order of increasing datum number with wrap around from the end of the chart datums list to the beginning of the chart datums list. Figure 4-7. PAGE TITLE: fuel config FUNCTION: Selects the external fuel tank configuration. Chart Datums Page
thru
Blank
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS4 on the Start 1 page (Figure 4-4). LS KEY LS1, LS3 thru LS7 LS2 Blank TANKS: DISPLAY CUE Toggles the external fuel tank configuration between NONE, LEFT INBOARD, RIGHT INBOARD, L & R INBOARD. Returns to the Start 1 page (Figure 4-4). Figure 4-8. Fuel Configuration Page FUNCTION
LS8
RTN
4-17
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: position FUNCTION: Displays the present position, track angle, ground speed, wind velocity and direction, static air temperature, and magnetic variation. Sets wind speed, wind direction, and magnetic variation. ACTIVATION: By pressing the PSN function key. LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the present position determined by the navigation solution selected on the Lateral Steer page (Figure 4-61). The selected navigation solution is shown on the title line. If the selected navigation solution is invalid, the position adjacent to LS1 will be dashed. Displays the track angle for the selected navigation solution. TAS xxx ] Displays the ground speed (GS) for the navigation solution and the selected true air speed (TAS). Actuation with a computed wind, displays the wind velocity for the navigation solution selected, the headwind/tailwind vector component, and the crosswind vector component. When sensor data is no longer valid or usable to compute wind velocity, data line 3 will display the latched wind velocity (last computed wind velocity) or the entered wind with brackets, the headwind/tailwind vector component, and the crosswind vector component. The previously computed wind is used as the default for the entered wind value. When no computed, latched, or entered wind is available, dashes are displayed and direction arrows removed. When the FMS is receiving a computed wind, LS3 is inoperative. When the FMS is not receiving a computed wind and displaying an INU wind for INU only selected solutions, LS3 is inoperative. When the FMS is not receiving a computed wind, actuation with a wind entry in the scratchpad enters the wind. When the FMS is not receiving a computed wind, actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the wind entry into the scratchpad. When the FMS is not receiving a computed wind, actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the wind speed to the default value of 0 knots and the wind direction to the default value of 360 degrees. Figure 4-9. Position Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
LS2 info line LS3
TRK xxx GS xxx WND[
4-18
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 SAT ---C
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays the static air temperature from the ADC. If the static air temperature data or selected navigation solution is not valid, the SAT field will be dashed. -
LS5, LS7, and LS8 LS6
Blank VAR*[ ]
Displays the present position magnetic variation for the selected navigation solution. Magnetic variation is displayed as E (the variation is east of true north) or W (the variation is west of true north) where magnetic variation is defined as true north minus magnetic north. If no magnetic variation tables are available, the magnetic variation field is dashed. Actuation with a magnetic variation in the scratchpad causes the FMS to use that magnetic variation value in lieu of tabled magnetic variation for all parameters requiring magnetic variation. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the magnetic variation value and the FMS will use the tabled magnetic variation for computations requiring magnetic variation. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the magnetic variation into the scratchpad. Figure 4-9. Position Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-19
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: INU/GPS/D inav FUNCTION: Selects INU mode and alignment type.
ACTIVATION: By pressing the INAV fixed function key and scrolling laterally as necessary to the other integrated navigation pages in the order: INU/GPS/D, INU, GPS, and FMS GPS INAV. LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the present position for the navigation solution shown on the title line. Displays the 95% probable error (the position index) for the selected navigation solution. Displays the difference between the selected navigation solution and the source of the navigation data on this page. Actuation causes the FMS to command the INU to navigate mode. If the INU is being aligned and AUTO NAV is set to 9ON9 on the Start 2 page (Figure 4-5) for the alignment, actuation commands the INU into navigate mode and AUTO NAV is blanked. LS5 LS6 Blank LAND or SEA Toggles between 9LAND9 or 9SEA9. This selection is linked to the LAND/SEA alignment type toggle on the Start 2 page (Figure 4-5). The default state is the last selected state. This toggle also controls the Doppler land/sea mode. Accesses the Update page (Figure 4-17). Scrolls laterally to the other integrated navigation pages in the order: INU/GPS/D, INU, GPS, FMS GPS INAV and wraps around. Figure 4-10. INU/GPS/D Integrated Navigation Page
95%ERR DIFF
LS4
ENABLE NAV
LS7 LS8 -
Blank UPDATE bc
4-20
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: INU inav FUNCTION: Selects INU mode.
ACTIVATION: By pressing the INAV fixed function key and scrolling laterally as necessary to the other integrated navigation pages in the order: INU/GPS/D, INU, GPS, and FMS GPS INAV. Also by vertically scrolling from the INU Navigation Data page (Figure 4-12). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the present position for the navigation solution shown on the title line. Displays the alignment circular error probability for the INU. Displays the difference between the selected navigation solution and the source of the navigation data on this page. Actuation causes the FMS to attempt to command the INU to navigate mode. If the INU is being aligned and AUTO NAV is set to 9ON9 on the Start 2 page (Figure 4-5) for the alignment, actuation commands the INU into navigate mode and AUTO NAV is blanked. LS5 LS8 thru Blank bc Accesses the INU Navigation Data page (Figure 4-12) and wraps around. Scrolls laterally to the other integrated navigation pages in the order: INU/GPS/D, INU, GPS, FMS GPS INAV and wraps around. Figure 4-11. INU Integrated Navigation Page
ALN CEP DIFF
LS4
ENABLE NAV
4-21
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: INU nav data FUNCTION: Displays INU pitch, roll, and heading.
ACTIVATION: By vertically scrolling from the INU Integrated Navigation page (Figure 4-11). LS KEY LS1, LS5 thru LS8 LS2 LS3 LS4 Blank PITCH ROLL xxx xxx xxx DISPLAY CUE Displays the pitch angle. Displays the roll angle. Displays the true heading or magnetic heading dependent upon the MAG/TRUE toggle on the Navigation Configuration 2 page (Figure 4-77). Accesses the INU Integrated Navigation page (Figure 4-11) and wraps around. Figure 4-12. INU Navigation Data Page FUNCTION
HEADING
4-22
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: GPS inav FUNCTION: Displays GPS present position, 95% probable error, number of satellites being tracked, and receiver state and accesses the GPS Satellite Data page (Figure 4-14). ACTIVATION: By pressing the INAV fixed function key and scrolling laterally as necessary to the other integrated navigation pages in the order: INU/GPS/D, INU, GPS, and FMS GPS INAV. Also by pressing LS8 on the GPS Satellite Data page (Figure 4-14). LS KEY LS1 [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the present position for the GPS receiver. The GPS navigation solution is displayed regardless of its validity. If no position is received, dashes are displayed. Displays the 95% probable error derived from the GPS estimated horizontal error (EHE). Displays the difference between the selected navigation solution and the displayed GPS solution. Displays the total number of satellites being tracked (sum of the number of satellites in state 3 operation and in state 5 operation). Also displays the receiver state (5, 3, or 9-9). The receiver state will be 5 if four satellites in state 5 operation are currently being tracked. The receiver state will be 3 if any number of satellites in state 3 operation are currently being tracked. The receiver state will be dashed if three or fewer satellites are tracked in state 5 and no satellites are tracked in state 3. Accesses the GPS Satellite Data page (Figure 4-14). Scrolls laterally to the other integrated navigation pages in the order: INU/GPS/D, INU, GPS, FMS GPS INAV and wraps around. Figure 4-13. GPS Integrated Navigation Page
LS2 LS3 LS4
95%ERR DIFF STATE
LS5 LS7 LS8 -
thru
Blank SATS bc
4-23
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: GPS satellite data FUNCTION: Displays satellite numbers, the carrier to noise ratio, and the state number tracking state for the satellites being tracked. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS8 on the GPS Integrated Navigation page (Figure 4-13). LS KEY LS1 LS5 LS2 LS6 and SATS DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the satellite numbers of the satellite vehicles being tracked. When no data is available for a satellite, 9--9 is displayed. Displays the carrier to noise ratio for the satellites being tracked. When no data is available for a satellite, 9--9 is displayed. Displays the frequency (1 or 2) and code type (P, Y, or C) for the satellites being tracked. When no data is available for a satellite, 9--9 is displayed. Displays the state number tracking state for the satellites being tracked. The possible tracks include: S - Search for satellite signal - States 1 and 2. T - Satellite signal is being tracked - States 4 and 6. I - Satellite signal track is degraded due to interference, jamming, or partial obscuration - State 3. D - Satellite signal is being tracked and data is being collected - State 5. R - Satellite signal has been lost and recovery operations are being attempted - State 7. When no data is available for a satellite, 9--9 is displayed. LS4 LS8 Blank RTN Accesses the GPS Integrated Navigation page (Figure 4-13). Figure 4-14. GPS Satellite Data Page
and
C/N
info line
FQ/CODE
LS3 LS7
and
STATE
4-24
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: ---/D/H inav FUNCTION: Displays FMS GPS present position, 95% probable error, heading, true airspeed, and difference data. Enters and copies FMS GPS heading and true airspeed. ACTIVATION: By pressing the INAV fixed function key and scrolling laterally as necessary to the other integrated navigation pages in the order: INU/GPS/D, INU, GPS, and FMS GPS INAV. Also by vertically scrolling from the VG/DG Navigation Data page (Figure 4-16). LS KEY LS1 [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the present position for the FMS GPS navigation solution shown on the title line. If no FMS GPS navigation solution position is received or can be computed, dashes are displayed. Displays the 95% probable error derived from the GPS EHE. Displays the difference between the selected navigation solution and the displayed GPS solution. Displays the FMS GPS integrated navigation solutions heading. When the navigation solution does not have heading data, dashes are displayed. If the FMS GPS navigation solution degrades to ---/-/- or BACKUP, brackets are displayed around the heading value allowing the operator to enter or delete the heading value or copy the value into the scratchpad. When the navigation solution is not 9BACKUP9 or 9Nav Fail9, LS4 is inoperative. Actuation with a heading entry in the scratchpad enters the heading. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the heading entry into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the heading to dashes. LS5 LS7 LS6 and Blank UPDATE If GPS is not available as part of the FMS GPS solution, 9UPDATE9 is displayed adjacent to LS6. Actuation will then access the Update page (Figure 4-17). FMS GPS Integrated Navigation Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
LS2 LS3 LS4
95%ERR DIFF HDG xxx
Figure 4-15.
4-25
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS8 TAS xxx kts
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays the FMS GPS integrated navigation solutions true airspeed. When the navigation solution does not have true airspeed data, dashes are displayed. If the FMS GPS navigation solution degrades to 9---/-/-9 or 9BACKUP9, brackets are displayed around the true airspeed value allowing the operator to enter or delete the true airspeed value or copy the value into the scratchpad. When the navigation solution is not 9BACKUP9 or 9Nav Fail9, LS8 is inoperative. Actuation with a true airspeed entry in the scratchpad enters the true airspeed. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the true airspeed entry into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the true airspeed to dashes.
bc
Scrolls laterally to the other integrated navigation pages in the order: INU/GPS/D, INU, GPS, FMS GPS INAV and wraps around. Accesses the VG/DG Navigation Data page (Figure 4-16) and wraps around. FMS GPS Integrated Navigation Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 4-15.
4-26
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: vg/dg nav data FUNCTION: Displays DG heading and displays pitch and roll angles for VG1 and VG2.
ACTIVATION: By vertically scrolling from the FMS GPS Integrated Navigation page (Figure 4-13). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 VG1 PITCH ROLL HEADING DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the label 9VG19. Displays the VG1 pitch angle. Displays the VG1 roll angle. Displays the DG heading which is the raw magnetic heading from the DG device. This value is not affected by the MAG/TRUE toggle on the Navigation Configuration 2 page (Figure 4-77). Displays the label 9VG29. Displays the VG2 pitch angle. Displays the VG2 roll angle. Accesses the FMS GPS Integrated Navigation page (Figure 4-13) and wraps around. Vertical Gyro/Directional Gryo Navigation Data Page
LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 -
VG2 PITCH ROLL Blank
Figure 4-16.
4-27
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: update FUNCTION: Displays the current or frozen position of the navigation source and the location of the source being used for the update and allows for entry of a check point position and update data. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS6 on the FMS GPS Integrated Navigation page (Figure 4-13). LS KEY LS1 LS5 LS2 and :MANUAL DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the current or frozen position of the navigation source displayed on the title line. Toggles between navigation sources that may be used for performing an update to the integrated navigation solution. Displays the difference between the navigation solution and the navigation source or entered position. Displays the location of the source being used for the update. When the source is VOR/TCN, the location must be entered in the form of an identifier/bearing/slant/range. When data line 2 is toggled to the current navigation solution, LS3 will be inoperative. Toggling the navigation source on data line 2 to MANUAL or VOR/TCN allows for entry of a check point position. When a check point position is entered while in MANUAL mode, an arrow is displayed adjacent to LS6 and the display on data line 4 will be blanked. This action is linked to and takes effect on all position update pages. When a VOR/TCN update mode is entered, actuation with a properly formatted identifier/bearing/slant range enters the data for a potential update, causes an arrow to be displayed adjacent to LS6, and causes the display on data line 4 to be blanked. This action is linked to and takes effect on all position update pages. For VOR/TCN mode, upon entry of a waypoint definition copied from another location via the scratchpad, the latitude/longitude will be recalculated based on a slant range calculation. Figure 4-17. Update Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
info line LS3, LS7
UPDATE DIFF PT[ ]
4-28
ORIGINAL
LS KEY
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the displayed waypoint into the scratchpad. For VOR/TCN mode, place/bearing/distance format type waypoints copied from this location into the scratchpad will not retain the waypoint location definition as derived by the slant range calculation. Only the waypoint format will be retained for entry into another location. Selection with a 9-9 in the scratchpad while in MANUAL mode will set the check point position to the active waypoint. If in VOR/TCN update mode, the checkpoint position will be blanked. This action is linked to and takes effect on all position update pages. For MANUAL mode only, the automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database function is allowed for LS3 and LS7.
LS4
ACCEPT
Actuation accepts the correction. If accepted, the arrow will change to an 9*9 and the arrow adjacent to LS8 will be blanked. After accepting the update the navigation solution will be updated by the amount displayed on the information line, the navigation solution present position on data line 1 will become active, the 9*9 will be replaced with an arrow adjacent to LS6, and the difference between the two navigation sources will be displayed on the information line. LS4 will be inoperative when an arrow is not being displayed. Actuation freezes the position displayed on data line 1, freezes the difference displayed on the information line, and freezes the display on data line 3. Rejects the update. The position on data line 1 becomes active, the current navigation solution on data line 3 becomes active, and the dynamic difference between the two navigation sources is displayed on the information line. Scrolls laterally to the other update pages and wraps around. Figure 4-17. Update Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
LS6
FREEZE*
LS7 LS8
Blank REJECT
bc
4-29
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: fpln FUNCTION: Displays and modifies flight plan waypoints and attributes.
ACTIVATION: By pressing the FPLN key or by line select key from the Flight Plan Edit 2 page (Figure 4-25), Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63), Hold page (Figure 4-28), Intercept A page (Figure 4-26), IAF Select page (Figure 4-38), Closed Random Pattern MFP page (Figure 4-34), Circle MFP page (Figure 4-31), Racetrack MFP page (Figure 4-32), Figure Eight MFP page (Figure 4-33), SID Transition page (Figure 4-45), STAR Transition page (Figure 4-47), Tactical Approach page (Figure 4-40), Visual Approach page (Figure 4-39), Impromptu Page 1 (Figure 4-48), Ladder page (Figure 4-51), Sector page (Figure 4-52), or Expanding Square page (Figure 4-53). LS KEY LS1 CRS DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the course to the active waypoint. The course is in 9T9 if the True/Mag selection is set to true or if no magnetic variation or declination data is available for the active waypoint. The pattern course orientation is displayed when a holding pattern, course reversal, or MFP (except for a closed random pattern) becomes active. The flight plan inbound course to the fix point of a closed random pattern is displayed during the execution of the CRP. If a discontinuity is active, the computed course is dashed. If there is no flight plan, the computed course is blank. Displays the parallel course offset for the flight plan when not in flyover mode. Course offsets are displayed as 9R9 or 9L9 followed by a distance from 0.1 to 53.9 nautical miles (99.9 kilometers). Displays the waypoint sequencing mode (AUTO, FLYOVER, or MAN). AUTO enables the FMS to automatically sequence waypoints in the flight plan. FLYOVER enables the FMS to automatically sequence waypoints in the flight plan but forces flying over the waypoint. MAN disables any sequencing of waypoints and requires pilot interaction. Inserts a crew selected inbound/outbound course for the active waypoint when a course is in the scratchpad. Actuation when 9FINAL APPR CRS XXX_9 is in the scratchpad following a Direct-To the FAF/runway extension point of an approach inserts the final approach course from the FAF/runway extension point to the MAP. Figure 4-18. Flight Plan Page (Initial Display) (Sheet 1 of 3)
4-30
ORIGINAL
LS KEY
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Enters a parallel course offset course in units corresponding to the state of the GEO/COORD reference when a offset is in the scratchpad and the flight mode is not flyover. This is prohibited when flyover flight mode is selected at LS5. The parallel offset is also canceled when flyover flight mode is entered. Right 9R9 or left 9L9 is required as the first character and a valid range is 0.1 to 53.9 nautical miles (99.9 kilometers). Deletes a parallel course offset if the scratchpad contains: 90.09, 9.09, 900.09, 90.009, 900.009, or 909, or 9L9 or 9R9 with any combination of zeros.
LS2, LS3, and LS4
Displays the waypoint, followed by waypoint coordinates or identifier, followed by any waypoint attributes defined for the waypoint. Inserts a waypoint from the scratchpad at the point corresponding to the line select key pressed. All subsequent waypoints will move down in the flight plan. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the waypoint adjacent to the line select key including any discontinuity. Actuation with a bearing/distance in the scratchpad copies the waypoint corresponding to the line select key pressed into the scratchpad with the bearing/distance offset amended to the waypoint position. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the corresponding waypoint into the scratchpad.
info line LS5
xxx/xxxnm MAN, AUTO, or FLYOVER
Displays the course and distance out of the active waypoint to the next waypoint. Toggles the flight plan advancing mode between 9MAN9 (manual), 9AUTO9 (automatic), and 9FLYOVER9 modes. When 9FLYOVER9 mode is selected, the parallel offset entry is prohibited.
Figure 4-18.
Flight Plan Page (Initial Display) (Sheet 2 of 3)
4-31
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS6, LS7, and LS8
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with any scratchpad entry other than 9-9 or scratchpad message of 9ADD ALTN BEFORE?9, 9ATTACH xxx AT?9, or 9INSERT xxx BEFORE?9 accesses the Flight Plan Waypoint page for the waypoint corresponding to the line select key pressed. An attribute may be deleted by entering a 9-9 in the scratchpad and pressing the line select key adjacent to the attribute. If a waypoint has multiple attributes associated with it, the right most attribute will be deleted. The 9I9 (intercept), 9S9 (SID), 9R9 (STAR), and approach 9M9, 9D9, and 9F9 attributes cannot be deleted from the flight plan. Actuation when 9ADD ALTN BEFORE?9 message is displayed inserts the alternate flight plan waypoints into the flight plan starting at the line adjacent to the selected line select key. Actuation when 9ATTACH xxx AT?9 message is displayed attaches the parameters associated with the scratchpad to the waypoint associated with the line select key pressed. This waypoint will then become the fix point for the specified MFP or hold. Actuation when 9INSERT xxx BEFORE?9 message is displayed inserts the new MFP, FMS approach, SID, STAR, or intercept into the flight plan at the location prior to the waypoint associated with the line select key pressed. Whatever was displayed on the line prior to the insertion point will move down in the flight plan.
Accesses additional waypoints. Scrolling up accesses waypoints in the order of decreasing waypoint number and scrolling down accesses waypoints in the order of increasing waypoint number. Flight Plan Page (Initial Display) (Sheet 3 of 3)
Figure 4-18.
4-32
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: fpln FUNCTION: Displays and modifies flight plan waypoints and attributes.
ACTIVATION: By scrolling from Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). LS KEY LS1 LS4 LS5 LS8 thru thru DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Operates as described for LS2 thru LS4 for Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). Operates as described for LS6 thru LS8 for Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). Accesses additional waypoints. Scrolling up accesses waypoints in the order of decreasing waypoint number and scrolling down accesses waypoints in the order of increasing waypoint number. Flight Plan Page (Scrolled from Initial Display)
Figure 4-19.
4-33
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: fpln FUNCTION: Modifies the flight plan to define and immediately execute a new great circle course to a waypoint. Sequences the flight plan such that the DME (distance measuring equipment) arc end point becomes the active waypoint while maintaining the DME arc leg. ACTIVATION: By pressing the DIR function key. LS KEY LS1 DIR TO DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad initiates an immediate direct-to course change to the new waypoint and displays that waypoint as the active waypoint. Actuation with a bearing/distance in the scratchpad initiates an immediate direct-to course change to the vector waypoint located at the specified bearing/distance offset from the present position when LS1 is pressed. The Flight Plan page will then be displayed with the active waypoint on data line 2 and the course indicator 9dir9 displayed on the title line. LS2, LS3, and LS4 With an empty scratchpad, actuation for any waypoint other than a non-active end point of a DME arc, initiates an immediate direct-to course change to the new waypoint corresponding to the line select key pressed. The direct-to waypoint selected will become the active waypoint and all intervening waypoints (between the previous active waypoint and the new direct-to waypoint) will be moved into history. After the selection, the Flight Plan page will be displayed with the active waypoint on data line 2 and the course indicator 9dir9 displayed on the title line. With an empty scratchpad, actuation for a non-active end point of a DME arc, sequences the flight plan such that the end point becomes the active waypoint while maintaining the DME arc. After the selection, the Flight Plan page will be displayed with the active waypoint on data line 2 and the course indicator 99 displayed on the title line. With an empty scratchpad, actuation for a active end point of a DME arc initiates an immediate direct-to course change to the new waypoint corresponding to the line select key pressed. Figure 4-20. Flight Plan Page Accessed with the DIR Key (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-34
ORIGINAL
LS KEY
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad inserts the waypoint into the flight plan at the location of the line select key. The existing waypoints at and following the line select key will move down the flight plan. When the active waypoint is the MAP, a direct-to performed to another waypoint causes the sequencing mode to automatically revert to AUTO mode.
info line LS5
xxx/xxxnm VNAV
Displays the course and distance out of the active waypoint to the next waypoint. If a VNAV is assigned to the current TO waypoint, a direct-to climb/descent to the VNAV point will be available. Actuation causes an immediate climb/descent to the VNAV waypoint. The Flight Plan Waypoint A page (Figure 4-23) will then be accessed for the active waypoint. If 9VNAV9 is not displayed adjacent to LS5, then LS5 is inoperative.
LS6, LS8 -
LS7,
Operates as described for LS6, LS7, and LS8 for Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). Accesses additional waypoints. Scrolling up accesses waypoints in the order of decreasing waypoint number and scrolling down accesses waypoints in the order of increasing waypoint number. Flight Plan Page Accessed with the DIR Key (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 4-20.
4-35
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: select wpt FUNCTION: page. Enters duplicate identifier waypoints into the originating page and accesses the originating
ACTIVATION: By attempting to enter a duplicate identifier waypoint. LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the country code, type of waypoint, and station frequency or TACAN station number (depending on the waypoint type) of the duplicate identifier. Enters the duplicate identifier waypoint into the originating page and accesses the originating page. LS1 is inoperative when a 9search in progress9 or 9search failed9 is active. LS2 Displays the waypoint position of the duplicate identifier. This line is blank when a 9search in progress9 or 9search failed9 is active. Displays the country code, type of waypoint, and station frequency or TACAN station number (depending on the waypoint type) of the duplicate identifier. Enters the duplicate identifier waypoint into the originating page and accesses the originating page. LS3 is inoperative when a 9search in progress9 or 9search failed9 is active. LS4 Displays the waypoint position of the duplicate identifier. This line is blank when a 9search in progress9 or 9search failed9 is active. thru Inoperative Accesses additional duplicate identifier pages if more than two duplicate identifiers exist. A maximum of 20 duplicate identifiers are available for selection. Figure 4-21. Duplicate Identifiers Page
LS3
LS5 LS8 -
4-36
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: fpln FUNCTION: Displays flight plan discontinuity.
ACTIVATION: When a discontinuity is encountered in a flight plan. LS KEY LS1 LS8 thru DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Operates as described for LS1 through LS8 for Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18) with the following exceptions: When a discontinuity is the active waypoint, the flight plan course is dashed. When a discontinuity is the active waypoint, pressing LS1 (crew selected inbound/outbound course for the active waypoint) with an entry in the scratchpad displays 9DISCONTINUITY9 in the scratchpad. LS1 through LS4 With a discontinuity displayed adjacent to the line select key, operation is as follows: For non-flyable legs and turn directions associated with flyable legs, the data line displays 9LEG DISCON9 followed by the waypoint number associated with the discontinuity. For discontinuities associated with the beginning of a SID, end of STAR, or after the MAP of an approach, the data lines will display 9DISCONTINUITY9 followed by the waypoint number associated with the discontinuity. The waypoint number will be the preceding waypoint number, the following waypoint number, or both waypoint numbers. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the discontinuity even when the discontinuity is the active waypoint. Actuation with any other value other than 9-9 or a waypoint in the scratchpad is inoperative. Figure 4-22. Flight Plan Page with Discontinuity
4-37
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: flpn wpt xx (where xx is the waypoint number) FUNCTION: Enters and displays waypoint data. Accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). Allows access to the Hold, Intercept A, IAF Select, Visual Approach, Tactical Approach, SID Transitions, STAR Transitions, Racetrack MFP, Circle MFP, Figure Eight MFP, CRP MFP, Impromptu, Ladder, Sector, Expanding Square or Tactical Flight Plan pages. ACTIVATION: By pressing the right line select key for the associated waypoint on the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). LS KEY LS1 [ ]ft DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays entered altitude or flight level assigned to the waypoint. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the waypoint altitude. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the altitude for the waypoint and blanks data line 3. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the waypoint into the scratchpad. LS2 Displays the waypoint position as shown on the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). Accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). If the waypoint is the active waypoint, the Flight Plan page is displayed with the active waypoint on data line 2. If the waypoint is not the active waypoint, the Flight Plan page will display the selected waypoint on the top line. info line LS3 xxx DIR DESCNT xxxxfpm [ ] Displays the direct descent/climb rate and angle from present position to the waypoint. Displays climb/descent angle. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad will enter the climb/descent angle. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the vertical angle. If no altitude is entered at LS1, LS3 will be inoperative. If the waypoint is a MAP, LS3 will be inoperative and will result in the 9APPROACH DEFINED9 scratchpad message. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the vertical angle into the scratchpad. Figure 4-23. Flight Plan Waypoint A Page (Sheet 1 of 4)
4-38
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 RTA[ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays the required time of arrival as entered by the operator. When an altitude is assigned at LS1, the descent/ascent selection is displayed based on waypoint geometry. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the UTC time for the TNAV function. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the time for the TNAV function. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the arrival time into the scratchpad.
LS5
]kt
Displays current wind for the active waypoint, actual wind for the history waypoints, and predicted wind for the future waypoints. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the leg wind aloft in knots and degrees true. For waypoints other than the active waypoint, actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the predicted wind into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad will set the display of predicted wind at the waypoint entry and all succeeding waypoints in the flight plan to blanks with the current wind being used as the default wind when valid, otherwise a zero wind will be used. Figure 4-23. Flight Plan Waypoint A Page (Sheet 2 of 4)
4-39
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS6
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays the attribute, if any, associated with the waypoint. The flight plan attributes are as follows: M - The waypoint is designated as the missed approach point. D - A DME arc will be flown to this waypoint. F - The waypoint is designated as the final approach fix for tactical and databased GPS approaches. I - The waypoint is a valid intercept or point of closest approach solution for a moving target. R - This waypoint is a part of STAR. S - This waypoint is a part of SID. T - The waypoint has a desired time of arrival associated with it. V - The waypoint has an altitude specified. H - A holding pattern has been attached to this waypoint. C - A course reversal has been enabled at this waypoint. P - This waypoint is a fix for a pattern which will be executed upon arrival at this point. X - This waypoint is a tactical plan which will be executed upon arrival at this point. Allows access to the Hold, Intercept A, IAF Select, Visual Approach, Tactical Approach, SID Transitions, STAR Transitions, Racetrack MFP, Circle MFP, Figure Eight MFP, CRP MFP, Impromptu, Ladder, Sector, Expanding Square, or Tactical Flight Plan pages. When a database holding pattern is assigned to the waypoint (9H9 or 9C9), actuation accesses the Hold page for the database holding pattern.
Figure 4-23.
Flight Plan Waypoint A Page (Sheet 3 of 4)
4-40
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS7 [ ]fpm
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays vertical rate. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the vertical rate. The climb/descent rate is the instantaneous rate at the bottom of climb or the top of descent. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the vertical rate. If no altitude is entered at LS1, LS7 is inoperative. If the waypoint is a MAP, LS7 will be inoperative and will result in the 9APPROACH DEFINED9 scratchpad message. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the vertical rate into the scratchpad.
LS8
Toggles between 9DESCNT9 (descent) and 9CLIMB9 (climb) for the VNAV function. The default is 9DESCNT9. If no altitude is entered at LS1, LS8 is inoperative. If a vertical angle or rate has not been entered at LS7, selection of LS8 is inhibited. If the waypoint is a MAP, LS8 is inoperative and results in the 9APPROACH DEFINED9 scratchpad message.
Accesses additional flight plan waypoint pages. Scrolling up accesses additional flight plan waypoint pages in the order of decreasing waypoint number and scrolling down accesses additional flight plan waypoint pages in the order of increasing waypoint number. Figure 4-23. Flight Plan Waypoint A Page (Sheet 4 of 4)
4-41
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: fpln edit 1 FUNCTION: Accesses pages that permit the crew to enter and modify data associated with the flight plan and alternate flight plan. ACTIVATION: By pressing the EDIT key. LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 DISPLAY CUE ALTN FPLN PATTERNS INTERCEPT USER WPTS HOLD SIDS STARS FMS APPR FUNCTION Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan pages (Figure 4-63). Accesses the Patterns 1 page (Figure 4-29). Accesses the Intercept A page (Figure 4-26). Accesses the User Waypoint page (Figure 4-57). Accesses the Hold page (Figure 4-28). Accesses the SIDS page (Figure 4-44). Accesses the STARS page (Figure 4-46). Accesses the FMS Approach page (Figure 4-37). Accesses the Flight Plan Edit 2 page (Figure 4-25) and wraps around. Figure 4-24. Flight Plan Edit 1 Page
4-42
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: fpln edit 2 FUNCTION: Accesses pages that permit the crew to enter and modify data associated with the flight plan and alternate flight plan. ACTIVATION: By vertical scrolling from the Flight Plan Edit 1 page (Figure 4-24). LS KEY LS1 LS2, LS6 LS8 LS3 LS5 LS4, thru MARKPT Blank DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Accesses the Markpoint List page (Figure 4-41). -
OFF ROUTE RENUMBER
Accesses the Off Route Waypoint List 1 page (Figure 4-58). Renumbers the flight plan and accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). This function requires confirmation indicated by 9CONFIRM RENUMB FPLN9 in the scratchpad. If the active waypoint is not an inserted (alphanumeric) waypoint number, the flight plan is renumbered beginning at the active waypoint with the number associated with the active waypoint. If the number is an inserted waypoint, the next waypoint is renumbered to the next available not-inserted waypoint. History waypoints and the active waypoint are not renumbered. If renumbering would sequence past the upper limit of available waypoints numbers, the sequence cycles back to 9019. Reserved waypoint numbers are skipped. Accesses the Flight Plan Edit 1 page (Figure 4-24) and wraps around. Figure 4-25. Flight Plan Edit 2 Page
4-43
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: intercept a wpt xxx (where xxx is the number of the waypoint in the flight plan) FUNCTION: Edits intercept waypoints.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS3 on the Flight Plan Edit 1 page (Figure 4-24) or by lateral scrolling from the Intercept B page (Figure 4-27). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and TGT FIX [ DISPLAY CUE ] FUNCTION Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters the position of the moving target at the time of report. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the waypoint. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the waypoint into the scratchpad. LS2 TRK [ ] Displays the target ground track. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the target ground track into the scratchpad. The symbol following the track entry will be 9T9 for true and 99 for magnetic. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the target ground track. This entry can be entered with either an 9M9 or 9T9 to orient track for the desired reference. If an entry is made without the 9M9 or 9T9, the track entered will be based on the True/Mag selection. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the ground track. LS3 GS [ ] Displays the target ground speed in knots. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the target ground speed in knots. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the ground speed. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the ground speed into the scratchpad. Figure 4-26. Intercept A Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-44
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 TRAIL [
DISPLAY CUE ]nm
FUNCTION Displays the along track trail distance. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the along track trail distance. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the trail distance to its default value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the trail distance into the scratchpad.
LS6 LS7
xxx/xxxnm UTC [ ]
Displays the bearing/distance to the current target location. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the time of target report. This display defaults to current time when position is entered in data line 1. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the time. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the time into the scratchpad.
LS8
FPLN INSR or FPLN RMV
If the intercept definition displayed on this page has not been inserted into the flight plan, 9FPLN INSR9 will be written adjacent to LS8. If the intercept definition displayed on this page has been inserted into the flight plan, 9FPLN RMV9 will be displayed adjacent to LS8. If there are less than ten intercepts in the flight plan, actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18) and 9INSERT INTR BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it removes the intercept from the flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 scratchpad message.
bc
Scrolls laterally to the Intercept B page (Figure 4-27) and wraps around. Figure 4-26. Intercept A Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-45
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: intercept b wpt xxx (where xxx is the number of the waypoint in the flight plan) FUNCTION: Edits intercept waypoints.
ACTIVATION: By scrolling laterally from the Intercept A page (Figure 4-26). LS KEY LS1 TTI DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays time to intercept. If interception is not possible, an intercept point will be generated that is the point of closest approach (PCA). The PCA is displayed at LS5 when a PCA is calculated. Displays helicopters current true air speed in knots. Enters helicopter true airspeed for alternate intercept solution. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the alternate true airspeed to the default of 360 knots. Actuation with a an empty scratchpad copies the alternate true airspeed into the scratchpad. LS4 TTI Displays alternate solution corresponding to the alternate airspeed entered on data line 3. The PCA is displayed at LS8 when a PCA is calculated. Displays 9PCA9 if interception is not possible. An intercept point will be generated that is the PCA. Displays 9PCA9 if interception is not possible for the alternate solution. An intercept point will be generated that is the PCA. Scrolls laterally to the Intercept A page (Figure 4-26) and wraps around. Figure 4-27. Intercept B Page
LS2 LS3
CURRENT TAS ALTN TAS
LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 and
PCA Blank PCA
bc
4-46
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: hold wpt xxxxx (where xxxxx is the number of the waypoint or the identifier of the waypoint the hold definition is attached to) FUNCTION: Adds or modifies a holding pattern.
ACTIVATION: From the Flight Plan Edit 1 page (Figure 4-24) or from the Flight Plan Waypoint page (Figure 4-23). LS KEY LS1 CRS [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the course into the holding fix. When a user-defined holding pattern is selected, actuation with a course in the scratchpad enters the course inbound to the holding fix in degrees. The default course is the inbound course from the flight plan for the waypoint that the hold is attached to. When a user-defined holding pattern is selected, actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad returns the display to the value for inbound course from the flight plan or 9INB9 if the hold has not been inserted into the flight plan. When a user-defined holding pattern is selected, actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the course into the scratchpad. When a databased holding pattern is selected, the course for the databased holding pattern is initially displayed adjacent to LS1. Actuation with a course in the scratchpad enters the course inbound to the holding fix in degrees. When a databased holding pattern is selected, actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the course to a default value which is the inbound course from the flight plan for the waypoint that the hold is attached to. When a databased holding pattern is selected, actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the course into the scratchpad. Figure 4-28. Hold Page (Sheet 1 of 5)
4-47
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS2
DISPLAY CUE :RIGHT TURN or :LEFT TURN
FUNCTION Displays the turn direction as indicated by 9RIGHT TURN9 or 9LEFT TURN9. Actuation when a user-defined holding pattern is selected toggles between right and left turns in the pattern. When a databased holding pattern is selected, the turn direction for the database holding pattern is initially displayed adjacent to LS2. Actuation toggles between right and left turns in the pattern.
LS3
]min
Displays the duration of the holding pattern inbound leg in minutes. An asterisk following the value indicates that the value was entered or is fixed. When not fixed, the value will be calculated based on pattern length and ground speed. When a user-defined holding pattern is selected, actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the duration in minutes and seconds of the pattern inbound leg. The default duration is 1:00 minute. When a user-defined or databased holding pattern is selected, actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the inbound leg duration to the default value. When a user-defined or databased holding pattern is selected, actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the inbound leg duration into the scratchpad. When a databased holding pattern is selected, the inbound leg duration time for the databased holding pattern is initially displayed adjacent to LS3. Else, the duration calculated from the databased distance is displayed. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the duration in minutes and seconds of the pattern inbound leg. Figure 4-28. Hold Page (Sheet 2 of 5)
4-48
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 [ ]nm
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays the length of the holding pattern inbound leg. An asterisk following the value indicates that the value was entered or is fixed. When not fixed, the value will be calculated based on pattern duration and ground speed. When a user-defined holding pattern is selected, actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the length of the pattern inbound leg. The default length is 4.0 nm/7.4 km. When a user-defined holding pattern is selected, actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the inbound length to the default value. This deletion of an entered length for the holding pattern resets the computed time at LS1. When a user-defined or databased holding pattern is selected, actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the inbound leg length into the scratchpad. When a databased holding pattern is selected, the distance for the databased holding pattern is initially displayed adjacent to LS4. Else, the distance calculated from the databased duration will be displayed. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the length in nautical miles of the pattern inbound leg. When a databased holding pattern is selected, actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the inbound length to the default value. The default value is 4.0 nautical miles.
LS5
IAS[
When a user-defined holding pattern is selected, displays the indicated airspeed (IAS) for holding in knots. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the IAS for holding in knots. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the IAS value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the IAS into the scratchpad. Figure 4-28. Hold Page (Sheet 3 of 5)
4-49
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS6 EFC[ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION When a user-defined holding pattern is selected, displays the EFC (expect further clearance) time. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the EFC time. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the EFC. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the EFC into the scratchpad.
LS7
HOLD PPS or ENBL RVS
When a user-defined holding pattern is selected, displays 9HOLD PPSN9 for immediate execution of a holding pattern with the present position as the fix point. When a published holding pattern/procedure turn is selected for an IAF, displays the course reversal status of the IAF. 9ENBL RVS9 indicates that the course reversal is disabled. The arrow will be replaced with an asterisk when the course reversal is enabled. Actuation when a user-defined holding pattern is selected allows for immediate execution of a holding pattern with the present position as the fix point. Actuation when a databased holding pattern is selected displays the course reversal enable status for an IAF with a published procedure turn/holding pattern. Else, the display at LS7 is blank and inoperative.
Figure 4-28.
Hold Page (Sheet 4 of 5)
4-50
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS8
DISPLAY CUE ENBL HLD
FUNCTION Displays the hold status when a databased holding pattern is selected. 9ENBL HLD9 indicates that the hold is disabled. Pressing LS8 in this mode allows the operator to enable the database hold. The arrow will be replaced with an asterisk when the holding pattern is enabled. The hold status defaults to 9disable9 when the hold is attached to an 9IAF9. The hold status defaults to 9enable9 when the hold is attached to a missed approach holding point (MAHP) fix. When a user-defined or databased holding pattern is selected, displays 9FPLN INSR9 if the hold definition displayed on this page has not been inserted into the flight plan; else, 9FPLN RMV9 is displayed if the hold definition displayed on this page has been inserted into the flight plan. When a user-defined holding pattern is selected, if the hold definition displayed on this page has not been inserted into the flight plan, 9FPLN INSR9 will be written adjacent to LS8. If the hold definition displayed on this page has been inserted into the flight plan, 9FPLN INSR9 will be displayed adjacent to LS8. When a user-defined holding pattern is selected, actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18) and 9ATTACH HOLD AT?9 is displayed in the scratchpad. When a user-defined holding pattern is selected, actuation with FPLN RMV displayed adjacent to it removes the hold from the flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 scratchpad message. Actuation when a databased holding pattern is selected displays the hold status. 9ENBL HLD9 indicates that the hold is disabled. Actuation in this mode allows the operator to enable the database hold.
Figure 4-28.
Hold Page (Sheet 5 of 5)
4-51
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: patterns 1 FUNCTION: Accesses SAR patterns pages that permit the crew to define SAR patterns.
ACTIVATION: From the Flight Plan Edit 1 page (Figure 4-24) or by vertically scrolling from the Patterns 2 page (Figure 4-30). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5, LS6, and LS8 info line DISPLAY CUE CLOSED RANDOM CIRCLE FIGURE 8 RACETRACK Blank FPLN xx FUNCTION Accesses the Closed Random Pattern MFP page (Figure 4-34). Accesses the Circle MFP page (Figure 4-31). Accesses the Figure Eight MFP page (Figure 4-33). Accesses the Racetrack MFP page (Figure 4-32). Displays the total number of MFPs entered in the alternate flight plan. A maximum of 20 MFPs are allowed in the flight plan. Displays the total number of MFPs entered in the alternate flight plan. A maximum of 20 MFPs are allowed in the alternate flight plan. Accesses the Patterns 2 page (Figure 4-30) and wraps around. Figure 4-29. Patterns 1 Page
LS7
ALTN xx
LS8 -
Blank
4-52
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: patterns 2 FUNCTION: Accesses SAR patterns pages that permit the crew to define SAR patterns.
ACTIVATION: From the Flight Plan Edit 1 page (Figure 4-24) or by vertically scrolling from the Patterns 1 page (Figure 4-29). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5 LS8 thru DISPLAY CUE IMPROMPTU LADDER SECTOR EXP SQR Blank FUNCTION Accesses the Impromptu Page 1 (Figure 4-48). Accesses the Ladder page (Figure 4-51). Accesses the Sector page (Figure 4-52). Accesses the Expanding Square page (Figure 4-53). Accesses the Patterns 1 page (Figure 4-29) and wraps around. Figure 4-30. Patterns 2 Page
4-53
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: circle FUNCTION: Modifies a circle MFP.
ACTIVATION: From the Patterns 1 page (Figure 4-29), Flight Plan Waypoint A page (Figure 4-23), Alternate Flight Plan Waypoint page (Figure 4-70), or Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). LS KEY LS1 [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters the pattern fix point. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the fix. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern fix point into the scratchpad. The function of automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database is allowed for LS1. LS2 CRS[ ]T Actuation with a course in the scratchpad enters the course inbound to the circle fix. The default course is the inbound course from the flight plan or alternate flight plan for the waypoint to which the circle is attached. This is displayed as [INB]T CRS prior to inserting the circle pattern into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad returns the display to the value for inbound course from the flight plan or alternate flight plan, if the circle has been inserted into the flight plan or alternate flight plan, or 9[INB]9 if the circle has not been inserted into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern course into the scratchpad. info line LS3 -- MAX BANK WIDTH[ ] Displays the maximum bank angle computed from the entered pattern width and aircraft speed. Actuation with a pattern width in the scratchpad enters the pattern width. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the width to the default value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern width into the scratchpad. Figure 4-31. Circle MFP Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-54
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 ETD[ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with an estimated time of departure (ETD) in the scratchpad enters the ETD. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the ETD. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the ETD into the scratchpad.
LS5 LS6 LS7
LEFT or RIGHT Blank FPLN INSR or FPLN RMV
Toggles between right and left turns in the pattern. Actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). If a fix has been defined on this page, 9INSERT CIR BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. If a fix has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH CIR AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it removes the circle pattern from the flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 scratchpad message.
LS8
ALTN INSR or ALTN RMV
Actuation with 9ALTN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). If a fix has been defined on this page, 9INSERT CIR BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. If a fix has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH CIR AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9ALTN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it removes the circle pattern from the alternate flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM ALTN RMV9 scratchpad message.
Figure 4-31.
Accesses the Racetrack MFP page (Figure 4-32). Accesses the Figure Eight page (Figure 4-33). Circle MFP Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-55
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: racetrack FUNCTION: Modifies a racetrack MFP.
ACTIVATION: From the Patterns 1 page (Figure 4-29), Flight Plan Waypoint A page (Figure 4-23), Alternate Flight Plan Waypoints page (Figure 4-70), or Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). LS KEY LS1 [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters the pattern fix point. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the fix. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern fix point into the scratchpad. The function of automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database is allowed for LS1. LS2 CRS[ ]T Actuation with a course in the scratchpad enters the course inbound to the racetrack fix. The default course is the inbound course from the flight plan or alternate flight plan for the waypoint to which the racetrack pattern is attached. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad returns the display to the value for inbound course from the flight plan or alternate flight plan, if the racetrack has been inserted into the flight plan or alternate flight plan, or 9[INB]9 if the racetrack has not been inserted into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern course into the scratchpad. info line LS3 -- MAX BANK WIDTH[ ] Displays the maximum bank angle computed from the entered pattern width and aircraft speed. Actuation with a pattern width in the scratchpad enters the pattern width. The width has a default value of 8 nm/14.8 km. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the width to the default value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern width into the scratchpad. Figure 4-32. Racetrack MFP Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-56
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 EDT[ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with an ETD in the scratchpad enters the ETD. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the ETD. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the ETD into the scratchpad.
LS5 LS6
RIGHT or LEFT LENGTH [ ]
Toggles between 9RIGHT9 and 9LEFT9 turns in the pattern. The default is a 9LEFT9 turn. Actuation with a pattern length in the scratchpad enters the pattern length. The length has a default value of 16 nm/30 km. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the length to the default value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern length into the scratchpad.
LS7
Actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). If a fix has been defined on this page, 9INSERT RTK BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. If a fix has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH RTK AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it removes the racetrack pattern from the flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 scratchpad message.
LS8
Actuation with 9ALTN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). If a fix has been defined on this page, 9INSERT RTK BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. If a fix has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH RTK AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9ALTN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it removes the racetrack pattern from the alternate flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM ALTN RMV9 scratchpad message.
Figure 4-32.
Accesses the Figure Eight page (Figure 4-33). Accesses the Circle MFP page (Figure 4-31). Racetrack MFP Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-57
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: figure 8 FUNCTION: Modifies a Figure Eight MFP.
ACTIVATION: From the Patterns 1 page (Figure 4-29), Flight Plan Waypoint A page (Figure 4-23), Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63), or Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). LS KEY LS1 [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters the pattern fix point. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the fix. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern fix point into the scratchpad. The function of automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database is allowed for LS1. LS2 CRS[ ]T Actuation with a course in the scratchpad enters the course inbound to the figure eight fix. The default course is the inbound course from the flight plan or alternate flight plan for the waypoint to which the figure eight pattern is attached. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad returns the display to the value for inbound course from the flight plan or alternate flight plan, if the figure eight has been inserted into the flight plan or alternate flight plan, or 9[INB]9 if the figure eight has not been inserted into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern course into the scratchpad. info line LS3 -- MAX BANK WIDTH[ ] Displays the maximum bank angle computed from the entered pattern width and aircraft speed. Actuation with a pattern width in the scratchpad enters the pattern width. The width has a default value of 8 nm/14.8 km. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the width to the default value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern width into the scratchpad. Figure 4-33. Figure Eight MFP Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-58
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 EDT[ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with an ETD in the scratchpad enters the ETD. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the ETD. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the ETD into the scratchpad.
LS5 LS6
LEFT or RIGHT LENGTH [ ]
Toggles between 9RIGHT9 and 9LEFT9 turns in the pattern. The default is a 9LEFT9 turn. Actuation with a pattern length in the scratchpad enters the pattern length. The length has a default value of 16 nm/30 km. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the length to the default value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern length into the scratchpad.
LS7
Actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). If a fix has been defined on this page, 9INSERT FG8 BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. If a fix has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH FG8 AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it removes the figure eight pattern from the flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 scratchpad message.
LS8
Actuation with 9ALTN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). If a fix has been defined on this page, 9INSERT FG8 BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. If a fix has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH FG8 AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9ALTN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it removes the figure eight pattern from the alternate flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM ALTN RMV9 scratchpad message.
Figure 4-33.
Accesses the Circle MFP page (Figure 4-31). Accesses the Racetrack MFP page (Figure 4-32). Figure Eight MFP Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-59
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: clsd random FUNCTION: Modifies a closed random pattern MFP.
ACTIVATION: From the Patterns 1 page (Figure 4-29), Flight Plan Waypoint A page (Figure 4-23), Alternate Flight Plan Waypoints page (Figure 4-70), Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18), or Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). LS KEY LS1 LS2 DISPLAY CUE FWD or REV ETD[ ] FUNCTION Toggles the CRP sequencing between forward (FWD fix, 1, 2, 3, ...) and reverse (REV - fix, 9, 8, 7, ...). Enters the ETD. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes ETD. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the ETD into the scratchpad. LS3 LS7 and [ ] Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad, enters the CRP fix point. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the fix. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern fix point into the scratchpad. The function of automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database is allowed for LS3 and LS7. LS4, LS8 1*[ ] Actuation with a pattern waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters the first point in the CRP. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the first point. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the point into the scratchpad. LS5 FPLN INSR or FPLN RMV Actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). If a fix has been defined on this page, 9INSERT CRP BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. If a fix has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH CRP AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it removes the CRP pattern from the flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 scratchpad message. Figure 4-34. Closed Random Pattern MFP Page 1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-60
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS6
DISPLAY CUE ALTN INSR or ALTN RMV
FUNCTION Actuation with 9ALTN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). If a fix has been defined on this page, 9INSERT CRP BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. If a fix has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH CRP AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9ALTN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it removes the CRP pattern from the alternate flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM ALTN RMV9 scratchpad message.
Accesses the Closed Random Pattern MFP page 2 (Figure 4-35). Accesses the Closed Random Pattern MFP page 3 (Figure 4-36). Closed Random Pattern MFP Page 1 (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 4-34.
4-61
ORIGINAL
ACTIVATION: From the Patterns 1 page (Figure 4-29), Flight Plan Waypoint A page (Figure 4-23), Alternate Flight Plan Waypoints page (Figure 4-70), Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18), or Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and 2[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a pattern waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters CRP point 2. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the point. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the point into the scratchpad. LS2 LS6 and 3[ ] Actuation with a pattern waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters CRP point 3. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the point. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the point into the scratchpad. LS3 LS7 and 4[ ] Actuation with a pattern waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters CRP point 4. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the point. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the point into the scratchpad. LS4 LS8 and 5[ ] Actuation with a pattern waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters CRP point 5. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the point. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the point into the scratchpad. Accesses the Closed Random Pattern MFP page 3 (Figure 4-36). Accesses the Closed Random Pattern MFP page 1 (Figure 4-34). Figure 4-35. Closed Random Pattern MFP Page 2
4-62
ORIGINAL
ACTIVATION: From the Patterns 1 page (Figure 4-29), Flight Plan Waypoint A page (Figure 4-23), Alternate Flight Plan Waypoints page (Figure 4-70), Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18), or Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and 6[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a pattern waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters CRP point 6. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the point. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the point into the scratchpad. LS2 LS6 and 7[ ] Actuation with a pattern waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters CRP point 7. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the point. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the point into the scratchpad. LS3 LS7 and 8[ ] Actuation with a pattern waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters CRP point 8. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the point. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the point into the scratchpad. LS4 LS8 and 9[ ] Actuation with a pattern waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters CRP point 9. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the point. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the point into the scratchpad. Accesses the Closed Random Pattern MFP page 1 (Figure 4-34). Accesses the Closed Random Pattern MFP page 2 (Figure 4-35). Figure 4-36. Closed Random Pattern MFP Page 3
4-63
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: fms appr FUNCTION: Modifies the flight plan approach.
ACTIVATION: From the Flight Plan Edit 1 page (Figure 4-24). LS KEY LS1 DEST[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with an airport identifier in the scratchpad enters the airport identifier at LS1. If an airport identifier is entered at LS1, the possible GPS approaches will appear on the left portion of the CDU display and visual approaches will appear on the right portion of the CDU display. If more than three approaches (GPS or visual) are available, vertical scrolling will access additional approaches page by page with wrap around. Each line select key contains one of the possible GPS approaches for the designated airport. Actuation when an approach is displayed at that line select key, accesses that approachs IAF Select page (Figure 4-38). When the approach defined in the flight plan is displayed, actuation for an approach that is not in the flight plan or pressing LS1 with an entry in the scratchpad, copies the flight plan approach definition along with the selection to the working copy and displays the working copy approach. If no GPS approaches exist for the airport, LS2, LS3, and LS4 will be blank and inoperative. LS5 LS6, LS7, and LS8 TACTICAL RWxxx Accesses the Tactical Approach page (Figure 4-40). Each line select key contains one of the possible visual approaches for the designated airport. Actuation when an approach is displayed at that line select key, accesses that approachs Visual Approach page (Figure 4-39). When the approach defined in the flight plan is displayed, actuation for an approach that is not in the flight plan or pressing LS1 with an entry in the scratchpad, copies the flight plan approach definition along with the selection to the working copy and displays the working copy approach. If no visual approaches exist for the airport, LS6, LS7, and LS8 will be blank and inoperative. Figure 4-37. FMS Approach Page
LS2, LS3, and LS4
GPSxxx
4-64
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: -iaf FUNCTION: Selects initial approach fix.
ACTIVATION: From the FMS Approach page (Figure 4-37) or from the Flight Plan Waypoint page (Figure 4-23). LS KEY LS1, LS3, LS4 LS2, and DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Each line select key contains one of the possible IAFs for the designated approach. If more than four IAFs are available, vertical scrolling will access additional IAFs page by page with wrap around. Actuation when an IAF is displayed at the line select key selects the IAF. LS5 LS6 LS7 and Blank FPLN INSR or FPLN RMV or FPLN MOD If an approach definition has not been inserted into the flight plan, 9FPLN INSR9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. When displaying the flight plan approach, 9FPLN RMV9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. When there is an approach in the flight plan and the working copy is displayed, 9FPLN MOD9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. Actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18) scrolled to *END and displays 9INSRT G-APR BEFORE?9 in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it displays 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 in the scratchpad. Confirmation removes future GPS approach waypoints in the flight plan as well as future waypoints inserted in the procedure. Once the flight plan approach has been removed, the IAF Select page will display the working copy approach. Actuation with 9FPLN MOD9 displayed adjacent to it displays the scratchpad message 9CONFIRM APPR RPLACE9. Confirmation removes the existing GPS, tactical or visual approach and inserts the working copy approach in the flight plan. LS8 RTN Figure 4-38. Accesses the FMS Approach page (Figure 4-37). Initial Approach Fix (IAF) Select Page
4-65
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: visual FUNCTION: bearing. Enters and displays above ground level (AGL), glide path, and distance along the runway
ACTIVATION: From the FMS Approach page (Figure 4-37) or from the Flight Plan Waypoint page (Figure 4-23). LS KEY LS1 LS5 LS2 and Blank [ ]nm DISPLAY CUE Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad, enters the distance along the runway bearing at LS2 which defines the runway extension point. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the distance into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad changes the distance at LS2 to its default value of 5.0 nm/9.3 km. LS3 G/S[ ] Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the glide path at LS3. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the glide path into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad changes the glide path at LS3 to its default value of 3.0. LS4 LS6 RW ELEV xxxxxft AGL[ ]ft Displays the runway elevation label. The actual elevation displayed is the landing threshold elevation. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad, enters the AGL at LS6. On the Flight Plan Waypoint page (Figure 4-23), this value will be added to the runway elevation to show altitude in feet above mean sea level (MSL). Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the AGL into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad changes the AGL at LS6 to its default value of 1500 feet. Figure 4-39. Visual Approach Page (Sheet 1 of 2) FUNCTION
4-66
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS7
DISPLAY CUE FPLN INSR or FPLN RMV or FPLN MOD
FUNCTION If an approach definition has not been inserted into the flight plan, 9FPLN INSR9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. When displaying the flight plan approach, 9FPLN RMV9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. When there is an approach in the flight plan and the working copy is displayed, 9FPLN MOD9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. Actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18) scrolled to *END and displays 9INSRT V-APR BEFORE?9 in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it displays 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 in the scratchpad. Confirmation removes future visual approach waypoints in the flight plan. Actuation with 9FPLN MOD9 displayed adjacent to it displays the scratchpad message 9CONFIRM APPR RPLACE9. Confirmation removes the existing GPS, tactical, or visual approach and inserts the working copy approach in the flight plan.
LS8
RTN Figure 4-39.
Accesses the FMS Approach page (Figure 4-37). Visual Approach Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-67
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: tact appr FUNCTION: plan. Defines a tactical approach and inserts, removes, or replaces a tactical approach in a flight
ACTIVATION: From the FMS Approach page (Figure 4-37) or from the Flight Plan Waypoint page (Figure 4-23). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters the waypoint as the FAF and displays it at LS1. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the waypoint into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the waypoint. The function of automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database is allowed for LS1 and LS5. LS2 LS6 and [ ] Actuation with a waypoint in the scratchpad enters the waypoint as the MAP and displays it at LS2. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the waypoint into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the waypoint. The function of automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database is allowed for LS2 and LS6. LS3 G/S[ ] Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad, enters the glide path angle for the approach which represents the desired vertical descent angle. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad changes the glide path entry to its default value of 3. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the glide path into the scratchpad. Figure 4-40. Tactical Approach Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-68
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 RW ELEV [
DISPLAY CUE ]ft
FUNCTION Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad, enters the runway elevation MSL. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the runway elevation if the tactical approach has not been inserted in the flight plan. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the runway elevation into the scratchpad.
LS7
FPLN INSR or FPLN RMV or FPLN MOD
If an approach definition has not been inserted into the flight plan, 9FPLN INSR9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. When displaying the flight plan tactical approach, 9FPLN RMV9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. When there is an approach in the flight plan and the working copy is displayed, 9FPLN MOD9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. Actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18) scrolled to *END and displays 9INSRT T-APR BEFORE?9 in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it displays 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 in the scratchpad. Confirmation removes future tactical approach waypoints. Actuation with 9FPLN MOD9 displayed adjacent to it displays the scratchpad message 9CONFIRM APPR RPLACE9. Confirmation removes the existing GPS, tactical, or visual approach and inserts the working copy approach in the flight plan.
Figure 4-40.
Tactical Approach Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-69
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: markpoint list FUNCTION: Defines up to ten markpoints and MOT points and stores them in a single markpoint list.
ACTIVATION: From the Flight Plan Edit 2 page (Figure 4-25). LS KEY LS1, LS5, LS7 LS3, and x[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION LS1 and LS3 displays the markpoint positions where x is the markpoint or MOT point label (A through J). Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the associated markpoint or MOT point into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the associated markpoint or MOT point. The function of automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database is allowed for LS1, LS3, LS5, and LS7. LS2 LS4 and MARK TIME or MOT TIME Displays time of mark for the markpoint or MOT point displayed above it. Vertical scrolling will access additional markpoint list pages with wrap around. Pressing accesses markpoints two at a time in increasing alphabetical order. Pressing accesses markpoints two at a time in decreasing alphabetical order. Figure 4-41. Markpoint List Page
4-70
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: from-to data FUNCTION: Generates 9what if?9 scenarios for computations defined by two flight plan legs, or present position and a selected TO waypoint. ACTIVATION: By pressing the DATA key, which will prompt the scratchpad message 9DATA FOR?9, and pressing the line select key adjacent to an operator enterable waypoint. LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION For flight plan waypoints: Actuation when the waypoint on data line 2 is a flight plan waypoint toggles data line 1 from the flight plan FROM waypoint for the 9Data For9 point on data line 2 to helicopter present position direct to the 9Data For9 point (9PPSN DIRECT9). Actuation when the waypoint on data line 2 is a flight plan waypoint toggles data line 1 from 9PPSN DIRECT9 to helicopter present position along the flight plan to the 9Data For9 point (9PPSN VIA FPLN9). Actuation when the waypoint on data line 2 is a flight plan waypoint toggles data line 1 from 9PPSN VIA FPLN9 to the flight plan FROM waypoint for the 9Data For9 point on data line 2. When the page is initially accessed for a flight plan waypoint, the flight plan waypoint prior to the TO waypoint is displayed on data line 1. If the FROM waypoint displayed on the Data page (Figure 4-42) is deleted from the flight plan, LS1 changes to 9PPSN DIRECT9. For flight plan FROM and non-flight plan TO waypoints: When data line 1 is displaying a flight plan FROM waypoint and the waypoint on data line 2 is a non-flight plan waypoint or entered point, actuation toggles data line 1 to 9PPSN DIRECT9. Once toggled to 9PPSN DIRECT9, the 9:9 adjacent to LS1 will be removed and no further toggle action will be allowed. When the page is initially accessed for non-flight plan waypoint, 9PPSN DIRECT9 will be displayed on data line 1. Figure 4-42. Data Page (Sheet 1 of 3)
4-71
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS2
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION When the FROM waypoint or 9PPSN DIRECT9 is selected at LS1, LS2 allows entry of a waypoint. When 9PPSN VIA FPLN9 is selected at LS1, LS2 will be inoperative. For flight plan waypoints: Data Line 2 will display the selected 9Data For9 waypoint. When an operator entered waypoint is displayed, the waypoint number will be blanked and vertical scrolling will be inhibited. If the 9TO9 Data page waypoint on the Data page (Figure 4-42) is deleted from the flight plan, the 9FROM9 Data page waypoint will remain fixed. For non-flight plan waypoints: Displays the selected 9Data For9 waypoint. Actuation with a waypoint in the scratchpad enters the waypoint into data line 2 when the FROM waypoint or 9PPSN DIRECT9 is selected at LS1. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the 9TO9 Data page waypoint into the scratchpad when the FROM waypoint or 9PPSN DIRECT9 is selected at LS1.
LS3
xxxxnm
Displays the direct bearing/distance between the FROM and TO waypoints when the flight plan 9FROM9 waypoint is selected at LS1. Displays the direct bearing/distance between the helicopter present position and the TO waypoint. Displays the distance along the flight plan and estimated time en route (ETE) from the helicopter present position through the flight plan to the TO waypoint when PPSN VIA FPLN is selected at LS1. Figure 4-42. Data Page (Sheet 2 of 3)
4-72
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Toggles the vertical scrolling for flight plan waypoints between waypoint (9WPT9) and leg (9LEG9) when the flight plan FROM waypoint is selected at LS1. When toggled to WPT, vertical scrolling will scroll only the 9TO9 Data page waypoint in sequence through the flight plan, one waypoint at a time. When toggled to LEG, vertical scrolling will scroll the 9TO9 and 9FROM9 Data page waypoints in sequence through each leg of the flight plan. When the scrolling mode is toggled from WPT to LEG, the 9TO9 Data page waypoint will be fixed and the 9FROM9 Data page waypoint associated with it will be displayed in data line 1. If no FROM exists in the flight plan, PPSN DIRECT will be used as the 9FROM9 Data page waypoint on data line 1. If a waypoint is entered via LS2, the label adjacent to LS4 will not be displayed, the line select key will be inoperative, and vertical scrolling will be inhibited. When PPSN DIRECT, or PPSN FPLN are selected at LS1, the label adjacent to LS4 will not be displayed, the line select key will be inoperative, and vertical scrolling will be inhibited.
LS5 LS6 LS7
and
Blank ETE xx:xx
Displays the ETE between the FROM and TO waypoints when the flight plan 9FROM9 waypoint is selected at LS1. Displays the ETE between the helicopter present position and the TO waypoint.
LS8 -
ETA xxxx:xx bc
Displays the ETA. Lateral scrolling accesses the Ident Data page (Figure 4-43) and wraps around. Figure 4-42. Data Page (Sheet 3 of 3)
4-73
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: ident data FUNCTION: Displays station frequency and/or number, station position, station declination, waypoint number, waypoint identifier, country code, waypoint type, point elevation, and magnetic variation. ACTIVATION: By lateral scrolling from the Data page (Figure 4-42). LS KEY LS1 FREQ DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the station frequency and/or the TACAN station number depending on the waypoint type. Frequency only is displayed for VOR, non-directional beacon (NDB), and NDB-DME waypoints. TACAN station number only is displayed for TACAN and DME waypoints. Both the frequency and TACAN station number is displayed for VOR-DME and VORTAC (VOR/ TACAN) waypoints. Displays the waypoint number, the waypoint identifier, the country code, and the waypoint type. Displays station position. Blank ELEV xxxft MVAR xxx Displays the point elevation in feet. Displays the magnetic variation. If the point is a waypoint, airport, NDB, NDB-DME, latitude/longitude, MGRS (miniature airborne GPS receiver), identifier/bearing/distance, or DME, the magnetic variation (MVAR) will be displayed. If the point is a VOR, VORTAC, TACAN, or VOR-DME, the station declination (DCL) will be displayed. Lateral scrolling accesses the Data page (Figure 4-42). Figure 4-43. Ident Data Page
LS2 info line LS3, LS5 thru LS7 LS4 LS8
bc
4-74
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: sids FUNCTION:
rwr
Selects a SID for attachment to a flight plan.
ACTIVATION: From the Flight Plan Edit 1 page (Figure 4-24) or the SID Transitions page (Figure 4-45). LS KEY LS1 ORIG[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters an airport identifier and lists the possible SIDs and runways for that airport. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the airport identifier. The SIDs and runways lists will be blanked. When displaying the flight plan SID, a deletion of the airport copies the flight plan definition to the working copy with the airport deleted and displays the working copy. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the identifier into the scratchpad. The identifier at LS1 remains until deleted or overwritten. It will not be deleted when a new CDU page is accessed. LS2, LS3, and LS4 Displays one of the possible SIDs for the designated airport. An asterisk displayed in the first column indicates that the SID is inserted in the flight plan. The asterisk along with 9IN FPLN9 displayed on the information line indicates that the flight plan SID is displayed. A large arrow displayed in the first column indicates that the SID has been selected by the crew but not necessarily inserted in the flight plan. The large arrow along with 9SELECT9 or 9MODIFY9 displayed on the information line indicates that the working copy SID is displayed. Actuation for a non-selected SID displayed at that line select key selects the SID. Actuation for a selected SID displayed at that line select key deselects the SID. Deselecting the SID or selecting a different SID when a runway has not been selected, causes the list of runways to be refreshed. Figure 4-44. Standard Instrument Departures (SIDS) Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-75
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS5
DISPLAY CUE TRANSITION
FUNCTION Actuation with a SID and a runway accesses the SID Transitions page (Figure 4-45) for the SID/runway combination to allow selection of the desired en route transition. The SID/runway combination determines the runway transition to be executed. If no runway transitions are available for a SID, the runway list will be blank. In this instance, actuation with a selected SID accesses the SID Transitions page. Displays one of the possible runways for the designated airports SIDs. If no runway transitions are available, LS6, LS7, and LS8 will be blank. An asterisk displayed in the last column indicates that the runway is inserted in the flight plan. The asterisk along with 9IN FPLN9 displayed on the information line indicates that the flight plan SID is displayed. A large arrow displayed in the last column indicates that the runway has been selected by the crew but not necessarily inserted in the flight plan. The large arrow along with 9SELECT9 or 9MODIFY9 displayed on the information line indicates that the working copy SID is displayed. Actuation for a non-selected runway displayed at that line select key selects the runway. Actuation for a for a selected runway displayed at that line select key deselects the runway. Deselecting the runway or selecting a different runway when a SID has not been selected, causes the list of SIDs to be refreshed.
LS6, LS7, and LS8
If more than three SIDs or three runways are available, vertical scrolling will be possible. Vertical scrolling accesses additional SIDs and runways page by page and wraps around. Standard Instrument Departures (SIDS) Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 4-44.
4-76
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: sid transition FUNCTION: Inserts, removes, or replaces a SID in a flight plan.
ACTIVATION: From the SIDS page (Figure 4-44) or the Flight Plan Waypoint page (Figure 4-23). LS KEY LS1, LS3, LS4 LS2, and DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays one of the possible en route transitions for the selected SID/runway combination. When the SID/runway combination is first selected, no en route transitions will be selected. An asterisk displayed in the first column indicates that the transition is inserted in the flight plan. The asterisk along with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed at LS7 indicates that the flight plan SID is displayed. A large arrow displayed in the first column indicates that the transition has been selected by the crew but not necessarily inserted in the flight plan. The large arrow along with 9FPLN INSR9 or 9FPLN MOD9 displayed at LS7 indicates that the working copy SID is displayed. Actuation for a non-selected transition displayed at that line select key selects the en route transition to be used with the SID. Actuation for a selected transition displayed at that line select key deselects the transition. LS5 LS6 and Blank -
Figure 4-45.
SID Transitions Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-77
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS7
FUNCTION If the SID has not been inserted into the flight plan, 9FPLN INSR9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. When displaying the flight plan SID, 9FPLN RMV9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. When there is a SID in the flight plan and the working copy is displayed, 9FPLN MOD9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. Actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18) scrolled to the active waypoint and displays 9INSRT SID BEFORE?9 in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it displays 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 in the scratchpad. Confirmation deletes all the waypoints associated with the SID procedure and any waypoints that have been inserted within the procedure, except those that have passed into history, or a SID waypoint that is the active waypoint or an active SID discontinuity and its associated waypoint. Actuation with 9FPLN MOD9 displayed adjacent to it displays the scratchpad message 9CONFIRM SID RPLACE9. Confirmation removes the existing SID.
LS8 -
RTN
Accesses the SIDS page (Figure 4-44). If more than four transitions are available, vertical scrolling will be possible. Vertical scrolling accesses additional transitions page by page and wraps around. Figure 4-45. SID Transitions Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-78
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: stars FUNCTION:
rwr
Selects STARs for attachment to a flight plan.
ACTIVATION: From the Flight Plan Edit 1 page (Figure 4-24) or the STAR Transitions page (Figure 4-47). LS KEY LS1 DEST[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters an airport identifier and a lists the possible STARs and runways for that airport. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the airport identifier. The STARs and runways lists will be blanked. When displaying the flight plan STAR, a deletion of the airport copies the flight plan definition to the working copy with the airport deleted and displays the working copy. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the identifier into the scratchpad. The identifier at LS1 remains until deleted or overwritten. It will not be deleted when a new CDU page is accessed. LS2, LS3, and LS4 Displays one of the possible STARs for the designated airport. An asterisk displayed in the first column indicates that the STAR is inserted in the flight plan. The asterisk along with 9IN FPLN9 displayed on the information line indicates that the flight plan approach is displayed. A large arrow displayed in the first column indicates that the STAR has been selected by the crew but not necessarily inserted in the flight plan. The large arrow along with 9SELECT9 or 9MODIFY9 displayed on the information line indicates that the working copy STAR is displayed. Actuation for a non-selected STAR displayed at that line select key selects the STAR. Actuation for a selected STAR displayed at that line select key deselects the STAR. Deselecting the STAR or selecting a different STAR when a runway has not been selected, causes the list of runways to be refreshed. Figure 4-46. Standard Terminal Arrival Routes (STARS) Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-79
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS5
DISPLAY CUE TRANSITION
FUNCTION Actuation with a STAR and a runway accesses the STAR Transitions page (Figure 4-47) for the STAR/runway combination to allow selection of the desired en route transition. The STAR/runway combination determines the runway transition to be executed. If no runway transitions are available for a STAR, the runway list will be blank. In this instance, actuation with a selected STAR accesses the STAR Transitions page. Displays one of the possible runways for the designated airports STARs. If no runway transitions are available, LS6, LS7, and LS8 will be blank. An asterisk displayed in the last column indicates that the STAR is inserted in the flight plan. The asterisk along with 9IN FPLN9 displayed on the information line indicates that the flight plan STAR is displayed. A large arrow displayed in the last column indicates that the STAR has been selected by the crew but not necessarily inserted in the flight plan. The large arrow along with 9SELECT9 or 9MODIFY9 displayed on the information line indicates that the working copy approach is displayed. Actuation for a non-selected runway displayed at that line select key selects the runway. Actuation for a for a selected runway displayed at that line select key deselects the runway. Deselecting the runway or selecting a different runway when a STAR has not been selected, causes the list of STARs to be refreshed.
LS6, LS7, and LS8
If more than three STARs or three runways are available, vertical scrolling will be possible. Vertical scrolling accesses additional STARs and runways page by page and wraps around. Standard Terminal Arrival Routes (STARS) Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 4-46.
4-80
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: star transition FUNCTION: Inserts, removes, or replaces a STAR in a flight plan.
ACTIVATION: From the STARS page (Figure 4-46) or the Flight Plan Waypoint page (Figure 4-23). LS KEY LS1, LS3, LS4 LS2, and DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays one of the possible en route transitions for the selected STAR/runway combination. When the STAR/runway combination is first selected, no en route transitions will be selected. An asterisk displayed in the first column indicates that the transition is inserted in the flight plan. The asterisk along with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed on the information line indicates that the flight plan STAR is displayed. A large arrow displayed in the first column indicates that the transition has been selected by the crew but not necessarily inserted in the flight plan. The large arrow along with 9FPLN INSR9 or 9FPLN MOD9 displayed at LS7 indicates that the working copy STAR is displayed. Actuation for a non-selected transition displayed at that line select key selects the en route transition to be used with the STAR. Actuation for a selected transition displayed at that line select key deselects the transition. LS5 LS6 and Blank -
Figure 4-47.
STAR Transitions Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-81
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS7
FUNCTION If the STAR has not been inserted into the flight plan, 9FPLN INSR9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. When displaying the flight plan STAR, 9FPLN RMV9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. When there is a STAR in the flight plan and the working copy is displayed, 9FPLN MOD9 will be displayed adjacent to LS7. Actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18) scrolled to END and displays 9INSRT STAR BEFORE?9 in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it displays 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 in the scratchpad. Confirmation deletes all the waypoints associated with the STAR procedure and any waypoints that have been inserted within the procedure, except those that have passed into history, or a STAR waypoint that is the active waypoint or an active STAR discontinuity and its associated waypoint. Actuation with 9FPLN MOD9 displayed adjacent to it displays the scratchpad message 9CONFIRM STAR RPLACE9. Confirmation removes the existing STAR.
LS8 -
RTN
Accesses the STARS page. If more than four transitions are available, vertical scrolling will be possible. Vertical scrolling accesses additional transitions page by page and wraps around. Figure 4-47. STAR Transitions Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-82
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: impromptu FUNCTION: Defines an impromptu pattern.
ACTIVATION: From the Patterns 2 page (Figure 4-30), Flight Plan Waypoint page (Figure 4-23), Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67), or the Track Space page (Figure 4-55). LS KEY LS1 LS2 DISPLAY CUE FWD or REV [ ]TKSP FUNCTION Displays current sequencing direction. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the offset track space. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the track space. Actuation with an empty scratchpad accesses the Track Space page (Figure 4-55). LS3 LS4 LS8 and :RIGHT or :LEFT 1[ ] Toggles between right and left offset of the pattern with respect to the current course. The default is left offset. Displays waypoint 1 and offset label. The offset label consists of an 9R9 for right or an 9L9 for left and a sequence number starting with 919 (i.e. R1, R2, R3, etc.). Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters point 1 (referred to as CSP or fix) before an offset occurs. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the CSP. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the point into the scratchpad. The function of automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database is allowed for LS4 and LS8. LS5 FPLN INSR or FPLN RMV Actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). If a CSP has been defined on this page, 9INSRT IMP BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. If a CSP has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH IMP AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it displays 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 in the scratchpad. Confirmation removes the impromptu pattern from the flight plan. Figure 4-48. Impromptu Page 1 (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-83
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS6
FUNCTION Actuation with 9ALTN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). If a CSP has been defined on this page, 9INSERT IMP BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. If a CSP has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH IMP AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9ALTN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it removes the impromptu pattern from the alternate flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM ALTN RMV9 scratchpad message.
LS7
ETD
Enters the ETD in UTC. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes ETD. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the ETD into the scratchpad.
Figure 4-48.
Accesses Impromptu page 2 (Figure 4-49). Accesses Impromptu page 3 (Figure 4-50). Impromptu Page 1 (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-84
ORIGINAL
ACTIVATION: Vertical scrolling from Impromptu Page 1 (Figure 4-48) or Impromptu page 3 (Figure 4-50). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and 2[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters point 2. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes point 2. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies point 2 into the scratchpad. LS2 LS6 and 3[ ] Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters point 3. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes point 3. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies point 3 into the scratchpad. LS3 LS7 and 4[ ] Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters point 4. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes point 4. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies point 4 into the scratchpad. LS4 LS8 and 5[ ] Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters point 5. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes point 5. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies point 5 into the scratchpad. Figure 4-49. Accesses Impromptu page 3 (Figure 4-50). Accesses Impromptu Page 1 (Figure 4-48). Impromptu Page 2
4-85
ORIGINAL
ACTIVATION: Vertical scrolling from Impromptu Page 1 (Figure 4-48) or Impromptu Page 2 (Figure 4-49). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and 6[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters point 6. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes point 6. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies point 6 into the scratchpad. LS2 LS6 and 7[ ] Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters point 7. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes point 7. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies point 7 into the scratchpad. LS3 LS7 and 8[ ] Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters point 8. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes point 8. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies point 8 into the scratchpad. LS4 LS8 and 9[ ] Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad enters point 9. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes point 9. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies point 9 into the scratchpad. Figure 4-50. Accesses Impromptu Page 1 (Figure 4-48). Accesses Impromptu page 2 (Figure 4-49). Impromptu Page 3
4-86
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: ladder FUNCTION: Defines a ladder pattern.
ACTIVATION: From the Patterns 2 page (Figure 4-30), Flight Plan Waypoint page (Figure 4-23), Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67), Track Space page (Figure 4-55), or the Ladder Points 1 page. LS KEY LS1 CTR or CSP DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles between 9CTR9 (center) and 9CSP9 attach selection. The default toggle state is 9CSP9. Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad, enters the reference point for the ladder patterns search area. Actuation with an 9-9 in the scratchpad, deletes the ladder patterns reference point. The function of automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database is allowed for LS1. LS2 [ ]T CRS Actuation with a course in the scratchpad enters the course inbound to the ladder pattern fix. The default course for the CSP mode is the inbound course from the flight plan or alternate flight plan for the waypoint to which the ladder pattern is attached. The default course for the CTR mode is 360 degrees true. In CSP mode, actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad returns the display to the value for inbound course from the flight plan or alternate flight plan, if the ladder pattern has been inserted into the flight plan or alternate flight plan, or 9[INB]9 (inbound) if the ladder pattern has not been inserted into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. In CTR mode, actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad returns the display to the default value of 360 degrees true. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern course into the scratchpad. LS3 [ ]WIDTH Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the pattern width in nautical miles. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the width to the default value of 30 nm/ 55 km. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the width into the scratchpad. Figure 4-51. Ladder Page (Sheet 1 of 3)
4-87
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 [ ] TKSP
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the track space. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the track space. Actuation with an empty scratchpad accesses the Track Space page (Figure 4-55).
LS5 LS6
L: or R: LENGTH [ ]
Toggles between 9L9( left) and 9R9 (right) turns from pattern course. The default is 9L9. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the pattern length in nautical miles. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the length to the default value of 50 nm/ 93 km. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the length into the scratchpad.
LS7
For standard CSP definition, actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). If a CSP has been defined on this page, 9INSERT LDR BEFORE9 is displayed in the scratchpad. If a CSP has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH LDR AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. For the CTR defined ladder pattern, actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18) and 9INSERT LDR BEFORE9 is displayed in the scratchpad. If a CSP has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH LDR AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it displays 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 in the scratchpad. Confirmation removes the ladder pattern from the flight plan.
Figure 4-51.
Ladder Page (Sheet 2 of 3)
4-88
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS8
FUNCTION For standard CSP definition, actuation with 9ALTN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). If a CSP has been defined on this page, 9INSERT LDR BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. If a CSP has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH LDR AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. For the CTR defined ladder pattern, actuation with 9ALTN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67) and 9INSERT LDR BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9ALTN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it removes the ladder pattern from the alternate flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM ALTN RMV9 scratchpad message.
bc
Accesses the Ladder Points pages. Accesses the SAR Freeze /Resume page (Figure 4-54) when the pattern is active. Figure 4-51. Ladder Page (Sheet 3 of 3)
4-89
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: sector FUNCTION: Defines a sector pattern.
ACTIVATION: From the Patterns 2 page (Figure 4-30), Flight Plan Waypoint page (Figure 4-23), Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67), Track Space page (Figure 4-55), or the Sector Points 1 page. LS KEY LS1 [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad, enters the pattern CSP. Actuation with an 9-9 in the scratchpad, deletes the CSP. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern CSP point into the scratchpad. The function of automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database is allowed for LS1. LS2 [ ]T CRS Actuation with a course in the scratchpad enters the course inbound to the sector pattern CSP. The default course is the inbound course from the flight plan or alternate flight plan for the waypoint to which the sector pattern is attached. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad returns the display to the value for inbound course from the flight plan or alternate flight plan, if the sector pattern has been inserted into the flight plan or alternate flight plan, or 9[INB]9 if the sector pattern has not been inserted into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the course into the scratchpad. LS3 [ ] RADIUS Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the pattern radius in nautical miles. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the radius to the default value of 10 nm/ 19 km. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the radius into the scratchpad. Figure 4-52. Sector Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-90
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 [ ] TKSP
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the track space. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the track space to the default value of 10 nautical miles. Actuation with an empty scratchpad accesses the Track Space page (Figure 4-55).
LS5 LS6
RIGHT: or LEFT: ANGLE[ ]
Toggles between 9RIGHT9 and 9LEFT9 initial turn in the pattern. The default is 9LEFT9 turn. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the pattern angle degrees. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the angle to the default value of 60 degrees and recomputes the track. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the angle into the scratchpad.
LS7
Actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). If a CSP has been defined on this page, 9INSERT SCT BEFORE9 is displayed in the scratchpad. If a CSP has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH SCT AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it displays 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 in the scratchpad. Confirmation removes the sector pattern from the flight plan.
LS8
Actuation with 9ALTN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). If a CSP has been defined on this page, 9INSERT SCT BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. If a CSP has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH SCT AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9ALTN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it removes the sector pattern from the alternate flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM ALTN RMV9 scratchpad message.
bc
Accesses the Sector Points pages. Accesses the SAR Freeze/Resume page (Figure 4-54) when the pattern is active. Figure 4-52. Sector Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-91
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: exp sqr FUNCTION: Defines an expanding square pattern.
ACTIVATION: From the Patterns 2 page (Figure 4-30), Flight Plan Waypoint page (Figure 4-23), Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67), Track Space page (Figure 4-55), or the Expanding Square Points 1 page. LS KEY LS1 [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a waypoint entry in the scratchpad, enters the pattern CSP. Actuation with an 9-9 in the scratchpad, deletes the CSP. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the pattern CSP point into the scratchpad. The function of automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database is allowed for LS1. LS2 [ ]T CRS Actuation with a course in the scratchpad enters the course inbound to the expanding square pattern CSP. The default course is the inbound course from the flight plan or alternate flight plan for the waypoint to which the expanding square pattern is attached. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad returns the display to the value for inbound course from the flight plan or alternate flight plan, if the expanding square pattern has been inserted into the flight plan or alternate flight plan, or 9[INB]9 if the expanding square pattern has not been inserted into the flight plan or alternate flight plan. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the course into the scratchpad. LS3 LS4 Blank [ ] TKSP Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the track space. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the track space. Actuation with an empty scratchpad accesses the Track Space page (Figure 4-55). Figure 4-53. Expanding Square Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-92
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS5 LS6
DISPLAY CUE RIGHT: or LEFT: LENGTH[ ]
FUNCTION Toggles between 9RIGHT9 and 9LEFT9 initial turn in the pattern. The default is 9LEFT9 turn. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the pattern length in nautical miles. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the length to the default value of 30 nm/56 km. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the length into the scratchpad.
LS7
Actuation with 9FPLN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). If a CSP has been defined on this page, 9INSERT SQR BEFORE9 is displayed in the scratchpad. If a CSP has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH SQR AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9FPLN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it displays 9CONFIRM FPLN RMV9 in the scratchpad. Confirmation removes the expanding square pattern from the flight plan.
LS8
Actuation with 9ALTN INSR9 displayed adjacent to it accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). If a CSP has been defined on this page, 9INSERT SQR BEFORE?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. If a CSP has not been defined on this page, 9ATTACH SQR AT?9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation with 9ALTN RMV9 displayed adjacent to it removes the expanding square pattern from the alternate flight plan after confirmation indicated by the 9CONFIRM ALTN RMV9 scratchpad message.
bc
Accesses the Expanding Square Points pages. Accesses the SAR Freeze/Resume page (Figure 4-54) when the pattern is active. Figure 4-53. Expanding Square Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-93
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: sar freeze or sar resume FUNCTION: Freeze or resume active SAR pattern.
ACTIVATION: By laterally scrolling from the SAR definition page of any active SAR pattern. LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE MARK POSITION or FREEZE PATTERN or RESUME PATTERN FUNCTION When 9MARK POSITION9 is displayed, actuation displays the present position at LS2 and copies the marked position into the markpoint list. Actuation when 9FREEZE PATTERN9 is displayed freezes the active SAR pattern. Actuation when 9RESUME PATTERN9 is displayed resumes the active SAR pattern. LS2 LS3 LS8 thru Blank bc Figure 4-54. Displays the most recently marked position. Accesses the active SAR pattern definition page. SAR Freeze/Resume Page
4-94
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: track space FUNCTION: Calculates the recommended visual track space to be used in the definition of a search pattern.
ACTIVATION: From the Impromptu Page 1 (Figure 4-48), Ladder page (Figure 4-51), Sector page (Figure 4-52), or Expanding Square page (Figure 4-53) by pressing LS2 or LS4 (TKSP) with an empty scratchpad. LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the target type. Toggles between the following target types: 9RAFT (4)9 9BOAT 15-259 9BOAT 25-409 9BOAT 40-659 9SH 90-1509 9SH 150-3009 9SH 300 +9 LS2 [ ]VIS Displays the visibility conditions. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the visibility. Actuation with a 9*9 in the scratchpad sets the visibility to the default value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the visibility into the scratchpad. LS3 [ ]WIND Displays wind speed. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the wind speed. Actuation with a 9*9 in the scratchpad sets the wind speed to the default value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the wind speed into the scratchpad. LS4 REJECT Returns to the search pattern page that called the Track Space page. The displayed track space will not be automatically entered into the track space field of the pattern calling the definition page. Figure 4-55. Track Space Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-95
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS5 AGL[ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays the helicopter search altitude. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the helicopter search altitude. Actuation with a 9*9 in the scratchpad sets the helicopter search altitude to the default value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the helicopter search altitude into the scratchpad.
LS6
SEAS[
Displays the wave height (seas). Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the seas. Actuation with a 9*9 in the scratchpad sets the seas to the default value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the seas into the scratchpad.
LS7
GS[
Displays the ground speed. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the ground speed. Actuation with a 9*9 in the scratchpad sets the ground speed to the default value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the ground speed into the scratchpad.
LS8
APPLY
Actuation when 9APPLY9 is displayed returns to the search pattern page that called the Track Space page. The displayed track space will be placed into the scratchpad then automatically entered into the track space field of the pattern calling the definition page. Figure 4-55. Track Space Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-96
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: user wpt list FUNCTION: Lists user waypoints.
ACTIVATION: From the Flight Plan Edit 1 page (Figure 4-24) and the User Waypoint List page (Figure 4-56). LS KEY LS1 SEARCH[ DISPLAY CUE ] FUNCTION Actuation with a user identifier in the scratchpad displays the User Waypoint List page (Figure 4-56) for the user identifier. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the user waypoint. Actuation with blanks in the scratchpad copies the waypoint to the scratchpad. LS5 LS6, LS7, and LS8 NEW Actuation when the database is not full accesses the User Waypoint List page (Figure 4-56). Access the User Waypoint List page (Figure 4-56) for that user identifier. Accesses additional user waypoints three at a time in increasing alphabetical order with wrap around from the end of the list to the beginning of the list. Accesses additional user waypoints three at a time in decreasing alphabetical order with wrap around from the beginning of the list to the end of the list. Figure 4-56. User Waypoint List Page
LS2, LS3, and LS4
4-97
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: user wpt FUNCTION: Creates, edits, and displays user waypoint information.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS6, LS7, or LS8 from the User Waypoint List page (Figure 4-56). LS KEY LS1 [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a user identifier in the scratchpad enters the user identifier. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the user identifier. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the associated user identifier into the scratchpad. LS2 LS6 and [ ] Actuation with a waypoint in the scratchpad displays the waypoint coordinates. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the position. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the associated position into the scratchpad. LS3 : Toggles between the following: FIX VOR VORTAC TACAN VOR-DME NDB NDB-DME DME ARPT Figure 4-57. User Waypoint Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-98
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 FREQ[ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with a frequency in the scratchpad enters the frequency. For waypoint types that do not display frequency, the brackets and label are not displayed. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad enters the default frequency. The default frequency is the lowest frequency available for the waypoint type. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the frequency into the scratchpad.
LS5
Actuation with an altitude in the scratchpad enters the elevation. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the elevation. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the associated elevation into the scratchpad.
LS7
DCL[
When a non-declination station is selected at LS3, the declination entry and label at LS7 will be blank and LS7 will be inoperative. Actuation with an declination in the scratchpad enters the declination. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the declination. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the associated declination into the scratchpad.
LS8
ADD or RTN
Actuation when 9ADD9 is displayed determines if the database contains the maximum number of points. If the user waypoint list is full, 9USER WPT LIST FULL9 is displayed in the scratchpad. Actuation when 9ADD9 is displayed checks the user waypoint database for a duplicate. If the same identifier exists in the database, 9CONFIRM OVERWRITE9 will be displayed in the scratchpad indicating that confirmation is required to overwrite the waypoint. If a duplicate identifier is not found, 9CONFIRM ADD9 will be displayed in the scratchpad. Confirmation of either scratchpad message will update the database and reset the page to default values. Actuation when 9RTN9 is displayed returns to the User Waypoint List page (Figure 4-56).
Figure 4-57.
User Waypoint Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-99
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: off route wpt list 1 FUNCTION: Lists off route waypoints.
ACTIVATION: From the Flight Plan Edit 2 page (Figure 4-25). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and HVR[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a waypoint in the scratchpad enters that value for the hover (HVR) waypoint. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the HVR. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the HVR point into the scratchpad. LS2, LS4, LS7, LS8 LS3, LS6, and With a waypoint in the scratchpad, actuation of any of these LS keys enters that value for an off route (OR) waypoint. When an off route waypoint is received from the mission bus, it will be displayed in the corresponding off route waypoint location overwriting the current waypoint displayed at that location. Actuation of any of these LS keys with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the off route waypoint. Actuation of any of these LS keys with an empty scratchpad copies the off route waypoint into the scratchpad. Accesses the Off Route Waypoint List 2 page (Figure 4-59) and wraps around. Figure 4-58. Off Route Waypoint List 1 Page
4-100
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: off route wpt list 2 FUNCTION: Lists off route waypoints.
ACTIVATION: By vertically scrolling from the Off Route Waypoint List 1 page (Figure 4-58). LS KEY LS1, LS5, LS6 LS2, and DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION With a waypoint in the scratchpad, actuation of any of these LS keys enters that value for an OR waypoint. When an off route waypoint is received from the mission bus, it will be displayed in the corresponding off route waypoint location overwriting the current waypoint displayed at that location. Actuation of any of these LS keys with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the off route waypoint. Actuation of any of these LS keys with an empty scratchpad copies the off route waypoint into the scratchpad. LS3, LS7, LS8 LS4, and Blank -
Accesses the Off Route Waypoint List 1 page (Figure 4-58) and wraps around. Figure 4-59. Off Route Waypoint List 2 Page
4-101
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: tactical fpln FUNCTION: Displays the fix plus up to ten active list tactical flight plan (TFP) waypoints defined by the mission computer. ACTIVATION: By pressing the LS key adjacent to the Tactical Flight Plan fix 9X9 attribute on the Flight Plan Waypoint page (Figure 4-23). The Tactical Flight Plan page is only accessible while the TFP pattern is active. LS KEY LS1 LS1 LS8 thru FIX DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the sequential number of the fix and the tactical flight plan fix position. Displays the sequential number of the fix. Displays the tactical waypoint label. Displays an asterisk adjacent to the current TO tactical waypoint of the TFP. Accesses additional waypoints if they exist and wraps around. Figure 4-60. Tactical Flight Plan Page
4-102
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: lnav steer FUNCTION: Displays navigation data that the FMS computes from navigation sources.
ACTIVATION: By pressing the STR function key. LS KEY LS1 : DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the navigation source between arbitrator (indicated by a 9+9 following the navigation source), GPS/D/H, and INU. The arbitrated solution represents the current best solution. LS1 is inoperative when the FMS model is used as the navigation source. Displays the current active waypoint. TRK XTK Displays the track angle from helicopter present position to the active waypoint. Displays crosstrack deviation. Crosstrack deviation displays 9R9 when present position is to the right of an observer at the FROM waypoint looking toward the TO waypoint and 9L9 otherwise. Toggles display between 9CMD GS:9 (commanded groundspeed), 9GS:9 (actual groundspeed), or 9IAS:9 (actual indicated airspeed) when in a holding pattern. The speed will be indicated as 9SLOW9 when the helicopter current ground speed or indicated airspeed is slower than the commanded groundspeed. The speed will be indicated as 9FAST9 when the helicopter current ground speed or indicated airspeed is faster than the commanded groundspeed. The default selection is 9GS9. Displays the ETA to the active waypoint. Displays the waypoint bearing and distance to go from helicopter present position to the active waypoint. Toggles the display between 9DA9 (drift angle) and 9TKE9 (track angle error). Drift angle displays 9R9 when the drift is right and 9L9 when the drift is left. Track angle error displays 9L9 when the track of the helicopter is rotated counterclockwise from the desired track and 9R9 when the track of the helicopter is rotated clockwise from the desired track. Accesses the Vertical Steer page (Figure 4-62) and wraps around. Figure 4-61. Lateral Steer Page
LS2 LS3 LS4
LS5
CMD GS: or GS: or IAS:
LS6 LS7 LS8
ETA xxx/xxxnm DA: or TKE:
4-103
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: vnav steer FUNCTION: Displays navigation data that the FMS computes from navigation sources.
ACTIVATION: By pressing the STR key and vertical scrolling from the Lateral Steer page (Figure 4-61). LS KEY LS1 ft DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the current helicopter altitude (pressure altitude is displayed as flight level (FL), barometric altitude is displayed as feet). Displays desired altitude and desired descent angle at the active waypoint. Displays direct angle for the descent (DIR DESCNT) or climb (DIR CLIMB). Displays BAROSET barometric settings used for altitude conversions. Displays either Top of Descent (TOD) or bottom of climb (BOC). Displays rate for the descent (DIR DESCNT) or climb (DIR CLIMB). Actuation with a blank scratchpad toggles the baroset entry units between 9in9 (inches) and 9mb9 (millibars). Accesses the Lateral Steer page (Figure 4-61) and wraps around. Figure 4-62. Vertical Steer Page
LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 -
xxxxft @ xxx xxx BAROSET TOD or BOC Blank xxxxfpm in: or mb:
4-104
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: altn fpln FUNCTION: Allows the operator to create or modify an alternate flight plan. Also used to replace the flight plan with the alternate flight plan waypoints, reverse the alternate flight plan order, or erase the alternate flight plan. ACTIVATION: By pressing EDIT function key then pressing LS1 (ALTN FPLN) on Flight Plan Edit 1 page (Figure 4-24). LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE INIT/FUEL FUNCTION Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Climb Initialization page (Figure 4-64) and Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Initialization Page (Figure 4-65). Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). Replaces the flight plan with the alternate flight plan waypoints. This function requires a confirmation indicated by the scratchpad message 9CONFIRM RPLACE FPLN9. After confirmation the display changes to the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18). Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Waypoints page (Figure 4-70). Reverses the order of the legs in the alternate flight. This function requires a confirmation indicated by the scratchpad message 9CONFIRM RVRSE ALTN9. Erases the alternate flight plan. This function requires a confirmation indicated by the scratchpad message 9CONFIRM ERASE ALTN9. Accesses the Flight Plan page (Figure 4-18) with 9ADD ALTN BEFORE9 displayed in the scratchpad. The operator may then transfer the alternate flight plan into a selected location in the flight plan by pressing the line select key adjacent to the point in the flight plan before which the alternate is to be added. Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Catalog pages (Figure 4-71). Figure 4-63. Alternate Flight Plan Page
LS2 LS3
LEG REPLACE
LS4 LS5
WAYPOINTS RVRS ALTN
LS6
ERASE ALTN
LS7
ADD
LS8
CATALOG
4-105
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: altn climb init FUNCTION: Provides for entry of climb allowances.
ACTIVATION: From the Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63), by vertically scrolling from the Leg pages, or by lateral scrolling from the Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Initialization page (Figure 4-65) or the Alternate Flight Plan Climb Initialization page (Figure 4-64). LS KEY LS1 TIME[ DISPLAY CUE ]min FUNCTION Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the time to climb. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the time to climb into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad will set the time to climb to the default value of 0 min (minute). LS2 DIST[ ]nm Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the air distance to climb. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the air distance to climb into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the air distance to climb to the default value of 0 nm (nautical mile). LS3 FUEL[ ]klb Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the fuel to climb. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the fuel to climb into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the fuel to climb to the default value of 0 klb (kilopound). LS4 WIND[ ]kt Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the average climb wind speed and direction. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the average climb wind speed and direction into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad will set the average climb wind speed to the default value of 0 knots. Figure 4-64. Alternate Flight Plan Climb Initialization Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-106
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS5 LS7 LS8 thru Blank RTN c b
DISPLAY CUE -
FUNCTION
Returns to the Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63). Accesses the first Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67) in the alternate flight plan. Accesses the last Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67) in the alternate flight plan. Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Initialization page (Figure 4-65). Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Summary page (Figure 4-66). Alternate Flight Plan Climb Initialization Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 4-64.
4-107
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: altn fuel init FUNCTION: Provides for entry of fuel allowances.
ACTIVATION: By lateral scrolling from the Alternate Flight Plan Climb Initialization page (Figure 4-64) or the Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Summary page (Figure 4-66). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and DISPLAY CUE INIT TOTAL FUEL[ ] FUNCTION Displays initial total fuel (prior to start-up). Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the total fuel prior to start-up. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the total fuel into the scratchpad. LS2 GND[ ] Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the ground fuel allowance. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the ground fuel allowance into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the ground fuel allowance to the default value. LS3 RSV[ ]% Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the reserve fuel entry based on the fuel mode selected at LS7 (klb, %, or min.). Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the reserve fuel entry into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the reserve fuel entry to the default value. LS4 APP[ ] Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the approach fuel allowance. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the approach fuel allowance into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the approach fuel allowance to the default value. Figure 4-65. Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Initialization Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-108
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS6 ZFW[ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the zero fuel weight prior to start-up. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the zero fuel weight into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the zero fuel weight value.
LS7
:RSV
Toggles the reserve fuel mode between weight in kilopounds (klb), percentage of leg and climb fuel (%), and minutes based on fuel burn rate of the last entered leg (min). Returns to the Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63). Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Summary page (Figure 4-66). Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Climb Initialization page (Figure 4-64). Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Initialization Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
LS8
RTN c b
Figure 4-65.
4-109
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: altn fuel summary FUNCTION: Displays an alternate flight plan fuel summary.
ACTIVATION: By lateral scrolling from the Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Initialization page (Figure 4-65) or Alternate Flight Plan Climb Initialization page (Figure 4-64). LS KEY LS1 LS2 info line LS3 LS4 LEGS GND RSV APP REQD DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays total fuel required for the defined legs including climb fuel. Displays computed reserve fuel. Displays ground fuel defined on the Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Initialization page (Figure 4-65). Displays the approach fuel allowance. Displays the required fuel that is computed by summing leg fuel, reserve, approach allowance, and ground allowance. Displays extra fuel. Actuation with the display toggled to the weight mode and with an entry in the scratchpad enters the extra fuel. Actuation with the display toggled to the endurance mode enters the extra fuel in endurance at the last leg burn rate. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the extra fuel into the scratchpad. LS6 TOTL or ENDUR Displays total fuel when the display is toggled to the weight mode. Actuation with the display toggled to the weight mode and with an entry in the scratchpad enters the total fuel. Actuation with a blank scratchpad except for brackets, copies the total fuel into the scratchpad. ENDUR Displays total endurance when the display is toggled to the endurance mode. Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Summary Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
LS5
EXTR
Figure 4-66.
4-110
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS7 hr or klb
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays the toggle selection for weight/endurance. Toggles the display of extra fuel and total fuel as endurance in hours (hr) and weight in kilopounds (klb).
LS8 -
RTN c b
Returns to the Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63). Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Climb Initialization page (Figure 4-64). Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Initialization page (Figure 4-65). Alternate Flight Plan Fuel Summary Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 4-66.
4-111
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: altn leg xxa (where xx is the leg number) FUNCTION: Defines an alternate flight plan leg.
ACTIVATION: From the Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63), the Circle MFP page (Figure 4-31), the CRP page (Figure 4-34), the Racetrack MFP page (Figure 4-32), the Figure Eight MFP pages (Figure 4-33), the Alternate Flight Plan Waypoints page (Figure 4-70), the Impromptu Page 1 (Figure 4-48), the Ladder page (Figure 4-51), the Sector page (Figure 4-52), and the Expanding Square page (Figure 4-53). Also by vertical scrolling from the Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63) or by lateral scrolling from the Alternate Flight Plan Leg B page (Figure 4-68) or Alternate Flight Plan Leg C page (Figure 4-69). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the origin on leg 01 only. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the waypoint into the scratchpad. Automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database function is allowed for LS1 and LS5. LS2 [ ] Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the TO waypoint which creates a new leg. After the last entered leg, 9END9 is displayed. Actuation when an 9ATTACH xxx AT?9 message is displayed attaches the parameters associated with the scratchpad to the waypoint associated with the line select key pressed. This waypoint will then become the fix point for the specified MFP. Actuation when an 9INSERT xxx BEFORE?9 message is displayed inserts the new MFP into the alternate flight plan at the location prior to the waypoint associated with the line select key pressed. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the waypoint into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the TO waypoint. Automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database function is allowed for LS2. info line TOC xxnm LEG or ORIG/DEST Displays the distance to top of climb (TOC) and the distance label corresponding to the distance selected at LS7 (LEG or ORIG/DEST), if the climb definition exists in the alternate flight plan on the leg containing the TOC only.
Figure 4-67.
Alternate Flight Plan Leg A Page (Sheet 1 of 3)
4-112
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS3 TAS[ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the leg true air speed in knots. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the true air speed into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the TAS to the previous legs value.
LS4
WIND[
Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the leg wind aloft in knots and degrees true. Prior to an input of predicted wind, a default wind direction of 360 degrees and wind speed of 0 knots is used for all legs. The display fields for wind direction and speed is blank when default values are used. Entered wind values apply for the active waypoint and all succeeding waypoints in the alternate flight plan. For new waypoints entered in the plan, the wind values for the preceding leg is used. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the predicted wind into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the predicted wind values and assigns the default wind values to the displayed leg and all succeeding legs.
LS5 LS6 LS7
Blank p xxxnm:
Actuation with a pattern (9p9) entered at that leg accesses the associated MFP page. Toggles displayed distance between leg distance and distance from origin/ distance to destination. The default is leg distance. Returns to the Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63). Accesses the previous Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67) in the alternate flight plan. If the Leg A page currently displayed is the first leg in the alternate flight plan, the Alternate Flight Climb Initialization page (Figure 4-64) is accessed. Accesses the next Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67) in the alternate flight plan. If the Leg A page currently displayed is for the END leg in the alternate flight plan, the Alternate Flight Climb Initialization page (Figure 4-64) is accessed.
LS8 -
RTN
Figure 4-67.
4-113
ORIGINAL
LS KEY c
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg B page (Figure 4-68) for the defined leg if the currently displayed page is not the END leg. Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg C page (Figure 4-69) for the defined leg if the currently displayed page is not the END leg.
Figure 4-67.
4-114
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: altn leg xxb (where xx is the leg number) FUNCTION: Defines an alternate flight plan leg.
ACTIVATION: By lateral scrolling from the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67) or Alternate Flight Plan Leg C page (Figure 4-69). LS KEY LS1 LS2 GWT [ ] TIME DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays gross weight at the beginning of the leg. Displays leg departure time. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the leg departure time in UTC on leg 01 only. Entry of the initial departure time allows the computation of subsequent arrival and departure times. If a future arrival time is entered, the departure time will be computed and displayed. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the departure time into the scratchpad on leg 01 only. LS3 LS4 BURN RATE[ ] Displays fuel at the beginning of the leg. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the average fuel consumption rate. The first entry of burn rate is applied to all legs in the alternate flight plan. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the burn rate into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the burn rate to the previous legs value. If no previous leg exists, the burn rate for all legs is deleted. LS5 LS6 GWT TIME [ ] Displays gross weight at the end of the leg. Displays leg arrival time. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the arrival time at the end of the leg in UTC. All arrival times are computed based on the entered arrival/departure time. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the arrival time into the scratchpad. LS7 Figure 4-68. Displays fuel at the end of the leg. Alternate Flight Plan Leg B Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-115
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS8 RTN
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Returns to the Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63). Accesses the previous Alternate Flight Plan Leg B page (Figure 4-68) in the alternate flight plan. If the Leg B page currently displayed is the first leg in the alternate flight plan, the Alternate Flight Climb Initialization page (Figure 4-64) is accessed. Accesses the next Alternate Flight Plan Leg B page (Figure 4-68) in the alternate flight plan. If the Leg B page currently displayed is for the last leg in the alternate flight plan, the Alternate Flight Climb Initialization page (Figure 4-64) is accessed. Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg C page (Figure 4-69). Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67).
c b
Figure 4-68.
Alternate Flight Plan Leg B Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-116
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: altn leg xxc (where xx is the leg number) FUNCTION: Defines an alternate flight plan leg.
ACTIVATION: By lateral scrolling from the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67) or Alternate Flight Plan Leg B page (Figure 4-68). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and DISPLAY CUE LOITER TIME[ : ] FUNCTION Actuation with and entry in the scratchpad enters the estimated time in loiter for an MFP. The entered loiter time is used in computations associated with the 9TO9 waypoint of the leg even if an MFP is not attached to the 9TO9 waypoint. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the loiter time. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the loiter time into the scratchpad. LS2 LS6 and LOITER BURN RATE[ ] Actuation with and entry in the scratchpad enters the average fuel consumption rate for the loiter. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the loiter burn rate. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the loiter burn rate into the scratchpad. LS3 LS4 ONLOAD or OFF LOAD ALT[ ] Toggles the fuel load display between 9ONLOAD and 9OFF LOAD9. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the altitude for the VNAV function. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the entered VNAV altitude. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the VNAV altitude into the scratchpad. LS7 [ ]klb Actuation with and entry in the scratchpad enters the on-load (fuel) weight or off-load (cargo or fuel) weight for that leg in klb. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the on-load (fuel) or off-load (cargo or fuel). Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the on-load (fuel) or off-load (cargo or fuel) into the scratchpad. Figure 4-69. Alternate Flight Plan Leg C Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-117
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS8 RTN
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Returns to the Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63). Accesses the previous Alternate Flight Plan Leg C page (Figure 4-69) in the alternate flight plan. If the Leg C page currently displayed is the first leg in the alternate flight plan, the Alternate Flight Climb Initialization page (Figure 4-64) is accessed. Accesses the next Alternate Flight Plan Leg C page (Figure 4-69) in the alternate flight plan. If the Leg C page currently displayed is for the last leg in the alternate flight plan, the Alternate Flight Climb Initialization page (Figure 4-64) is accessed. Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67). Accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg B page (Figure 4-68).
c b
Figure 4-69.
Alternate Flight Plan Leg C Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-118
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: altn fpln wpts FUNCTION: Displays and inserts waypoints into the alternate flight plan.
ACTIVATION: From the Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63). LS KEY LS1, LS3, LS4 LS2, and DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the waypoint number, followed by waypoint coordinates or identifier, followed by any waypoint attributes defined for the waypoint. Inserts a waypoint from the scratchpad at the point corresponding to the line select key pressed and creates a leg which is defined with the defaults on the leg definition pages. All subsequent waypoints will move down in the alternate flight plan and be renumbered in sequence. When an 9ATTACH xxx AT?9 message is displayed, actuation (if not the 9ORIGIN9 waypoint from leg 01) attaches the parameters associated with the line select key pressed. This waypoint will then become the fix point for the specified MFP. When an 9INSERT xxx BEFORE?9 message is displayed, actuation (if not the 9ORIGIN9 waypoint from leg 01) inserts the new MFP into the alternate flight plan at the location prior to the waypoint associated with the line select key pressed. When a 9-9 is entered in the scratchpad, actuation (if not the 9ORIGIN9 waypoint from leg 01) deletes the waypoint adjacent to the line select key and recalculates the leg. The new leg will be defined with the values of the deleted leg that began at the point previous to the deleted point. Actuation with a user waypoint in the scratchpad inserts the waypoint at the corresponding line select key. Figure 4-70. Alternate Flight Plan Waypoints Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-119
ORIGINAL
LS KEY
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with a bearing/distance in the scratchpad copies the waypoint corresponding to the line select key pressed into the scratchpad with the bearing/distance offset amended to the waypoint position. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the corresponding waypoint into the scratchpad. Automatic user waypoint naming and insertion into the user waypoint database function is allowed for LS1, LS2, LS3, and LS4.
LS5, LS7, LS8 -
LS6, and
Actuation with an adjacent outward arrow accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Leg A page (Figure 4-67) for the leg which has the waypoint as the TO (except for waypoint 00). Accesses additional flight plan waypoint pages. Scrolling up accesses additional flight plan waypoint pages in the order of decreasing waypoint number and scrolling down accesses additional flight plan waypoint pages in the order of increasing waypoint number. Alternate Flight Plan Waypoints Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 4-70.
PAGE TITLE: altn catalog 01-08 FUNCTION: Lists the alternate flight plans on the data cartridge, loads alternate flight plans from the data cartridge to the CDU, saves alternate flight plans from the CDU to the data cartridge, and enters user defined alternate flight plan labels. ACTIVATION: From the Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63) and the Start 3 page (Figure 4-6). LS KEY LS1 through LS8 DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION If accessed from the Start 3 page (Figure 4-6), actuation of an LS key loads the alternate from the data cartridge to the CDU and returns to the Start 3 page. If accessed from the Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63), actuation of an LS key accesses the Alternate Flight Plan Load/Save page (Figure 4-72) for that alternate. Accesses other alternate flight plan catalog pages and wraps around. Figure 4-71. Alternate Flight Plan Catalog 01-08 Page
4-120
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: altn load/save FUNCTION: Loads an alternate flight plan into the CDU from the data cartridge and saves an alternate flight plan in the CDU to the data cartridge. ACTIVATION: From the Alternate Flight Plan Catalog pages (Figure 4-71). LS KEY LS1 LOAD DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Prompts the 9CONFIRM LOAD ALTN9 scratchpad message and upon confirmation, loads the alternate flight plan displayed on the title line into the CDU from the data cartridge and the 99 adjacent to LS1 will change to an 9*9 until the load is complete. Displays the entered label associated with the CDUs alternate flight plan. The display defaults to the label associated with the line select key on the Alternate Flight Plan Catalog page (Figure 4-71) used to access the Alternate Flight Plan Load/Save page (Figure 4-72). If no label exists, the field will be blank. Actuation with a blank scratchpad prompts the 9CONFIRM SAVE ALTN9 scratchpad message and upon confirmation, saves the alternate flight plan in the CDU to the location on the data cartridge specified on the title line and the 99 adjacent to LS2 will change to an 9*9 until the save is complete. Actuation with an alternate flight plan label in the scratchpad inserts the label adjacent to LS2 and prompts the 9CONFIRM SAVE ALTN9 scratchpad message. Upon confirmation, the alternate flight plan in the CDU is saved with the label to the data cartridge at the location specified on the title line and the 99 adjacent to LS2 will change to an 9*9 until the save is complete. Actuation with an 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the alternate flight plan label adjacent to LS2. Upon confirmation, actuation with a blank scratchpad and an alternate flight plan label adjacent to LS2 saves the alternate in the CDU with the alternate number. LS3 LS7 LS8 thru Blank RTN Figure 4-72. Returns to the Alternate Flight Plan page (Figure 4-63). Alternate Flight Plan Load/Save Page
LS2
SAVE
4-121
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: gps sa/as FUNCTION: Displays current GPS mission duration and key load status and toggles SA/AS mode between 9Y-ONLY9 and 9MIXED9. ACTIVATION: From the Index 1 page (Figure 4-2). LS KEY LS1, LS7 LS8 LS2 LS3, and Blank DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION
DAYS
Displays current GPS mission duration which is the number of consecutive valid daily keys beginning with the current days key that is contained in the set. The default is the number of days remaining in keys. Toggles SA/AS mode between 9Y-ONLY9 and 9MIXED9. When the mode is toggled to 9Y-ONLY9, the corresponding receiver constellation type is set to an all Y constellation and the GPS mode select is initialized. When the mode is toggled to 9MIXED9, the corresponding receiver constellation type is set to mixed mode and the GPS mode select is initialized. Displays GPS key load status. If the GPS receiver contains keys, 9KEYS LOADED9 is displayed. If the GPS receiver does not contain keys, 9NO KEYS9 is displayed. GPS SA/AS Page
LS5
MODE
LS6
KEYS LOADED or NO KEYS
Figure 4-73.
4-122
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: fv ctrl FUNCTION: Selects the heading data to be used by the EGI. The heading data is either slaved to the FV magnetic heading or manually entered in DG mode. In DG mode the operator can either enter or slew to a new heading value. ACTIVATION: From the Start 2 page (Figure 4-5). LS KEY LS1 LS2 FV CAL HDG DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Accesses the Flux Valve Calibration page (Figure 4-75). Displays the manual heading (DG mode) or FV heading (SLAVE mode) being sent to the EGI. If DG mode is selected at LS3, actuation with a heading in the scratchpad enters the manual heading. If SLAVE mode is selected at LS3, LS2 is inoperative. LS3 MODE Displays the mode for selecting magnetic heading. Toggles attitude and heading reference system (AHRS) mode command between SLAVE and DG. LS4 LS7 LS8 thru Blank RTN c b Returns to the Start 2 page (Figure 4-5). Increases the entered magnetic heading when in DG mode. Decreases the entered magnetic heading when in DG mode. Figure 4-74. Flux Valve Control Page
4-123
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: fv cal FUNCTION: Initiates a flux valve calibration and monitors its progress. Also allows an operator to abort a flux valve calibration in progress. ACTIVATION: From the Flux Valve Control page (Figure 4-74). LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE START or ABORT FUNCTION Actuation when 9START9 is displayed initiates a flux valve calibration. Actuation when 9ABORT9 is displayed aborts the flux valve calibration in progress. While FV calibration is in progress, displays the FV calibration time in seconds. While FV calibration is in progress, displays the FV calibration command messages based on sequence step and the current flux valve status. While FV calibration is in progress, displays the FV calibration command messages based upon sequence step and bit states of the current flux valve status word. Returns to the Flux Valve Control page (Figure 4-74). Figure 4-75. Flux Valve Calibration Page
LS2 info line
CAL TIME CMD=
LS3
CMD
LS4 LS7 LS8
thru
Blank RTN
4-124
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: nav config 1 FUNCTION: Sets the mode of the various navigation devices.
ACTIVATION: From the Index 1 page (Figure 4-2) or by vertical scrolling from the Navigation Configuration 2 page (Figure 4-77) or Navigation Configuration 3 page (Figure 4-78). LS KEY LS1, LS6, and LS7 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS6 LS8 Blank INU GPS ADC1 DPLR ADC2 DISPLAY CUE Toggles the state of INU between 9USE9 and 9OUT9. Toggles the mode of GPS between 9USE9 and 9OUT9. Toggles the mode of ADC1 between 9USE9 and 9OUT9. Toggles the mode of DPLR (Doppler) between 9USE9 and 9OUT9. Toggles the mode of ADC2 between 9USE9 and 9OUT9. Accesses Navigation Configuration 3 page (Figure 4-78). Accesses Navigation Configuration 2 page (Figure 4-77). Figure 4-76. Navigation Configuration 1 Page FUNCTION
4-125
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: nav config 2 FUNCTION: bank limit. Sets flight mode, heading/bearing reference, default ground speed, coordinate system, and
ACTIVATION: By vertical scrolling from the Navigation Configuration 1 page (Figure 4-76) or Navigation Configuration 3 page (Figure 4-78). LS KEY LS1 LS2 FLT MODE REF: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles between 9ENRT/TAC19, 9TERM/TAC29, 9APPR/TAC39, and 9OCN/TAC19 scaling modes. Toggles the FMS heading and bearing references between 9TRUE9 (true north) and 9MAG9 (magnetic north). After a cold start, the reference defaults to the last selected setting. ]kts Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the ground speed to be used while on the ground when the model aircraft function is not running. When the display is present, actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the ground speed into the scratchpad. Actuation with an 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the ground speed to the default value of 145 knots. The default ground speed is used for static flight planning calculations. LS6 :COORD Toggles between 9NTGS9 (naval tactical grid system) and 9L/L9 (latitude/longitude) which is the input to the system reference function for metric or english display of units. Navigation related distances and positions are displayed in english units when 9L/L9 is selected and in metric units when 9NTGS9 is selected. The default setting is the last selected setting. ] Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the bank angle. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad enters the default bank angle or 25 degrees. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the bank angle into the scratchpad. Accesses Navigation Configuration 1 page (Figure 4-76). Accesses Navigation Configuration 3 page (Figure 4-78). Figure 4-77. Navigation Configuration 2 Page 4-126 ORIGINAL
LS3 LS5 LS4 LS8
and and
Blank GS[
LS7
BANK[
PAGE TITLE: nav config 3 FUNCTION: Sets cross track alert distance, speed alert speed, and waypoint alert time.
ACTIVATION: By vertical scrolling from the Navigation Configuration 1 page (Figure 4-76) or Navigation Configuration 2 page (Figure 4-77). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and XTK ALERT[ DISPLAY CUE ]nm FUNCTION Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the distance that is used to generate the 9xtk alert9 annunciation on the CDU and the 9MSG9 alert on the MFD for excessive cross track deviation when the deviation exceeds the entered value for more than three seconds. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the cross track distance and causes suppression of the cross track alert function. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the cross track distance into the scratchpad. LS2 LS6 and SPD ALERT[ ]kt Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the speed that is used to generate the 9U speed9 annunciation and causes the speed command bug to flash on the MFD when the current helicopter speed deviates from the commanded speed by the entered amount for more than three seconds. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the speed and causes suppression of the speed command alert function. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the speed into the scratchpad. Figure 4-78. Navigation Configuration 3 Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-127
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS3 LS7 and WPTALERT[
DISPLAY CUE ]sec
FUNCTION Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the waypoint alert time in seconds. The waypoint alert time only affects external annunciators. The waypoint annunciators on the CDU always remain 10 seconds prior to the waypoint. The entered waypoint alert time does not apply to TERMINAL mode or APPROACH mode. During these modes, the waypoint alert time is 10 seconds. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad enters the default waypoint alert time of 10 seconds. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the waypoint alert time into the scratchpad.
LS4 LS8 -
and
Blank
Accesses Navigation Configuration 2 page (Figure 4-77). Accesses Navigation Configuration 1 page (Figure 4-76).
Figure 4-78.
Navigation Configuration 3 Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-128
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: comm FUNCTION: Tunes the communication radios and accesses the communication radio control pages.
ACTIVATION: By pressing the COM key. LS KEY LS1 V1 DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays radio identifier, plain/cipher for V/UHF1. status, preset, and
Accesses the V/UHF1 Control page (Figure 4-80). LS2 V2 Displays radio identifier, plain/cipher for V/UHF2. status, preset, and
Accesses the V/UHF2 Control page (Figure 4-80). LS3 LS7 LS4 and Blank HF Displays radio identifier, status, plain/cipher for the HF radio. preset, and
Accesses the HF Control page (Figure 4-87). LS5 LS6 and [ ] Displays the frequency for the corresponding radio. Actuation with a blank scratchpad tunes the corresponding radio to the previously tuned frequency (recall). If the previously tuned frequency was a preset, Havequick net, or maritime channel, the preset field and call sign field will display the associated mode/preset number and call sign respectively. Actuation with a preset number in the scratchpad tunes the corresponding radio to the preset defined in the corresponding preset list. Actuation with a frequency or Havequick net in the scratchpad tunes the corresponding radio to the frequency entry in V/UHF Frequency Control. Actuation with a maritime channel in the scratchpad sends the channel to the radio in V/UHF Frequency Control and the radio sends back the V/UHF frequency for display. Actuation with a preset call sign in the scratchpad tunes the corresponding radio to the call sign preset defined in the corresponding preset list in V/UHF Frequency Control. Figure 4-79. Communication Radio Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-129
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS8 [ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays emission mode and frequency for the HF radio. Actuation with a blank scratchpad tunes the HF radio to the previously tuned frequency (recall). If the previously tuned frequency was a preset frequency, the preset field will display the associated preset number. Actuation with a preset number in the scratchpad tunes the HF radio to the preset defined in the HF preset list. Actuation with a frequency in the scratchpad tunes the HF radio to the frequency entry in HF Frequency Control. If the frequency matches a preset in the HF preset list, the currently tuned frequency will be tuned to the preset definition for the corresponding radio. Actuation with a preset call sign in the scratchpad tunes the HF radio to the call sign preset defined in the HF preset list in HF Frequency Control. Actuation with the HF power mode is set to 9STBY9 (standby), sets the HF power mode to 9ON9.
Accesses the COMSEC Control page (Figure 4-90) and wraps around. Figure 4-79. Communication Radio Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-130
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: v/uhfx ctrl (where x is the radio number) FUNCTION: Provides V/UHF mode control, selects the V/UHF antenna, and accesses the V/UHF Presets page (Figure 4-81) and the V/UHF Havequick Setup page (Figure 4-84). ACTIVATION: From the Communication Radio page (Figure 4-79). LS KEY LS1 LS2 PRESETS MODE: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Accesses the V/UHF Presets page (Figure 4-81). Toggles the mode between 9TR9 (transmitter/receiver), 9TR/G9 (transmitter/receiver and guard), 9DF9 (direction finder), and 9GD9 (guard). Toggles the V/UHF squelch between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Toggles the V/UHF maritime mode between 9USA9 and 9INTL9 (international). Actuation with an airport identifier in the scratchpad enters that value as the identifier and accesses the database list of airport frequencies associated with that airport. Toggles the V/UHF antenna selection between 9TOP9 and 9BOT9. Accesses the V/UHF Havequick Setup page (Figure 4-84). Toggles V/UHF Link 11 enable between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Figure 4-80. V/UHF Control Page
LS3 LS4 LS5
SQL: MARITIME: APRT[ ]
LS6 LS7 LS8
:ANT HAVEQUICK :LK11
4-131
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: v/uhfx presets (where x is the radio number) FUNCTION: Displays and selects V/UHF presets.
ACTIVATION: From the V/UHF Control page (Figure 4-80). LS KEY LS1, LS3, LS4 LS2, and xx xxxxx DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the preset list number and call sign assigned to each preset. Selects the corresponding preset, tunes the V/UHF 1 radio to the preset frequency, and accesses the Communication Radio page (Figure 4-79). The currently active preset is indicated by an 9*9 adjacent to the line select key. LS5, LS7, LS8 LS6, and xxx.xxx Displays the frequency (or anti-jam net) assigned to each preset. Accesses the corresponding V/UHF Presets xx page (Figure 4-82). Figure 4-81. Accesses the remainder of the presets list. V/UHF Presets Page
4-132
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: v/uhfx preset yy (where x is the radio number and yy is the preset number) FUNCTION: Sets the frequency, call sign, and modulation type of a V/UHF preset.
ACTIVATION: From the V/UHF Presets pages (Figure 4-81). LS KEY LS1, LS5, LS7 LS2 LS3, and Blank DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION
FREQ[
Actuation with a frequency or Havequick net in the scratchpad enters the frequency or net. Actuation with a blank in the scratchpad copies the frequency/net and modulation (9A9 or 9F9) into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad enters the default frequency of 121.500 MHz.
LS4
SIGN[
Actuation with a call sign in the scratchpad enters the call sign for that preset. Actuation with a blank in the scratchpad copies the call sign into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the call sign.
LS6
AM: or FM:
Toggles the preset modulation type between 9AM9 and 9FM9 if the corresponding frequency at LS2 can be either AM or FM. Accesses the V/UHF Presets page (Figure 4-81) which contains the preset. Accesses the other V/UHF Presets xx pages (Figure 4-82) and wraps around. Figure 4-82. V/UHF Presets xx Page
LS8 -
RTN
4-133
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: v/uhfx yyyy freq (where x is the radio number and yyyy is the airport identifier) FUNCTION: Displays airport frequencies, communication type, and sectorization data and tunes the selected V/UHF radio to the selected airport frequency. ACTIVATION: From the V/UHF Control pages (Figure 4-80). LS KEY LS1, LS3, LS4 LS2, and DISPLAY CUE xxx.xxx xxx FUNCTION Displays the frequency, the communication type, and sectorization data if any exists. Tunes the selected V/UHF radio to the selected frequency. The currently active frequency is indicated by an 9*9 adjacent to the line select key. LS5 LS8 thru Blank Accesses the additional Airport Frequency pages if more frequencies are available from the database. Figure 4-83. Airport Frequency Page
4-134
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: v/uhfx havequick (where x = 1 or 2) FUNCTION: Sets Havequick parameters.
ACTIVATION: From the V/UHF Control page (Figure 4-80) or by return from the V/UHF MWOD Entry page (Figure 4-85) or V/UHF FMT Load page (Figure 4-86). LS KEY LS1 LOAD DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION If a secure loading device is connected to the V/UHF radio, a 99 will be displayed adjacent to LS1, else, no character will be displayed and LS1 will be inoperative. Actuation causes the FMS to command the V/UHF radio to load the Havequick data. LS2 LS3 FMT : Accesses the V/UHF FMT (frequency managed training) Load pages (Figure 4-86). Toggles Havequick time of day loading procedures between: 9:RECV TIME9 - Allows receipt of time from other Havequick radios. 9:SEND TIME9 - Allows transmission of time to another Havequick radio. 9:EMERG CLK9 - Sets the internal clock to the date entered at LS6 when no other time is available. 9:GPS TIME9 - Accepts GPS time as the synchronization source. LS4 Displays the V/UHF time of day (TOD) status as received from the corresponding radio as follows: 9NO TOD9 - Radio does not have time of day. 9TOD INVALID9 - The radio received and invalid TOD. 9TOD VALID9 - The radio has received a valid TOD. 9FORCED TOD9 - The emergency clock is enabled and a status of 9emergency start9 is returned TOD status message. Figure 4-84. V/UHF Havequick Setup Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-135
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS5 MWOD[
DISPLAY CUE ]
FUNCTION Actuation with a date code in the scratchpad accesses the V/UHF MWOD Entry page (Figure 4-85) for that date code and places the date code in the brackets. Actuation with an empty scratchpad and a date code displayed in brackets adjacent to LS5 accesses the V/UHF MWOD Entry page (Figure 4-85) for that date code. Actuation with a - in the scratchpad enters a default MWOD date of 1.
LS6
DATE[
Actuation with a date code in the scratchpad sends that calendar day of the month (1-31) to the radio. Actuation with an empty scratchpad and the date displayed in brackets adjacent to LS6 sends that calendar day of the month (1-31) to the radio.
LS7 LS8
ENABLE RTN Figure 4-84.
Relays the synchronize mode selected at LS3 to the radio indicated. Returns to the V/UHF Control page (Figure 4-80). V/UHF Havequick Setup Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
PAGE TITLE: v/uhfx mwod day yy (where x is the radio number and yy is the day) FUNCTION: Loads multiple words of the day (MWOD) into the memory of the V/UHF radios.
ACTIVATION: From the V/UHF Havequick Setup page (Figure 4-84). LS KEY LS1, LS3, LS6, LS7 LS2, LS5, and [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation of the LS key with a word of the day (WOD) element in the scratchpad copies the WOD element into the brackets adjacent to the LS key. Actuation of the LS key with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the element in the brackets adjacent to the LS key. Actuation of the LS key with an empty scratchpad copies the element into the scratchpad. LS4 LS8 ENTER RTN Figure 4-85. Enters the WOD displayed into the memory of all installed V/UHF radios. Returns to the previous page. V/UHF MWOD Entry Page
4-136
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: v/uhf fmt load x (where x = 1, 2, or 3) FUNCTION: Modifies the FMT list and loads the list into each radio.
ACTIVATION: From the V/UHF Havequick Setup page (Figure 4-84). LS KEY LS1, LS3, LS6, LS7 LS2, LS5, and DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a FMT element in the scratchpad copies the FMT element into the brackets adjacent to the LS key. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad deletes the element in the brackets adjacent to the LS key. Actuation with an empty scratchpad copies the element into the scratchpad. LS3 and LS7 on V/UHF FMT Load 3 page are inoperative. LS4 LS8 ENTER RTN Activates a V/UHF FMT load for all installed V/UHF radios. Returns to the previous page. Scrolls to other V/UHF FMT Load pages and wraps around. Figure 4-86. V/UHFx FMT Load Page
4-137
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: hf ctrl FUNCTION: Provides mode control of the HF radio and accesses the HF Presets pages (Figure 4-88).
ACTIVATION: From the Communication Radio page (Figure 4-79). LS KEY LS1 LS2 PRESETS MODE: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Accesses the HF Presets pages (Figure 4-88). Toggles the HF emission mode settings between: 9UV9 - Upper voice sideband. 9LV9 - Lower voice sideband 9AM9 - Amplitude modulation equivalent. If HF power mode is set to 9STBY9, actuation sets HF power mode to 9ON9. LS3 SQL: Toggles through the HF squelch levels 0, 1, 2, and 3. A squelch level of 0 represents no squelch and a squelch level of 3 represents maximum squelch. If HF power mode is set to 9STBY9, actuation sets HF power mode to 9ON9. LS4 XMIT: Toggles the HF transmit power between: 9HI9 - High power. 9MED9 - Medium power. 9LO9 - Low power. If HF power mode is set to 9STBY9, actuation sets HF power mode to 9ON9. LS5 LS6 LS7 Blank :PWR :LK11 Toggles the HF power mode between 9ON9 and 9STBY9 (standby). Toggles the Link 11 between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. If the HF power mode is set to 9STBY9, actuation sets the HF power mode to 9ON9. LS8 RTN Returns to the Communication Radio page (Figure 4-79). Figure 4-87. HF Control Page
4-138
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: hf presets FUNCTION: Displays and selects HF presets.
ACTIVATION: From the HF Control page (Figure 4-87). LS KEY LS1, LS3, LS4 LS2, and DISPLAY CUE xx xxxxx xx FUNCTION Displays the call sign and emission mode assigned to each preset. Tunes the radio to the preset frequency and accesses the Communication Radio page (Figure 4-79). If HF power mode is set to 9STBY9, actuation sets HF power mode to 9ON9. LS5, LS7, LS8 LS6, and xx.xxx Displays the frequency assigned to each preset.
Accesses the corresponding HF Preset xx page (Figure 4-89). Figure 4-88. Accesses the remainder of the presets list. HF Presets Page
4-139
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: hf preset xx (where xx is the preset number) FUNCTION: Sets the frequency, emission mode, and call sign of a HF preset.
ACTIVATION: From the HF Presets pages (Figure 4-88). LS KEY LS1, LS5 thru LS7 LS2 Blank FREQ[ ] DISPLAY CUE Actuation with a frequency in the scratchpad enters the frequency. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the frequency into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad enters the default frequency of 2.1820 MHz. If HF power mode is set to 9STBY9, actuation sets HF power mode to 9ON9. LS3 MODE: Toggles the HF emission mode settings between: 9UV9 - Upper voice sideband. 9LV9 - Lower voice sideband 9AM9 - Amplitude modulation equivalent. If HF power mode is set to 9STBY9, actuation sets HF power mode to 9ON9. LS4 SIGN[ ] Actuation with a call sign in the scratchpad enters the call sign for that preset. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the call sign into the scratchpad. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad blanks the call sign. LS8 RTN Accesses the HF Presets page (Figure 4-88) which contains the preset. Accesses the other HF Preset xx pages and wraps around. Figure 4-89. HF Preset xx Page FUNCTION
4-140
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: comsec FUNCTION: Selects plain or cipher mode for the KY-58 and ANDVT COMSEC devices.
ACTIVATION: By vertical scrolling from the Communication Radio page (Figure 4-79). LS KEY LS1 LS2, LS3, LS4, LS6, and LS7 LS5 LS8 V1: Blank DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles V/UHF1 plain/cipher mode between 9PLAIN9 and 9CIPHER9. -
:V2 :HF
Toggles V/UHF2 plain/cipher mode between 9PLAIN9 and 9CIPHER9. Toggles HF ANDVT plain/cipher mode between 9PLAIN9 and 9CIPHER9. Accesses the Communication Radio page (Figure 4-79). Figure 4-90. COMSEC Control Page
4-141
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: cnav FUNCTION: Accesses the VOR/ILS1 Control page (Figure 4-92), VOR/ILS2 Control page (Figure 4-92), TACAN Control page (Figure 4-94), and ADF Control page (Figure 4-95). Sets the VOR/ILS, TACAN, and ADF frequencies. ACTIVATION: By pressing the NAV function key. LS KEY LS1 VOR1 VOR2 TCN ADF ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays status and identifier for VOR1. Accesses the VOR/ILS1 Control page (Figure 4-92). LS2 Displays status and identifier for VOR2. Accesses the VOR/ILS2 Control page (Figure 4-92). LS3 Displays status and identifier for TACAN. Accesses the TACAN Control page (Figure 4-94). LS4 Displays status and identifier for ADF. Accesses the ADF Control page (Figure 4-95). LS5 [ Displays frequency for VOR1. Actuation with a VOR/LOC frequency in the scratchpad tunes the associated VOR/ILS radio to that frequency. Actuation with a VOR, VORTAC, or VOR/DME identifier in the scratchpad tunes the associated VOR/ILS to the corresponding frequency. Actuation with a blank scratchpad recalls the previously tuned frequency. LS6 [ ] Displays frequency for VOR2. Actuation with a VOR/LOC frequency in the scratchpad tunes the associated VOR/ILS radio to that frequency. Actuation with a VOR, VORTAC, or VOR/DME identifier in the scratchpad tunes the associated VOR/ILS to the corresponding frequency. Actuation with a blank scratchpad recalls the previously tuned frequency. Figure 4-91. CNAV Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-142
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS7 [ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays channel for TACAN. Actuation with a TACAN channel in the scratchpad outputs that channel to the TACAN. Actuation with a TACAN or VORTAC identifier in the scratchpad tunes the radio to the associated channel. Actuation with a blank scratchpad recalls the previously tuned channel.
LS8
Displays frequency for ADF. Actuation with a ADF frequency in the scratchpad tunes the associated ADF radio to that frequency. Actuation with a NDB identifier in the scratchpad tunes the radio to the associated frequency. Actuation with a blank scratchpad recalls the previously tuned frequency. Figure 4-91. CNAV Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
PAGE TITLE: vor/ilsx ctrl (where x = 1 or 2) FUNCTION: Sets marker beacon sensitivity and accesses the CNAV radio information page.
ACTIVATION: From the civil navigation (cnav) page (Figure 4-91). LS KEY LS1, LS2, LS4, LS6, and LS7 LS3 LS5 Blank DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION
MB SENS: APRT[ ]
Toggles the marker beacon sensitivity between 9LO9 (low) and 9HI9 (high). Actuation with an airport identifier in the scratchpad enters that value for the airport and accesses the CNAV Radio Information page (Figure 4-93). Accesses the civil navigation (cnav) page (Figure 4-91). Figure 4-92. VOR/ILS Control Page
LS8
RTN
4-143
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: cnavx (where x = 1 or 2) FUNCTION: Tunes the CNAV radios.
ACTIVATION: From the VOR/ILS Control pages (Figure 4-92) when entering an airport identifier. LS KEY LS1 xxx.xx DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the recommended navigation aid (if available on the database) as follows: The frequency of the recommended navigation aid associated with the airport in the navigation database. The recommended navigation aid for an airport from the database is a VOR, VOR/DME, or VOR-TAC. The navigation aid ID. If no recommended navigation aid exists for the selected airport, the first runway frequency will be displayed instead. Tunes the associated radio to that frequency and returns to the civil navigation (cnav) page (Figure 4-91). LS2, LS3, and LS4 xxx.xx Displays the following: The frequency associated with the runway. The type of navigation aid associated with the frequency. The name of the airport runway. The NDB frequency associated with the approach if any. The NDB frequency is the frequency of a compass locator at the outer, middle, or inner marker beacons. Tunes the associated radio to that frequency and returns to the civil navigation (cnav) page (Figure 4-91). LS5 LS8 thru Blank Accesses additional CNAV Radio Information pages if more than four frequencies are available. Figure 4-93. Civil Navigation Radio Information Page
4-144
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: tacan ctrl FUNCTION: Selects TACAN mode, pairing, and antenna.
ACTIVATION: From the civil navigation (cnav) page (Figure 4-91). LS KEY LS1, LS5, LS7 LS2 LS4, and Blank DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION
MODE:
Toggles the TACAN mode between 9R9 (receive), 9TR9 (transmit/receive), 9AAR9 (air-to-air receive), and 9AATR9 (air-to-air transmit/receive). The FMS sets the TACAN mode to 9R9 when EMCON is enabled. Toggles the TACAN pair indication between 9VOR19, 9VOR29, and 9OFF9. When set to 9VOR19 or 9VOR29, the FMS adjusts the TACAN channel to match the VOR 1 or VOR 2 frequency respectively. Subsequent entry of TACAN channel or ID reverts the pairing mode to 9OFF9. Toggles the TACAN antenna selection between 9AUTO9 select (automatic), 9TOP9, and 9BOT9 (bottom). The cold start default value is 9AUTO9. Accesses the civil navigation (cnav) page (Figure 4-91). Figure 4-94. TACAN Control Page
LS3
PAIR:
LS6
:ANT
LS8
RTN
PAGE TITLE: adf ctrl FUNCTION: Selects ADF mode and tone (on/off).
ACTIVATION: From the civil navigation (cnav) page (Figure 4-91). LS KEY LS1, LS5, LS7 LS2 LS3 LS8 LS4, thru Blank DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION
MODE: TONE: RTN
Toggles the 9ADF9 mode between 9ADF9 and 9ANT9. Toggles the 9ADF9 tone between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Accesses the civil navigation (cnav) page (Figure 4-91). Figure 4-95. ADF Control Page
4-145
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: iff control FUNCTION: Selects IFF power mode, emergency mode, and antenna. Accesses the IFF Mode 1/2/3/C page (Figure 4-97) and the IFF Mode 4 page (Figure 4-98). ACTIVATION: By pressing the IFF function key. LS KEY LS1 IFF DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the IFF power mode selection. Toggles the IFF power mode between 9ON9 and 9STBY9. The cold start default state is 9STBY9. When IFF emergency mode is selected with either LS2 or the emergency mode switch, 9EMER9 will be displayed adjacent to LS1. When IFF emergency mode is commanded off with either LS2 or the emergency mode switch, the IFF power mode will return to the previous state. LS2 EMER Displays the IFF emergency mode selection. Toggles the IFF emergency mode operation between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. To toggle the IFF emergency mode to 9ON9 with the CDU requires confirmation indicated by the scratchpad message 9CONFIRM EMER IFF9. The default state is 9OFF9. LS3, LS6, and LS7 LS4 LS5 Blank MODE ANT Accesses the IFF Mode 1/2/3/C page (Figure 4-97). Displays the IFF antenna selection. Toggles IFF antenna selection between 9TOP9, 9BOT9 (bottom), and 9DIV9 (diversity - both top and bottom antennas selected). The default state is 9DIV9. LS8 MODE 4 Figure 4-96. Accesses the IFF Mode 4 page (Figure 4-98). IFF Control Page
4-146
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: iff mode 1/2/3/c FUNCTION: Selects on/out state for modes 1/2/3A/C and selects codes for modes 1/2/3A.
ACTIVATION: From the IFF Control page (Figure 4-96). LS KEY LS1 M1: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the on/out state of mode 1. Toggles IFF mode 1 between 9ON9 and 9OUT9. LS2 M2: Displays the on/out state of mode 2. Toggles IFF mode 2 between 9ON9 and 9OUT9. LS3 M3A: Displays the on/out state of mode 3A. Toggles IFF modes 3A and S between 9ON9 and 9OUT9. LS4 MC: Displays the on/out state of mode C. If mode 3A is set to 9ON9 at LS3, actuation toggles IFF mode C between 9ON9 and 9OUT9. When mode 3/A is toggled from 9OUT9 to 9ON9 at LS3, mode C will automatically be set to 9ON9. LS5 M1[ ] Displays the mode 1 code. Actuation with a two digit code in the scratchpad enters the mode 1 code and displays it in brackets adjacent to LS5. Actuation with a empty scratchpad copies the mode 1 code to the scratchpad. LS6 M2[ ] Displays the mode 2 code. Actuation with a four digit code in the scratchpad enters the mode 2 code and displays it in brackets adjacent to LS6. Actuation with a empty scratchpad copies the mode 2 code to the scratchpad. LS7 M3A[ ] Displays the mode 3A code. Actuation with a four digit code in the scratchpad enters the mode 3A code and displays it in brackets adjacent to LS7. Actuation with a empty scratchpad copies the mode 3A code to the scratchpad. LS8 RTN Figure 4-97. Returns to the IFF Control page (Figure 4-96). IFF Mode 1/2/3/C Page
4-147
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: iff mode 4 FUNCTION: Selects mode 4 on/out state, reply mode, and code. Saves the mode 4 encrypted code.
ACTIVATION: From the IFF Control page (Figure 4-96). LS KEY LS1 M4 DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the on/out state of mode 4. Toggles IFF mode 4 between 9ON9 and 9OUT9. LS2 LS3 M4 RPLY Commands the IFF to save the mode 4 encrypted code. Displays mode 4 reply mode. Toggles the mode 4 reply mode between 9ANN9 (annunciation), 9AUD9 (annunciation + audio), and 9OUT9. Selection of 9ANN9 or 9AUD9 allows display of the 9m4 reply9 annunciation. The default state is 9ANN9. LS4, LS6, and LS7 LS5 Blank :CODE Displays mode 4 code. Toggles mode 4 code between 9A9 and 9B9. The default state is 9A9. LS8 RTN Figure 4-98. Returns to the IFF Control page (Figure 4-96). IFF Mode 4 Page
4-148
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: data loader FUNCTION: Stores and retrieves data cartridge data.
ACTIVATION: From the Index 1 page (Figure 4-2). LS KEY LS1 LS2 Blank LOAD ALMANAC DISPLAY CUE Loads the almanac data to the GPS from the data cartridge. This function requires confirmation indicated by 9CONFIRM LOAD ALMANAC9 in the scratchpad. Loads the communications presets and Havequick II FMTs into the CDU from the data cartridge. This function requires confirmation indicated by 9CONFIRM LOAD COMM9 in the scratchpad. Loads the markpoint and user waypoint list into the CDU from the data cartridge. This function requires confirmation indicated by 9CONFIRM LOAD PTS9 in the scratchpad. Saves system status information from the CDU to the data cartridge. This function requires confirmation indicated by 9CONFIRM SAVE STATUS9 in the scratchpad. Saves GPS almanac data to the data cartridge. This function requires confirmation indicated by 9CONFIRM SAVE ALMNAC9 in the scratchpad. Saves communications presets and Havequick II FMTs to the data cartridge. This function requires confirmation indicated by 9CONFIRM SAVE COMM9 in the scratchpad. Saves markpoint and user waypoint lists to the data cartridge. This function requires confirmation indicated by 9CONFIRM SAVE PTS9 in the scratchpad. Data Loader Load/Save Page FUNCTION
LS3
LOAD COMM
LS4
LOAD MKPT/WPT
LS5
STAT SAVE
LS6
ALMANAC SAVE
LS7
COMM SAVE
LS8
MKPT/WPT SAVE
Figure 4-99.
4-149
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: system status FUNCTION: status pages. Displays overall status of devices monitored by the FMS and provides access to their individual
ACTIVATION: By pressing the STAT key. LS KEY LS1 xxx FMS xxx COMM DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of the FMS. Accesses the FMS Status page (Figure 4-101). LS2 Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of the communications radios. Accesses the Communications Status page (Figure 4-104). LS3 xxx NAV Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of the navigation sensors. Accesses the Navigation Sensor Status page (Figure 4-107). LS4 xxx DCU Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of the DCU system. Accesses the DCU System Status page (Figure 4-100). LS5 MFD xxx CNAV xxx Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of the MFDs. Accesses the MFD System Status page (Figure 4-100). LS6 Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of the CNAV radios. Accesses the CNAV Status page (Figure 4-118). LS7 MSN xxx Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of the mission system. Accesses the Mission Status 1 page (Figure 4-209). LS8 Blank Figure 4-100. System Status Page
4-150
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: fms status FUNCTION: Displays overall status of FMS devices monitored by the FMS and provides access to their individual status pages. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS1 on the System Status page (Figure 4-100). LS KEY LS1 LS3 LS4 thru Blank xxx DLDR DISPLAY CUE Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of the FMS data loader. Accesses the FMS Data Loader Status page (Figure 4-103). LS5 CDU1 xxx CDU2 xxx CDU3 xxx RTN Figure 4-101. Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of CDU 1. Accesses the CDU1 Status page (Figure 4-102). LS6 Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of CDU 2. Accesses the CDU2 Status page (Figure 4-102). LS7 Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of the CDU 3. Accesses the CDU3 Status page (Figure 4-102). LS8 Returns to the System Status page (Figure 4-100). FMS Status Page FUNCTION
4-151
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: cdux status (where x = 1, 2, or 3) FUNCTION: Displays CDU alert status, software version number, bus status, CBIT, mode, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the FMS Status page (Figure 4-101). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the associated CDU will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures to the associated CDU will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. Displays the software version number. Displays the bus status as 9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9. Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the CDU mode as either 9BC9 (bus controller) or 9RT9 (remote terminal). Displays the failure count which increments when the CDU status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon a CDU bus failure. Resets the failure count to 0. LS6 LS7 LS8 and Blank RTN Figure 4-102. Returns to the FMS Status page (Figure 4-101). CDU Status Page
LS2 info line LS3 LS4 LS5
VSN BUS CBIT BC MODE or RT MODE FAILS
4-152
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: data ldr status FUNCTION: Displays data loader alert status, software version number, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the FMS Status page (Figure 4-101). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the data loader will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures to the data loader will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. Displays the data loader version number. Displays the bus status as 9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9. Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count which increments when the data loader status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon a data loader bus failure. Resets the failure count to 0. LS8 RTN Figure 4-103. Returns to the FMS Status page (Figure 4-101). Data Loader Status Page
LS2 info line LS3 LS4, LS6 and LS7 LS5
VSN BUS CBIT Blank FAILS
4-153
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: comm status FUNCTION: Displays overall status of communication devices monitored by the FMS and provides access to their individual status pages. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS2 on the System Status page (Figure 4-100). LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE xxx V/UHF1 FUNCTION Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of the No. 1 V/UHF radio. Accesses the V/UHF1 Status page (Figure 4-105). LS2 xxx V/UHF2 Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of the No. 2 V/UHF radio. Accesses the V/UHF2 Status page (Figure 4-105). LS3, LS6, LS7 LS5 LS4, and Blank -
HF xxx
Displays overall status (9GO9 or 9NGO9) of the HF radio. Accesses the HF Status page (Figure 4-106).
LS8
RTN Figure 4-104.
Returns to the System Status page (Figure 4-100). Communications Status Page
4-154
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: v/uhfx status (where x = 1 or 2) FUNCTION: Displays V/UHF alert status, software version number, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the Communications Status page (Figure 4-104). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the associated V/UHF radio will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures to the associated V/UHF radio will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. Displays the associated V/UHF radio software part number. Displays the bus status as 9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9. Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count which increments when the associated V/UHF radio status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon an associated V/UHF radio bus failure. Resets the failure count to 0. LS8 RTN Returns to the Communications Status page (Figure 4-104). Figure 4-105. V/UHF Status Page
LS2 info line LS3 LS4, LS6, and LS7 LS5
VSN BUS CBIT Blank FAILS
4-155
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: hf status FUNCTION: Displays HF alert status, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the Communications Status page (Figure 4-104). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the HF radio will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures to the HF radio will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. -
LS2, LS6, LS7
LS4, and
Blank
info line LS3 LS5
BUS CBIT FAILS
Displays the bus status as 9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9. Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count which increments when the HF radio status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon a HF radio bus failure. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS8
RTN
Returns to the Communications Status page (Figure 4-104). Figure 4-106. HF Status Page
4-156
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: nav status FUNCTION: Displays overall status of navigation devices monitored by the FMS and provides access to their individual status pages. ACTIVATION: From the System Status page (Figure 4-100). LS KEY LS1 xxx EGI xxx ADC1 xxx FV DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays overall status of the EGI. Accesses the EGI Status page (Figure 4-108). LS2 Displays overall status of the No. 1 ADC. Accesses the ADC1 Status page (Figure 4-109). LS3 Displays overall status of the flux valve. Accesses the FV Status page (Figure 4-110). LS4 LS7 LS5 and Blank DPLR xxx ADC2 xxx RTN Figure 4-107. Displays overall status of the Doppler. Accesses the Doppler Status page (Figure 4-111). LS6 Displays overall status of the No. 2 ADC. Accesses the ADC2 Status page (Figure 4-109). LS8 Returns to the System Status page (Figure 4-100). Navigation Sensor Status Page
4-157
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: egi status FUNCTION: Displays EGI alert status, INU computer program configuration item (CPCI) and GPS identification numbers, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the Navigation Sensor Status page (Figure 4-107). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the INU or GPS will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures of the INU or GPS will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. Displays the INU CPCI identification number. Displays the bus status as 9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9. Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count which increments when the EGI status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon a INU bus failure. Resets the failure count to 0. LS6 LS8 ID GPS RTN Displays the INU GPS identification number. Returns to the Navigation Sensor Status page (Figure 4-107). Figure 4-108. EGI Status Page
LS2 info line LS3 LS4 LS7 LS5 and
INU ID BUS CBIT Blank FAILS
4-158
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: adcx status (where x = 1 or 2) FUNCTION: Displays ADC alert status, input status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the Navigation Sensor Status page (Figure 4-107). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the associated air data computer will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures of the associated air data computer will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. -
LS2, LS6, LS7
LS5, and
Blank
info line
ARINC
Displays the ADC input status as 9GO9, 9REV9, or 9NGO9. A 9REV9 status indicates that the data is being received by a reversionary path through the MFDs. Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count which increments when the associated air data computer status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon an associated air data computer bus failure. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS3 LS5
CBIT FAILS
LS8
RTN
Returns to the Navigation Sensor Status page (Figure 4-107). Figure 4-109. ADC Status Page
4-159
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: fv status FUNCTION: Displays flux valve alert status and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the Navigation Sensor Status page (Figure 4-107). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the associated flux valve will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures of the associated flux valve will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. -
LS2, LS3, LS4, LS6, and LS7 LS5
Blank
FAILS
Displays the failure count which increments when the flux valve status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon a flux valve failure. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS8
RTN
Returns to the Navigation Sensor Status page (Figure 4-107). Figure 4-110. FV Status Page
4-160
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: doppler status FUNCTION: Displays Doppler alert status, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the Navigation Sensor Status page (Figure 4-107). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the Doppler will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures of the Doppler will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. -
LS2, LS6, LS7
LS4, and
Blank
info line LS3 LS5
BUS CBIT FAILS
Displays the bus status as 9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9. Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count which increments when the Doppler status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon an Doppler bus failure. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS8
RTN
Returns to the Navigation Sensor Status page (Figure 4-107). Figure 4-111. Doppler Status Page
4-161
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: dcu system status FUNCTION: Displays overall status of DCU system devices monitored by the FMS and provides access to their individual status pages. ACTIVATION: From the System Status page (Figure 4-100). LS KEY LS1 LS5 LS2 and Blank xxx DCU1 xxx DEC1 xxx RTR OVRSPD DISPLAY CUE Displays overall status of the No. 1 DCU. Accesses the DCU1 Status page (Figure 4-113). LS3 Displays overall status of the No. 1 DEC. Accesses the DEC1 Status page (Figure 4-114). LS4 Displays overall status of rotor overspeed. Accesses the Rotor Overspeed Status page (Figure 4-115). LS6 DCU2 xxx DEC2 xxx RTN Figure 4-112. Displays overall status of the No. 2 DCU. Accesses the DCU2 Status page (Figure 4-113). LS7 Displays overall status of the No. 2 DEC. Accesses the DEC2 Status page (Figure 4-114). LS8 Returns to the System Status page (Figure 4-100). DCU System Status Page FUNCTION
4-162
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: dcux status (where x = 1 or 2) FUNCTION: Displays DCU alert status, software part number, DCU input status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the DCU System Status page (Figure 4-112). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the associated DCU will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures to the associated DCU will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. Displays the associated DCU software part number. Displays the DCU input status as 9GO9, 9REV9, or 9NGO9. A 9REV9 status indicates that the data is being received by a reversionary path through the MFDs. Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count which increments when the associated DCU status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon an DCU ARINC bus failure. Resets the failure count to 0. LS8 RTN Figure 4-113. Returns to the DCU System Status page (Figure 4-112). DCU Status Page
LS2 info line
VSN ARINC
LS3 LS4, LS6, and LS7 LS5
CBIT Blank FAILS
4-163
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: decx status (where x = 1 or 2) FUNCTION: Displays digital engine controller (DEC) alert status, DEC input status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the DCU System Status page (Figure 4-112). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the associated DEC will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures to the associated DEC will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. Displays the DEC input status as 9GO9, or 9NGO9. -
info line LS2, LS6, LS7 LS3 LS5 LS4, and
ARINC Blank
CBIT FAILS
Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count which increments when the associated DEC status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon an DEC bus failure. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS8
RTN Figure 4-114.
Returns to the DCU System Status page (Figure 4-112). DEC Status Page
4-164
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: rtr ovrspd status FUNCTION: Displays rotor overspeed alert status, rotor overspeed input status, rotor overspeed values from DCU1 and DCU2, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the DCU System Status page (Figure 4-112). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a rotor overspeed fault will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, a rotor overspeed fault will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. Displays the status of the rotor overspeed input status as 9GO9 or 9NGO9. A 9GO9 status indicates that the data is being received by either path through the MFDs. A 9NGO9 status indicates that no ARINC data is available and the overall status is 9NGO9. Displays the rotor speed value from DCU1. If no rotor overspeed failure is indicated, the data field will be all dashes. Displays the failure count which increments when the rotor overspeed status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon a rotor overspeed failure. Resets the failure count to 0. LS7 % EXCEEDED Displays the rotor speed value from DCU2. If no rotor overspeed failure is indicated, the data field will be all dashes. Returns to the DCU System Status page (Figure 4-112). Figure 4-115. Rotor Overspeed Status Page
LS2
ARINC
LS3
% EXCEEDED
LS4 LS6 LS5
and
Blank FAILS
LS8
RTN
4-165
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: mfd system status FUNCTION: Displays overall status of the MFDs and provides access to their individual status pages.
ACTIVATION: From the System Status page (Figure 4-116). LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE xxx CPLT OUTBRD FUNCTION Displays overall status of the copilot outboard MFD. Accesses the Copilot Outboard MFD Status page (Figure 4-117). LS2 xxx CPLT INBRD Displays overall status of the copilot inboard MFD. Accesses the Copilot Inboard MFD Status page (Figure 4-117). LS3 xxx PLT INBRD Displays overall status of the pilot inboard MFD. Accesses the Pilot Inboard MFD Status page (Figure 4-117). LS4 xxx PLT OUTBRD Displays overall status of the pilot outboard MFD. Accesses the Pilot Outboard MFD Status page (Figure 4-117). LS5 LS7 LS8 thru Blank RTN Figure 4-116. Returns to the System Status page (Figure 4-116). MFD System Status Page
4-166
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: plt inbrd status FUNCTION: Displays MFD alert status, MFD input status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the MFD System Status page (Figure 4-100). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the associated MFD will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures to the associated MFD will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. -
LS2, LS6, LS7
LS4, and
Blank
info line
ARINC
Displays the MFD input status as 9GO9, 9REV9, or 9NGO9. A 9REV9 status indicates that the data is being received by a reversionary path through the MFDs. Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count which increments when the associated MFD status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon an MFD ARINC bus failure. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS3 LS5
CBIT FAILS
LS8
RTN
Returns to the MFD System Status page (Figure 4-100). Figure 4-117. Pilot Inboard MFD Status Page (Typical for all MFD Status Pages)
4-167
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: cnav status FUNCTION: Displays overall status of CNAV system devices monitored by the FMS and provides access to their individual status pages. ACTIVATION: From the System Status page (Figure 4-100). LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE xxx VOR1 xxx VOR2 FUNCTION Displays overall status of the No. 1 VOR. Accesses the VOR1 Status page (Figure 4-119). LS2 Displays overall status of the No. 2 VOR. Accesses the VOR2 Status page (Figure 4-119). LS3 LS7 LS4 and Blank xxx ADF IFF xxx TACAN xxx RTN Figure 4-118. Displays overall status of the ADF. Accesses the ADF Status page (Figure 4-120). LS5 Displays overall status of the IFF Accesses the IFF Status page (Figure 4-121). LS6 Displays overall status of the TACAN. Accesses the TACAN Status page (Figure 4-122). LS8 Returns to the System Status page (Figure 4-100). CNAV Status Page
4-168
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: vorx status (where x = 1 or 2) FUNCTION: Displays VOR alert status, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the CNAV Status page (Figure 4-118). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the associated VOR will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures to the associated VOR will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. -
LS2, LS6, LS7
LS4, and
Blank
info line LS3 LS5
BUS CBIT FAILS
Displays the bus status as 9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9. Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count which increments when the associated VOR status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS8
RTN Figure 4-119.
Returns to the CNAV Status page (Figure 4-118). VOR Status Page
4-169
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: adf status FUNCTION: Displays ADF alert status, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the CNAV Status page (Figure 4-118). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the associated ADF will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures to the associated ADF will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. -
LS2, LS6, LS7
LS4, and
Blank
info line LS3 LS5
BUS CBIT FAILS
Displays the bus status as 9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9. Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count which increments when the associated ADF status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon an ADF bus failure. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS8
RTN Figure 4-120.
Returns to the CNAV Status page (Figure 4-118). ADF Status Page
4-170
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: iff status FUNCTION: Displays IFF alert status, bus status, CBIT, KIT alert status, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the CNAV Status page (Figure 4-118). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the associated IFF will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures to the associated IFF will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. Displays the bus status as 9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9. Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Toggles the KIT ALERT 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the KIT ALERT is set to 9OFF9, a failure associated with the KIT 1C will not affect the overall status of the IFF or the overall subsystem status. Also, a failure associated with the KIT 1C will not set any bits in the CBIT word. The default state for KIT ALERT is 9ON9. Displays the failure count which increments when the associated IFF status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9 or upon an IFF bus failure. Resets the failure count to 0. LS8 RTN Figure 4-121. Returns to the CNAV Status page (Figure 4-118). IFF Status Page
LS2, LS6, and LS7 info line LS3 LS4
Blank BUS CBIT KIT ALERT
LS5
FAILS
4-171
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: tacan status FUNCTION: Displays TACAN alert status, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: From the CNAV Status page (Figure 4-118). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the 9U status9 annunciation ALERT between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9ON9, a failure of the associated TACAN will cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear. When the 9U status9 annunciation is set to 9OFF9, failures to the associated TACAN will not cause the 9U status9 annunciation to appear but the failure history will continue to be recorded. The default state of 9ALERT9 is 9ON9. -
LS2, LS6, LS7
LS4, and
Blank
info line LS3 LS5
BUS CBIT FAILS
Displays the bus status as 9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9. Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count which increments when the associated TACAN status changes from 9GO9 to 9NGO9. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS8
RTN Figure 4-122.
Returns to the CNAV Status page (Figure 4-118). TACAN Status Page
4-172
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: egi install FUNCTION: values. Enters GPS antenna position relative to the EGI. Enters EGI pitch, roll, and yaw boresight
ACTIVATION: From the EGI Test page (refer to SA4047-S70B6-ATM-000). LS KEY LS1 X[ ]in DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the distance of the EGI from the GPS antenna in the X direction (lever arm X value) measured in inches. With 9ENTERED9 displayed adjacent to LS4 and an entry in the scratchpad, actuation enters the lever arm X value. With 9ENTERED9 displayed adjacent to LS4 and a 9-9 in the scratchpad, actuation enters the default lever arm X value. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the lever arm X value into the scratchpad. With 9USED9 displayed adjacent to LS4, LS1 is inoperative. LS2 Y[ ]in Displays the distance of the EGI from the GPS antenna in the Y direction (lever arm Y value) measured in inches. With 9ENTERED9 displayed adjacent to LS4 and an entry in the scratchpad, actuation enters the lever arm Y value. With 9ENTERED9 displayed adjacent to LS4 and a 9-9 in the scratchpad, actuation enters the default lever arm Y value. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the lever arm Y value into the scratchpad. With 9USED9 displayed adjacent to LS4, LS2 is inoperative. Figure 4-123. EGI Install Page (Sheet 1 of 3)
4-173
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS3 Z[ ]in
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays the distance of the EGI from the GPS antenna in the Z direction (lever arm Z value) measured in inches. With 9ENTERED9 displayed adjacent to LS4 and an entry in the scratchpad, actuation enters the lever arm Z value. With 9ENTERED9 displayed adjacent to LS4 and a 9-9 in the scratchpad, actuation enters the default lever arm Z value. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the lever arm Z value into the scratchpad. With 9USED9 displayed adjacent to LS4, LS3 is inoperative.
LS4
:ENTERED or :USED
Toggles between 9ENTERED9 and 9USED9. When set to 9USED9, the lever arm data and boresight angles displayed on the page are those obtained from the EGI. The display will be dashed if the EGI does not have valid parameters for the corresponding field. The default state is 9USED9 at power up. Displays the roll boresight value measured in degrees. With 9ENTERED9 displayed adjacent to LS4 and an entry in the scratchpad, actuation enters the roll boresight value. With 9ENTERED9 displayed adjacent to LS4 and a 9-9 in the scratchpad, actuation blanks the display. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the roll boresight value into the scratchpad. With 9USED9 displayed adjacent to LS4, LS5 is inoperative.
LS5
]R
Figure 4-123.
EGI Install Page (Sheet 2 of 3)
4-174
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS6 [ ]P
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays the pitch boresight value measured in degrees. With 9ENTERED9 displayed adjacent to LS4 and an entry in the scratchpad, actuation enters the pitch boresight value. With 9ENTERED9 displayed adjacent to LS4 and a 9-9 in the scratchpad, actuation blanks the display. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the pitch boresight value into the scratchpad. With 9USED9 displayed adjacent to LS4, LS6 is inoperative.
LS7
]Y
Displays the yaw boresight value measured in degrees. With 9ENTERED9 displayed adjacent to LS4 and an entry in the scratchpad, actuation enters the yaw boresight value. With 9ENTERED9 displayed adjacent to LS4 and a 9-9 in the scratchpad, actuation resets the yaw boresight value to the INU value. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the yaw boresight value into the scratchpad. With 9USED9 displayed adjacent to LS4, LS7 is inoperative.
LS8
SEND
Actuation with 9ENTERED9 displayed adjacent to LS4 sends the lever arm and boresight data to the EGI. With 9USED9 displayed adjacent to LS4, LS8 is inoperative. Figure 4-123. EGI Install Page (Sheet 3 of 3)
4-175
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: zeroize FUNCTION: Performs zeroization of waypoint data, markpoint data, flight plans, SA/AS, tactical database, ESM, ADLP and communication preset and Havequick data by writing zeros in the corresponding memory locations on the FMS and mission data cartridges and on the CDUs. ACTIVATION: From the Index 1 page (Figure 4-2). LS KEY LS1 LS2 Blank FPLN/ALTN DISPLAY CUE Zeroizes the flight plan and CDU loaded alternate flight plan in the system. This function requires confirmation indicated by a 9CONFIRM CLEAR FPLNS9 scratchpad message. Additionally, any defined holds, approaches, intercepts, SIDs, STARs, or MFPs will also be zeroized. Zeroizes the markpoint and user waypoint lists and the User Waypoint page (Figure 4-57). This function requires confirmation indicated by a 9CONFIRM CLEAR PTS9 scratchpad message. Zeroizes waypoints and markpoints in the CDUs; codes in the IFF; presets, MWODs, FMTs, and tactical net designators in the U/VHF radios; FMS and mission data cartridge data; GPS mission duration and crypto keys; tactical database; ESM; and ADLP. This function requires confirmation indicated by a 9CONFIRM ZERO ALL9 scratchpad message. Zeroizes all communication presets, Havequick II MWODs and FMTs. This function requires confirmation indicated by a 9CONFIRM CLEAR COM9 scratchpad message. Forces the FMS to relinquish control to the mission computer for the Mission Zeroize page (Figure 4-136). Send a GPS zeroize command to the GPS receiver. This function requires confirmation indicated by a 9CONFIRM CLEAR GPS9 scratchpad message. Figure 4-124. Zeroize Page FUNCTION
LS3
USER WPTS/MKPTS
LS4 LS5
Blank ZERO ALL
LS6
COMM
LS7 LS8
MSN GPS
4-176
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: msn start FUNCTION: Accesses mission system pages.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS5 on the Index 1 page (Figure 4-2). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7 and TACPLOT PIM LINK FUEL Blank [ ]WPT AOU DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Accesses the Tactical Plot page (Figure 4-126). Accesses the PIM page (Figure 4-128). Accesses the Link Setup page (Figure 4-193). Accesses the Fuel Advisory page (Figure 4-133). Displays the tactical flight plan waypoint area of uncertainty. Actuation with a value between 50 and 4000 yards in the scratchpad sets the tactical flight plan waypoint area of uncertainty. LS8 RTN Figure 4-125. Returns to the Index 1 page (Figure 4-2). Mission Start Page
4-177
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: tacplot FUNCTION: Sets the DLRP and local operations plot (LOP) positions. Selects the DLRP method.
ACTIVATION: From the Mission Start page (Figure 4-125). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS6 LS3 LS7 and and Blank [ [ ] ] DISPLAY CUE If the DLRP method is manual, actuation with a latitude and longitude in the scratchpad sets the DLRP position. Actuation with a latitude and longitude in the scratchpad sets the LOP position. It also sets the LOP Shift Flag which is used by radar sensor manager to set the radar aircraft navigation update flag. Accesses the FTN Pool page (Figure 4-127). Toggles the DLRP method between automatic (AUTO) and manual (MAN) mode. The current DLRP method is displayed. Accesses the Mission Start page (Figure 4-125). Figure 4-126. Tactical Plot Page FUNCTION
LS4 LS5
FTN ASSIGNMENT :DLRP
LS8
RTN
4-178
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: ftn assignment FUNCTION: Defines the FTN assignment pool.
ACTIVATION: From the Tactical Plot page (Figure 4-126). LS KEY LS1 LS5 LS2 and Blank [xxxxx] START DISPLAY CUE Actuation with a FTN between 102018 and 177768, sets the FTN block bottom to 102008 and sets the FTN block top to the value in the scratchpad. The current FTN block top is displayed. Attempts to change the FTN block top if the ADLP mode is not disabled is not allowed. Actuation with a FTN between 102008 and the FTN block top sets the FTN block bottom. The current FTN block bottom is displayed. Attempts to change the FTN block bottom if the ADLP Mode is not disabled is not allowed. Toggles the FTN numbering method: 9POOL9, 9BLOCK9, 9POOL/BLOCK9. Attempts to change the FTN numbering method if the ADLP Mode is not disabled is not allowed. The current FTN numbering method is displayed. Actuation with a FTN between 102018 and 177768, sets the FTN pool bottom to 102008 and sets the FTN block top to the value in the scratchpad. The current FTN Block Top is displayed. Attempts to change the FTN block top if the ADLP mode is not disabled is not allowed. Actuation with a FTN between 102008 and the FTN block top sets the FTN Pool Bottom. The current FTN pool bottom is displayed. Attempts to change the FTN pool bottom if the ADLP mode is not disabled is not allowed. Accesses the Tactical Plot page (Figure 4-126). Figure 4-127. FTN Pool Page FUNCTION
LS3
[xxxxx] END
LS4
LS6
START [xxxxx]
LS7
END [xxxxx]
LS8
RTN
4-179
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: pim FUNCTION: Enters PIM FTN. Displays the PIM current position, course, and speed. Selects transmit status.
ACTIVATION: From the Tote page (Figure 4-162) or Mission Start page (Figure 4-125). LS KEY LS1 FTN[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the four digit octal PIM FTN. Actuation with a FTN in the scratchpad sets the PIM FTN. LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5 CRS PIM DATA T* or T Displays the PIM current position. Displays the PIM current course. Accesses the PIM Data 1/3 page (Figure 4-130). Displays the PIM transmit status. If the transmit status is set to transmit, a 9*9 symbol is displayed to the right of the T, otherwise a 99 is displayed. Toggles the PIM transmit status between transmit and dont transmit. LS6 LS7 LS8 Blank SPD RTN Figure 4-128. PAGE TITLE: PIM FUNCTION: Displays the PIM FTN. Displays PIM current position, course, and speed. Displays the PIM current speed. Returns to the last displayed page. PIM Page
ACTIVATION: Generated when a data link PIM is queried or amplified on the tactical plot. LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS6 LS8 LS7 thru and CRS Blank FTN[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the four digit octal PIM FTN. Displays the PIM current position. Displays the PIM current course. -
SPD Figure 4-129.
Displays the PIM current speed. Data Link PIM Page
4-180
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: pim data 1/3 FUNCTION: the PIM FTN. Sets and displays the PIM initial position, initial time, initial course, and initial speed. Assigns
ACTIVATION: Generated when PIM data is selected from the PIM page (Figure 4-128). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and IP[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the PIM initial position. Actuation with a position in the scratchpad sets the PIM initial position and assigns the PIM FTN. LS2 ITIME[ ] Displays the PIM initial time. Actuation with a time in the scratchpad sets the PIM initial time. If PIM future time is valid then PIM initial time shall be up to 12 hours prior to PIM future time. Actuation with a blank scratchpad sets the PIM initial time to current mission system time. LS3 LS4 LS8 LS6 LS7 and ICRS[ Blank PIM [ ]ISPD ] Displays the PIM initial course. Accesses the PIM page (Figure 4-128). Displays the PIM initial speed. Actuation with a speed in the scratchpad sets the PIM initial speed. Figure 4-130. PIM Data 1/3 Page
4-181
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: pim data 2/3 FUNCTION: Sets and displays PIM future course, time, and speed.
ACTIVATION: Generated when page down is selected from the PIM Data 1/3 page (Figure 4-130) or page up is selected from the PIM Data 3/3 page (Figure 4-132). LS KEY LS1 1CRS[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the first PIM future course. Actuation with a course in the scratchpad sets the first PIM future course. LS2 1TIME[ ] Displays the first PIM future time. PIM times must be entered in order. Actuation with a valid time in the scratchpad sets the associated PIM future time provided that the time is between the previous and next time and is less than 12 hours from the previous time. Actuation with a blank scratchpad sets PIM time to current mission system time. LS3 2CRS[ ] Displays the second PIM future course. Actuation with a course in the scratchpad sets PIM future course. LS4 2TIME[ ] Displays the second PIM future time. PIM times must be entered in order. Actuation with a valid time in the scratchpad sets the associated PIM future time provided that the time is between the previous and next time and is less than 12 hours from the previous time. Actuation with a blank scratchpad sets PIM time to current mission system time. LS5 [ ]1SPD Displays the first PIM future speed. Actuation with a speed in the scratchpad sets PIM future speed. LS6 LS7 PIM [ ]2SPD Accesses the PIM page (Figure 4-128). Displays the second PIM future speed. Actuation with a speed in the scratchpad sets PIM future speed. LS8 Blank Figure 4-131. PIM Data 2/3 Page
4-182
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: pim data 3/3 FUNCTION: Sets and displays PIM future course, time, and speed.
ACTIVATION: Generated when the pilot or copilot scrolls down from the PIM Data 2/3 page (Figure 4-131) or up from the PIM Data 1/3 page (Figure 4-130). LS KEY LS1 3CRS[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the third PIM future course. Actuation with a course in the scratchpad sets the third PIM future course. LS2 3TIME[ ] Displays the third PIM future time. PIM times must be entered in order. Actuation with a valid time in the scratchpad sets the associated PIM future time provided that the time is between the previous and next time and is less than 12 hours from the previous time. Actuation with a blank scratchpad sets PIM time to current mission system time. LS3 4CRS[ ] Displays the fourth PIM future course. Actuation with a course in the scratchpad sets the fourth PIM future course. LS4 4TIME[ ] Displays the fourth PIM future time. PIM times must be entered in order. Actuation with a valid time in the scratchpad sets the associated PIM future time provided that the time is between the previous and next time and is less than 12 hours from the previous time. Actuation with a blank scratchpad sets PIM time to current mission system time. LS5 [ ]3SPD Displays the third PIM future speed. Actuation with a speed in the scratchpad sets the third PIM future speed. LS6 LS7 PIM [ ]4SPD Accesses the PIM page (Figure 4-128). Displays the fourth PIM future speed. Actuation with a speed in the scratchpad sets the fourth PIM future speed. LS8 Blank Figure 4-132. PIM Data 3/3 Page
4-183
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: fuel advisory FUNCTION: Displays fuel time remaining, current fuel flow rate, display processor (DP) total fuel, return fuel flow rate, best range speed, and destination bearing and distance. Sets the tactical flight plan guidance mode to fly-to and sets the return fuel flow rate. ACTIVATION: From the Mission Start page (Figure 4-125). LS KEY LS1 LS2 DISPLAY CUE TIME REM x:xx FLY TO HOME FUNCTION Displays fuel time remaining in hours and minutes. Actuation sets the tactical flight plan guidance mode to fly-to. Also, if the destination type for fuel calculation is position, actuation sets the tactical flight plan waypoint position to the destination position for fuel calculation. If the destination type for fuel calculation is dynamic PDI, actuation sets the tactical flight plan reference PDI to the destination PDI for fuel calculation. Displays the current fuel flow rate in lbs/hr., and the fuel flow rate source as either 9AVG9 or 9MAN9. Displays DP total fuel in pounds. Displays destination bearing and distance as determined from the fuel calculation. ] Displays the return fuel flow rate source as either 9SYS9 or 9MAN9, and the return fuel flow rate in lbs/hr. Actuation with a flow rate (pounds/hour) from 100 9999 in the scratchpad sets the return fuel flow rate. The fuel flow rate is displayed as 9SYS9 or 9MAN9. LS8 SPD xxx KIAS Figure 4-133. Displays the best range speed in kts. Fuel Advisory Page
LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7
xxxx AVG or xxxx MAN Blank xxxx QTY xxx/yy.y SYS[ ] or MAN[
4-184
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: fuel advisory config FUNCTION: Displays zero fuel operating weight, destination position, destination PDI, reserve fuel, and current number of engines. Sets zero fuel operating weight. ACTIVATION: By vertical scrolling from the Fuel Advisory page (Figure 4-133). LS KEY LS1 OPWT[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the zero fuel operating weight in pounds. Selection with a weight from 10,000 - 28,000 pounds sets the zero fuel operating weight. Actuation with a blank scratchpad is inoperative. LS2 LS6 and DES[ ] If the destination type for fuel calculation is position, displays the destination position for fuel calculation. If the destination type for fuel calculation is dynamic PDI, displays the destination PDI for fuel calculation. Displays the current number of engines. Displays the reserve fuel in pounds. Returns to the last displayed page. Figure 4-134. Fuel Advisory Config Page
LS3 LS4 LS7 LS5 LS8 and
ENG: Blank [ ]RESV
RTN
4-185
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: msn record/load FUNCTION: Displays record status, mark event text, file time and date, save interval. Sets MDR/L record command. Selects the save interval. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS6 on the Index 1 page (Figure 4-2). LS KEY LS1 RCRDING: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the MDR/L record status state of 9STOP9 or 9RECORD9. Toggles the MDR/L record command between 9STOP9 and 9RECORD9. LS2 LS6 and [ ] Displays the MDR/L mark event text ASCII text string. Sets the MDR/L mark event text to the contents of the scratchpad if the data is within the 16 character limit. info line LS3 LS4 MDL xx:xx SAVE MDL SAVE INTRVL: XXmin xx/xx/xx Displays MDL (mission data loader) file time and date. Sets the MDL save command to save. Displays the MDL save interval value. Toggles the MDL save interval between OFF, 10, 30, and 60 minutes. LS5 MARK Displays an 9*9 when the MDR/L mark event command is set to mark, a when recording, or no arrow when zeroizing, stopped or stopping. If the MDR/L record status is set to record, actuation sets the MDR/L mark event command to mark event. LS7 LS8 LOAD Blank Figure 4-135. Sets MDL restore command to save. Mission Data Loader/Recorder Page
4-186
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: msn zeroize FUNCTION: Zeroizes the ADLP, tactical database, mission data loader/recorder cartridge, mission systems, all ADLP data, and ESM database. (Note: the MDR/L cartridge is zeroized at the rate of approximately 1 megabyte per minute. To reduce the time needed to zeroize the cartridge during or after a mission, it is recommend that the cartridge should be zeroized prior to starting the mission.) ACTIVATION: By pressing LS7 on the Zeroize page (Figure 4-124). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 Blank LRO ADLP TAC DATABASE TAC ZERO MSN ADLP ALL DATABASE ESM RTN Figure 4-136. PAGE TITLE: msn ctrl FUNCTION: Accesses the top level mission pages. DISPLAY CUE Zeroizes the ADLP LRO. Zeroizes the tactical database. Zeroizes the mission data loader/recorder cartridge. Zeroizes the mission systems. Zeroizes all ADLP data. Zeroizes the ESM database. Returns to the last displayed page. Mission Zeroize Page FUNCTION
ACTIVATION: By pressing the MSN function key. LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 WPN TACAID ESM TOTE RADAR FLIR LINK LINK MSG DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Accesses the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). Accesses the Tactical Aids page (Figure 4-186). Accesses the ESM Control page (Figure 4-160). Accesses the Tote Index page (Figure 4-162). Accesses the Radar Control page (Figure 4-190). Accesses the FLIR Control page (Figure 4-192). Accesses the Link Setup page (Figure 4-193). Accesses the Link Message pages (Figures 4-200 through 4-208). Figure 4-137. Mission Control Page
4-187
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: wpn sum (x) (where x = plt, cplt, or tso) FUNCTION: Displays the inventory of each ASC station. Accesses the appropriate ASC weapon control page based on the inventory of the ASC stations. Sets ASC control to this CDU station. Displays Hellfire autonomous and remote octal code letters. Accesses the Octal Codes page (Figure 4-158). ACTIVATION: From the Mission Control page (Figure 4-137). LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE L-OTBD or L-OTBD MSL TRAINING FUNCTION Displays inventory of the L-OTBD (left outboard) ASC station. Accesses the appropriate ASC weapon control page based on the inventory of the L-OTBD (left outboard) ASC station. LS2 L-INBD Displays inventory of the L-INBD (left inboard) ASC station. Accesses the appropriate ASC weapon control page based on the inventory of the L-INBD ASC station. LS3 R-INBD Displays inventory of the R-INBD (right inboard) ASC station. Accesses the appropriate ASC weapon control page based on the inventory of the R-INBD ASC station. LS4 LS6 LS5 and Blank CTRL or RLS If MCS training mode is not active, actuation sets ASC control to this CDU station (plt, cplt, or tso). This permits the operator to take control of the ASC configuration. If this CDU station currently has control, then actuation releases ASC control. Displays Hellfire autonomous octal code letter. Accesses the Octal Codes page (Figure 4-158). LS8 RMT Displays Hellfire remote octal code letter. Accesses the Octal Codes page (Figure 4-158). Vertical scrolling accesses the Bomb Rack Status page (Figure 4-159) and the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). Figure 4-138. Weapon Summary Page
LS7
AUT
4-188
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: station load FUNCTION: Initiates ASC station load inventory processing.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS1 from any ASC weapon control page. LS KEY LS1 MK 46/1 DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station to MK 46/1, and executes ASC station load inventory processing. The 9*9 indicates which store is currently assigned to the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station to MK 46/2, and executes ASC station load inventory processing. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station to MK 46/5, and executes ASC station load inventory processing. If the ASC selected station is L-OTBD, actuation replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station to AGM119B, and executes ASC station load inventory processing. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station to fuel tank, and executes ASC station load inventory processing. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station to empty, and executes ASC station load inventory processing. If the ASC selected station is L-OTBD, actuation replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station to M299, and executes ASC station load inventory processing. Figure 4-139. ASC Station Load Page
LS2
MK 46/2
LS3
MK 46/5
LS4
AGM-119B
LS5 LS6
Blank FUEL TANK
LS7
EMPTY
LS8
M299
4-189
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: wpn (x) (where x is (plt, cplt, tso, or ----) FUNCTION: Sets the ASC selected station and displays the load inventory of the ASC selected station.
ACTIVATION: Generated when the ASC station load inventory input (ASC selected station) is set to 9EMPTY9 or 9----9 (None). LS KEY LS1 STN: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the selected ASC selected station (L- OTBD, L-INBD, or R-INBD). If alert 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is displayed in the scratchpad and MCS training mode is not active, actuation sets ASC control to this CDU station (plt, cplt, or tso) and clears the scratchpad alert. If alert 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is not displayed in the scratchpad, actuation toggles among weapon stations and sets the ASC selected station (L- OTBD, L-INBD, or R-INBD). LS2 LOAD Displays the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station (EMPTY or ----). If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the ASC Station Load page (Figure 4-139). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad. LS3 LS8 thru Blank bc Accesses the Bomb Rack Status page (Figure 4-159). Lateral scrolling accesses the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138) and the ASC Selected Station L-OTBD, L-INBD, and R-INBD pages based on the inventory of the ASC station. Figure 4-140. ASC Weapon Control Page (Empty)
4-190
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: wpn (x) (where x is (plt, cplt, tso, or ----) FUNCTION: Controls MK46 in circle mode.
ACTIVATION: Generated when the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station is 46/1 or 46/2 or 46/5 and the ASC torpedo mode of the ASC selected station is circle. LS KEY LS1 STN: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the selected ASC selected station (L- OTBD, L-INBD, or R-INBD). If alert 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is displayed in the scratchpad and MCS training mode is not active, actuation sets ASC control to this CDU station (plt, cplt, or tso) and clears the scratchpad alert. If alert 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is not displayed in the scratchpad, actuation toggles among weapon stations and sets the ASC selected station (L- OTBD, L-INBD, or R-INBD). LS2 LOAD Displays the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station (46/1, 46/2, 46/5). If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the ASC Station Load page (Figure 4-139). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad. LS3 DEPTH If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the Torpedo Depth page (Figure 4-142). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad. Displays the ASC torpedo ceiling value of the ASC selected station (20FT ACTIVE, 20FT PASSIVE, 50FT ACTIVE or 50FT PASSIVE). If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the Torpedo Ceiling page (Figure 4-143). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad. Figure 4-141. Weapon Control Page (MK 46 CIRCLE) (Sheet 1 of 2)
LS4 LS8
and
CEILING
4-191
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS5 WPN
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays the ASC weapon status of the ASC selected station (9READY9, 9AWAY9, 9MODE9, 9DEPTH9, 9CRS9, 9CEIL9, or 9DP/CL9). Displays the ASC torpedo mode of the ASC selected station (9CIR9, 9SNKE9, or 9HATS9). If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the Torpedo Mode page (Figure 4-144). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad.
LS6
MODE
LS7
ARM SEL
If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control) and the ASC aircraft master arm is on, then actuation accesses the Torpedo Arm Select page (Figure 4-145). If ASC control is set to this CDU station and the ASC aircraft master arm is off, then actuation displays 9Turn On MA9 in the scratchpad. If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad. Accesses the Bomb Rack Status page (Figure 4-159). Lateral scrolling accesses the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138) and the ASC Selected Station L-OTBD, L-INBD, and R-INBD pages based on the inventory of the ASC station. Weapon Control Page (MK 46 CIRCLE) (Sheet 2 of 2)
bc
Figure 4-141.
4-192
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: depth (ft) FUNCTION: Sets ASC torpedo depth of the ASC selected station.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS3 (DEPTH) from the MK46 Circle page (Figure 4-141) or MK46 Snake ASC Weapon Control page (Figure 4-146). LS KEY LS1 LS5 LS2 and Blank 125 DISPLAY CUE Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo depth of the ASC selected station to 125, and returns to the previous page. The 9*9 symbol indicates which is currently the ASC torpedo depth of the ASC selected station. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo depth of the ASC selected station to 275 D, and returns to the previous page. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo depth of the ASC selected station to 275, and returns to the previous page. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo depth of the ASC selected station to 500, and returns to the previous page. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo depth of the ASC selected station to 750, and returns to the previous page. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo depth of the ASC selected station to 1000, and returns to the previous page. Figure 4-142. Torpedo Depth Page FUNCTION
LS3
275 D
LS4
275
LS6
500
LS7
750
LS8
1000
4-193
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: ceiling (ft) FUNCTION: Sets ASC torpedo ceiling of the ASC selected station.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS4 (9CEILING9) from the MK46 Circle ASC Weapon Control page (Figure 4-141). LS KEY LS1, LS5, LS7 LS2 LS3, and Blank DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION
20 ACT
Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo ceiling of the ASC selected station to 20 active, and returns to the previous page. The 9*9 symbol indicates which is currently the ASC torpedo ceiling of the ASC selected station. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo ceiling of the ASC selected station to 50 active, and returns to the previous page. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo ceiling of the ASC selected station to 20 passive, and returns to the previous page. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo ceiling of the ASC selected station to 50 passive, and returns to the previous page. Figure 4-143. Torpedo Ceiling Page
LS4
50 ACT
LS6
20 PASS
LS8
50 PASS
4-194
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: torpedo mode FUNCTION: Sets the torpedo mode of the ASC selected station.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS6 (9MODE9) from the MK46 Circle page (Figure 4-141) or MK46 Snake page (Figure 4-146) or MK46 HATS ASC Weapon Control page (Figure 4-148). LS KEY LS1, LS5, thru LS8 LS2 Blank CIRCLE DISPLAY CUE Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC torpedo mode of the ASC selected station to circle, and returns to the previous page. The 9*9 symbol indicates which is currently the ASC torpedo mode of the ASC selected station. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC torpedo mode of the ASC selected station to snake, and returns to the previous page. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC torpedo mode of the ASC selected station to HATS (helicopter automatic targeting system), and returns to the previous page. Figure 4-144. Torpedo Mode Page FUNCTION
LS3
SNAKE
LS3
HATS
4-195
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: arm mode FUNCTION: Sets the ASC torpedo arm mode of the ASC selected station
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS7 (9ARM9) from the MK46 Circle page (Figure 4-141) or MK46 Snake page (Figure 4-146) or MK46 HATS ASC Weapon Control page (Figure 4-148). LS KEY LS1, LS5, thru LS8 LS2 Blank TAIL DISPLAY CUE Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC torpedo arm mode of the ASC selected station to TAIL, and returns to the previous page. The 9*9 symbol indicates which is currently the ASC torpedo arm mode of the ASC selected station. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC torpedo arm mode of the ASC selected station to NOSE/TAIL, and returns to the previous page. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC torpedo arm mode of the ASC selected station to SAFE, and returns to the previous page. Figure 4-145. Torpedo Arm Select Page FUNCTION
LS3
NOSE/TAIL
LS4
SAFE
4-196
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: wpn (x) (where x is plt, cplt, tso, or ----) FUNCTION: Controls MK46 in snake mode.
ACTIVATION: Generated when the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station is 46/1 or 46/2 or 46/5 and the ASC torpedo mode the ASC selected station is SNAKE. LS KEY LS1 STN: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the ASC selected station (L-OTBD, L-INBD or R- INBD). If 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is displayed in the scratchpad and the MCS status training mode is not active, actuation sets ASC control to this CDU station (operator now has control) and clears the scratchpad alert. If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), the BC MP also sets the ASC station selected by the CDU with ASC control to the ASC selected station. If 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is displayed in the scratchpad and the MCS status training mode is active, actuation displays 9MSL TRAINING9 in the scratchpad. If 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is not displayed in the scratchpad, actuation toggles among weapon stations and sets the ASC selected station (L- OTBD, L-INBD, or R-INBD). LS2 LOAD Displays the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station (46/1, 46/2, or 46/5). If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the ASC Station Load page (Figure 4-139). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad. LS3 DEPTH If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the Torpedo Depth page (Figure 4-142). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad. ASC Weapon Control Page (MK 46 SNAKE) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 4-146.
4-197
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 COURSE
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays the ASC torpedo course of the ASC selected station (9AUTO9, 909, 9359 9RIGHT9, 970 RIGHT9, 935 LEFT9, or 970 LEFT9). If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the Torpedo Course Load page (Figure 4-147). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad.
LS5
WPN
Displays the ASC weapon status of the ASC selected station (9READY9, 9AWAY9, 9MODE9, 9DEPTH9, 9CRS9, 9CEIL9, or 9DP/CL9). Displays the ASC torpedo mode of the ASC selected station (9CIR9, 9SNKE9, 9HATS9). If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the Torpedo Mode page (Figure 4-144). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad.
LS6
MODE
LS7
ARM SEL
If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control) and the ASC aircraft master arm is on, then actuation accesses the Torpedo Arm Select page (Figure 4-145). If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control) and ASC aircraft master arm is off, then actuation displays 9Turn On MA9 in the scratchpad. If ASC Control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad.
LS8 -
Blank bc
Accesses the Bomb Rack Status page (Figure 4-159). Lateral scrolling accesses the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138) and the ASC Selected Station L-OTBD, L-INBD, and R-INBD pages based on the inventory of the ASC station. ASC Weapon Control Page (MK 46 SNAKE) (Sheet 2 of 2)
Figure 4-146.
4-198
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: course (degrees) FUNCTION: Enters MK46 torpedo course.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS4 9COURSE9 from the MK46 Snake page (Figure 4-146) or MK46 HATS ASC Weapon Control page (Figure 4-148). LS KEY LS1 : DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the ASC torpedo course direction (9LEFT9, 9RIGHT9, 9AUTO9) of the ASC selected station. Toggles between 9LEFT9, 9RIGHT9, 9AUTO9 and sets the ASC torpedo course direction of the ASC selected station. LS2 0 If the ASC torpedo course direction of the ASC selected station is AUTO, the display adjacent to LS2 will be blank and actuation displays alert 9INVALID ENTRY AUTO9 in the scratchpad. Else, actuation replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo course to 0, and returns to the previous page. The 9*9 symbol indicates which is currently the ASC torpedo course of the ASC selected station. If the ASC torpedo course direction of the ASC selected station is AUTO, the display adjacent to LS3 will be blank and actuation displays alert 9INVALID ENTRY AUTO9 in the scratchpad. Else, actuation replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo course to 35, and returns to the previous page. If the ASC torpedo course direction of the ASC selected station is AUTO, the display adjacent to LS4 will be blank and actuation displays alert 9INVALID ENTRY AUTO9 in the scratchpad. Else, actuation replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo course to 70, and returns to the previous page. If the ASC torpedo course direction of the ASC selected station is AUTO, the display adjacent to LS5 will be blank and actuation displays alert 9INVALID ENTRY AUTO9 in the scratchpad. Else, if the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station is MK46-2 or MK46-5 and ASC torpedo mode of the ASC selected station is HATS, then actuation replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo course to 95, and returns to the previous page. Figure 4-147. Torpedo Course Load Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
LS3
35
LS4
70
LS5
95
4-199
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS6 120
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION If the ASC torpedo course direction of the ASC selected station is AUTO, the display adjacent to LS6 will be blank and actuation displays alert 9INVALID ENTRY AUTO9 in the scratchpad. Else, if the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station is MK46-2 or MK46-5 and ASC torpedo mode of the ASC selected station is HATS, then actuation replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo course to 120, and returns to the previous page. If the ASC torpedo course direction of the ASC selected station is AUTO, the display adjacent to LS7 will be blank and actuation displays alert 9INVALID ENTRY AUTO9 in the scratchpad. Else, if the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station is MK46-2 or MK46-5 and ASC torpedo mode of the ASC selected station is HATS, then actuation replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo course to 150, and returns to the previous page. If the ASC torpedo course direction of the ASC selected station is AUTO, the display adjacent to LS8 will be blank and actuation displays alert 9INVALID ENTRY AUTO9 in the scratchpad. Else, if the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station is MK46-2 or MK46-5 and ASC torpedo mode of the ASC selected station is HATS, then actuation replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo course to 180, and returns to the previous page.
LS7
150
LS8
180
Figure 4-147.
Torpedo Course Load Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-200
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: wpn (x) (where x is plt, cplt, tso, or ----) FUNCTION: Controls MK46 in HATS mode.
ACTIVATION: Generated when the ASC station load inventory of the ASC selected station is 46/2 or 46/5 and the ASC torpedo mode of the ASC station location is HATS. LS KEY LS1 STN: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the ASC station location (9L-OTBD9, 9L-INBD9 or 9R- INBD9). If 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is displayed in the scratchpad and the MCS status training mode is not active, actuation sets ASC control to this CDU station (operator now has control) and clears the scratchpad alert. If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), the BC MP also sets ASC station selected by the CDU with ASC control to the ASC selected station. If 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is displayed in the scratchpad and the MCS status training mode is active, actuation displays 9MSL TRAINING9 in the scratchpad. If 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is not displayed in the scratchpad, actuation toggles among weapon stations and sets ASC selected station to L-OTBD, L-INBD, or R-INBD. LS2 LOAD Displays the ASC station load inventory of the ASC station location (946/19, 946/29, or 946/59). If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the ASC Station Load page (Figure 4-139). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad. LS3 DEP/CLG If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the Torpedo Depth/Ceiling page (Figure 4-149). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad. ASC Weapon Control Page (MK 46 HATS) (Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 4-148.
4-201
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 COURSE
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays the ASC torpedo course (9AUTO9, 909, 91809, 935 RIGHT9, 970 RIGHT9, 995 RIGHT9, 9120 RIGHT9, 9150 RIGHT9, 935 LEFT9, 970 LEFT9, 995 LEFT9, 9120 LEFT9, or 9150 LEFT9). If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the Torpedo Course Load page (Figure 4-147). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad.
LS5
WPN
Displays ASC weapon status of the ASC station location (9READY9, 9AWAY9, 9MODE9, 9DEPTH9, 9CRS9, 9CEIL9, or 9DP/CL9). Displays ASC torpedo mode of the ASC station location (9CIR9, 9SNKE9, or 9HATS9). If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the Torpedo Mode page (Figure 4-144). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad.
LS6
MODE
LS7
ARM
If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control) and the ASC aircraft master arm is on, then actuation accesses the Torpedo Arm Select page (Figure 4-145). If ASC Control is set to this CDU station (operator has control) and ASC aircraft master arm is off, then actuation displays 9Turn On MA9 in the scratchpad. If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad. Accesses the Bomb Rack Status page (Figure 4-159). Lateral scrolling accesses the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138) and the ASC Selected Station L-OTBD, L-INBD, and R-INBD pages based on the inventory of the ASC station. ASC Weapon Control Page (MK 46 HATS) (Sheet 2 of 2)
bc
Figure 4-148.
4-202
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: depth/ceiling (ft) FUNCTION: Sets the torpedo depth/ceiling value.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS3 (DEPTH/CEILING) from the MK46 HATS Weapon Control page (Figure 4-148). LS KEY LS1 LS5 LS2 and Blank 125/20 DISPLAY CUE Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC torpedo depth/ceiling of the ASC station location to 125/20, and returns to the previous page. The 9*9 symbol indicates which is the current ASC torpedo depth/ceiling value of the ASC station location. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC torpedo depth/ceiling of the ASC station location to 275D/20, and returns to the previous page. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC torpedo depth/ceiling of the ASC station location to 275/20, and returns to the previous page. Replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC torpedo depth/ceiling of the ASC station location to 500/50, and returns to the previous page. If the ASC station load inventory of the ASC station location is MK46-2, actuation replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC torpedo depth/ceiling of the ASC station location to 750/50, and returns to the previous page. If the ASC station load inventory of the ASC station location is MK46-5, actuation replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC torpedo depth/ceiling of the ASC station location to 850/50, and returns to the previous page. If the ASC station load inventory of the ASC station location is MK46-2, actuation replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets the ASC torpedo depth/ceiling of the ASC station location to 1000/50, and returns to the previous page. If the ASC station load inventory of the ASC station location is MK46-5, actuation replaces 99 with 9*9 on the display, sets ASC torpedo depth/ceiling of the ASC station location to 1450/50, and returns to the previous page. Torpedo Depth/Ceiling Page FUNCTION
LS3
275D/20
LS4
275/20
LS6
500/50
LS7
750/50 or 850/50
LS8
1000/50 or 1450/50
Figure 4-149.
4-203
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: wpn (x) (where x is plt, cplt, tso, or ----) FUNCTION: Provides 119B missile status and control.
ACTIVATION: Generated when ASC station load inventory (L-OTBD) is set to 9119B9 and MCS status training mode is off and L-OTBD is selected. LS KEY LS1 STN: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the ASC station location (L-OTBD, L-INBD or R-INBD). If 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is displayed in the scratchpad and MCS status training mode is not active, actuation sets the ASC control to this CDU station (operator now has control) and clears the scratchpad alert. If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), the BC MP also sets the ASC station selected by the CDU with ASC control to the ASC selected station. If 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is displayed in the scratchpad and the MCS status training mode is active, actuation displays 9MSL TRAINING9 in the scratchpad. If 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is not displayed in the scratchpad, actuation toggles among the weapon stations and sets ASC selected station (9L-OTBD9, 9LINBD9, or 9R-INBD9). LS2 LOAD 119B If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the ASC Station Load page (Figure 4-139). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad. Displays the following control settings: Penguin Seeker Scan (9NRW9, 9STD9, or 9WIDE9) Penguin Seeker Option (9LOW9, 9MED9, or 9HIGH9) Penguin Target Count (919, 929, 939, 949, or 959) Penguin CCM (9ON9 or 9OFF9) Penguin Missile Mode (9MAN9, 9STR9, 9DOGL9, 9DOGR9, or 9WPT9) Figure 4-150. 119B Missile Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
LS3 LS7
and
4-204
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays 9ALTH9 if MCS status altitude hold is on. Displays 9SKM9 if MCS status sea skimming is on. Displays 9WVG9 if MCS status weaving is on.
LS5 LS6
WPN MSL SETUP
Displays the ASC weapon status of the ASC station location (9 9, READY, AWAY). If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the 119B Setup (1/2) page (Figure 4-151). If ASC control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad. Displays the ASC MCS missile system 9on9 status (9ON9, 9OFF9). Accesses the Bomb Rack Status page (Figure 4-159). Accesses the ASC Selected Station (L-OTBD) page, ASC Selected Station (L-INBD) page, ASC Selected Station (R-INBD) page, and the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). Figure 4-150. 119B Missile Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
LS8 -
MCS bc
4-205
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: 9missile setup 1/29 or 9trng msl setup 1/29 FUNCTION: Sets Penguin missile mode, seeker scan, seeker option, target count, and (counter countermeasures) CCM. ACTIVATION: By pressing 9MSL SETUP9 from the 119B Missile Weapon Control page (Figure 4-150) or Penguin Training page (Figure 4-154). LS KEY LS1 MODE DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the of Penguin missile mode (9MAN9, 9STR9, 9DOGL9, 9DOGR9, or 9WPT9) Accesses the 119B Missile Mode page (Figure 4-153). LS2 SKR SCAN: Displays the Penguin seeker scan. Toggles SKR SCAN (9NARROW9, 9STANDARD9, or 9WIDE9) and sets Penguin seeker scan. LS3 SKR OPTION: Displays the Penguin seeker option. Toggles SKR OPTION (9LOW9, 9MEDIUM9, or 9WIDE9) and sets Penguin seeker option. LS4 TGT COUNT Displays Penguin target count. Actuation with a integer value of 1-5 in the scratchpad sets the Penguin target count to the scratchpad value. The default value is 1. LS5 LS6 LS7 and CCM Blank Displays the on/off state of Penguin CCM (9ON9, 9OFF9). Toggles CCM (9ON9 or 9OFF9) and sets Penguin CCM. LS8 RTN Figure 4-151. Accesses the 119B Missile Weapon Control page (Figure 4-150). Accesses the 119B Setup (2/2) page (Figure 4-152). 119B Setup (1/2) Page
4-206
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: 9missile setup 2/29 or 9trng msl setup 2/29 FUNCTION: Sets Penguin missile altitude hold, sea skimming, and weaving.
ACTIVATION: By pressing from the 119B Setup (1/2) page (Figure 4-151). LS KEY LS1 ALT HOLD: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays Penguin altitude hold on/off state (9ON9 or 9OFF9). If Penguin altitude hold is not available, 9ALT HOLD NOT AVAIL9 is displayed. If Penguin altitude hold is available and Penguin missile mode is set to manual or bearing, 9ALT HOLD OFF9 is displayed. If Penguin altitude hold is available and Penguin missile mode is not set to manual or bearing, actuation toggles the Penguin altitude hold (ON, OFF). If Penguin altitude hold is available and Penguin missile mode is set to manual or bearing, actuation displays 9CHANGE MSL MODE9 in the scratchpad. LS2 SEA SKIM Displays Penguin sea skimming on/off state (ON, OFF). If Penguin sea skimming is not available, 9SEA SKIM NOT AVAIL9 is displayed. If Penguin sea skimming is available, and penguin missile mode is not set to manual or bearing, and Penguin altitude hold is off or Penguin missile mode is 9WPT9, actuation toggles Penguin sea skimming between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. If Penguin sea skimming is available, and Penguin missile mode is set to 9STR9 or 9DOGL9 or 9DOGR9, and Penguin altitude hold is on, actuation displays 9TURN OFF ALT HOLD9 in the scratchpad. If Penguin sea skimming is available and Penguin missile mode is set to manual or bearing, actuation displays 9CHANGE MSL MODE9 in the scratchpad. Figure 4-152. 119B Setup (2/2) Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-207
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS3 WEAVING
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION If Penguin weaving is available and Penguin missile mode is not set to manual or bearing, the Penguin weaving on/off state (9ON or 9OFF9) is displayed. If Penguin weaving is not available, 9WEAVING NOT AVAIL9 is displayed. If Penguin weaving is available and Penguin missile mode is set to manual or bearing, 9WEAVING OFF9 is displayed. If Penguin weaving is available and Penguin missile mode is not set to manual or bearing, actuation toggles Penguin weaving between 9ON9 and 9OFF9. If Penguin weaving is toggled 9ON9 while Penguin seeker scan is set to 9WIDE9, Penguin seeker scan is set to 9STD9. If Penguin weaving is available and Penguin missile mode is set to manual or bearing, actuation displays 9CHANGE MSL MODE9 in the scratchpad.
LS4
LAUNCH
Displays 9LAUNCH9 if the Penguin training mode is on. Accesses the Launch Panel Simulation Training page (Figure 4-155).
LS5 LS7 LS8 -
thru
Blank RTN Figure 4-152.
Accesses the 119B Missile Weapon Control page (Figure 4-150). Accesses the 119B Setup (1/2) page (Figure 4-151). 119B Setup (2/2) Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-208
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: 9missile mode9 or 9trng missile mode9 FUNCTION: Sets Penguin missile mode.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS1 (MODE) on the 119B Setup (1/2) page (Figure 4-151). LS KEY LS1 LS2 info line LS3, LS6, and LS7 LS4 LS5 LS8 DISPLAY CUE STRAIGHT DESIGNATED WPT [ Blank DOG LEFT MANUAL DOG RIGHT ] FUNCTION Sets Penguin missile mode to straight and returns to this page. Sets Penguin missile mode to designated waypoint and returns to this page. Displays Penguin MCS reported waypoint range north and east in latitude and longitude. Sets Penguin missile mode to dog left and returns to this page. Sets Penguin missile mode to manual and returns to this page. Sets Penguin missile mode to dog right and returns to this page. Figure 4-153. 119B Missile Mode Page
4-209
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: msl trng (----) FUNCTION: Provides 119B missile training status and control.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS4 on the Tactical Aids Index page (Figure 4-186). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS7 and DISPLAY CUE STN: L-OTBD LOAD 119B FUNCTION Displays the label 9STN: L-OTBD9. Displays the label 9LOAD 119B9. Displays the values of the following control settings: Penguin seeker scan (9NRW9, 9STD9, or 9WIDE9) Penguin seeker option (9LOW9, 9MED9, or 9HIGH9) Penguin target count (919, 929, 939, 949, or 959) Penguin CCM (9ON9, or 9OFF9) Penguin missile mode (9MAN9, 9STR9, 9DOGL9, 9DOGR9, or 9WPT9) LS4 ALTH/SKM/WVG If MCS status altitude hold is on, 9ALTH9 is displayed. If MCS status sea skimming is on, 9SKM9 is displayed. If MCS status weaving is on, 9WVG9 is displayed. Displays the training state of L-OTBD (9READY9, 9AWAY9, or 9 9), which is set on the Launch Panel Simulation Training page (Figure 4-155). Actuation accesses the 119B Setup (1/2) page (Figure 4-151). Displays the state of ASC MCS missile system on status (9ON9 or 9OFF9). Displays the Launch Panel Simulation Training page (Figure 4-155). Lateral scrolling accesses the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138) and the ASC Selected Station L-OTBD, L-INBD, and R-INBD pages based on the inventory of the ASC station. Figure 4-154. 119B Missile Training Page
LS5
WPN
LS6 LS8 -
MSL SETUP MCS bc
4-210
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: msl trng (----) FUNCTION: Provides launch panel simulation training.
ACTIVATION: By pressing or on the Penguin Training page (Figure 4-154). LS KEY LS1, LS5 thru LS7 LS2 LS3 Blank launch pnl simulation L-OTBD DISPLAY CUE Displays the label 9launch pnl simulation9. Display the training state of L-OTBD (9 9, 9READY9, or 9AWAY9). The state is 9READY9 if the training MSTR ARM is on and MCS status missile ready is ready. The state is 9AWAY9 if Penguin training launch command is valid. Else, the state is 9 9. Toggles the local training state of MSTR ARM (9ON9 or 9OFF9). If training state of L-OTBD is 9READY9, actuation sets the Penguin training launch command to valid, display 9AWAY9 on data line 3, waits 5 seconds, and then accesses the Training Complete page (Figure 4-156). Launch Panel Simulation Training Page FUNCTION
LS4 LS8
MSTR ARM LAUNCH
Figure 4-155. PAGE TITLE: msl trng (----) FUNCTION:
Exits launch panel simulation training.
ACTIVATION: Generated 2 seconds after the Penguin training launch command has been set valid on the Launch Panel Simulation Training page (Figure 4-155). LS KEY LS1, LS5 LS7 LS2 LS3 LS8 LS4, thru Blank DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION
119 TRAINING COMPLETE TURN OFF MCS SWITCH EXIT Figure 4-156.
Displays the label 9119 TRAINING COMPLETE9. Displays the label 9TURN OFF MCS SWITCH9. Accesses the Tactical Aids page (Figure 4-186). Training Complete Page
4-211
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: wpn (x) (where x is plt, cplt, tso, or ----) FUNCTION: Provides M299 Hellfire status and control.
ACTIVATION: By selecting 9M2999 from the Mission Status 3 page (Figure 4-221). LS KEY LS1 STN: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the ASC station location (9L-OTBD9, 9L-INBD9 or 9R- INBD9). If the alert 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is displayed in the scratchpad and MCS training mode is not active, actuation sets ASC control to this CDU station (operator now has control) and cleasr the scratchpad alert. If the alert 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is displayed in the scratchpad and MCS training mode is active, actuation displays 9 MSL TRAINING9 in the scratchpad. If the alert 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 is not displayed in the scratchpad, actuation toggles among weapon stations (L- OTBD, L-INBD, or R-INBD) and sets the ASC selected station. LS2 LOAD M299 If ASC control is set to this CDU station (operator has control), actuation accesses the ASC Station Load page (Figure 4-139). If ASC Control is not set to this CDU station (operator does not have control), actuation displays 9PRESS STN FOR CTRL9 in the scratchpad. If MCS power is off, then the CDU will display 9station position (UO) ----9. If MCS power is on, then the CDU will display station position (UO) and 9UNLTCH9 if missile is unlatched, or blank if missile is latched and there is no missile type, or 9UNKOWN9 if missile is latched and missile type is unknown, or missile type code letter if missile is latched. If MCS power is off, then the CDU will display 9station position (LO) ----9. If MCS power is on, then the CDU will display station position (LO) and 9UNLTCH9 if missile is unlatched, or blank if missile is latched and there is no missile type, or 9UNKOWN9 if missile is latched and missile type is unknown, or missile type code letter if missile is latched. Displays 9SAFE M2999 when M299 arm status is safe, 9ARMED M2999 when M299 arm status is arm and 9---M2999 when M299 arm status is off. Display the state of ASC MCS missile system on status (9ON9 or 9OFF9). Figure 4-157. M299 Hellfire Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
LS3
UO
LS4
LO
LS5
M299
LS6
MCS
4-212
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS7 UI
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION If MCS power is off, then the CDU will display 9station position (UI) ----9. If MCS power is on, then the CDU will display station position (UI) and 9UNLTCH9 if missile is unlatched, or blank if missile is latched and there is no missile type, or 9UNKOWN9 if missile is latched and missile type is unknown, or missile type code letter if missile is latched. If MCS power is off, then the CDU will display 9station position (LI) ----9. If MCS power is on, then the CDU will display station position (LI) and 9UNLTCH9 if missile is unlatched, or blank if missile is latched and there is no missile type, or 9UNKOWN9 if missile is latched and missile type is unknown, or missile type code letter if missile is latched. Vertical scrolling clears the scratchpad and accesses the Bomb Rack Status page (Figure 4-159). Lateral scrolling clears the scratchpad and accesses the ASC selected station L-OTBD, L-INBD, and R-INBD pages based on the inventory of the ASC station.
LS8
LI
bc
Figure 4-157.
M299 Hellfire Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-213
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: octal codes FUNCTION: Selects one of eight four-digit octal laser codes (A-H).
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS5 or LS6 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). LS KEY LS1 A[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays octal code A. Actuation with a laser code (XXXX) in the scratchpad enters octal code A. Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire remote code letter to A and Hellfire remote code to octal code A - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS5 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire autonomous code letter to A and Hellfire autonomous code to octal code A - 1111, if this page was accessed from the LS6 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). LS2 B[ ] Displays octal code B. Actuation with a laser code (XXXX) in the scratchpad enters octal code B. Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire remote code letter to B and Hellfire remote code to octal code B - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS5 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire autonomous code letter to B and Hellfire autonomous code to octal code B - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS6 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). LS3 C[ ] Displays octal code C. Actuation with a laser code (XXXX) in the scratchpad enters octal code C. Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire remote code letter to C and Hellfire remote code to octal code C - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS5 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). Figure 4-158. Octal Codes Page (Sheet 1 of 3)
4-214
ORIGINAL
LS KEY
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire autonomous code letter to C and Hellfire autonomous code to octal code C - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS6 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138).
LS4
D[
Displays octal code D. Actuation with a laser code (XXXX) in the scratchpad enters octal code D. Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire remote code letter to D and Hellfire remote code to octal code D 1111, if this page was accessed from LS5 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire autonomous code letter to D and Hellfire autonomous code to octal code D - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS6 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138).
LS5
E[
Displays octal code E. Actuation with a laser code (XXXX) in the scratchpad enters octal code E. Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire remote code letter to E and Hellfire remote code to octal code E - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS5 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire autonomous code letter to E and Hellfire autonomous code to octal code E - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS6 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138).
LS6
F[
Displays octal code F. Actuation with a laser code (XXXX) in the scratchpad enters octal code F. Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire remote code letter to F and Hellfire remote code to octal code F - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS5 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). Figure 4-158. Octal Codes Page (Sheet 2 of 3)
4-215
ORIGINAL
LS KEY
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire autonomous code letter to F and Hellfire autonomous code to octal code F - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS6 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138).
LS7
G[
Displays octal code G. Actuation with a laser code (XXXX) in the scratchpad enters octal code G. Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire remote code letter to G and Hellfire remote code to octal code G - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS5 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire autonomous code letter to G and Hellfire autonomous code to octal code G - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS6 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138).
LS8
H[
Displays octal code H. Actuation with a laser code (XXXX) in the scratchpad enters octal code H. Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire remote code letter to H and Hellfire remote code to octal code H - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS5 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). Actuation with no code in the scratchpad, sets the Hellfire autonomous code letter to H and Hellfire autonomous code to octal code H - 1111, if this page was accessed from LS6 on the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). Figure 4-158. Octal Codes Page (Sheet 3 of 3)
4-216
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: bomb rack status FUNCTION: Displays bomb rack status.
ACTIVATION: By pressing from the ASC Weapon Control pages or Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138), except for the Penguin Training page (Figure 4-154). LS KEY LS1 LS2 DISPLAY CUE STA IFOBRL LEMA AUX L-INBD FUNCTION Displays the legend 9STA IFOBRL LEMA AUX9. Displays the states of ASC IFOBRL (L-INBD), ASC linear electromechanical actuator (LEMA) (L-INBD), ASC AUX (L-INBD). Displays the states of ASC IFOBRL (R-INBD), ASC LEMA (R-INBD), ASC AUX (R-INBD). Displays the states of ASC IFOBRL (L-OTBD), ASC LEMA (L-OTBD), ASC AUX (L-OTBD). Displays the previous page either Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138) or ASC Weapon Control page. -
info line LS3 LS4 LS8 thru
R-INBD L-OTBD Blank
Figure 4-159.
Bomb Rack Status Page
4-217
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: esm ctrl FUNCTION: Displays ESM emitter parameter file (EPF) load and identification numbers, ESM tune table load and identification numbers, ESM mode, and ESM recorder status. Sets the ESM recorder to 9ON9. Toggles ESM mode standby/operate. Sets ESM directory structure to 9invalid9. Initializes the ESM. Accesses tone control page. ACTIVATION: From the Mission Control Page (Figure 4-137). LS KEY LS1 LS2 TONES EPF DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Accesses the Tone Control page (Figure 4-161). Displays the ESM EPF load and the EPF ID. If EPF ID is zero and ESM Load Status is not 9EPF LOAD IN PROGRESS9 then dashes are displayed for ESM EPF Load. If all filenames in ESM EPF are null or if an EPF or Tune Table selection page is active on another CDU, actuation generates the 9Not Available9 scratchpad alert. Otherwise, actuation access a selection page for selecting the ESM EPF Load. LS3 TT Displays the ESM tune table load and the ESM tune table ID. If the ESM tune table ID is zero and ESM load status is not 9TT LOAD IN PROGRESS9 then dashes are displayed for ESM tune table load. If all filenames in ESM tune table are null or if an EPF or tune table selection page is active on another CDU, actuation generates the 9Not Available9 scratchpad alert. Otherwise, actuation accesses a selection page for selecting the ESM tune table load. LS4 :STANDBY or :OPERATE Displays the ESM mode as 9STANDBY9 or 9OPERATE9. Toggles the ESM mode between 9STANDBY9 and 9OPERATE9. LS5 :RECORD Displays the on/off status of the ESM recorder. Actuation sets the ESM recorder to 9ON9. LS6 LS7 DIR INIT Sets the ESM directory structure to 9INVALID9. If the scratchpad is blank, actuation generates a 9CONFIRM ESM INIT9 scratchpad message. If the scratchpad contains 9CONFIRM ESM INIT9, actuation initializes the ESM. Figure 4-160. ESM Control Page
4-218
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: tone ctrl FUNCTION: Toggles ESM warning tones on/off.
ACTIVATION: From the ESM Control page (Figure 4-160). LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE LETHAL LOCK: FUNCTION Displays the status of the ESM lethal lock (OFF or ON). Toggles the ESM lethal lock 9ON9 or 9OFF9. LS2 LETHAL IN RNG: Displays the status of the ESM lethal in range (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the ESM lethal in range 9ON9 or 9OFF9. LS3 LETHAL : Display the status of ESM lethal (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the ESM lethal 9ON9 or 9OFF9. LS4 STAT CHG: Displays the status of the ESM status change (9OFF9 or 9ON9) Toggles the ESM status change 9ON9 or 9OFF9. LS5 LS7 LS8 thru Blank RTN Figure 4-161. Returns to the previous page. Tone Control Page
4-219
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: tote FUNCTION: Enters FTN of a track, marker, ASW contact, or ESM contact and accesses the associated page. Accesses the PIM page (Figure 4-128) and Graphics page (Figure 4-179). ACTIVATION: From the Mission Control page (Figure 4-137). LS KEY LS1 TRK DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with the FTN of a track displays the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) for the track. Actuation with a blank scratchpad displays the Track Summary page for the first track in the local database. If the track is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Actuation with the FTN of a marker displays the Marker page (Figure 4-169) for the marker. Actuation with a blank scratchpad displays the Markers page for the first valid marker in the database. If the marker is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Actuation with the FTN of a ASW contact displays the ASW Contact page (Figure 4-171) for the contact. Actuation with a blank scratchpad displays the ASW Contacts page for the first contact in the database. If the ASW contact is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Actuation with the FTN of a ESM contact displays the ESM Contact page (Figure 4-173) for the contact. Actuation with a blank scratchpad displays the ESM Contacts page for the first contact in the database. If the ESM contact is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the PIM page (Figure 4-128). Accesses the Graphics Index page (Figure 4-179). Accesses the Mission Control page (Figure 4-137). Figure 4-162. Tote Page
LS2
SPL
LS3
ASW
LS4
ESM
LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8
PIM GRAPHICS Blank RTN
4-220
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: track summary FUNCTION: Display track FTN and track quality. Sets track identification, amplification, secondary amplification, transmit status, category, course and speed. ACTIVATION: From the Tote page (Figure 4-162). LS KEY LS1 FTN[ ] DISPLAY CUE TQ FUNCTION Displays current track FTN and track quality. Sets track FTN. LS2 ID: Displays current track identification. Generates a selection list for setting the track identification. Upon a selection, the track amplification and track secondary amplification is set to the value 0. info line LS3 PP AMP: Displays track position. Displays track amplification. Generates a selection list for setting the track amplification. Upon a selection, the track secondary amplification is set to the value 0. LS4 SEC: 9T9 or 9T*9 Displays current track secondary amplification. Generates the secondary amplification selection list. LS5 Displays track status (on =9*9, off = 99). Toggles track transmit status between off and on. LS6 :CAT Displays current track category. Toggles the track category between surface, air, and subsurface. Selection also sets track identification, track amplification, and track secondary amplification to 0. LS7 [ ]CRS Displays track course. Actuation with a course in the scratchpad sets the track course. Figure 4-163. Track Summary Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-221
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS8 [ ]SPD
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays track speed. Actuation with a speed in the scratchpad sets the track speed.
Accesses the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) for the previous track in the database. If the track is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) for the next track in the database. If the track is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Track Miscellaneous page (Figures 4-165, 4-166, or 4-167) for the current track. Accesses the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175) for the current track. Figure 4-163. Track Summary Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
b c
4-222
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: track summary FUNCTION: Displays track FTN, quality, identification, amplification, secondary amplification, category, course, and speed. Toggles track transmit status off/on. ACTIVATION: Generated when a link receive only track is query/amplified on the tactical plot. LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 FTN ID AMP SEC T CAT CRS SPD TQ DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays current track FTN and track quality. Displays current track identification. Displays track amplification. Displays current track secondary amplification. Toggles track transmit status between OFF and ON. Displays current track category. Displays track course. Displays track speed. Accesses the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) for the previous LRO track in the database. If the LRO track is not found in the local database, the local system track database is searched. Accesses the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) for the next LRO track in the database. If the LRO track is not found in the local database, the local system track database is searched. Accesses the Track Miscellaneous page (Figures 4-168) for the current LRO track. Accesses the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175) for the current LRO track. Figure 4-164. Track Summary Page (LRO)
b c
4-223
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: track xxxxx misc (where xxxxx is the FTN) FUNCTION: Displays the track reporting unit, time of validity weapon/engagement status, altitude, and size. Sets track altitude and size. ACTIVATION: By pressing b on the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) or c on the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177). LS KEY LS1 LS2 info line LS3 RU TIME W/ES ALT[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION If the track is a correlated system track 9CORRELATED9 is displayed. Else, 9OWN SHIP9 is displayed. Displays the track time of validity. Displays the current track weapon/engagement status. The current altitude is displayed. Actuation with a scratchpad value between 0 and 127000 sets the track altitude in feet. LS4 SIZE: Displays the track size. Actuation toggles the track size between: NS, 1, 2-7, and 8. LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 Blank Blank Blank Blank Accesses the Track Miscellaneous page (Figures 4-165, 4-166, or 4-167) for the previous track in the database. If the track is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Track Miscellaneous page (Figures 4-165, 4-166, or 4-167) for the next track in the database. If the track is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177) for the current track. Accesses the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) for the current track. Track Miscellaneous Page (Air Category System Track)
b c
Figure 4-165.
4-224
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: track xxxxx misc (where xxxxx is the FTN) FUNCTION: track size. Displays the track reporting unit, time of validity weapon/engagement status, and size. Sets
ACTIVATION: By pressing b on the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) or c on the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177). LS KEY LS1 LS2 info line LS3 LS4 RU TIME W/ES Blank SIZE: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION If the track is a correlated system track 9CORRELATED9 is displayed. Else, 9OWN SHIP9 is displayed. Displays the track time of validity. Displays the current track weapon/engagement status. Displays the track size. Actuation toggles the track size between: NS, 1, 2-7, and 8. LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 Blank Blank Blank Blank Accesses the Track Miscellaneous page (Figures 4-165, 4-166, or 4-167) for the previous track in the database. If the track is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Track Miscellaneous page (Figures 4-165, 4-166, or 4-167) for the next track in the database. If the track is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177) for the current track. Accesses the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) for the current track. Track Miscellaneous Page (Surface Category System Track)
b c
Figure 4-166.
4-225
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: track xxxxx misc (where xxxxx is the FTN) FUNCTION: and depth. Displays the track reporting unit, time of validity weapon/engagement status, POSSUB status,
ACTIVATION: By pressing b on the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) or c on the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177). LS KEY LS1 LS2 info line LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 RU TIME W/ES DEPTH Blank Blank Blank Blank POSSUB DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION If the track is a correlated system track 9CORRELATED9 is displayed. Else, 9OWN SHIP9 is displayed. Displays the track time of validity. Displays the current track weapon/engagement status. The current depth is displayed. Displays the current track POSSUB (possible submarine) status. If the track amplification is POSSUB, actuation toggles between NS, 1, 2, 3, and 4. Accesses the Track Miscellaneous page (Figures 4-165, 4-166, or 4-167) for the previous track in the database. If the track is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Track Miscellaneous page (Figures 4-165, 4-166, or 4-167) for the next track in the database. If the track is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177) for the current track. Accesses the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) for the current track. Track Miscellaneous (Sub-Surface Category System Track)
b c
Figure 4-167.
4-226
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: track xxxxx misc (where xxxxx is the FTN) FUNCTION: Displays the track reporting unit, time of validity, weapon/engagement status, depth (subsurface), altitude (air), size (subsurface or air) and POSSUB status (subsurface). ACTIVATION: By pressing b on the Track Summary page (Figure 4-164) or c on the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-178). LS KEY LS1 LS2 info line LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 RU TIME W/ES 9DEPTH9 or 9ALT9 SIZE Blank DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the track reporting unit for the current LRO track. Displays the track time of validity. Displays the current track weapon/engagement status. Displays the track depth if the track category is subsurface or track altitude if the track category is air. If the track category is air or surface, the current track size is displayed. If the track category is surface, track PU status is PU, and its a helicopter carrying track, 9HELIPAD9 is displayed. Blank :POSSUB If the track category is subsurface and track amplification is POSSUB, the current track POSSUB value is displayed. Accesses the Track Miscellaneous page (Figures 4-168) for the previous LRO track in the database. If the track is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Track Miscellaneous page (Figures 4-168) for the next LRO track in the database. If the track is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-178) for the current track. Accesses the Track Summary page (Figure 4-164) for the current track. Figure 4-168. Track Miscellaneous Page (LRO)
LS7 LS8
b c
4-227
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: x marker (where x is the marker type: ref pt, datum, man in wtr, msl rel, torp rel, mine, rescue, rendezvous, search, sinker, brief ctc, asw center, wreck, dl wpt, or asw fix) FUNCTION: Displays the current marker FTN, identification, time, position, course, transmit status, position error, depth (as applicable), and marker speed. Sets the marker FTN, identification position (as applicable), course, transmit status, and speed. ACTIVATION: Generated when MARKERS is selected on the Tote page (Figure 4-162). LS KEY LS1 FTN[ DISPLAY CUE ] FUNCTION Displays the current marker FTN. Actuation with a FTN in the scratchpad sets the marker FTN. LS2 ID If the marker type is ASW fix, datum, sinker, brief contact, ASW search center, or charted wreck, marker identification 9PENDING9, 9UNKNOWN9, 9FRIEND9, or 9HOSTILE9 is displayed. Else, ID and marker identification is not displayed. If the marker type is ASW fix, datum, sinker, brief contact, ASW search center, or charted wreck, actuation generates a selection list for setting the marker identification. info line TIME xx:xx xx ERROR Displays marker time. If the marker type is datum, the 9ERROR9 label and the current marker position error in Nm is displayed. Displays the current marker position. Actuation with a location in the scratchpad sets the marker position. LS4 CRS[ ] Displays the current marker course. Actuation with a course between 0 and 359 degrees sets the marker course. Figure 4-169. Marker Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
LS3 LS7
and
4-228
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS5
DISPLAY CUE 9T9 or 9T*9
FUNCTION Displays marker transmit status (on =9*9, off = 99). Toggles the marker transmit status between transmit and dont transmit.
LS6
DP
Displays marker depth if the marker type is sinker, brief contact, or ASW fix. If the marker type is ASW fix, sinker, or brief contact, actuation generates a selection list for marker depth.
LS8
]SPD
Displays marker speed. Actuation with a speed between 0 and 999 in the scratchpad sets the marker speed.
Accesses the previous valid marker in the database. If the marker is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the next valid marker in the database. If the marker is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177). Accesses the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175). Figure 4-169. Marker Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
b c
4-229
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: x marker (where x is the marker type: ref pt, datum, man in wtr, msl rel, torp rel, mine, rescue, rendezvous, search, sinker, brief ctc, asw center, wreck, dl wpt, or asw fix) FUNCTION: Displays the current marker FTN, identification, time, position, course, transmit status, position error, depth (as applicable) and marker speed. Sets the marker transmit status. ACTIVATION: Generated when MARKERS is selected on the Tote page (Figure 4-162). LS KEY LS1 LS2 FTN[ ID DISPLAY CUE ] FUNCTION Displays the current marker FTN. If the marker type is ASW fix, datum, sinker, brief contact, ASW search center, or charted wreck, marker identification 9PENDING9, 9UNKNOWN9, 9FRIEND9, or 9HOSTILE9 is displayed . Else, ID and marker identification is not displayed. xx ERROR Displays marker time. If the marker type is datum, the 9ERROR9 label and the current marker position error in Nm is displayed. Displays the current marker position. ] Displays the current marker course. Displays marker transmit status (on =9*9, off = 99). Toggles the marker transmit status between transmit and dont transmit. LS6 LS8 DP [ ]SPD Displays marker depth if the marker type is sinker, brief contact, or ASW fix. Displays marker speed. Accesses the previous valid marker in the database. If the marker is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the next valid marker in the database. If the marker is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177). Accesses the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175). Figure 4-170. Marker Page (LRO)
info line
TIME xx:xx
LS3 LS7 LS4 LS5
and
[ CRS[
9T9 or 9T*9
b c
4-230
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: asw contact FUNCTION: Displays the current ASW contact FTN, identification, position, transmit status, time, range, and bearing. Sets the ASW contact FTN, identification, and transmit status. ACTIVATION: From the Tote page (Figure 4-162). LS KEY LS1 FTN[ DISPLAY CUE ] FUNCTION Displays the current ASW contact FTN. Actuation with a FTN sets the ASW contact FTN. LS2 ID: Displays contact identification: (9PENDING9, 9UNKNOWN9, 9FRIEND9, or 9HOSTILE9). Actuation generates a selection list for setting the ASW contact identification. info line LS3 LS4 LS6 LS5 and [ ] Displays ASW contact position if the ASW contact type is auto fix or manual ASW fix. Displays current ASW contact range if the ASW contact type is auto fix. Else, the display is blank. Displays the current ASW contact transmit status (on =9*9, off = 99). Toggles the contact transmit status between transmit and dont transmit. LS7 BRG Displays the current ASW contact bearing if the ASW contact type is auto fix or auto bearing. Else, the display is blank. Displays the current ASW contact time. Accesses the previous valid ASW contact in the database. If the ASW contact is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the next valid ASW contact in the database. If the ASW contact is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177). Accesses the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175) Figure 4-171. ASW Contact Page
RNG xxx.xx Blank 9T9 or 9T*9
LS8 -
xx:xx TIME
b c
4-231
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: asw contact FUNCTION: Displays the current ASW contact FTN, identification, position, transmit status, time, range, and bearing. Sets the transmit status. ACTIVATION: Generated when a link receive only ASW contact is query/amplified on the tactical plot. LS KEY LS1 LS2 info line LS3 LS4 LS6 LS5 and FTN[ ID: [ ] DISPLAY CUE ] FUNCTION Displays the current ASW contact FTN. Displays contact identification: (9PENDING9, 9UNKNOWN9, 9FRIEND9, or 9HOSTILE9). Displays ASW contact position if the ASW contact type is auto fix or manual ASW fix. Displays current ASW contact range if the ASW contact type is auto fix. Else, the display is blank. Displays the current ASW contact transmit status (on =9*9, off = 99). Toggles the contact transmit status between transmit and dont transmit. LS7 BRG Displays the current ASW contact bearing if the ASW contact type is auto fix or auto bearing. Else, the display is blank. Displays the current ASW contact time. Accesses the previous valid ASW contact in the database. If the ASW contact is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the next valid ASW contact in the database. If the ASW contact is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177). Accesses the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175) Figure 4-172. ASW Contact Page (LRO)
RNG xxx.xx Blank 9T9 or 9T*9
LS8 -
xx:xx TIME
b c
4-232
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: esm contact FUNCTION: Displays the current ESM emitter FTN, identification, position, octal identification (ID) designator, ID confidence, transmit status, category, and azimuth direction of arrival (DOA). Sets the ESM emitter FTN, identification, transmit status, and category. ACTIVATION: From the Tote page (Figure 4-162). LS KEY LS1 FTN[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the current ESM emitter FTN. Actuation with a FTN sets the ESM emitter FTN. LS2 ID: Displays contact identification: (9PENDING9, 9UNKNOWN9, 9FRIEND9, or 9HOSTILE9). Generates a selection list for setting the ESM emitter identification. info line LS3 LS4 LS5 ID# ID CONF 9T9 or 9T*9 Displays ESM emitter position. Displays the current ESM emitter ID designator in octal. Displays the ESM emitter ID confidence. Displays the current ESM emitter transmit status (on =9*9, off = 99). Toggles the ESM emitter transmit status between transmit and dont transmit. LS6 :CAT Displays ESM emitter category. Generates a selection list for the ESM emitter category. LS7 LS8 BRG Blank Figure 4-173. Displays the current ESM emitter azimuth DOA. ESM Contact Page
4-233
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: esm contact FUNCTION: Displays the current ESM emitter FTN, identification, position, octal ID designator, ID confidence, frequency, transmit status, category, time, and azimuth DOA. Sets ESM emitter transmit status. ACTIVATION: From the Tote page (Figure 4-162). LS KEY LS1 LS2 info line LS3 LS4 LS5 ID GHZ 9T9 or 9T*9 FTN[ ID: DISPLAY CUE ] FUNCTION Displays the current ESM emitter FTN. A9D9 9 is diaplayed if the ESM emitter source is data link. Displays contact identification: (9PENDING9, 9UNKNOWN9, 9FRIEND9, or 9HOSTILE9). Displays ESM emitter position. Displays the current ESM emitter confidence in decimal and the current ESM emitter number in octal. Displays the ESM emitter average frequency. Displays the current ESM emitter transmit status (on =9*9, off = 99). Actuation toggles the ESM emitter transmit status between transmit and dont transmit. LS6 LS7 LS8 :CAT BRG xx:xx:xx Displays ESM emitter category. Displays the current ESM emitter azimuth DOA. Displays the ESM emitter time (hours: minutes: seconds). Accesses the previous valid ASW contact in the database. If the ASW contact is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the next valid ASW contact in the database. If the ASW contact is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177). Accesses the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175) Figure 4-174. ESM Contact Page (LRO)
b c
4-234
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: x intel (where x is the FTN) FUNCTION: Sets and displays the current link object intelligence category, general type, mission, current activity, nationality, specific type, and operational status. ACTIVATION: By pressing c from the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163), ASW Contact page (Figure 4-171), or ESM Contact page (Figure 4-173) or bfrom the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177) or Link Object IFF Page (LRO) (Figure 4-178). LS KEY LS1 CAT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the current link object intelligence category. Generates a selection list for setting the link object intelligence category. LS2 : Displays the current link object intelligence general type. Generates a selection list for setting the link object intelligence general type. LS3 : Displays the current link object intelligence mission. Generates a selection list for setting the link object intelligence mission. LS4 ACT: Displays the current link object intelligence current activity. Generates a selection list for setting the link object intelligence current activity. LS5 :NAT Displays the current link object intelligence nationality. Generates a selection list for setting the link object intelligence nationality. LS6 : Displays the current link object intelligence specific type. Generates a selection list for setting the link object intelligence specific type. LS7 : Displays the current link object intelligence operational status. Generates a selection list for setting the link object intelligence operational status. Figure 4-175. Link Object Intelligence Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-235
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS8 Blank
DISPLAY CUE -
FUNCTION
Accesses the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175) for the previous object of the same type, in the database. If the object is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175) for the next object of the same type, in the data base. If the track is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) for the current object. Accesses the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177) for the current object. Figure 4-175. Link Object Intelligence Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
b c
4-236
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: x intel (where x is the FTN) FUNCTION: Displays the current link object intelligence category, general type, specific type, nationality, mission, current activity, and operational status. ACTIVATION: By pressing c from the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) or b from the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177) or Link Object IFF Page (LRO) (Figure 4-178). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 NAT: MSN ACT :OPSTAT Blank CAT TYPE DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the current link object intelligence category. Displays the current link object intelligence general type. Displays the current link object intelligence specific type. Displays the current link object intelligence nationality. Displays the current link object intelligence mission. Displays the current link object intelligence current activity. Displays the current link object intelligence operational status. Accesses the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175) for the previous object of the same type, in the database. If the object is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175) for the next object of the same type, in the data base. If the track is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) for the current object. Accesses the Link Object IFF page (Figure 4-177) for the current object. Figure 4-176. Link Object Intelligence Page (LRO)
b c
4-237
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: x iff (where x is the FTN) FUNCTION: Displays the current link object IFF codes.
ACTIVATION: By pressing c from the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175) or b from the Track Miscellaneous page (Figures 4-165, 4-166, or 4-167), the ASW Contact page (Figure 4-171), or the ESM Contact page (Figure 4-173). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS8 thru MODE1 MODE2 MODE3 MODE4 MODES Blank DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the current link object IFF mode 1 code. Displays the current link object IFF mode 2 code. Displays the current link object IFF mode 3 code. Displays the current link object IFF mode 4 code. Displays the current link object IFF mode S code. Accesses the IFF page for the previous link object of the same type, in the data base. If the object is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the IFF page for the next link object in the data base. If the object is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175) for the current object. Accesses the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) for the current object. Figure 4-177. Link Object IFF Page
b c
4-238
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: track x iff (where x is the FTN) FUNCTION: Displays the current link object IFF codes.
ACTIVATION: By pressing c from the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175) or b from the Track Miscellaneous page (Figures 4-165, 4-166, or 4-167). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS8 thru MODE1 MODE2 MODE3 MODE4 MODES Blank DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the current link object IFF mode 1 code. Displays the current link object IFF mode 2 code. Displays the current link object IFF mode 3 code. Displays the current link object IFF mode 4 code. Displays the current link object IFF mode S code. Accesses the IFF page for the previous link object of the same type, in the data base. If the object is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the IFF page for the next link object in the data base. If the object is not found in the local database, the link receive only database is searched. Accesses the Link Object Intelligence page (Figure 4-175) for the current object. Accesses the Track Summary page (Figure 4-163) for the current object. Figure 4-178. Link Object IFF Page (LRO)
b c
4-239
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: graphics index FUNCTION: Accesses the Vectors and Circles pages.
ACTIVATION: By selecting Graphics from the Tote page (Figure 4-162). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS7 LS8 thru DISPLAY CUE VECTORS CIRCLES Blank RTN Figure 4-179. FUNCTION Accesses the Vector page (Figure 4-180). Accesses the Circle page (Figures 4-183 through 4-185) based on the circle type. Accesses the Tote Index page (Figure 4-162) Graphics Index Page
4-240
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: vector FUNCTION: Sets and displays the vector start point, end point offset bearing, course, end point offset range, and speed. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS1 on the Graphics Index page (Figure 4-179). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and SPT[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the vector start point. Actuation with a position in the scratchpad overwrites the current vector start point with the scratchpad value and calculates the vector end point offset range and bearing. LS2 LS6 LS3 and Blank BRG[ ] If the vector type is not moving, displays the vector end point offset bearing. Actuation with a bearing in the scratchpad sets the vector end point offset bearing. LS4 CRS[ ] Displays the vector course if the vector type is set to moving. Actuation with a course in the scratchpad sets the vector course and update the vector time of effect with the mission system time if the vector type is moving, otherwise the line select key is inoperative. LS7 [ ]RNG If the vector type is not moving, displays the vector end point offset range. Actuation with a range in the scratchpad sets the vector end point offset range. LS8 [ ]SPD Display the vector speed, if the vector type is set to moving. Actuation with a speed in the scratchpad sets the vector speed and update the vector time of effect with the mission system time if the vector type is moving, otherwise the line select key is inoperative. Figure 4-180. Vector (Static/Moving) Page
4-241
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: vector FUNCTION: Displays the FTN (track, ASW contact, ESM contact, PIM, or marker), vector start point offset bearing, vector end point offset bearing, vector start point offset range, and vector end point offset range. Sets vector start point offset bearing, vector end point offset bearing, vector start point offset range, and vector end point offset range. ACTIVATION: Generated when the PDI information entered on the Tote page (Figure 4-162) is a slaved position. LS KEY LS1 LS5 LS2 and REF BRG[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the track FTN, ASW contact FTN, ESM contact FTN, PIM FTN, or marker FTN. Displays the vector start point offset bearing. Actuation with a bearing in the scratchpad sets the vector start point offset bearing. LS3 BRG[ ] Displays the vector end point offset bearing. Actuation with a bearing in the scratchpad sets the vector end point offset bearing. LS4 LS8 LS6 and Blank [ ]RNG Displays the vector start point offset range. Actuation with a range in the scratchpad sets the vector start point offset range. LS7 [ ]RNG Displays the vector end point offset range. Actuation with a range in the scratchpad sets the vector end point offset range. Figure 4-181. Vector (Slaved 1) Page
4-242
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: vector FUNCTION: Sets and displays the vector start point and vector end point offset. Displays vector end point offset bearing and range. ACTIVATION: By vertical scrolling from the Vector (Slaved 1) page (Figure 4-181). LS KEY LS1 LS5 and SPT[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the vector start point. Actuation with a position in the scratchpad overwrites the current vector start point with the scratchpad value and calculates the vector end point offset range and bearing. LS2 LS6 and EPT[ ] Displays the vector end point offset. Actuation with a position in the scratchpad overwrites the current vector end point offset with the scratchpad value and calculates the vector end point offset range and bearing. LS3 LS4 LS8 LS7 and BRG Blank RNG Figure 4-182. Displays the vector end point offset bearing. Displays the vector end point offset range. Vector (Slaved 2) Page
4-243
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: circle FUNCTION: Sets and displays the circle radius, center, course, and speed.
ACTIVATION: Generated when circle is selected from the Graphics Index page (Figure 4-179). LS KEY LS1 RAD[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the circle radius. Actuation with a radius less than 700 nm sets the circle radius. LS2 LS6 and CTR[ ] Displays the current circle center reference of the circle. Actuation with a location in the scratchpad sets circle center. LS3, LS5, and LS7 LS4 Blank CRS[ ] Displays the circle course, if the circle type is set to moving. Actuation with a course sets the circle course if the circle type is set to moving. LS8 [ ]SPD Displays the circle speed, if the circle type is set to moving. Actuation with a course sets the circle velocity speed value, if the circle type is set to moving. Figure 4-183. Circle (Static/Moving) Page
4-244
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: circle FUNCTION: Sets and displays the circle radius, center, course, and speed.
ACTIVATION: By vertical scrolling from the Circle (Static/Moving) page (Figure 4-183). LS KEY LS1 RAD DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the circle radius. Actuation with a radius less than 700 nm sets the circle radius. LS2 LS6 and CTR[ ] Displays the circle center. Actuation with a location in the scratchpad sets the circle center. LS3, LS5, and LS7 LS4 Blank CRS[ ] Displays the circle course. Actuation with a course sets the circle course. LS8 [ ]SPD Displays the circle speed. Actuation with a course sets the circle velocity speed value. Figure 4-184. Circle (Slaved) Page
4-245
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: circle FUNCTION: Sets and displays the circle time, center, and speed.
ACTIVATION: By vertical scrolling from the Circle (Static/Moving) page (Figure 4-183). LS KEY LS1 TIME LATE[ DISPLAY CUE ] FUNCTION Displays the time late. Actuation with a time late value in the scratchpad sets the circle time. LS2 LS6 and CTR[ ] Displays the circle center. Actuation with a location in the scratchpad sets the circle center. LS3 LS5 LS8 LS7 thru and Blank -
]SPD
Displays the circle speed. Actuation with a speed sets the circle speed. Figure 4-185. Circle (Expanding) Page
4-246
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: tac aids FUNCTION: Accesses the Attack page (Figure 4-187), Closest Point of Approach (cpa) page (Figure 4-189), and Intercept page (Figure 4-188). Selects Penguin training mode. ACTIVATION: By selecting TAC AIDS from the mission control page (Figure 4-137). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 ATTACK CPA INTERCEPT 119 TRAIN: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Accesses the Attack page (Figure 4-187). Accesses the Closest Point of Approach (cpa) page (Figure 4-189). Accesses the Intercept page (Figure 4-188). If MCS status missile present is not present and Penguin training mode is off and ASC MCS missile system on status is on, actuation toggles Penguin training mode from off to on, wait 2 seconds and then accesses the Penguin Training page (Figure 4-154). If MCS status missile present is not present and Penguin training mode is on and ASC MCS missile system on status is off, actuation toggles Penguin training mode from on to off. LS7 LS8 Blank RTN Figure 4-186. Accesses the mission control page (Figure 4-137). Tactical Aids Index Page
4-247
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: attack FUNCTION: Displays attack type, FTN associated with the attack target PDI, PDI modifier FTN, and attack active status. Sets the attack type, attack target PDI, attack active status, and the PDI modifier FTN for laser designator. Accesses the Weapon Summary page. ACTIVATION: By selecting when ATTACK is selected from the Tactical Aids Index page (Figure 4-186). LS KEY LS1 : DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays attack selection (MK46, AGM114, or AGM119). Toggles attack selection between MK46, AGM114, and AGM119. LS2 TGT [ ] Displays the FTN associated with the attack target PDI. Actuation with an FTN in the scratchpad sets the attack target PDI. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad clears the attack target PDI and sets the attack type to none. LS3 LS4 LS5 and Blank Displays attack active status (9ON9 or 9OFF9). Actuation toggles the attack type between none and the attack selection specified by LS1. LS6 [ ]RMT For an attack type of AGM-114, displays the PDI modifier FTN for laser designator. For an attack type of AGM-114, actuation with a track FTN in the scratchpad sets the PDI modifier FTN for laser designator. Actuation with a 9-9 in the scratchpad clears the RMT field and sets the PDI modifier FTN for laser designator to null. LS7 LS8 WPN RTN Figure 4-187. Accesses the Weapon Summary page (Figure 4-138). Accesses the Tactical Aids Index page (Figure 4-186). Attack Page (MK46, AGM114, or AGM119)
4-248
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: intercept FUNCTION: Displays FTN, heading, bearing, and range for intercept tracks 1 and 2. Displays intercept speed selection and intercept track 1 speed. Sets FTN for intercept tracks 1 and 2. ACTIVATION: By selecting intercept from the Tactical Aids Index page (Figure 4-186). LS KEY LS1 TRK2[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the intercept track 2 FTN. Actuation with a PDI FTN in the scratchpad sets intercept track 2. Intercept mode is activated and CPA is deactivated. If intercept track 1 has not been entered, intercept track 1 is set to 9Own Helo PU9. LS2 TRK1[ ] Displays intercept track 1 FTN. Selection with a PDI FTN in the scratchpad sets intercept track 1. LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 HDG1 INT TIME / / [ ] Displays intercept track 1 heading. Display the intercept time in hours, minutes, and seconds. Displays the intercept track 2 bearing and intercept track 2 range in true degrees and nautical miles. Displays the intercept track 1 bearing and intercept track 1 range in true degrees and nautical miles. Displays intercept speed selection (9SYS9 or 9MAN9), and intercept track 1 speed. Returns to the Tactical Aids Index page (Figure 4-186).
RTN
Figure 4-188.
Intercept Page
4-249
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: cpa FUNCTION: Displays FTN, bearing, and range for CPA tracks 1 and 2. Sets FTN for CPA tracks 1 and 2. Displays CPA time. ACTIVATION: By selecting CPA from the Tactical Aids Index page (Figure 4-186). LS KEY LS1 TRK2[ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays CPA track 2 FTN. Actuation with a PDI FTN in the scratchpad sets the CPA track 2. CPA mode is activated and Intercept is deactivated. LS2 TRK1[ ] Displays CPA track 1 FTN. Selection with a PDI FTN in the scratchpad sets CPA track 1. LS3 LS7 LS4 LS5 and Blank CPA TIME / Displays the CPA time when the CPA NOW is inactive. Displays the CPA track 2 bearing and CPA track 2 range in true degrees and nautical miles if CPA NOW is active. Displays the CPA track 1 bearing and CPA track 1 range in true degrees and nautical miles if CPA NOW is active. Returns to the Tactical Aids Index page (Figure 4-186).
LS6
LS8
RTN
Figure 4-189.
CPA Page
4-250
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: radar ctrl FUNCTION: Displays current radar control gain, CFAR value, STC, mode, noise value, antenna tilt, and antenna sector width. Sets radar control gain, CFAR value, STC, noise value, antenna tilt, and antenna sector width. ACTIVATION: By selecting radar from the Mission Control page (Figure 4-137). LS KEY LS1 GAIN [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays current radar control gain. Actuation with an empty scratchpad enables the and keys to increase or decrease the radar control gain through the range of 0 to 31. Else, actuation with a integer value between 0 and 31 in the scratchpad sets radar control gain. LS2 CFAR [ ] Displays current radar control CFAR value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad enables the and keys to increase or decrease the radar control CFAR value through the range of 0 to 255. Else, actuation with a integer value between 0 and 255 in the scratchpad sets the radar control CFAR value. LS3 STC [ ] Displays current radar control STC. Actuation with an empty scratchpad enables the and keys to increase or decrease the radar control STC through the range of 0 to 7. Else, actuation with a integer value between 0 and 7 in the scratchpad sets the radar control STC. LS4 MODE: Displays the current radar control mode. Accesses the Radar Mode page (Figure 4-191). LS5 [ ] NOISE Displays current radar control noise value. Actuation with an empty scratchpad enables the and keys to increase or decrease the radar control noise value through the range of 0 to 255. Else, actuation with a integer value between 0 and 255 in the scratchpad set the radar control noise value. Figure 4-190. Radar Control Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-251
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS6 [ ] TILT
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Displays current radar control antenna tilt. Actuation with an empty scratchpad enables the and keys to increase or decrease the radar control antenna tilt through the range of -15.0 to 15.0. Else, actuation with a value between -15.0 and 15.0 in the scratchpad sets radar control antenna tilt with a resolution of 0.1.
LS7
] SCTR WD
Displays current radar control antenna sector width. Actuation with an empty scratchpad enables the and keys to increase or decrease the radar control antenna sector width through the range of 60 to 300. Else, actuation with a integer value between 60 and 300 in the scratchpad sets the radar control antenna sector width.
LS8
RTN Figure 4-190.
Accesses the Mission Control page (Figure 4-137). Radar Control Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-252
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: radar mode FUNCTION: Sets radar control mode and antenna rotation.
ACTIVATION: By selecting Mode from the Radar Control page (Figure 4-190). LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE STANDBY FUNCTION Sets radar control mode to 9STANDBY9 and if radar control antenna rotation rate is 9FAST SWP9, sets radar control antenna rotation rate to 9SLOW9. Returns to the Radar Control page (Figure 4-190). Sets radar control mode to 9SEARCH9 and if radar control antenna rotation rate is 9FAST SWP9, sets radar control antenna rotation rate to 9SLOW9. Returns to the Radar Control page (Figure 4-190). Displays the status of radar control antenna scan type. Toggles the radar control antenna rotation between 9SECTOR9 and 9CONT9 (slow). LS4, LS7, and LS8 LS5 Blank WEATHER Set radar control mode to 9WEATHER9 and if radar control antenna rotation rate is 9FAST SWP9 and sets radar control antenna rotation rate to 9SLOW9. Returns to the Radar Control page (Figure 4-190). Sets radar control mode to 9FAST SWEEP9, sets radar control antenna rotation rate to 9FAST9, and returns to the Radar Control page (Figure 4-190). Figure 4-191. Radar Mode Page
LS2
SEARCH
LS3
SCAN:
LS6
FAST SWEEP
4-253
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: flir ctrl FUNCTION: Sets and displays the FLIR azimuth, gain, level, focus, and elevation.
ACTIVATION: By selecting FLIR from the Mission Control page (Figure 4-137). LS KEY LS1 AZ [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the FLIR slave position azimuth. Actuation with a azimuth in the range of -180.0 to +179.9 in the scratchpad sets the FLIR slave position azimuth. LS2 GAIN [ ] Displays the FLIR gain if the FLIR display processing mode is manual. Actuation with an empty scratchpad (i.e. no data, though a scratchpad alert may be present), sets the CDU scratchpad alert to 9 FLIR GAIN9. With 9 FLIR GAIN9 in the scratchpad, actuation of the or key increments/decrements FLIR gain by 1 within the range of 0 to 255. LS3 LVL [ ] Displays the FLIR level if the FLIR display processing mode is manual. Actuation with an empty scratchpad (i.e. no data, though a scratchpad alert may be present), sets the CDU scratchpad alert to 9 FLIR LEVEL9. With 9 FLIR LEVEL9 in the scratchpad, actuation of the or key increments/decrements FLIR level by 1 within the range of 0 to 255. Figure 4-192. FLIR Control Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-254
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 FOCUS[ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION With FLIR field of view (FOV) set to MEDIUM or NARROW, displays the FLIR focus value and 9M9 or 9N9 for medium or narrow FOV. With FOV set to WIDE, 9FOCUS [----] W9 is displayed. With FLIR mode set to stow, 9FOCUS [----] -9 is displayed. Actuation with an empty scratchpad (i.e. no data, though a scratchpad alert may be present) and FOV set to MEDIUM or NARROW, sets the CDU scratchpad alert to 9 FLIR FOCUS9. With 9 FLIR FOCUS9 in the scratchpad, actuation of the or key increments/ decrements FLIR focus by 5 and actuation of b or c key increments/decrements FLIR focus by 50 within the ranges of 2025 to 3000 for medium FOV and 3025 to 4000 for narrow FOV. Actuation with FOV set to MEDIUM or NARROW and a valid integer in the scratchpad (2025 to 3000 for medium FOV and 3025 to 4000 for narrow FOV), sets the FLIR focus to that value.
LS5
]EL
Displays the FLIR slave position elevation. Actuation with a valid elevation value (-105 to 60 for wide FOV, -105 to 30 for medium FOV, and -105 to 25 for narrow FOV) in the scratchpad, and sets the FLIR slave position elevation.
LS6 LS7 LS8
and
Blank RTN Figure 4-192.
Accesses the Mission Control page (Figure 4-137). FLIR Control Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-255
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: link setup FUNCTION: Sets the ADLP mode, auto correlation distance, auto squawk maximum, and the last two octal digits for OWNPU. Accesses the Link Parameters page (Figure 4-194), Link Reception Quality page (Figure 4-199), Filter Settings page (Figure 4-195), and Gridlock page (Figure 4-198). ACTIVATION: By selecting Link from the Mission Control page (Figure 4-137). LS KEY LS1 MODE: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the current ADLP mode. Generates a selection page to set the ADLP mode. title line In addition to the page title, the ADLP mode state transition status is displayed. When an ADLP mode has been commanded, but has not yet begun transitioning to the mode, the text 9CMND9 is displayed. When the ADLP mode is in the process of transitioning modes, the text 9IPRG9 is displayed. When the ADLP Mode has finished transitioning to the modes, the sub-mode text is blanked, with the following exceptions. When the ADLP mode is disabled but loop test is in progress, the text 9LOOP9 is displayed below the mode. When mode is silence, and burst transmission has been commanded, the text 9XCMD9 is displayed below the mode. When mode is silence and transmit is in progress, the text 9XMIT9 is displayed below the mode. OWNPU[ ] Actuation with a value between 18 and 768 in the scratchpad, sets the last two octal digits for OWNPU. If the ADLP mode is net test, the bit error rate is displayed. If ADLP network communications is established, 9net comm established9 is displayed. CORR[ ]DM Displays the current ADLP auto correlation distance. Actuation with a value between 1 and 256 data miles in the scratchpad sets the ADLP auto correlation distance. LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7 LS8 SQUAWK[ PARAM FILTERS GRIDLOCK RTN ]% Actuation with a value between 1 and 100 in the scratchpad sets the ADLP auto squawk maximum. Accesses the Link Parameters (PARAM) page (Figure 4-194). Accesses the Filter Settings page (Figure 4-195). Accesses the Gridlock page (Figure 4-198). Accesses the Mission Start page (Figure 4-125). Accesses the Link Reception Quality page (Figure 4-199). Figure 4-193. Link Setup Page
LS2 info line
LS3
4-256
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: link parameters FUNCTION: Sets and displays DTS error correction, waveform, and diversity.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS5 on the Link Setup page (Figure 4-193). LS KEY LS1 EDAC: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the DTS error correction 9DETECT9 or 9CORRECT9. Toggles DTS error correction between 9DETECT9 and 9CORRECT9. LS2 WAVEFORM : Displays DTS waveform CLEW2250, CLEW1364/18, CLEW1364/9, or SLEW (single-tone Link 11 waveform sometimes referred to as LESW (Link 11 single-tone waveform)). Toggles the DTS waveform between CLEW (conventional Link 11 waveform) 2250 bps, CLEW 1364/18, CLEW1364/9 and LESW (Link 11 single-tone waveform). Waveform change is only allowed when the ADLP mode is DISABLED. LS3 TONE: Displays DTS diversity 9AVG9 (linear combining) or 9SELECT9 (selective combining). Toggles DTS diversity between 9AVG9 and 9SELECT9. LS4 LS7 LS8 thru Blank RTN Figure 4-194. Accesses the Link Setup page (Figure 4-193). Link Parameters Page
4-257
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: filter settings FUNCTION: Displays and sets the ADLP range filter value. Accesses the Sector Filter page (Figure 4-196) and Geographic Filter page (Figure 4-197). ACTIVATION: By pressing LS6 on the Link Setup page (Figure 4-193). LS KEY LS1, LS5 thru LS7 LS2 Blank RNG[ ] DISPLAY CUE Displays the ADLP range filter value. Actuation with a range in nautical miles from 1 to 256 sets the ADLP range filter value if ADLP range filter control is off. Actuation with a blank scratchpad toggles the ADLP range filter control between on and off. LS3 LS4 LS8 SECTOR GEOGRAPHIC RTN Figure 4-195. Accesses the Sector Filter page (Figure 4-196). Accesses the Geographic Filter page (Figure 4-197). Accesses the Link Setup page (Figure 4-193). Filter Settings Page FUNCTION
4-258
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: sector filter FUNCTION: Sets and displays current ADLP sector filter start point, filter bearing, and bearing delta.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS3 from the Filter Settings page (Figure 4-195). LS KEY LS1 LS5 LS2 LS6 and and Blank SPT[ ] DISPLAY CUE Displays the current ADLP sector filter start point. Actuation with a location or a position display item sets the ADLP sector filter start point if ADLP sector filter control is off. LS3 BRG[ ] Displays the ADLP sector filter bearing. Actuation with an angle in degrees from 001 to 359 sets the ADLP sector filter bearing if ADLP sector filter control is off. LS4 LS7 : [ ]DELTA Actuation toggles the ADLP sector filter control between on and off. Displays the ADLP sector bearing delta. Actuation with an angle in degrees from 001 to 179 sets the ADLP sector bearing delta if ADLP sector filter control is off. LS8 RTN Figure 4-196. Accesses the Filter Settings page (Figure 4-195). Sector Filter Page FUNCTION
4-259
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: geographic filter FUNCTION: Sets and displays ADLP geographic filter upper left and lower right positions.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS4 from the Filter Settings page (Figure 4-195). LS KEY LS1, LS4 and LS5 LS2 LS6 and Blank [ ] DISPLAY CUE Displays the current ADLP geographic filter upper left position. Actuation with ADLP geographic filter control off and with a position in the scratchpad sets the ADLP geographic filter upper left position. LS3 LS7 and [ ] Displays the current ADLP geographic filter lower right position. Actuation with ADLP geographic filter control off and with a position in the scratchpad sets the ADLP geographic filter lower right position. LS4 LS8 : RTN Figure 4-197. Actuation toggles the ADLP geographic filter control between on and off. Accesses the Filter Settings page (Figure 4-195). Geographic Filter Page FUNCTION
4-260
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: gridlock FUNCTION: Displays the current ADLP gridlock local track, gridlock correction, gridlock remote track. Calculates the ADLP gridlock correction command. Sets the ADLP gridlock correction command to (N0, E0). ACTIVATION: By pressing LS7 on the Link Setup page (Figure 4-193). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7 ACCEPT RMT Blank CANCEL LCL ACTIVE XXXX YD DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the current ADLP gridlock local track. Displays the ADLP gridlock correction. Displays the ADLP gridlock error. Calculates the ADLP gridlock correction command. Displays the current ADLP gridlock remote track. If the ADLP gridlock error is invalid, actuation sets the ADLP gridlock correction command to (N0, E0). Else, actuation sets the ADLP gridlock error, ADLP gridlock local track, and ADLP gridlock remote track invalid. Accesses the Link Setup page (Figure 4-193). Figure 4-198. PAGE TITLE: link quality FUNCTION: Displays the track reception quality of own PU and the track PU reception quality (reported/calculated) of the PUs listed. ACTIVATION: By pressing or from the Link Setup page (Figure 4-193). LS KEY LS1 through LS8 b c Figure 4-199. DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the track reception quality of own PU and the track PU reception quality (reported/calculated) of the PUs listed. Displays the previous block of 8 PUs if it exists. Displays the next block of 8 PUs if it exists. Accesses the Link Setup page (Figure 4-193). Link Reception Quality Page Gridlock Page
LS8
RTN
4-261
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: link message FUNCTION: Displays the ADLP receive message type and position.
ACTIVATION: By selecting Link MSG from the Mission Control page (Figure 4-137) or by scrolling up or down from another Link Message page. LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3, LS5 thru LS7 LS4 Blank ACCEPT DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the ADLP receive message type. Displays ADLP receive message position. Generates an ADLP DLRP accept command for the ADLP receive message position, and deletes the message from the receive message queue. Deletes the message from the receive message queue. Searches one up through the receive message stack. If the first message is being displayed, the MP searches for the last message in the stack. Search one down through the receive message stack. If the last message is being displayed, the MP searches for the first message in the stack. Figure 4-200. Link Message Page (Update DLRP)
LS8 -
REJECT
4-262
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: link message FUNCTION: command. Displays the ADLP receive message type and track number. Generates an ADLP decorrelation
ACTIVATION: By scrolling up or down from the Update DLRP Link Message page (Figure 4-200). LS KEY LS1 LS2, LS6, LS7 LS3 LS4, and DISPLAY CUE TN CONFLICT Blank FUNCTION Displays the ADLP receive message type. -
DECORR
Generates an ADLP decorrelation command for the ADLP receive message track number, and deletes the message from the receive message queue. Displays the ADLP receive message track number. Deletes the message from the receive message queue. Searches one up through the receive message stack. If the first message is being displayed, the MP searches for the last message in the stack. Search one down through the receive message stack. If the last message is being displayed, the MP searches for the first message in the stack. Figure 4-201. Link Message Page (TN Conflict)
LS5 LS8 -
xxxxx REJECT
4-263
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: link message FUNCTION: Displays the ADLP receive message type and track number. Generates an ADLP decorrelation command for the ADLP receive message track number. ACTIVATION: By scrolling up or down from the Update DLRP Link Message page (Figure 4-200). LS KEY LS1 LS2, LS6, LS7 LS3 LS4, and DISPLAY CUE POS CONFLICT Blank FUNCTION Display the ADLP receive message type. -
DECORR
Generates an ADLP decorrelation command for the ADLP receive message track number and deletes the message from the receive message queue. Displays the ADLP receive message track number.
LS5 LS8 REJECT
Deletes the message from the receive message queue. Searches one up through the receive message stack. If the first message is being displayed, the MP searches for the last message in the stack. Search one down through the receive message stack. If the last message is being displayed, the MP searches for the first message in the stack.
Figure 4-202.
Link Message Page (Position Conflict)
4-264
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: link message FUNCTION: Displays the ADLP receive message type, track identification, track number, track category, remote amplification and secondary amplification. Updates the category, identification, amplification, and secondary amplification track values and deletes the message from the receive message queue. ACTIVATION: By scrolling up or down from the Update DLRP Link Message page (Figure 4-200). LS KEY LS1 LS2 info line LS3 LS7 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS8 and DISPLAY CUE CHANGE DATA ID AMP Blank ACCEPT CAT REJECT FUNCTION Displays the ADLP receive message type. Displays track identification. Displays the ADLP receive message remote amplification and secondary amplification. Removes the message from the receive message queue. Displays the ADLP receive message track number. Displays the track category. Deletes the message from the receive message queue. Searches one up through the receive message stack. If the first message is being displayed, the MP searches for the last message in the stack. Search one down through the receive message stack. If the last message is being displayed, the MP searches for the first message in the stack. Figure 4-203. Link Message Page (Change Data Order)
4-265
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: link message FUNCTION: Displays the ADLP receive message type, track identification, track number, track category, remote amplification and secondary amplification. Generates an ADLP decorrelation command or a change data order command for the ADLP receive message track number and deletes the message from the receive message queue. ACTIVATION: By scrolling up or down from the Update DLRP Link Message page (Figure 4-200). LS KEY LS1 LS2 info line LS3 DISPLAY CUE DIFFERENCE ID= AMP= DECORR FUNCTION Displays the ADLP receive message type. Displays track identification. Displays the ADLP receive message remote amplification and secondary amplification. If the ADLP information difference message requires an operator response, actuation generates an ADLP decorrelation command for the ADLP receive message track number and deletes the message from the receive message queue. If the ADLP information difference message requires an operator response, actuation updates the category, track identification, amplification, and secondary amplification track values and deletes the message from the receive message queue. Displays the ADLP receive message track number. Displays the track category. Generates an ADLP change data order command for the ADLP receive message track number and deletes the message from the receive message queue. Deletes the message from the receive message queue. Searches one up through the receive message stack. If the first message is being displayed, the MP searches for the last message in the stack. Search one down through the receive message stack. If the last message is being displayed, the MP searches for the first message in the stack. Link Message Page (Information Difference Report)
LS4
ACCEPT
LS5 LS6 LS7
=CAT CHANGE ORDER
LS8 -
REJECT
Figure 4-204.
4-266
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: link message FUNCTION: Displays the ADLP receive message type and track number. Generates ADLP command message HAVCO, WILCO, and CANTCO responses for the associated ADLP receive message type. ACTIVATION: By scrolling up or down from the Update DLRP Link Message page (Figure 4-200). LS KEY LS1 LS2, LS6, and LS7 LS3 ENGAGE Blank HAVCO DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the ADLP receive message type. Generates an ADLP command message HAVCO (have complied) response for the associated ADLP receive message type. Generates an ADLP command message WILCO (will comply) response for the associated ADLP receive message type. Displays the ADLP receive message track number. Generates an ADLP command message CANTCO (cannot comply) response for the associated ADLP receive message type. Searches one up through the receive message stack. If the first message is being displayed, the MP searches for the last message in the stack. Search one down through the receive message stack. If the last message is being displayed, the MP searches for the first message in the stack. Figure 4-205. Link Message Page (Command Message)
LS4
WILCO
LS5 LS8
CANTCO
4-267
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: link message FUNCTION: Displays the ADLP receive message type and track number. Sets W/ES status to 9EFFECTIVE9, 9PARTIAL9 (partially effective), 9HEADS UP9, or 9INEFFECTIVE9. ACTIVATION: By scrolling up or down from the Update DLRP Link Message page (Figure 4-200). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS6 LS3 and DISPLAY CUE BATTLE DAMAGE Blank EFFECTIVE FUNCTION Displays the ADLP receive message type. Sets ADLP own helo W/ES to effective and the ADLP own helo W/ES target to ADLP receive message track number. Sets ADLP own helo W/ES to partially effective and the ADLP own helo W/ES target to ADLP receive message track number. Displays the ADLP receive message track number. HEADS UP Sets ADLP own helo W/ES to heads up and the ADLP own helo W/ES target to ADLP receive message track number. Sets ADLP own helo W/ES to not effective and the ADLP own helo W/ES target to ADLP receive message track number. Searches one up through the receive message stack. If the first message is being displayed, the MP searches for the last message in the stack. Search one down through the receive message stack. If the last message is being displayed, the MP searches for the first message in the stack. Figure 4-206. Link Message Page (Battle Damage Report)
LS4
PARTIAL
LS5 LS7
LS8
INEFFECTIVE
4-268
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: link message FUNCTION: Displays the ADLP receive message type, ADLP own helo W/ES, and track number. Breaks engagement and removes the message from the queue. ACTIVATION: By scrolling up or down from the Update DLRP Link Message page (Figure 4-200). LS KEY LS1 LS2 LS3, LS6, LS7 LS5 LS8 LS4, and Blank W/ES DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the ADLP receive message type. Displays the ADLP Own Helo W/ES. -
BREAK
Displays the track number associated with the weapon/engagement status. If an engagement is active, actuation issues an ADLP break engagement command and removes the message from the queue. Searches one up through the receive message stack. If the first message is being displayed, the MP searches for the last message in the stack. Search one down through the receive message stack. If the last message is being displayed, the MP searches for the first message in the stack. Link Message Page (Weapon/Engagement Status)
Figure 4-207.
4-269
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: link message FUNCTION: Displays the ADLP receive message type and track number. Deletes the message.
ACTIVATION: By scrolling up or down from the Update DLRP Link Message page (Figure 4-200). LS KEY LS1 LS2, LS6 LS8 LS4 LS5 LS3, thru DISPLAY CUE HELO CONTROL Blank FUNCTION Displays the ADLP receive message type. -
ACCEPT
Deletes the message. Displays the ADLP receive message track number. Searches one up through the receive message stack. If the first message is being displayed, the MP searches for the last message in the stack. Search one down through the receive message stack. If the last message is being displayed, the MP searches for the first message in the stack. Link Message Page (Own Helo Controlling Unit Report)
Figure 4-208.
4-270
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: msn status 1/3 FUNCTION: Displays overall status of the listed mission system devices.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS7 on the System Status page (Figure 4-100). LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE xxx DLDR FUNCTION Displays the DLDR (data loader) overall status. Accesses the Mission Data Loader Status page (Figure 4-210). LS2 xxx P-MP Displays the Pilot MP overall status. Accesses the Pilot Mission Processor Status page (Figure 4-211). LS3 xxx C-MP Displays the Copilot MP overall status. Accesses the Copilot Mission Processor Status page (Figure 4-212). LS4 xxx T-MP Displays the TSO MP overall status. Accesses the TSO Mission Processor Status page (Figure 4-213). LS5 LS6 LS7 and Blank DBASE SYNC If a Dbase Sync condition exists, the 9DBASE SYNC9 label is displayed and actuation sets the MP TDB manual cross load command. Accesses the System Status page (Figure 4-100). Figure 4-209. Mission Status 1 Page
LS8
RTN
4-271
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: msn dldr status FUNCTION: Displays the DLDR alert state, software version number, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the DLDR alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS1 on the Mission Status 1 page (Figure 4-209). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the DLDR alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the DLDR alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2 info line LS3 LS4, LS6, and LS7 LS5 VSN BUS CBIT Blank FAILS RTN Figure 4-210. Displays the software version number. Displays the DLDR bus status (9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGOB9, or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0. LS8 Accesses the Mission Status 1 page (Figure 4-209). Mission Data Loader Status Page
4-272
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: p-mp status FUNCTION: Displays the Pilot MP alert state, bus status, CBIT, mode, and number of failures. Toggles the Pilot MP alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS2 on the Mission Status 1 page (Figure 4-209). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the pilot MP alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the pilot MP alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2, LS6, and LS7 info line LS3 LS4 LS5 Blank BUS CBIT MODE FAILS RTN Figure 4-211. Displays the pilot MP bus status (9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays 9BC MODE9 if the BC MP is set to pilot, otherwise it is set to 9RT MODE9. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0. LS8 Accesses the Mission Status 1 page (Figure 4-209). Pilot Mission Processor Status Page
4-273
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: c-mp status FUNCTION: Displays the copilot MP alert state, bus status, CBIT, mode, and number of failures. Toggles the copilot MP alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS3 on the Mission Status 1 page (Figure 4-209). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the copilot MP alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the copilot MP alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2, LS6, and LS7 info line LS3 LS4 LS5 Blank BUS CBIT MODE FAILS RTN Figure 4-212. Displays the copilot MP bus status (9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays 9BC MODE9 if the BC MP is set to copilot, otherwise it is set to 9RT MODE9. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0. LS8 Accesses the Mission Status 1 page (Figure 4-209). Copilot Mission Processor Status Page
4-274
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: t-mp status FUNCTION: Displays the TSO MP alert state, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the TSO MP alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS4 on the Mission Status 1 page (Figure 4-209). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the TSO MP alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the TSO MP alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2, LS6, LS7 LS4, and Blank -
info line LS3 LS5
BUS CBIT FAILS RTN Figure 4-213.
Displays the TSO MP bus status (9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS8
Accesses the Mission Status 1 page (Figure 4-209). TSO Mission Processor Status Page
4-275
ORIGINAL
ACTIVATION: By pressing on the Mission Status 1 page (Figure 4-209). LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE xxx SONAR xxx ESM xxx RADAR xxx FLIR FUNCTION Displays the sonar overall status. Accesses the Sonar Status page (Figure 4-215). LS2 Displays the ESM overall status. Accesses the ESM Status page (Figure 4-216). LS3 Displays the radar overall status. Accesses the Radar Status page (Figure 4-217). LS4 Displays the FLIR overall status. Accesses the FLIR Status page (Figure 4-218). LS5 LS6 Blank DLP xxx DTS xxx RTN Figure 4-214. Displays the DLP overall status. Accesses the DLP Status page (Figure 4-219). LS7 Displays the DTS overall status. Accesses the DTS Status page (Figure 4-220). LS8 Accesses the System Status page (Figure 4-100). Mission Status 2 Page
4-276
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: sonar status FUNCTION: Displays the sonar alert state, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the sonar alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS1 on the Mission Status 2 page (Figure 4-214). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the sonar alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the sonar alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2, LS6, LS7 LS4, and Blank -
info line LS3 LS5
Displays the sonar bus status (9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGOB9, or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS8
Accesses the Mission Status 2/3 page (Figure 4-214). Sonar Status Page
4-277
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: esm status FUNCTION: Displays the ESM alert state, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the ESM alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS2 on the Mission Status 2 page (Figure 4-214). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the ESM alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the ESM alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2, LS6, LS7 LS4, and Blank -
info line LS3 LS5
Displays the ESM bus status (9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGOB9, or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS8
Accesses the Mission Status 2/3 page (Figure 4-214). ESM Status Page
4-278
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: radar status FUNCTION: Displays the radar alert state, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the radar alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS3 on the Mission Status 2 page (Figure 4-214). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the radar alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the radar alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2, LS6, LS7 LS4, and Blank -
info line LS3 LS5
Displays the ESM bus status (9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGOB9, or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS8
Accesses the Mission Status 2/3 page (Figure 4-214). Radar Status Page
4-279
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: flir status FUNCTION: Displays the FLIR alert state, software version number, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the FLIR alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS4 on the Mission Status 2 page (Figure 4-214). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the FLIR alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the FLIR alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2 info line LS3 LS4, LS6, and LS7 LS5 VSN NBUS CBIT Blank FAILS RTN Figure 4-218. WBUS Displays the software version number. Displays the FLIR1 bus status and FLIR2 bus status (9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0. LS8 Accesses the Mission Status 2/3 page (Figure 4-214). FLIR Status Page
4-280
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: dlp status x (where x is the ADLP overall status (GO / NGO) FUNCTION: Displays the DLP alert state, software version, bus status, CBIT, and failure count.. Toggles the DLP alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS6 on the Mission Status 2 page (Figure 4-214). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the DLP alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the DLP alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2 VSN Displays the ADLP operational flight program (OFP) computer software configuration item (CSCI), release letter, and version. Version 909 is displayed as blank. Displays the DLP bus status (9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGOB9, or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0. LS8 RTN Figure 4-219. Accesses the Mission Status 2/3 page (Figure 4-214). DLP Status Page
info line LS3 LS4, LS6, and LS7 LS5
BUS CBIT Blank FAILS
4-281
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: dts status FUNCTION: Displays the DTS alert state, bus status, CBIT, DTS fault code, and number of failures. Toggles the DTS alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS7 on the Mission Status 2 page (Figure 4-214). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the DTS alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the DTS alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2, LS6, and LS7 info line LS3 LS4 LS5 Blank BUS CBIT FLT CODE FAILS RTN Figure 4-220. Displays the DTS bus status (9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGOB9, or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the three digit DTS fault code. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0. LS8 Accesses the Mission Status 2/3 page (Figure 4-214). DTS Status Page
4-282
ORIGINAL
ACTIVATION: By pressing on the Mission Status 2 page (Figure 4-214). LS KEY LS1 DISPLAY CUE xxx CMDS xxx MCS xxx M299 FUNCTION Displays the CMDS overall status. Accesses the CMDS Status page (Figure 4-222). LS2 Displays the MCS overall status. Accesses the MCS Status page (Figure 4-223). LS3 Displays the M299 Hellfire overall status. Accesses the M299 Hellfire Status page (Figure 4-157). LS4 xxx ASC Displays the ASC overall status. Accesses the ASC Status page (Figure 4-224). LS5 LS7 LS8 thru Blank RTN Figure 4-221. Accesses the System Status page (Figure 4-100). Mission Status 3 Page
4-283
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: cmds status FUNCTION: Displays the countermeasures dispensing system (CMDS) alert state, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the CMDS alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS1 on the Mission Status 3 page (Figure 4-221). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the CMDS alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the CMDS alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2, LS6, LS7 LS4, and Blank -
info line LS3 LS5
Displays the CMDS bus status (9GO9 or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0.
LS8
Accesses the Mission Status 3 page (Figure 4-221). CMDS Status Page
4-284
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: mcs status FUNCTION: Displays the MCS alert state, software version number, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the MCS alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS2 on the Mission Status 3 page (Figure 4-221). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the MCS alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the MCS alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2 info line LS3 LS4, LS6, and LS7 LS5 VSN BUS CBIT Blank FAILS RTN Figure 4-223. Displays the software version number. Displays the MCS bus status (9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGOB9, or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0. LS8 Accesses the Mission Status 3 page (Figure 4-221). MCS Status Page
4-285
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: asc status FUNCTION: Displays the ASC alert state, software version number, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the ASC alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS4 on the Mission Status 3 page (Figure 4-221). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the ASC alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the ASC alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2 info line LS3 LS4, LS6, and LS7 LS5 VSN BUS CBIT Blank FAILS RTN Figure 4-224. Displays the software version number. Displays the ASC bus status (9GO9, 9NGO-A9, 9NGOB9, or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0. LS8 Accesses the Mission Status 3 page (Figure 4-221). ASC Status Page
4-286
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: m299 status FUNCTION: Displays the M299 Hellfire alert state, software version number, bus status, CBIT, and number of failures. Toggles the M299 Hellfire alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. Resets the failure count to 0. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS3 on the Mission Status 3 page (Figure 4-221). LS KEY LS1 ALERT: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the M299 Hellfire alert state (9OFF9 or 9ON9). Toggles the M299 Hellfire alert state between 9OFF9 and 9ON9. LS2 info line LS3 LS4, LS6, and LS7 LS5 VSN BUS CBIT Blank FAILS RTN Figure 4-225. Displays the software version number. Displays the M299 Hellfire bus status (9GO9, 9NGOA9, 9NGO-B9, or 9NGO-T9). Displays a sixteen bit data word which indicates the results of the CBIT. Displays the failure count. Resets the failure count to 0. LS8 Accesses the Mission Status 3 page (Figure 4-221). M299 Hellfire Status Page
4-287
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: model aircraft FUNCTION: Generates a simulated navigation solution based on entered airspeed, wind, initial heading, and altitude. Used for testing, troubleshooting, and training. ACTIVATION: From the Index 2 page (Figure 4-3). LS KEY LS1 MODE: DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Toggles the mode of operation between 9RUNNING9 and 9STOPPED9 if the helicopter is on the ground. When toggled to 9RUNNING9, the speed will remain constant, but heading and altitude will automatically be adjusted along the horizontal and vertical execution of the flight plan. ] Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the model aircraft heading in degrees whether 9STOPPED9 or 9RUNNING9. The heading will be dynamic and follow along flight plan execution. The default heading is 360 degrees. Actuation with a blank scratchpad toggles the heading between 9STR9 (steer) and 9HLD9 (hold). When toggled to 9HLD9 mode the heading will be maintained and the displayed heading will not follow horizontal flight plan execution. When toggled to 9STR9 mode the heading will follow horizontal flight plan execution. Actuation with 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the heading to its default value. LS3 TAS[ ] Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the model aircraft TAS in knots. The default is 360 knots. Actuation with 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the TAS to the default value. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the TAS into the scratchpad. Figure 4-226. Model Aircraft Page (Sheet 1 of 2)
LS2
:HDG [
4-288
ORIGINAL
LS KEY LS4 WIND [ ]
DISPLAY CUE
FUNCTION Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the model aircraft wind in the form: direction/magnitude. The default direction is 360 and default magnitude is 0. Actuation with 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the model wind to the default value. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the wind into the scratchpad.
LS5, LS6, and LS8 LS7
Blank ALT[ ]ft
Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the model aircraft pressure altitude in feet. The model assumes a baroset of 29.92 inches for the determination of barometric and pressure altitude. The default altitude is 10000 feet. Actuation with 9-9 in the scratchpad sets the altitude to the default value. Actuation with a blank scratchpad copies the altitude into the scratchpad. Figure 4-226. Model Aircraft Page (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-289
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: bc cdu FUNCTION: Enters data into the selected memory addresses.
ACTIVATION: From the Index 2 page (Figure 4-3). LS KEY LS1, LS2, and LS3 DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters a memory address. Two modes of entry are possible: linear or step. The entry mode depends on the state of the toggle adjacent to LS4. In linear mode, addresses are displayed and entered in the format: AAAAAAAA, where A represents the hexadecimal digits for the address. In step mode, addresses are displayed as with linear mode but only signed hexadecimal entries are allowed which step the address by the amount entered in the indicated direction. Step values are in the range -FFF to 7FFF. Actuation with a blank scratchpad toggles scrolling on and off. With scrolling enabled, pressing increments the addresses and pressing decrements the address. LS4 LS5, LS6, and LS7 ADDR: Toggles the address mode between 9LIN9 (linear) and 9STP9 (step). Enters data into the selected memory address adjacent on the left. Four display formats are possible depending on the state of the toggle adjacent to LS8: unsigned hexadecimal word, unsigned hexadecimal double word, signed decimal, and floating point. :FORMAT Toggles the data display mode between 9HEX9 (unsigned hexadecimal word), 9DWD9 (unsigned hexadecimal double word), 9DEC9 (signed decimal), and 9FLT9 (floating point). Figure 4-227. Debug Page
LS8
4-290
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: bus analyzer setup FUNCTION: or receive. Displays message origin and destination. Selects terminal address, update mode, and transmit
ACTIVATION: From the Index 2 page (Figure 4-3). LS KEY LS1 :TA [ ] DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Actuation with a blank scratchpad toggles through the available terminal addresses. Actuation with an entry in the scratchpad enters the terminal address. LS2 From Displays where the message is being sent from. The format is: TA (terminal address), SA (subaddress), WC (word count). Displays where the message is being sent to. The format is: TA (terminal address), SA (subaddress), WC (word count). Scrolls to the previous subaddress of the terminal address specified adjacent to LS1 and the transmit/receive state specified adjacent to LS5. If the first subaddress is reached, the current subaddress will wrap around to the last available subaddress according to its decimal representation. Toggles between 9On Demand9 and 9Monitor9. If the mode is 9Monitor9, the data will be updated whenever the page is updated. If the mode is 9On Demand9, the data will only will be updated when LS4 is pressed on the Bus Analyzer Data page (Figure 4-42). Toggles between 9Transmit:9 and 9Receive:9. Scrolls to the next subaddress of the terminal address specified adjacent to LS1 and the transmit/receive state specified adjacent to LS5. If the last subaddress is reached, the current subaddress will wrap around to the first available subaddress according to its decimal representation. Accesses the Bus Analyzer Data page (Figure 4-42). Figure 4-228. Bus Analyzer Setup Page
info line
To
LS3
Prev
LS4
9On Demand9 or 9Monitor9
LS5 LS7
9Transmit:9 or 9Receive:9 Next
LS8
View Data
4-291
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: FUNCTION: Displays the current message data along with the current MIL-STD-1553B command word, status word, and revision tag. ACTIVATION: By pressing LS8 on the Bus Analyzer Setup page (Figure 4-228). LS KEY LS1 Title Line DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the current MIL-STD-1553B command word and the status word. Displays which message of the messages buffered is currently being displayed. Also displays the message revision tag. Displays the current message data with unused words blanked. Refresh Buffers the current MIL-STD-1553B bus messages at the page built rate if the mode is 9On Demand9 on the Bus Analyzer Setup page (Figure 4-228). Accesses the Bus Analyzer Status page (Figure 4-230). Setup Accesses the Bus Analyzer Setup page (Figure 4-228). Accesses additional data words four words at a time in increasing word count order. Accesses additional data words four words at a time in decreasing word count order. Figure 4-229. Bus Analyzer Data Page
LS2, and line LS4
LS3, info
LS5 LS8 -
4-292
ORIGINAL
PAGE TITLE: FUNCTION: Displays message status.
ACTIVATION: By pressing LS5 on the Bus Analyzer Data page (Figure 4-42). LS KEY LS1 Title Line DISPLAY CUE FUNCTION Displays the current MIL-STD-1553B command word and the status word. Displays which message of the messages buffered is currently being displayed. Also displays the message revision tag. Displays the text for each set status bit. If a bit is set, a 9U9 will be displayed to the left of the status text. Refresh Buffers the current MIL-STD-1553B bus messages at the page built rate if the mode is 9On Demand9 on the Bus Analyzer Setup page (Figure 4-228). Accesses the Bus Analyzer Data page (Figure 4-42). Accesses additional status bits one bit at a time in decreasing bit number order. Accesses additional status bits one bit at a time in increasing bit number order. Figure 4-230. Bus Analyzer Status Page
LS2, and line LS4
LS3, info
LS8 -
View Data
ORIGINAL
CHAPTER 5
ASW Sensor Subsystem

5.1. INTRODUCTION The Helicopter Long Range Active Sonar (HELRAS) set is a dipping sonar set designed for use on an ASW helicopter. The sonar set provides active, passive, and UWT capabilities. Operation of the sonar set provides detection, tracking, and classifying of underwater targets through a submersible unit lowered into the water from a hovering helicopter. During active modes, the sonar set provides 360 degree coverage of the water volume in a single sonic ping. The sonar set presents visual information to the sonar display. Data consisting of a cursor, alphanumerics, and targets is digitally assembled and formatted on to a selectable display. The cursor is either a point, or a line, depending on the selected display format. The cursor is manually positioned by the sonar operator using the cursor control device forcestick. Positioning the cursor over an active target, or passive noise line, causes related information to be displayed on the sonar display. Sonar audio is provided to the ICS for distribution to the pilot, copilot, ASO, TSO, wet crew, and rescue stations. the ASO receives binaural sonar audio while all other crew stations receive only monaural audio. BIT capability provides a means of self-testing to determine sonar system mission readiness or to detect malfunctions in hardware or software operations. 5.2. SONAR EQUIPMENT The sonar set consists of nine WRAs: 1. Sonar Display 2. Sonar Control Unit (SCU) Control Display Unit (CDU) 3. SCU Cursor Control Device (CCD) 4. Cable Interface Power Supply (CIPS) 5. Dome Control 6. Reeling Machine 7. 8. 9. Sonar Interface Unit (SIU) Submersible Unit Cable and Reel Assembly
5.2.1. Sonar Display. The sonar display is a general purpose video display. The sonar display presents selectable views of sonar set generated idle, passive, active, COMM, APP (acoustic performance prediction), and BIT displays. The sonar display contains an OFF/ON/TEST switch and video controls for adjusting the presentation. 5.2.2. Sonar Control Unit Control Display Unit. The SCU CDU provides most of the sonar set operating controls and the BIT controls. The sonar operator selectable functions are selected using front panel fixed action buttons (FABs) or variable action buttons (VABs). The SCU contains a CRT (cathode ray tube) display, 10 VABs, and 36 FABs. The SCU exchanges digital control data with the SIU over a local MIL-STD-1553B data bus. The SCU does not contain fuses, circuit breakers, or cooling fans. For further information regarding SCU front panel controls, refer to SA4047-S70B6-720-100, WP 003 00. 5.2.3. Sonar Control Unit Cursor Control Device. The SCU CCD contains a maneuverable forcestick which is used to control cursor movement and three FABs. 5.2.4. Cable Interface Power Supply. The CIPS accepts analog data, digital control data, and BIT test signals from other sonar set WRAs. The CIPS multiplexes then downlinks the data through the reeling machine and cable and reel assembly to the submersible unit. The CIPS also receives uplinked submersible unit multiplexed data through the cable and reel assembly and reeling machine. The CIPS demultiplexes and reconstructs the uplinked data and distributes the data to other sonar set WRAs. The CIPS exchanges digital data with the SIU over a local MIL-STD1553B data bus. Power supplies inside the CIPS provide operating electrical power to sonar set WRAs and provide a fuse protected variable dc charging voltage to the storage battery assembly located inside the submersible unit. The CIPS front panel contains a 5 ampere fuse designated as 5F1, a spare 5 ampere fuse, a high voltage indicator lamp, and an over temperature indicator. The
5-1
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 CIPS rear panel contains exhaust vents for two internal cooling fans. These exhaust vents must not be obstructed. 5.2.5. Dome Control. The dome control provides operational control of the reeling machine hydraulic control valve assembly for the normal lower function, slow lower function, and normal raise function via front panel mounted pushbutton indicator switches. The dome control also has an auxiliary raise switch which actuates the auxiliary raise relay when pressed. Indicators on the dome control provide the sonar operator with visual indication of submersible unit and reeling machine status. The dome control indicates submersible unit water depth in feet by means of a four digit light emitting diode (LED) display. The depth display is blanked when the submersible unit depth is less than 16 feet (4.9 meters) or if the submersible unit is out of the water. The dome control provides an enabling signal to the automatic flight control system (AFCS) when the submersible unit is at a water depth of 27 feet (8.3 meters) or greater. This enabling signal is removed from the AFCS for a period of 6 62 seconds during: (1) a reeling machine normal raise stop or normal lower stop, (2) all reeling machine emergency stops, (3) during the normal reeling machine raise fast to intermediate speed transition and (4) whenever the dome control AUX RAISE switch is pressed or released. Temporarily removing this enabling signal prevents undesired reeling machine cable angle sensor input signals from affecting the AFCS. The dome control also provides a 9sonar submerged9 signal which is displayed on the cockpit MFDs to notify the pilots when the submersible unit is either: (1) at a water depth of 27 feet (8.3 meters) or greater or (2) total sonar cable pay out is greater than 24 meters (80 feet). The dome control does not contain fuses, circuit breakers, or cooling fans. 5.2.6. Reeling Machine. The reeling machine holds in place or rotates the mounted cable and reel assembly. The reeling machine rotates the cable and reel assembly in a clockwise or counterclockwise (lowering or raising) direction at various controlled speeds. The cable and reel assembly contains 1,750 615 feet (533.4 64.6 meters) of triaxial cable to which the submersible unit is physically and electrically connected. The reeling machine hydraulic control valve assembly regulates and directs helicopter supplied hydraulic fluid to a hydraulic motor and to a hydraulically released brake as required to raise, lower, or hold in place the submersible unit. For emergency jettison purposes, the reeling machine brake may be manually released which will allow the submersible unit to be paid out until the sonar cable is stripped off the reel assembly. Various sonar set critical or minor fault conditions will require that the submersible unit be recovered using either: (1) the hydraulic auxiliary raise (HAR) method, where by manually operating a reeling machine control valve, regulated hydraulic fluid is directly applied to the hydraulic motor, or (2) the electrical auxiliary raise (EAR) method, where by pressing the dome control AUX RAISE switch, +28 Vdc is applied to the auxiliary raise relay, which then applies 3-phase 400 hertz ac electrical power to the reeling machine ac motor. Submersible unit recovery is also possible, (in the raise direction only) by manual rotation of the cable and reel assembly by engaging a reeling machine gear mechanism and using a speed handle. Due to the low gear ratio, this method is only practical when the amount of remaining sonar cable paid out to be recovered is relatively small (typically less than 50 feet (15 meters)). The reeling machine provides lateral and longitudinal inertial cable angle drift sensing information to: (1) the AFCS, (2) the sonar display hover indicator (3) the cable angle display on the cockpit and TSO MFDs. The reeling machine contains a slip ring assembly which provides two functions: (1) when the cable and reel assembly is rotating, the slip ring assembly generates lead and lag clock signals which are part of the sonar set cable pay out counting circuits and (2) the slip ring transfers downlink signal data and uplink signal data between the stationary reeling machine and the rotating cable and reel assembly. The reeling machine contains a sonar cable buildup detector (BUD) switch which will interrupt a normal raise or normal lower operation in the event a severe cable and reel assembly miswrap occurs. The reeling machine contains an initiator cable cutter device which is a listed Class B explosive charge. During an emergency, this explosive charge may be detonated by the pilot or copilot to sever the sonar cable, causing the loss of the submersible unit. The reeling machine contains a dip cycle event counter which advances by one count each time a dome control lower then raise cycle occurs. The event counter does not advance during BIT tests.
5-2
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 The reeling machine contains two surge arrestors which form part of the electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection circuitry designed to minimize sonar set equipment damage caused by ESD. The surge arrestors require functional testing by maintenance personnel every 30 days. The reeling machine stop assembly contains a cable wiper holder. Within the cable wiper holder are three cable wipers that wipe water off the sonar cable during retrieval. The reeling machine is fitted with splash guards and a self-draining drip pan. Interconnecting tubing routes accumulated water to a water shield drainage port. The reeling machine does not contain fuses, circuit breakers, or cooling fans. 5.2.7. Sonar Interface Unit. The SIU is a dedicated sonar signal processor. It accepts analog data, digital control signals, and BIT signals. The SIU also accepts uplinked multiplexed submersible unit acoustical data which it processes to provide target range, Doppler (range rate), bearing, and system status display (SSD) data. The SIU exchanges digital data with the SCU and CIPS over a local MIL-STD-1553B data bus. The SIU contains programmable digital signal processors (DSP) which provide real-time processing, noise reduction, signal enhancement, and automatic target candidate selection on returned acoustical data for all active mode pulse lengths. Special characteristics are detected, defined, and noted in SIU memory. The SIU also provides the sonar set with enhanced passive mode search capability and underwater voice communication mode capability. The SIU provides compass correction for the magnetic north to true north location declination angle. The compass correction value is either a default value or an operator selected value from the SCU SETUP menu. The SIU formats and outputs: (1) sonar video data to the sonar display, (2) sonar audio signals to the ICS and (3) bearing, range, BIT, and cable pay out data over MIL-STD-1553B data bus to the mission processor (MP). The SIU rear panel contains exhaust vents for the two internal cooling fans. These exhaust vents must not be obstructed. The SIU contains no fuses or circuit breakers. 5.2.8. Submersible Unit. The submersible unit contains a transmit array, receive array, batteries, multiplex system and associated electronics. The transmit array is a vertical array of seven acoustic projectors that can be deployed and retrieved mechanically from the bottom of the submersible unit. The receive array consists of eight extendable and retractable arms; each equipped with 12 hydrophones. The submersible unit is lowered into the water by the reeling machine. Once lowered to the desired depths, the arrays are opened in response to operator command. It is in this deployed state that active transmissions are available. The submersible unit transmits active waveforms omnidirectionally, in the horizontal plane, from the transmit arrays projectors, and receives target returns or target self-generated acoustics via the receive arrays hydrophones. Unprocessed data from the receive array is continuously multiplexed and uplinked through the sonar cable to the cable interface power supply for further routing to other sonar system components. The submersible unit contains a rechargeable battery power source used for acoustic transmissions and actuation of the deployable arrays. Both the receive and transmit arrays are simultaneously actuated by operator command, reaching fully opened or closed condition within 15 seconds. In the event of a system power loss condition or loss of uplink data, the submersible unit automatically closes both arrays within two minutes. The submersible unit internal battery is used to operate a small electric motor for array movement. This motor provides power to winch the transmit array up or down. The motor also contains a small hydraulic pump that provides hydraulic actuation of the receive array. A temperature sensor incorporated into the submersible unit electronics package allows for accurate measurement of the water column for use in the APP function. A pressure sensor is installed to provide visual depth data to the operator and for other sonar system functions. The submersible unit contains a bottom sounder that provides bottom proximity data to the operator in the form of a displayed alert. This alert is displayed to the operator when the submersible unit is 100 feet (30.5 meters) from the bottom. At 75 feet (22.9 meters) from the bottom, the reeling machine automatically executes a normal reeling machine stop. The bottom sounder is only operational when the arrays are stowed. An underwater telephone (UWT) transducer built into the kiting plate of the transmit array allows for UWT. The UWT transducer operates at 8.08 kHz to provide compatibility with other UWT systems.
CAUTION
Use of a cable and reel assembly that has experienced a reeling machine emergency stop can result in failure of the sonar cable and loss of the submersible unit.
5-3
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 New sonar cables will stretch during the cable and reel assemblys initial dip and will increase in length by 1 to 2 meters. The sonar cable overall length may become shorter in length if the sonar cable is re-terminated at a depot maintenance facility. 5.3. OPERATION
CAUTION
Use of a cable and reel assembly that has experienced a reeling machine emergency stop can result in failure of the sonar cable and loss of the submersible unit. 5.2.9. Cable and Reel Assembly. The cable and reel assembly contains a triaxial cable that provides a physical and electrical link between the submersible unit and the reeling machine. This triaxial cable is referred to as the sonar cable. The sonar cable is 1,750 615 feet (533.4 64.6 meters) long. The cable and reel assembly, installed onto the reeling machine, is rotated counterclockwise (as viewed from the sonar operators seat) to lower the submersible unit or clockwise to raise the submersible unit. The cable and reel assembly contains a dip cycle event counter which advances by one count each time a dome control lower then raise cycle occurs. The event counter does not advance during BIT tests. The cable and reel assembly contains one normal lower limit switch and two maximum lower limit switches which, when actuated, inhibit the normal lowering function. The normal lower limit switch will actuate when 11 wraps of sonar cable remain. This causes a reeling machine normal braked stop to occur. The two maximum lower limit switches will actuate when 5 wraps of sonar cable remain. This causes a reeling machine emergency braked stop to occur. Sonar operations must immediately stop if the cable and reel assembly experiences a reeling machine emergency stop. The cable and reel assembly must be removed, inspected, and tested by an intermediate maintenance facility before reuse. The cable and reel assembly does not contain fuses, circuit breakers, or cooling fans. At a point 80 feet (24.4 meters) from the submersible unit upward is a 1 foot (30.5 centimeters) white mark. This mark provides a visual indication that the submersible unit is approaching the water surface when the helicopter is operating in a stable 80 foot hover. The last 15 feet (4.6 meters) from the submersible unit upward, the cable marking alternates between black and white every foot. This marking provides a visual indication that the submersible unit is approaching the trail position during raise operations.
Before operational use of the sonar set, a visual preflight inspection of the sonar set is required. After the preflight inspection, operational use of the sonar set includes performing up to seven functions: 1. 2. Performing the sonar operator BIT procedures. Lowering the submersible unit while in a stable hover. Obtaining and analyzing an APP to determine optimum depth and range. Performing a search using the active modes. Performing a search using the passive mode. Using the UWT mode (COMM mode) Raising or recovering the submersible unit.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
In all operational modes, the sonar set formats and outputs raster scan video data to the sonar display. Selectable sonar binaural and monaural audio is provided to the ICS for further amplification and sonar operator aural analysis. The audio is selectable between sixteen beam omnidirectional, cursor selected single beam with two adjacent beams (WIDE), and cursor selected single beam (NARROW). 5.3.1. Sonar Operator BIT Procedures. The sonar operator shall perform sonar operator BIT procedures prior to takeoff. The sonar operator dome control reeling machine short drop BIT procedures must not be performed while the helicopter is in flight or in a hover. The sonar operator BIT procedures allow the sonar operator to rapidly determine the operating status of major sonar set functions including MIL-STD-1553B data bus functions, lamp test, uplink data receive, downlink data transmit, compass, battery, depth, cable pay out, reeling machine lower, and reeling machine raise. While in the SCU selectable BIT modes, sonar set WRAs or circuits are stimulated with test signals. The response to these signals
5-4
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 are then analyzed by the sonar set or the sonar operator for proper function. The sonar operator does not use all of the available sonar set BIT tests. Some sonar set BIT tests are used mostly by maintenance personnel. While the sonar set is powered on, critical areas of the sonar set are continually monitored for failure by sonar set BIT circuitry. BIT detected failures, which are prioritized, are presented to fault indicators located on the dome control. Fault indications are also provided in the fault indicators display field on the sonar display. The sonar operator may manually view the system condition display at any time by entering the BIT menu. 5.3.2. Lower. Prior to the start of a lower operation, the helicopter must achieve a stable Doppler hover of about 80 feet (24 meters) above the water surface. To prevent possible damage to the cable and reel assembly or submersible unit, water depth and obstacles should be known prior to start of a lower operation. The submersible unit is attached to the cable and reel assembly with 1,750615 feet (533.4 64.6 meter) of triaxial cable which is mounted to the reeling machine. When the dome control LOWER switch is pressed and held, the reeling machine will rotate the cable and reel assembly in a speed controlled clockwise direction. During the cable and reel assembly clockwise rotation, optical detectors within the reeling machine slip ring assembly generate lead and lag output clock pulses which are applied to dome control reel speed and cable pay out counting circuits. The dome control reel speed data is used to control the reeling machine hydraulic control valve assembly which regulates flow through the hydraulic motor thereby controlling the submersible unit rate of descent. The dome control outputs the cable pay out counting data to the SIU, which in turn transfers the cable pay out data to the MFDs. From the seat position (no cable pay out), the reeling machine will pay out cable at an average rate of 15 feet (4.6 meters) per second until the submersible unit reaches a water depth of 114 feet (35 meters). At this point, the reeling machine cable pay out average will increase to 18 feet (5.5 meters) per second. The reeling machine will continue to pay out cable until: (1) the dome control LOWER switch is released or (2) with approximately 11 wraps of sonar cable remaining, the normal lower limit switch located on the cable and reel assembly is activated. Releasing the dome control LOWER switch or actuation of the normal lower limit switch interrupts the lower command between the dome control and the reeling machine, which brings the reeling machine to a braked normal stop. The rapid reeling machine normal lower speed does not allow for precise stopping of the submersible unit at a specific depth. When the dome control provided SLOW (lower only) function is enabled, the reeling machine cable pay out is reduced to an average speed of 6 feet (1.8 meters) per second. This feature allows the sonar operator to lower the submersible unit slowly to a desired operating depth. During the normal lower cycle, the dome control monitors and compares reeling machine reel speed data and submersible unit depth data. If the data does not compare properly, the dome control will automatically initiate a 9normal9 stop of the reeling machine lower cycle. The faulty condition must be corrected and reset before the normal lower cycle will function again. The cable and reel assembly contains two maximum limit switches. If either of these switches actuate, the dome control will automatically initiate an 9emergency9 stop of the reeling machine lower cycle. If a reeling machine emergency stop occurs, sonar operations must be stopped until the potentially over-stressed cable and reel assembly is removed, inspected, and cleared for use by the maintenance activity. Whenever the submersible unit is at a water depth of 27 feet (8.3 meters) or greater or cable pay out is greater than 80 feet (24 meters), the dome control provides a 9sonar submerged9 signal which is displayed on the cockpit MFDs. Whenever the submersible unit is at a water depth of 27 feet (8.3 meters) or greater, the dome control provides an enabling signal to the AFCS. Reeling machine generated cable position lateral and longitudinal sensing signals are provided to the AFCS, which in turn actuates flight controls as required to keep the helicopter positioned vertically over the submerged submersible unit. Reeling machine generated lateral and longitudinal cable position data is also provided to the sonar display hover indicator and the cable angle display on the cockpit MFDs. The sonar operator or pilot, using his indicator display as reference, may manually input to the AFCS additional lateral or longitudinal cable correctional signals as required to ensure the helicopter is positioned vertically over the submersible unit. During all lower cycles, the sonar operator must observe the sonar cable to make certain that it does not come into continuous contact with the lower funnel assembly. Continuous contact may cause damage to the sonar cable exterior jacket. Momentary contact is acceptable. If the sonar cable is making continuous contact with the helicopter lower funnel, do the following: (1) if the ASO cable angle control panel ENGAGED indicator is illuminated,
5-5
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 inform the pilot that the cable is on the funnel and stop the lower cycle by releasing the dome control LOWER switch. If the cable angle control panel ENGAGED indicator is extinguished, continue the lower cycle until the cable angle control panel ENGAGED indicator illuminates then inform the pilot that the cable is on the funnel and stop the lower cycle by releasing the dome control LOWER switch, (2) make manual cable angle lateral control and longitudinal control changes as required until the sonar cable angle is within proper limits. 5.3.3. Range Of The Day / Sound Velocity Profile. The sonar set can provide the sonar operator with a SVP of the water through which the submersible unit has descended or ascended. This is routinely done prior to starting active mode or passive mode search operations. The sonar operator can elect to store three SVPs in non-volatile memory for future recall and further analysis. The submersible unit contains a temperature sensor and a depth sensor. Data from these sensors is provided to the SIU for processing and display. Sonar operator analysis of the ROD/SVP display allows for repositioning of the submersible unit to achieve optimum sonar set transmission and reception of acoustic signals. The sonar operator may also view a computed and scaled range of day display. 5.3.4. Passive Mode. With the submersible unit lowered to the desired operating water depth, the sonar set can be operated in the passive mode. When in the passive mode the sonar operator may choose specific passive settings from menu selections presented on the SCU CRT display. In the passive mode, the sonar set only obtains target bearing data. Target range and Doppler (range rate) is not available while in the passive mode as the sonar set does not generate or emit sonic pulses. Information concerning a possible target is obtained by evaluation of acoustics emitted by the object. In passive mode, the sonar set listening frequency range is 800 to 2000 hertz. Passive mode includes BB (broadband), NB (narrowband), and DEMON submodes. The broadband capability provides acoustic detection in all beams across the passive bandwidth and estimation of bearing of radiated acoustic sources exceeding the detection threshold. Passive narrowband identifies narrowband emitters and presents amplitude, bearing, and frequency data for each independent beam. The passive DEMON submode detects lower frequency narrowband lines that have modulated higher frequency broadband emissions. This submode demodulates, provides automatic line integration (ALI) for each beam independently. The ALI data is stored and presented separately, with the sonar operator being able to view only one beam at a time. Upper frequency DEMON bandpass is operator selectable within the overall passive bandwidth. SIU processed passive mode sonar audio is converted to frequency ranges more discernible by the human ear and is then provided to the ICS for further amplification and aural analysis by the sonar operator. The sonar operator may elect to listen to sonar audio which is collectively derived from all beams (16) by selecting audio OMNI, from three adjacent beams by selecting WIDE, or from one beam only by selecting NRW. When WIDE or NRW are selected the position of the hooked sonar cursor determines which beam or beams will be presented to the ICS and to the passive combination ALI display. 5.3.5. Active Mode. With the submersible unit lowered to the desired operating depth and arrays fully extended, the sonar set can be operated in the active mode. When in an active mode, the sonar operator may choose specific active mode functions or settings from menu selections presented on the SCU CRT display. In the active mode, the sonar set obtains target bearing data, range data, and Doppler (range rate) information by transmitting sonic pulses and receiving target acoustics (reflected echoes or emitted acoustics). Selectable active mode operating parameters include CW sonic output frequencies of 1.31, 1.38, 1.45 kilohertz, FM 100 hertz linear sweep from 1.43 to 1.33 kilohertz; range scales of 2, 3, 5, 8, 12, 20, 32, 50, 80 and 120 kiloyards, and transmit pulsewidths of 39, 78, 156, 313, 624, 1250, 5000 and 10000 milliseconds. Rectangular, cosine squared, and extended cosine pulse shaping techniques are used. The submersible maximum sonic output level is operating frequency dependent: 218 dB at 1.38 kilohertz, 213 dB at 1.3 kilohertz and 215 dB at 1.45 kilohertz. The submersible unit provides two sonic output levels: a high power output of 7,500 watts and a low power output of 500 watts. The sonic output level is automatically governed by submersible unit depth or is operator selectable with certain restrictions. It is possible to deplete the submersible unit battery when transmitting long pulse lengths (greater than 625 milliseconds) at minimum range scales consecutively. When battery depletion occurs, the sonar set generates a BATTERY FAULT indication. Submersible unit received acoustical data is uplinked to the SIU which processes the data for display. Processed acoustical data is SIU limited to a bandwidth of 500 hertz, centered around the selected sonic output frequency.
5-6
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 Matched filter processing is used for the longer CW pulses followed by post-detection integration. For the FM pulses, wide band processing is optimized to detect and localize very low speed targets in a reverberation limited environment. SIU processed target data may be Doppler filtered in three ways: (1) Doppler declutter, which removes candidates with range rates within 6x knots, where x is sonar operator selectable in increments between 0.1 and 3.1 knots, (2) Doppler windowing, which removes candidates with range rates outside a Doppler window with a sonar operator selectable center and width and (3) a sonar operator selectable detection threshold (DT). There are two selectable active mode display formats available for presentation on the sonar display: (1) a surveillance (SURV) display or (2) a detect and classify display. The surveillance display includes and All Beam Doppler Range (ABDR) display and an operator selectable non-acoustic Preliminary Contact Tote (PCT) side data panel. The detect and classify display may include a Bearing Range (BR) display, Doppler Range (DR) display, A-scan FM (AFM) display, and PCT. Sound velocity correction for the current submersible unit depth is calculated and the rate of selected display time line is adjusted automatically for all active mode displays. SIU processed active sonar audio data is converted to frequency ranges more discernible by human ear, and is then provided to the ICS for further amplification and then for aural analysis by the sonar operator. The sonar operator may elect to listen to sonar audio collectively derived from all beams by selecting audio OMNI, from three adjacent beams by selecting WIDE, or from one beam only by selecting NRW. When audio WIDE or NRW are selected, the position of the hooked sonar cursor determines which beam or beams will be presented to the ICS. 5.3.6. Underwater Telephone. The sonar set identifies the UWT mode as the COMM mode. When the sonar set is operated in the COMM mode, underwater telephone communications may be conducted between compatible sonar sets, submarines, or surface ships. The sonar operator microphone provided voice frequencies are converted to a 8,086 hertz suppressed carrier, single side band transmission format by the SIU. The submersible unit sonic output of COMM mode transmit data is limited to 250 watts PEP (peak envelope power) nominal and 500 watts PEP maximum. Typical COMM mode transmit range is 3 to 5 kiloyards. The maximum range for COMM mode transmit data is dependent upon water conditions. Compatible single side band signals received by the submersible unit are processed and converted by the SIU into audio data for the ICS. In the COMM mode, a small underwater telephone communication transducer mounted to the transmit array kiting plate is dedicated solely to UWT operations. When operating in COMM mode, the sonar audio collectively derived from all beams (OMNI) is provided to the sonar operator. 5.3.7. Raise. Upon completion of active, passive, or COMM modes of operation, the sonar operator will initiate a raise cycle by pressing and holding the dome control RAISE switch. The reeling machine will rotate the cable and reel assembly in a controlled counterclockwise direction at various speeds until the submersible unit reaches a position at which 20 feet (6.1 meters) of cable pay out remain. This position is referred to as the trail position. Upon reaching the trail position, the dome control will cause the reeling machine to come to a braked normal stop. With the submersible unit at the trail position, the crew may elect to transition the helicopter to flight or to fully recover the submersible unit to a position at which no cable pay out remains. This position is referred to as the seat position. The seat position is the point where the submersible unit makes physical contact with the reeling machine stop assembly mounted seat switch. When actuated, the seat switch interrupts the dome control normal raise command to the reeling machine. The seat switch does not stop the reeling machine when using hydraulic auxiliary raise method or when using the electrical auxiliary raise method to recover the submersible unit.
CAUTION
With the submersible unit at the trail position, the helicopter may be flown at airspeeds up to 40 knots indicated air speed. To prevent submersible unit instability and sonar cable friction on the lower funnel, the helicopter shall not be flown at speeds greater than 40 knots indicated air speed anytime the submersible unit is in air below trail. The reeling machine normal raise recovery speed is automatically determined by three dome control monitored parameters: (1) the slipring generated cable pay out signal, (2) the submersible unit derived depth signal, and (3) a computed reel speed signal. With cable pay out indicators greater than 233 feet (71 meters), the reeling machine will rotate the cable and reel assembly counterclockwise (raise) at an average speed of 18 feet (5.5 meters) per second. Upon reaching 233 feet (71 meters) cable pay out indication and ascending up through the 114 feet (35 meters) cable pay out indication, the reeling machine raise speed will decrease to an average rate of 5
5-7
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 feet (1.5 meters) per second. The reeling machine raise speed of 5 feet (1.5 meters) per second is maintained until a cable pay out indication of 20 feet (6.1 meters) is attained (trail) at which point the dome control will cause the reeling machine to come to a braked normal stop. The dome control RAISE switch must be released for a mandatory 3 second period before continuing. After the wait period, pressing the dome control RAISE switch will actuate the reeling machine which will rotate the cable and reel assembly counterclockwise at an average speed of 1.5 feet (0.4 meters) per second until the submersible unit makes contact with the reeling machine seat switch at the seat position. Actuation of the reeling machine seat switch causes the following three actions: (1) the dome control normal raise command is removed from the reeling machine, stopping the normal raise cycle, (2) the dome control UNSEAT indicator extinguishes, and (3) the dome control internal cable pay out counting circuits are reset to 0. During the normal raise cycle, the dome control continuously compares cable pay out data, reel speed data, and submersible unit depth data. From this compared data, the dome control provides a variable servo valve control signal used by the reeling machine hydraulic control valve assembly for raise speed control. If compared data exceed certain limits, the dome control will automatically stop the reeling machine raise cycle using one of three logic prioritized methods: (1) a braked normal stop, (2) a servo valve stop or (3) an emergency stop. The faulty condition must be corrected and the dome control fault circuit reset before the normal raise cycle will function. The dome control processed reel speed data (raise direction only) is also used to drive the dome control front panel CABLE SPEED (F/S) > 1, > 4, or > 10 indicators. During raise cycles, the sonar operator must observe the sonar cable to make certain that it does not come into continuous contact with the lower funnel assembly. Continuous contact may cause damage to the sonar cable exterior jacket. Momentary sonar cable to funnel contact is acceptable. If the sonar cable is making continuous contact with the lower funnel, perform the following procedures: (1) If the dome control DEPTH-FEET display indicates 59 feet or less, continue the raise cycle until the submersible unit reaches the trail position. If the dome control DEPTH-FEET display indicates 60 feet or greater, inform the pilot that the cable is on the funnel and stop the raise cycle by releasing the dome control RAISE switch then (2) make manual cable angle lateral control and longitudinal control changes as required until the sonar cable is within raising limits. If, due to a faulty condition, the normal raise cycle is not available, recovery of the cable and reel assembly cable and submersible unit is possible through three alternative raise methods: (1) hydraulic auxiliary raise, (2) electrical auxiliary raise and (3) manual recovery by hand cranking. When using any of these alternate raise methods to recover the submersible unit, observe the submersible unit as it approaches the helicopter.
CAUTION
Do not recover the submersible unit to seat position using hydraulic auxiliary raise method. Damage to the sonar cable can occur which can cause the loss of the submersible unit. Abrupt stops of the reeling machine with the hydraulic auxiliary raise valve may cause damage to the sonar cable which can cause loss of the submersible unit. The sonar operator may perform a hydraulic auxiliary raise (HAR) by manually actuating a valve located on the reeling machine. The reeling machine will rotate in a counterclockwise direction at a maximum speed of 5 feet (1.5 meters) per second until the HAR valve is released. The HAR valve must be released prior to the submersible unit reaching the lower funnel assembly. The remaining sonar cable is then retrieved using the manual hand crank method until the submersible unit is at seat position.
CAUTION
Do not recover the submersible unit to the seat position using electrical auxiliary raise. Damage to the sonar cable can occur which can cause the loss of the submersible unit. The sonar operator may perform an electrical auxiliary raise by actuating a dome control provided AUX RAISE switch. Actuation of this switch closes contacts on a auxiliary raise relay which applies electrical power to the reeling machine AC motor. The reeling machine will rotate in a counterclockwise (raise) direction at an average speed of 5 feet (1.5 meters) per second until the dome control AUX RAISE switch is released. The dome control AUX RAISE switch must be released prior to the submers-
5-8
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 ible unit reaching the lower funnel assembly. The remaining sonar cable is then retrieved using the manual hand crank method until the submersible unit is at seat position. To prevent thermal damage to the AC motor when using the electrical raise mode, a duty cycle of 6 minutes on and 45 minutes off must be observed. The 6 minute on time is sufficient to recover any amount of sonar cable paid out. range rate, bearing sonar data, and information regarding the origin of the data, i.e., whether the sonar is in passive or active mode. The data is transferred as a contact to the tactical database whenever the operator presses the verify key on the sonar set. The specific contact created by BC MP depends on the mode. In passive mode, a bearing-only contact is generated on the MFD tactical plot. In active mode, a contact with both range and bearing is generated. The mission MFDs display up to 15 sonar contacts on the mission MFD tactical plot. An attempt to create more than 15 contacts causes the MP to overwrite the oldest one based upon contact time. The operator can assign these sonar contacts to system tracks. 5.4.2. Cable Angle. The BC MP generates the cable data for the cable angle display. The BC MP receives cable payout from the SIU via the mission data bus. The time-to-raise value is calculated by the BC MP. The BC MP takes successive samples of cable payout over time to determine the rate of raising. This rate is used to calculate the time-to-raise. The BC MP sends this data (cable payout and time-to-raise) to the BC control display unit (CDU) via the mission data bus. The BC CDU transmits cable data to all four PFDs over the FMS ARINC-429 data bus. 5.4.3. Data Recording. (Provisional) The sonar display passes sonar video to the AVTR (provisional). The AVTR (provisional) converts the RS-343A video format to PAL video format and records it. The operator controls the recording of sonar data via the recorder controls on the front panel of the recorder. The AVTR (provisional) acts as an RT on the mission data bus. The AVTR (provisional) receives the system time from the MP via the mission data bus and records it along with the acoustic video data. 5.4.4. Dip FTP. A dip point is designated via the tactical aids pull down menu on the MFD. The dip point is flown as a series of four tactical waypoints to arrive at the dip position. The first waypoint is the circle intercept point. The next leg is a DME arc into the second point (circle exit point). The third waypoint is the mark gate point. The final waypoint is the dip destination that was designated by the operator. The BC MP passes the four waypoints in the tactical flight plan (including DME arc origin) that defines the dip entry to the BC CDU via the mission data bus. 5.4.5. CBIT. The BC MP monitors the sonar set via the mission data bus for the CBIT status results. The BC MP displays this status on the Mission Status 2 CDU page. The BC MP provides an alert enable for the sonar set to enable/disable the status from the roll up mission status. The default is 9enabled9 for the sonar set installed. The BC
CAUTION
The sonar operator must stop hand cranking when the submersible unit reaches the seat position. Continued hand cranking with the submersible unit at the seat position can damage the sonar cable which can cause the loss of the submersible unit. To manually recover paid out sonar cable, the reeling machine gear mechanism must be released and engaged to the cable and reel assembly ring gear. Due to the low reeling machine gear mechanism to cable and reel assembly ring gear ratio, it is not practical to use the manual hand crank method to retrieve large amounts of sonar cable. Typically, the hand crank method is used to recover the submersible unit to the seat position after using the hydraulic auxiliary raise or electrical auxiliary raise methods (less than 20 feet (6.1 meters) of sonar cable). For safety reasons, releasing the reeling machine gear mechanism locks out the normal raise, normal lower, and electrical auxiliary raise function. To manually recover paid out sonar cable, an 11 mm socket drive speed handle is placed onto the gear mechanism shaft and is rotated clockwise. This causes the cable and reel assembly to rotate in the raise direction. If the reeling machine gear mechanism is rotated counterclockwise, it will disengage itself from the cable and reel assembly ring gear. The sonar operator must then place the reeling machine gear mechanism in the disengaged detent position before the reeling machine normal lower, normal raise, or electrical auxiliary raise modes will function. The reeling machine gear mechanism does not provide for manual lowering of the submersible unit. 5.4. TACTICAL CAPABILITIES 5.4.1. Tactical Data. The bus controller (BC) MP receives data from the sonar set via the mission MIL-STD1553B data bus. This data contains the current range,
5-9
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 MP puts a check mark next to the sonar status to indicate that it requires checking through its detailed status page. Once the detailed page has been accessed, the check is removed on the mission status page. 5.4.6. Data Link Management of Sonar Contacts. The pilot, copilot, and TSO mission MFDs provide the capability to send and receive sonar contacts via the data link interface. The sonar contact data is designated for transmission via the MP pull down menus and is accepted into the local database from the Link-11 via the MP pull down menus.
5-10
ORIGINAL
CHAPTER 6
System Operation
6.1. INTRODUCTION The paragraphs that follow describe the system operations performed by the pilot, copilot, TSO and ASO. 6.2. CDU, MFD, SCU, AND SONAR DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT 6.2.1. CDU Display Brightness Adjustment. To adjust CDU display brightness, rotate the BRT control on the CDU front panel as required. To adjust CDU keyboard lighting, rotate the CONSOLE PANEL LTS LOWER control on the overhead console as required. 6.2.2. MFD Display Brightness Adjustment. To adjust MFD video display brightness, press the BRT rocker switch on the upper right side of the MFD front panel up or down as required. To adjust MFD video display contrast, press the CONT rocker switch on the lower right side of the MFD front panel up or down as required. To adjust MFD video display luminance (backlight brightness), press the LUM rocker switch on the lower left side of the MFD front panel up or down as required. 6.2.3. SCU Display Brightness Adjustment. To adjust SCU display brightness, press the SCU BRT FAB or SCU DIM FAB on the SCU front panel as required. To adjust SCU cursor brightness, press the CUR BRT FAB or CUR DIM FAB on the SCU front panel as required. 6.2.4. Sonar Display Brightness Adjustment. To adjust sonar display brightness, press the brightness up key or down key on the sonar display front panel as required. To adjust sonar display contrast, press the contrast up key or down key on the sonar display front panel as required. 6.3. ICS AND MONITORED AUDIO VOLUME ADJUSTMENT To adjust ICS volume, rotate the VOL control on the CSC panel as required. To adjust the volume of a monitored audio source (HF radio, V/UHF radios 1 and 2, sonar, ADF, TACAN, or ESM), push in the control on the CSC panel of the selected source to turn on the audio. Rotate the control as required. 6.4. VOR AND MARKER BEACON AUDIO VOLUME ADJUSTMENT To adjust the volume of VOR or marker beacon audio (VOR 1, VOR 2, marker beacon 1, or marker beacon 2), push in the control on the NRU panel of the selected source to turn on the audio. Rotate the control as required. 6.5. CREW INTERCOMMUNICATION (ICS)
Figure 6-1 summarizes the capabilities available at each ICS station. Crew intercommunication is established in one of four modes: PTT, HOT MIC, VOX, or CALL. In the PTT (push-to-talk) mode, the ICS select switch on the CSC is set to NORM and transmission is initiated by pressing the applicable key switch (PTT or foot switch) for that station. Microphone audio is distributed to the applicable station(s). A sidetone is returned to the transmitting station headset. In the HOT MIC mode, the ICS select switch on the CSC is set to HOT MIC. This provides continuous ICS or external communications without pressing a PTT switch. In the VOX (voice operated switching) mode, the ICS select switch on the CSC is set to VOX ON. The ICS keys while the operator is speaking. The VOX control on the CSC controls the threshold for voice activation. CALL mode operation is initiated by pressing the CALL switch. The CALL switch for the pilots and copilots station is located on the NRU. In the CALL mode, an operator communicates with all crew stations simultaneously via HOT MIC. The volume increases automatically during CALL mode transmissions. 6.6. RADIOS
The radio selection procedures include the channelization, configuration, and assignment of the V/UHF radio No. 1, V/UHF radio No. 2, and HF radio sets and the configuration and assignment of VOR/ILS, TACAN, and ADF.
6-1
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 assignment. Figure 6-4 shows the procedure for TACAN configuration and assignment. Figure 65 shows the procedure for ADF configuration and assignment. 6.7. DATA TRANSFER-PREFLIGHT
6.6.1. V/UHF and HF Radios Channelization. The channelization of the V/UHF and HF radios consists of selecting frequencies for up to 60 V/UHF presets and 30 HF presets. To access the V/UHF presets, press the COM key to display the Communications (comm) page. Press LS1 to display V/UHF 1 Control (v/uhf1 ctrl) page or press LS2 to display V/UHF 2 Control (v/uhf2 ctrl) page. Press LS1 to display V/UHF Presets (v/uhf presets) page. Press LS5 through LS8 to access the corresponding V/UHF preset page or vertically scroll to access the remainder of the presets list. The channelization configuration defaults to the last entries made. To access the HF presets, press the COM key to display the Communications (comm) page. Press LS4 to display HF Control (hf ctrl) page. Press LS1 to display HF Presets (hf presets) page. Press LS5 through LS8 to access the corresponding HF preset page or vertically scroll to access the remainder of the presets list. The channelization configuration defaults to the last entries made. 6.6.2. Configuration and Assignment. The configuration and assignment selections are made from the Communications (comm), V/UHF 1 Control (v/uhf1 ctrl), V/UHF 2 Control (v/uhf2 ctrl), HF Control (hf ctrl), CNAV, VOR/ILS 1 Control (vor/ils1 ctrl), VOR/ILS 2 Control (vor/ils2 ctrl), TACAN Control (tacan ctrl), and ADF Control (adf ctrl) pages. These pages are selected as follows:
The preflight procedure for data transfer consists of entering the aircraft PU (participating unit) number. The procedure is presented as follows: Press MSN key on CDU. The Mission Control (msn ctrl) page appears. Press LS7. The Link Setup (link setup) page appears. Enter the last two octal digits for OWNPU in scratchpad. The digits for OWNPU appear in the scratchpad as entered. Press LS2. The digits for OWNPU appear as entered. 6.8. AUDIO MONITORING
The operators can monitor ICS audio in accordance with Figure 6-1. ADF, ESM, TACAN, radar altimeter, and IFF audio is monitored as described below. ADF audio is selectable via the CDU. To select ADF tone ON or OFF, press the NAV key on the CDU. The civil navigation (cnav) page appears. Press LS4. The ADF Control (adf ctrl) page appears. Toggle LS3 to select tone ON or OFF. The ESM warning tones are selectable via the CDU. To select ESM warning tones, press MSN key on the CDU. The Mission Control (msn ctrl) page appears. Press LS3. The ESM Control (esm ctrl) page appears. Press LS1. The Tone Control (tone ctrl) page appears. Toggle LS1 to select ESM lethal lock tone ON or OFF. Toggle LS2 to select ESM lethal in range tone ON or OFF. Toggle LS3 to select ESM lethal tone ON or OFF. Toggle LS4 to select ESM status change tone ON or OFF. TACAN station identification audio is provided to the ICS at 30 second intervals. TACAN audio can only be heard when the TACAN control (tacan ctrl) page is displayed on the CDU and the TACAN pair indication at LS3 is not OFF. The audio is automatically disabled when leaving the TACAN control (tacan ctrl) page. To select the TACAN control (tacan ctrl) page press the NAV key on the CDU. The civil navigation (cnav) page appears. Press LS4. The TACAN Control (tacan ctrl) page appears. Toggle LS3 to select VOR1, VOR2, or OFF TACAN pair indication. VOR1, VOR2, or OFF appears as selected. The radar altimeter warning system provides audio warnings to the ICS. When the helicopter is below the altitude setting of the variable altitude warning bug, four to six warning tones interrupted at a 2 Hz rate will be heard in the headsets. When the AFCS is uncoupled and
Page comm v/uhf1 ctrl v/uhf2 ctrl hf ctrl cnav vor/ils1 ctrl vor/ils2 ctrl tacan ctrl adf ctrl
Selected From COM Key comm comm comm NAV Key cnav cnav cnav cnav
Figure 6-2 shows the preflight procedure for V/UHF and HF radios configuration and assignment. Figure 63 shows the procedure for VOR/ILS configuration and
6-2
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 the helicopter descends below 100 feet, four to six warning tones interrupted at a 2 Hz rate will be heard. When AFCS-coupled modes (approach, hover, or depart) are engaged and the helicopter descends below 35 feet, a continuous warning tone will be heard. If the radar altimeter becomes unreliable, a continuous tone will be heard. The unreliability warning tone is inhibited when a weight-on-wheels condition exists. If the IFF transponder detects a mode 4 disparity, a warning tone will be will be provided to the ICS. The warning tone may be selected by pressing the IFF key on the CDU. The iff control page appears. Press LS4. The iff mode 4 page appears. Toggle LS3 to set the reply mode to AUD (annunciation with an audio alert). 6.9. STATUS MONITORING CBIT operates automatically within the mission avionic system. Malfunctions are indicated by alerts displayed at the operator stations. If a malfunction is indicated or an operator suspects a malfunction, the operator can view equipment status pages to determine the status of the equipment. Figure 6-6 presents the system status display procedure. In addition to system status, a page called the Position page is also available for displaying the navigation source selected by the FMS for the navigation solution. The Position page is selected with the PSN key. 6.10. STORES Stores configuration involves verifying and updating the inventories of the ASC stations and viewing the bomb rack status. 6.10.1. ASC Station Inventory. The Weapon Summary (wpn sum) page displays the inventories of the left outboard (L-OTBD), left inboard (L-INBD), and right inboard (R-INBD) ASC stations. To access the Weapon Summary (wpn sum) page, press the MSN key on the CDU. The Mission Control (msn ctrl) page appears. Press LS1. The Weapon Summary (wpn sum) page appears. To access the weapon control page of the inventory of a given ASC station, press the LS adjacent to that station. 6.10.2. Bomb Racks. Bomb rack status is displayed on the Bomb Rack Status (bomb rack status) page. To access this page, press the MSN key on the CDU. The Mission Control (msn ctrl) page appears. Press LS1. The Weapon Summary (wpn sum) page appears. Press . The Bomb Rack Status (bomb rack status) page appears which lists the three ASC stations and the status of the in-flight operable bomb rack lock (IFOBRL) and the linear electro-magnetic actuator (LEMA) for each station. 6.11. FUEL CONFIGURATION
The fuel configuration procedure allows the operator to enable or disable fuel tank quantity inputs to the mission MFDs. To configure the fuel tanks, press the IDX key on the CDU. The Index 1 (index 1) page appears. Press LS1. The FMS Start 1 (start 1) page appears. Press LS4. The Fuel Configuration (fuel config) page appears. Toggle LS2 to set the external fuel tank configuration to NONE, LEFT INBOARD, RIGHT INBOARD, or L & R INBOARD. 6.12. SYSTEM START AND INITIALIZATION
The system start and initialization procedure includes steps for placing the system in a state of readiness. Figure 6-7 presents the System Start and Initialization Procedure. The data entry ranges for system start and initialization data are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Position latitude: 0 - 90 north/south Position longitude: 0 - 180 east/west Date: 1 - 31/1 - 12/0 - 99 Time: 00:00:00 - 23:59:59 Datum number: 1 - 47, 49, 68 Alternate flight plan number: 1 - 40 Ground speed: 1 - 999 knots Bank angle: 05 - 25
9. Cross track alert distance: 0.1 - 53.9 nm / 0.2 100.0 km 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Speed alert speed: 1 - 99 knots Waypoint alert time: 000 - 120 seconds FTN Block Top: 102018 - 177768 FTN Block Bottom: 102008 - FTN Block Top FTN Pool Top: 102018 - 177768 FTN Pool Bottom: 102008 - FTN Pool Top Last two octal digits for OWNPU: 0 - 768 ORIGINAL
6-3
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 17. Auto correlation distance: 1 - 256 datum miles 18. ADLP auto squawk maximum: 0 - 100 19. ADLP range filter: 1 - 256 nm 20. ADLP sector filter bearing: 000 - 359 21. ADLP sector bearing delta: 000 - 359 6.12.1. Initial Time and Date. GPS year, day of year, and UTC time are used as the system time if the date is correct and the UTC valid message from the EGI is valid. If this data is not available or not valid, the 9enter UTC9 annunciation is displayed on the CDU requesting manual entry of time and date. If the FMS receives valid GPS UTC and date at any time after power up and the GPS has acquired at least one satellite, the bus controller CDU will synchronize its internal clock to the UTC and date and displays these values on data line 3 of the Start 1 (start 1) page as long as they remain valid. If the GPS fails or the 6.13. INITIATED BUILT-IN TEST (IBIT) UTC or date become invalid, the CDU will continue to propagate time and date internally.
Initiated built-in test will execute only when initiated by the operator. IBIT causes the CDU to go off line during the test and the RAM contents to be destroyed. The CDU displays the results of IBIT on the CDU test pages. IBIT results displayed on the test pages are the results of the last IBIT performed. Figure 6-8 presents the IBIT procedure. 6.14. SONAR TESTS
Refer to Aircrew Pocket Checklist (SA4047-S70HNNFM-800) for sonar preflight procedures.
6-4
ORIGINAL
AUDIO
PILOT
COPILOT Yes Vol Yes Yes Yes Vol Yes Vol Yes Vol Yes
TSO
ASO
HOIST OPERATOR Yes Vol-TSO Yes-TSO Yes-TSO
WET CREW Yes Vol-TSO Yes-TSO Yes-TSO
GROUND CREW
Master Volume ICOM Network ICS and PVT Audio ICOM Network ICS and PVT Tx Audio an Key ICOM VOX and Hot Key CALL HF Audio HF Tx Audio and Key V/UHF 1 Audio; V/UHF 2 Audio V/UHF 1 Tx Audio and Key; V/UHF 2 Tx Audio and Key Sonar Audio (Monaural) Sonar Tx Audio and Key Sonar Binaural Audio LF/ADF Audio TACAN Audio VOR Audio 1; VOR Audio 2 Radar Altimeter Low Altitude Warning Stabilator Warning Marker Beacon Indicator 1; Marker Beacon Indicator 2 ESM Audio IFF Audio KEY:
Yes Vol Yes Yes Yes Vol Yes Vol Yes Vol Yes
Yes Vol Yes Yes Yes Vol Yes Vol Yes Vol Yes
Yes Vol Yes Yes Yes Vol Yes Vol Yes Vol Yes Left Vol & Right Vol
Vol (ICS Only) Yes (ICS Only)
Vol-TSO Yes-TSO Vol-TSO Yes-TSO Vol-TSO Vol-TSO
Vol-TSO Yes-TSO Vol-TSO Yes-TSO Vol-TSO Vol-TSO
Vol Vol Vol On On Vol Vol On
Vol Vol Vol On On Vol Vol On
Vol Vol
Vol Vol
Vol-TSO Vol-TSO
Vol-TSO Vol-TSO
Vol
Vol
Vol-TSO
Vol-TSO
Yes - This capability is provided for this station. On - This audio is always on. Operator does not have control of audio level. Audio is adjustable by ground maintenance. Audio is provided regardless of selected audio monitoring configuration.
Figure 6-1.
ICS Station Capabilities (Sheet 1 of 2) 6-5 ORIGINAL
Vol - This audio can be selected on or off and operator has control of audio level. Binaural - This audio can be selected on or off and operator has control of audio level. Operator has capability to route one of four audio signals to one ear and one of other audio signals to other ear. TSO - Hoist operator and wet crew operator selections for audio monitoring and for radio and sonar control are slaved to TSO stations settings. Master Volume, Radio PTT, and ICOM PTT are independent.
Figure 6-1.
ICS Station Capabilities (Sheet 2 of 2)
6-6
ORIGINAL
STEP 1 2 3
OPERATOR ACTION Press COM key. Press LS1. Toggle LS2 to select TR (transmitter/receiver), TR/G (transmitter/receiver and guard), DF (direction finder, or GD (guard) mode. Toggle LS3 to select squelch ON or OFF. Toggle LS4 to select USA or INTL (international) V/UHF maritime mode. Toggle LS6 to select TOP or BOT (bottom) V/UHF antenna. Toggle LS8 to select V/UHF Link 11 ON or OFF. Press COM key. Press LS2. Toggle LS2 to select TR (transmitter/receiver), TR/G (transmitter/receiver and guard), DF (direction finder, or GD (guard) mode. Toggle LS3 to select squelch ON or OFF. Toggle LS4 to select USA or INTL (international) V/UHF maritime mode. Toggle LS6 to select TOP or BOT (bottom) V/UHF antenna. Toggle LS8 to select V/UHF Link 11 ON or OFF. Press COM key. Press LS4. Toggle LS2 to select UV (upper voice sideband), LV (lower voice sideband), or AM (amplitude modulation equivalent) emission mode. Toggle LS3 to select squelch level 0, 1, 2, or 3. Toggle LS4 to select HI (high), MED (medium), or LO (low) HF transmit power. Toggle LS6 to select ON or STBY (standby) HF power mode. Toggle LS7 to select HF Link 11 ON or OFF.
RESPONSE Communications (comm) page appears. V/UHF1 Control (v/uhf1 ctrl) page appears. TR, TR/G, DF, or GD appears as selected.
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON or OFF appears as selected. USA or INTL appears as selected. TOP or BOT appears as selected. ON or OFF appears as selected. Communications (comm) page appears. V/UHF2 Control (v/uhf2 ctrl) page appears. TR, TR/G, DF, or GD appears as selected.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ON or OFF appears as selected. USA or INTL appears as selected. TOP or BOT appears as selected. ON or OFF appears as selected. Communications (comm) page appears. HF Control (hf ctrl) page appears. UV, LV, or AM appears as selected.
18 19 20 21
0, 1, 2, or 3 appears as selected. HI, MED, or LO appears as selected. ON or STBY appears as selected. ON or OFF appears as selected.
Figure 6-2. V-UHF and HF Radios Configuration and Assignment Preflight Procedure
6-7
ORIGINAL
STEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
OPERATOR ACTION Press NAV key. Enter VOR/LOC frequency or identifier for VOR1 in scratchpad. Press LS5. Press LS1. Toggle LS3 to select LO (low) or HI (high) marker beacon sensitivity. Press LS8. Enter VOR/LOC frequency or identifier for VOR2 in scratchpad. Press LS6. Press LS2. Toggle LS3 to select LO (low) or HI (high) marker beacon sensitivity.
RESPONSE Civil navigation (cnav) page appears. Frequency or identifier appears in scratchpad as entered. Frequency appears as entered. VOR/ILS 1 Control (vor/ils1 ctrl) page appears. LO or HI appears as selected. Civil navigation (cnav) page appears. Frequency or identifier appears in scratchpad as entered. Frequency appears as entered. VOR/ILS 2 Control (vor/ils2 ctrl) page appears. LO or HI appears as selected.
Figure 6-3. VOR/ILS Configuration and Assignment Preflight Procedure STEP 1 2 3 4 5 OPERATOR ACTION Press NAV key. Enter TACAN channel, TACAN identifier, or VORTAC identifier in scratchpad. Press LS7. Press LS3. Toggle LS2 to select R (receive), TR (transmit/receive), AAR (air-to-air receive), or AATR (air-to-air transmit/receive) TACAN mode. Toggle LS3 to select VOR1, VOR2, or OFF TACAN pair indication. Toggle LS6 to select AUTO (automatic antenna selection), TOP, or BOT (bottom) antenna. RESPONSE Civil navigation (cnav) page appears. Channel or identifier appears in scratchpad as entered. TACAN channel appears as entered. TACAN Control (tacan ctrl) page appears. R, TR, AAR, or AATR appears as selected.
6 7
VOR1, VOR2, or OFF appears as selected. AUTO, TOP, or BOT appears as selected.
Figure 6-4. TACAN Configuration and Assignment Preflight Procedure
6-8
ORIGINAL
STEP 1 2 3 4 5 6
OPERATOR ACTION Press NAV key. Enter ADF frequency or NDB identifier in scratchpad. Press LS8. Press LS4. Toggle LS2 to select ADF or ANT mode. Toggle LS3 to select ON or OFF tone. Figure 6-5.
RESPONSE Civil navigation (cnav) page appears. ADF frequency or NDB identifier appears in scratchpad as entered. ADF frequency appears as entered. ADF Control (adf ctrl) page appears. ADF or ANT appears as selected. ON or OFF appears as selected.
ADF Configuration and Assignment Preflight Procedure
6-9
ORIGINAL
STEP
OPERATOR ACTION NOTE All keys and display indications are on CDU.
RESPONSE
Press STAT key.
Following page appears, where XXX is the aggregate result of CBIT performed on the associated subset of LRUs. If all the LRUs of a subset pass CBIT, GO is displayed. If any LRU of a subset fails CBIT, NGO is displayed.
XXX XXX XXX XXX
FMS system status COMM
MFD
XXX XXX XXX
CNAV
NAV
MSN
DCU
Is FMS result NGO? Yes: Go to step 3. No: Go to step 6.
Press LS1.
Following page appears, where XXX is the result of CBIT on the associated LRU. If the LRU passes, GO is displayed. If LRU fails CBIT, NGO is displayed.
CDU1 fms status CDU2
XXX XXX XXX RTN
CDU3
XXX
DLDR
4 5
Note each LRU whose CBIT result is NGO. Press LS8. System Status (system status) page is displayed.
Figure 6-6. System Status Display Procedure (Sheet 1 of 6)
6-10
ORIGINAL
STEP 6
OPERATOR ACTION Is COMM result NGO? Yes: Go to step 7. No: Go to step 10.
RESPONSE
Press LS2.
XXX XXX
V/UHF1 comm status V/UHF2
HF
XXX
RTN
8 9 10
Note each LRU whose CBIT result is NGO. Press LS8. Is NAV result NGO? Yes: Go to step 11. No: Go to step 14. System Status (system status) page is displayed.
11
Press LS3.
XXX XXX XXX
EGI nav status ADC1
DPLR
XXX XXX
ADC2
FV
RTN
Figure 6-6.
System Status Display Procedure (Sheet 2 of 6)
6-11
ORIGINAL
STEP 12 13 14
OPERATOR ACTION Note each LRU whose CBIT result is NGO. Press LS8. Is DCU result NGO? Yes: Go to step 15. No: Go to step 18.
RESPONSE
System Status (system status) page is displayed.
15
Press LS4.
dcu system status XXX XXX XXX DCU1 DCU2 XXX XXX RTN
DEC1
DEC2
RTR OVRSPD
16 17 18
Note each LRU whose CBIT result is NGO. Press LS8. Is MFD result NGO? Yes: Go to step 19. No: Go to step 22. System Status (system status) page is displayed.
19
Press LS5.
XXX XXX XXX XXX
CPLT
OUTBRD mfd system status
CPLT
INBRD
PLT
INBRD
PLT
OUTBRD
RTN
Figure 6-6.
System Status Display Procedure (Sheet 3 of 6) 6-12 ORIGINAL
STEP 20 21 22
OPERATOR ACTION Note each LRU whose CBIT result is NGO. Press LS8. Is CNAV result NGO? Yes: Go to step 23. No: Go to step 26.
RESPONSE
System Status (system status) page is displayed.
23
Press LS6.
XXX XXX
VOR1 cnav status VOR2
IFF
XXX XXX
TACAN
XXX
ADF
RTN
24 25 26
Note each LRU whose CBIT result is NGO. Press LS8. Is MSN result NGO? Yes: Go to step 27. No: Go to step 33. Figure 6-6. System Status Display Procedure (Sheet 4 of 6) System Status (system status) page is displayed.
6-13
ORIGINAL
STEP 27
OPERATOR ACTION Press LS7.
RESPONSE Following page appears, where XXX is the result of CBIT on the associated LRU. If the LRU passes, GO is displayed. If LRU fails CBIT, NGO is displayed.
XXX XXX XXX XXX
DLDR msn status 1/3 P-MP
C-MP
T-MP
RTN
28 29
Note each LRU whose CBIT result is NGO. Press . Following page appears, where XXX is the result of CBIT on the associated LRU. If the LRU passes, GO is displayed. If LRU fails CBIT, NGO is displayed.
XXX XXX XXX XXX
SONAR msn status 2/3 ESM DLP XXX XXX RTN
RADAR
DTS
FLIR
30
Note each LRU whose CBIT result is NGO. Figure 6-6. System Status Display Procedure (Sheet 5 of 6)
6-14
ORIGINAL
STEP 31
OPERATOR ACTION Press .
RESPONSE Following page appears, where XXX is the result of CBIT on the associated LRU. If the LRU passes, GO is displayed. If LRU fails CBIT, NGO is displayed.
XXX XXX XXX XXX
CMDS msn status 3/3 MCS
M299
ASC
RTN
32 33
Note each LRU whose CBIT result is NGO. System status check is complete. If any failed LRUs were noted, refer to SA4047-S70B6-ATM-000 for further testing. Figure 6-6. System Status Display Procedure (Sheet 6 of 6)
6-15
ORIGINAL
STEP 1 2 3
OPERATOR ACTION Press IDX key. Press LS1. To change initialization position displayed adjacent to LS1, enter new position into scratchpad then press LS1. Toggle LS2 to freeze (*FREEZE) or discontinue freeze function (FREEZE) on position displayed adjacent to LS1. To change date displayed adjacent to LS3, enter new date into scratchpad then press LS3. To change time displayed adjacent to LS7, enter new time into scratchpad then press LS7. To change datum number displayed adjacent to LS8, enter new datum number into scratchpad then press LS7. Press LS4 to access Fuel Configuration (fuel config) page. Toggle LS2 to set external fuel tank configuration to NONE, LEFT INBOARD, RIGHT INBOARD, or L & R INBOARD. Press LS8 to return to Start 1 (start 1) page. Press to access Start 2 (start 2) page. Toggle LS1 to select LAND or SEA INU alignment type.
NOTE
RESPONSE Index 1 (index 1) page appears. Start 1 (start 1) page appears. Position appears as entered and *FREEZE appears adjacent to LS2, indicating that position is frozen. *FREEZE or FREEZE appears as selected.
5 6 7
Date appears as entered. Time appears as entered. Datum number appears as entered.
8 9
Fuel Configuration (fuel config) page appears. External fuel tank configuration appears as selected.
10 11 12 13
Start 1 (start 1) page appears. Start 2 (start 2) page appears. LAND or SEA appears as selected. INU alignment type appears as selected.
Availability of various alignment types is determined by LAND /SEA selection at LS1 and by whether helicopter is airborne or not. Toggle LS2 to select GC (gyrocompass), SH (stored heading), GPS, AIR (in-air), AIR-G (in-air with GPS aiding), or AIR-D (in-air with Doppler aiding) INU alignment type. 14 15 16 Press LS3 to initialize GPS and start INU alignment. Toggle LS4 to select AUTO NAV function ON or OFF. Press LS5 to access Flux Valve Control (fv ctrl) page. Figure 6-7. EGI INU mode changes from RDY to NAV. ON or OFF appears as selected. Flux Valve Control (fv ctrl) page appears.
System Reset Procedure (Sheet 1 of 5)
6-16
ORIGINAL
STEP 17 18
OPERATOR ACTION Press LS1 to access Flux Valve Calibration (fv cal) page. Press LS1.
RESPONSE Flux Valve Calibration (fv cal) page appears. Flux valve calibration starts. ABORT is displayed while flux valve calibration is in progress. START is displayed when calibration is complete. Flux Valve Control (fv ctrl) page appears. SLAVE or DG appears as selected. Start 2 (start 2) page appears. Start 3 (start 3) page appears. Alternate flight plan number is displayed adjacent to LS2. Flight plan is replaced with alternate flight plan. Flight data is loaded. Index 1 (index 1) page appears. FMS Data Loader (data loader) page appears. GPS almanac data is loaded. Communications presets and Havequick II FMTs are loaded. Markpoint and user waypoint list is loaded. Index 1 (index 1) page appears. Navigation Configuration 1 (nav config 1) page appears. USE or OUT appears as selected. USE or OUT appears as selected. USE or OUT appears as selected. USE or OUT appears as selected. USE or OUT appears as selected.
19 20 21 22 23
Press LS8 to return to Flux Valve Control (fv ctrl) page. Toggle LS3 to select AHRS mode SLAVE or DG. Press LS8 to return to Start 2 (start 2) page. Press to access Start 3 page (start 3). To load an alternate flight plan, enter an alternate flight plan number in scratchpad then press LS2 twice. To replace flight plan with alternate flight plan, press LS7 twice. To load FMS with flight data stored on data loader cartridge, press LS8 twice. Press IDX key. Press LS2 to access FMS Data Loader (data loader) page. To load almanac data to GPS from data cartridge, press LS2 twice. To load communications presets and Havequick II FMTs into CDU from data cartridge, press LS3 twice. To load markpoint and user waypoint list into CDU from data cartridge, press LS4 twice. Press IDX key. Press LS3 to access Navigation Configuration 1 (nav config 1) page. Toggle LS2 to select USE or OUT INU state. Toggle LS3 to select USE or OUT GPS mode. Toggle LS4 to select USE or OUT ADC1 mode. Toggle LS8 to select USE or OUT ADC2 mode. Toggle LS6 to select USE or OUT DPLR mode. Figure 6-7.
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
6-17
ORIGINAL
STEP 38 39 40
OPERATOR ACTION Press to access Navigation Configuration 2 (nav config 2) page. Toggle LS1 to select ENRT/TAC1, TERM/TAC2, APPR/TAC3, or OCN/TAC1 scaling mode. Toggle LS2 to select TRUE (true north) or MAG (magnetic north) FMS heading and bearing references. To change default ground speed displayed adjacent to LS4, enter new ground speed into scratchpad then press LS4. Toggle LS6 to select NTGS (naval tactical grid system) or L/L (latitude/longitude) coordinate system. To change bank angle displayed adjacent to LS7, enter new bank angle into scratchpad then press LS7. Press to access Navigation Configuration 3 (nav config 3) page. To change cross track alert distance displayed adjacent to LS1, enter cross track alert distance into scratchpad then press LS1. To change speed alert speed displayed adjacent to LS2, enter speed into scratchpad then press LS2. To change waypoint alert time displayed adjacent to LS3, enter time into scratchpad then press LS3. Press IDX key. Press LS4 to access GPS Selective Availability / Anti-Spoof (SA/AS) (gps sa/as) page. Toggle LS5 to select Y-ONLY or MIXED GPS SA/AS mode. Press IDX key. Press LS4 to access Mission Start (msn start) page. Press LS1 to access Tactical Plot (tacplot) page. Toggle LS5 to select AUTO or MAN DLRP method. To set DLRP position if DLRP method is MAN, enter latitude and longitude into scratchpad then press LS2 . Figure 6-7.
RESPONSE Navigation Configuration 2 (nav config 2) page appears. ENRT/TAC1, TERM/TAC2, APPR/TAC3, OCN/TAC1 appears as selected. TRUE or MAG appears as selected. or
41
Default ground speed appears as entered.
42
NTGS or L/L appears as selected.
43
Bank angle appears as entered.
44 45
Navigation Configuration 3 (nav config 3) page appears. Cross track alert distance appears as entered.
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Speed alert speed appears as entered. Waypoint alert time appears as entered. Index 1 (index 1) page appears. GPS SA/AS (gps sa/as) page appears. Y-ONLY or MIXED appears as selected. Index 1 (index 1) page appears. Mission Start (msn start) page appears. Tactical Plot (tacplot) page appears. AUTO or MAN appears as selected. DLRP position appears as entered.
6-18
ORIGINAL
STEP 56 57
OPERATOR ACTION Press LS8 to return to Mission Start (msn start) page. To change the tactical flight plan waypoint area of uncertainty, enter area in yards into scratchpad then press LS7. Press LS3 to access Link Setup (link setup) page. To change current ADLP mode, press LS1 then press LS key adjacent to selected mode. To change last two octal digits for OWNPU displayed adjacent to LS2, enter two octal digits into scratchpad then press LS2. To change ADLP auto correlation distance displayed adjacent to LS3, enter auto correlation distance into scratchpad then press LS3. To change ADLP auto squawk maximum displayed adjacent to LS4, enter auto squawk maximum into scratchpad then press LS4. Press LS5 to access Parameters (link parameters) page. Toggle LS1 to select DETECT or CORRECT error correction. Toggle LS2 to select the DTS waveform between CLEW 2250 bps, CLEW 1364/18, CLEW1364/9 and LESW. Toggle LS3 to select DTS diversity between linear combining (AVG) and selective combining (SELECT). Press LS8 to return to Link Setup (link setup) page. Press LS6 to access Filter Settings (filter settings) page. To change ADLP range filter value displayed adjacent to LS2, enter range in nautical miles into scratchpad then press LS2. Press LS3 to access Sector Filter (sector filter) page. To change ADLP sector filter start point displayed adjacent to LS2, enter a location or a position display item into scratchpad then press LS2. To change ADLP sector filter bearing displayed adjacent to LS3, enter a bearing into scratchpad then press LS3. Figure 6-7.
RESPONSE Mission Start (msn start) page appears. Tactical flight plan waypoint area of uncertainty appears as entered. Link Setup (link setup) page appears. Link Setup (link setup) page appears with selected ADLP mode displayed adjacent to LS1. Last two octal digits for OWNPU appears as entered. ADLP auto correlation distance appears as entered.
58 59 60
61
62
ADLP auto squawk maximum appears as entered.
63 64 65
Parameters (link parameters) page appears. DETECT or CORRECT appears as selected. CLEW2250, CLEW1364/18, CLEW1364/9, or SLEW appears as selected. AVG or SELECT appears as selected. Link Setup (link setup) page appears. Filter Settings (filter settings) page appears. ADLP range filter value appears as entered.
66 67 68 69
70 71
Sector Filter (sector filter) page appears. ADLP sector filter start point appears as entered.
72
ADLP sector filter bearing appears as entered.
6-19
ORIGINAL
STEP 73
OPERATOR ACTION To change ADLP sector bearing delta displayed adjacent to LS7, enter a bearing delta into scratchpad then press LS7. Press LS8 to return to Filter Settings (filter settings) page. Press LS4 to access Geographic Filter (geographic filter) page. To change ADLP geographic filter upper left position displayed adjacent to LS2, enter a position into scratchpad then press LS2. To change ADLP geographic filter lower right position displayed adjacent to LS3, enter a position into scratchpad then press LS3. Figure 6-7.
RESPONSE ADLP sector bearing delta appears as entered.
74 75 76
Filter Settings (filter settings) page appears. Geographic Filter (geographic filter) page appears. ADLP geographic filter upper left position appears as entered. ADLP geographic filter lower right position appears as entered.
77
6-20
ORIGINAL
STEP
OPERATOR ACTION NOTE All keys and display indications are on the CDU.
RESPONSE
Press IDX key.
Following page appears:
FMS FMS NAV GPS
START index 1 DATA LOADER
MSN MSN TEST LOCK/ZERO
CONFIG
SA/AS
Press LS7.
Following page appears, where XXX is the aggregate result of the last IBIT performed on the associated subset of LRUs. If all the LRUs of a subset passed the last IBIT, GO is displayed. If any LRU of a subset failed the last IBIT, NGO is displayed. If the results of the last IBIT of a subset are unknown, dashes are displayed.
XXX XXX XXX XXX
FMS system test COMM
MFD
XXX XXX XXX XXX
CNAV
NAV
MSN
DCU
SYSTEM
Press LS8. Figure 6-8.
CONFIRM SYSTEM TEST appears in scratchpad. IBIT Procedure (Sheet 1 of 7)
6-21
ORIGINAL
STEP 4
OPERATOR ACTION Press LS8 again to confirm.
RESPONSE BIT is initiated on all LRUs of each subset. The 99 next to LS8 changes to an 9*9 for the duration of the test. TST is displayed while any LRU of a subset is in IBIT. When IBIT is complete, 99 is displayed adjacent to LS8 and the aggregate result of IBIT is displayed for each subset.
Is SYSTEM result NGO? Yes: Go to step 6. No: Go to step 37.
Is FMS result NGO? Yes: Go to step 7. No: Go to step 10.
Press LS1.
Following page appears, where XXX is the result of the last IBIT performed on the associated LRU. If the LRU passed the last IBIT, GO is displayed. If LRU failed the last IBIT, NGO is displayed.
CDU1 fms test CDU2
XXX XXX XXX RTN
CDU3
XXX
DLDR
8 9 10
Note each LRU whose IBIT result is NGO. Press LS8. Is COMM result NGO? Yes: Go to step 11. No: Go to step 14. Figure 6-8. IBIT Procedure (Sheet 2 of 7) System Test (system test) page is displayed.
6-22
ORIGINAL
STEP 11
RESPONSE Following page appears, where XXX is the result of the last IBIT performed on the associated LRU. If the LRU passed the last IBIT, GO is displayed. If LRU failed the last IBIT, NGO is displayed.
XXX XXX
V/UHF1 comm test V/UHF2
HF
XXX XXX
INSTALL
RTN
12 13 14
Note each LRU whose IBIT result is NGO. Press LS8. Is NAV result NGO? Yes: Go to step 15. No: Go to step 18. System Test (system test) page is displayed.
15
Press LS3.
XXX
EGI nav test
DPLR
XXX
RTN 16 17 Note each LRU whose IBIT result is NGO. Press LS8. Figure 6-8. System Test (system test) page is displayed. IBIT Procedure (Sheet 3 of 7)
6-23
ORIGINAL
STEP 18
OPERATOR ACTION Is DCU result NGO? Yes: Go to step 19. No: Go to step 22.
RESPONSE
19
Press LS4.
dcu system test XXX DCU1 DCU2 XXX
RTN 20 21 22 Note each LRU whose IBIT result is NGO. Press LS8. Is MFD result NGO? Yes: Go to step 23. No: Go to step 26. 23 Press LS5. Following page appears, where XXX is the result of the last IBIT performed on the associated LRU. If the LRU passed the last IBIT, GO is displayed. If LRU failed the last IBIT, NGO is displayed. System Test (system test) page is displayed.
XXX XXX XXX XXX
CPLT
OUTBRD mfd system test
CPLT INBRD
PLT
INBRD
PLT
OUTBRD
RTN
Figure 6-8.
IBIT Procedure (Sheet 4 of 7)
6-24
ORIGINAL
STEP 24 25 26
OPERATOR ACTION Note each LRU whose IBIT result is NGO. Press LS8. Is CNAV result NGO? Yes: Go to step 27. No: Go to step 30.
RESPONSE
System Test (system test) page is displayed.
27
Press LS6.
VOR1 cnav test VOR2
IFF
XXX XXX
TACAN
XXX
ADF
RTN
28 29 30
Note each LRU whose IBIT result is NGO. Press LS8. Is MSN result NGO? Yes: Go to step 31. No: Go to step 37. Figure 6-8. IBIT Procedure (Sheet 5 of 7) System Test (system test) page is displayed.
6-25
ORIGINAL
STEP 31
RESPONSE Following page appears, where XXX is the result of the last IBIT performed on the associated LRU. If the LRU passed the last IBIT, GO is displayed. If LRU failed the last IBIT, NGO is displayed.
XXX XXX XXX XXX
DLDR msn test 1/2 P-MP
FLIR
XXX XXX
ESM
C-MP
T-MP
RTN
32 33
Note each LRU whose IBIT result is NGO. Press . Following page appears, where XXX is the result of the last IBIT performed on the associated LRU. If the LRU passed the last IBIT, GO is displayed. If LRU failed the last IBIT, NGO is displayed.
XXX XXX MCS XXX
ASC msn test 2/2 HELLFIRE
DATA
LINK
RTN
34 35 36 37
Note each LRU whose IBIT result is NGO. Press IDX key. Press LS7. Press LS6. Figure 6-8. Index (index) page appears. System Test (system test) page appears. Civil Navigation Test (cnav test) page appears. IBIT Procedure (Sheet 6 of 7)
6-26
ORIGINAL
STEP 38
RESPONSE Following page appears, where # is one bit of a 16 bit data word which indicates the results of IBIT and XXX is the overall result of IBIT.
INITIATE TEST tacan test XXX
IBIT ######## ########
RTN IBIT is initiated on TACAN. The 99 next to LS1 changes to an 9*9 for the duration of the test. TST is displayed on title line while TACAN is in IBIT. When IBIT is complete, 99 is displayed adjacent to LS1 and either GO or NGO is displayed on the title line. 40 Is overall result on title line NGO? Yes: Record 16 bit data word. No: Go to step 41. 41 System testing is complete. If any failed LRUs were noted, refer to SA4047-S70B6-ATM-000 for further testing. Figure 6-8. IBIT Procedure (Sheet 7 of 7)
39
Press LS1.
ORIGINAL
CHAPTER 7
ESM System Operation

7.1. INTRODUCTION The ESM is an airborne surveillance and warning system which operates in the frequency range of 2 to 18 GHz. The system detects, identifies, classifies, sorts, and localizes RF emitters for immediate threat recognition. The ESM searches for RF emissions and upon detection generates a track file report that is transferred to the BC MP. The track file contains parametric details of the detected threat including frequency, pulse repetition interval (PRI), pulse width (PW), scan information, agility information, and emitter geo-location estimates. Based on a programmed emitter parameter file (EPF), symbology representing the top priority threats is displayed on the TWD located at the center of the instrument panel. The ESM provides audio to the ICS to alert the crew of lethal treats and changes of emitter status. The ESM provides detected threat details to the threat adaptive countermeasures dispensing system (TACDS) to allow for threat adaptive dispensing. A recorder/loader device is used for the transfer of EPFs and the tune tables to the ESM system and for transfer and storage of detected emitter files. ESM data is displayed on the CDUs and mission MFDs. The ESM is controlled by the BC MP via the mission MIL-STD-1553B data bus. Operator interface to the ESM is through the MFDs, MSCs, and CDUs. 7.2. SYSTEM INTERFACES The ESM provides two MIL-STD-1553B interfaces: one interface to the mission data bus and the other interface to the EW (electronic warfare) data bus. The ESM acts as a remote terminal on the mission data bus and acts as bus controller on the EW data bus. The ESM interfaces with the MPs in the mission MFDs via the mission data bus. The ESM is controlled by the BC MP. The ESM interfaces with the TWD and the TACDS chaff/flare dispenser via the EW data bus. The TACDS is a remote terminal on the EW data bus. The TACDS memory loader verifier (MLV) panel for the TACDS is connected to the EW data bus. The ESM provides threat emitter data, helicopter altitude (radar and barometric), and true airspeed to the TACDS. This data is used by the TACDS to determine the optimum countermeasure to dispense. The ESM provides two RS-422 bi-directional serial data links: one for the ground support station computer and one for the ESM data loader/recorder. The ESM data loader/recorder is used in flight to record status messages and detected emitter data. It also provides storage for ESM data files which include tune tables, and emitter parameter files. The ESM data loader/recorder uses PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) flash cards as storage media. The ESM accepts four discrete blanking inputs from the search radar, radar altimeter, TACAN, and IFF. These inputs signal the ESM to inhibit pulse data collection during on-board RF transmissions which may interfere with ESM receiver performance. The ESM provides an audio output to the ICS for alerting the crew of self-protection threats. 7.3. SYSTEM OPERATION
7.3.1. ESM Operational Software Program. The ESM operational software program contains receiver control and signal processing software that allows the ESM to operate with minimal operator intervention. The operational software program functions include system initialization, mode control, sequencing, command processing, navigation I/O data processing, BIT and calibration control and processing, ESM signal processing, ESM data extraction, data recording, and system testing. 7.3.2. Tune Table. The tune table defines the tuning strategy used by the ESM. It defines the frequency ranges to be tuned and the dwell time to be used at each frequency range. The tune table controls receiver frequency scanning in both the ESM signal intercept and BIT/CAL operating modes. 7.3.3. Emitter Parameter File. The emitter parameter file defines the characteristics of all emitters that are identified by the system. Emitter identification is accomplished by comparing the characteristics of the intercepted ESM signal to emitter parameter file data from which the emitter reports are generated. Emitter reports are prioritized, displayed on the TWD, and made available on the EW data bus for TACDS countermeasure response. Emitter parameter file characteristics include emitter parameter file identification numbers (0-31), fre-
7-1
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 quency index table, the total number of beam records, and a data record defining the characteristics of each emitter beam. 7.3.4. ESM Status. ESM operational status is provided on the ESM status CDU page. Refer to Avionics Test Manual SA4047-S70B6-ATM-000 for a detailed description of the ESM status CDU page. 7.3.5. Emitter Report and Emitter ID. The ESM maintains a maximum of 512 emitters locally however only the 32 highest mission priority emitters are reported to the BC MP in the form of an emitter report. Mission priority is defined by the emitter parameter file. The emitter report is provided to the BC MP upon detection of a new emitter which meets the priority criteria. To keep emitter display information current, the emitter report is updated on a periodic basis as defined by the report rate in the tune table. When a previously reported emitter beam is no longer active, a drop emitter report is issued to the BC MP. The BC MP maintains a local RAM (random access memory) copy of the ESM emitter reports and the ESM emitter IDs. A limited subset of these emitter reports are released to the tactical database for display in the ESM display mode and tactical plot mode. Upon receipt of the ESM emitter report and ESM emitter ID, the BC MP will perform the processing detailed in the following paragraph. The ESM emitter report and ESM emitter ID are always requested as a pair by the BC MP. If an ESM emitter report is an updated or new emitter report, the BC MP stores the emitter report and emitter ID report in the local RAM and transfers the emitter data to tactical data base. Following an emitter update that may impact the number of emitter records in the tactical data base, the BC MP checks the number of emitter records in the tactical database. If the number of emitter records in the tactical database is greater than or equal to 26 but less than 32, the BC MP displays 9esm dbase 80%9 on the CDU. The BC MP removes the 9esm dbase 80%9 annunciation when this condition is no longer true. If the number of emitters is equal to 32, then the BC MP displays 9esm dbase 100%9 on the CDU. The BC MP removes the 9esm dbase 100%9 annunciation when this condition is no longer true. Upon a MP cold start initialization or ESM cold start initialization, the BC MP purges the existing ESM emitter section of the RAM and tactical database. 7.3.6. Data Management. The BC MP requests sensor data from the ESM when available. The BC MP receives the emitter record reports and emitter record ID reports via the mission data bus. The BC MP sensor manager processes the incoming reports into the tactical database. The tactical database allocates space for 1 beam record per track number for up to 32 track numbers. The sensor manager reads the priority of the beam for a particular track, compares it to the incoming track beam priority, and maintains the higher priority beam in the tactical database. The ID report for each emitter record immediately follows the report. The sensor manager compares the current identification label to the incoming label and loads the identification text into the tactical database for the particular track number only if it has changed. Additional space is allocated in the tactical database for the amplification function. This allows the operator to amplify a particular track number which provides all current beam records for that track. The tactical database manager receives the ESM emitters into the tactical database. The emitters contain a track number and either a bearing only or a bearing and range (fix position). 7.3.7. Navigation Data. The BC MP provides navigation data and current navigation mode to the ESM via the mission data bus. This data includes system time, latitude, longitude, true heading, current navigation mode, radar altitude, barometric altitude, roll angle, pitch angle, and true airspeed. 7.3.8. Emitter Geo-location. The ESM contains passive ranging algorithms which allow stationary RF emitters to be located as the helicopter flies a small arc relative to the emitter. This ranging solution is used to geo-locate emitters, thereby improving the direction finding accuracy and removing bias errors from the azimuth interferometer measurement. 7.3.9. CDU Commands. The BC MP hosts ESM control pages on the CDU that are used to control certain functions of the ESM. The ESM responds to commands initiated by the operator through the ESM control pages. These commands are sent from the BC MP to the ESM via the mission data bus. These commands include tones on/off, emitter parameter file load, tune table load, initialize, directory, standby/operate mode, recorder on, and zeroize. The function of these commands are summarized below. Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed information on CDU pages. The tones on/off commands allow the operator to individually enable or disable the four ESM warning tones. The default state for each of the four ESM warning tones is enable.
7-2
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 The directory command allows the operator to retrieve the file names of the EPFs and tune tables stored on the PCMCIA card in the recorder. This command is also done automatically upon MP cold start. The emitter parameter file load and the tune table load commands allow the operator to load into the ESM a selected emitter parameter file or tune table that is stored on the PCMCIA flash card currently inserted in the ESM data loader/recorder. When commanded by the operator, the BC MP receives the file directory information from the ESM via the mission data bus and displays it on the CDU pages. The operator selects the desired file via the appropriate line select key. The BC MP then displays the file name loaded and actual file ID on the CDU page. The ESM mode command allows the operator to select either standby or operate mode. In standby mode, the ESM stops collecting data and waits for the operate command to begin collecting data. In operate mode, the ESM collects data. The default state of the ESM mode command is standby. The initialize command allows the operator to reset the ESM system. The recorder on command allows the operator to enable the ESM data loader/recorder. The ESM zeroize command allows the operator to zeroize the active emitter file, the current tune table, and the current emitter parameter file residing in the ESM. Additionally, the operator may destroy the PCMCIA flash card in the ESM data loader/recorder. The ESM performs a system reset after zeroizing its memory. 7.3.10. ESM MP Control. The BC MP supports the following ESM control and display via the MFD. 7.3.10.1. View. The view pull-down icon on the ESM display provides the ability to select an emitter from the track list table and view additional information on that emitter. 7.3.10.2. Beam Amplify. When in ESM mode, HPB selection of the query/amplify icon, followed by a HPB then APB selection of an emitter number, amplifies the selected emitter beam. The next APB selection turns off amplification and sets the ESM emitter table page to the previous page. A MPB selection turns off amplification and sets the ESM emitter table page to previous page and displays the icon menu. 7.3.10.3. Emitter Protect/Unprotect. The protect/unprotect function is used to protect or unprotect an ESM emitter on the ESM tabular display. A protected emitter is protected from being replaced by a new one with a higher priority provided the emitter remains active. The ESM system will drop a protected emitter from the tabular display and issue a drop track message for lack of detection. HPB selection of the protect /unprotect icon, followed by a HPB then APB of an ESM emitter, toggles the protection status of that emitter between protected and unprotected. The emitter record number indicates a 9P9 next to each track number that is designated as protected. There is no limit to the number of protected emitters. It is important to note that since the number of emitters in the ESM tabular display is limited, a newly detected emitter would be prevented from being reported from the ESM if the tabular display was filled with higher priority and/or protected emitters. 7.3.10.4. Promote to Tactical Plot. There are two methods to allow display of emitters on the tactical plot display. One method uses an icon in the menu icon list to provide the capability to manually promote/unpromote up to 32 emitter tracks to the tactical plot display. This function is activated in the same manner as the emitter protect/unprotect function. The second method allows the BC MP to automatically promote emitter tracks to the tactical plot display based on reported priority. 7.3.11. Manual Emitter Classification. The normal color of all emitter file text is white. The BC MP provides an option to classify one or more emitters based upon operator input via the CDU. The selections are hostile, friendly, unknown, and pending. Color is used to indicate emitter affiliation. The emitter color options on the MFD are red (hostile), cyan, (friendly), yellow (unknown), and green (pending). 7.3.12. ESM Warning Tones. The ESM provides an audio output to the ICS for alerting the crew of self-protection threats. The audio output consists of one of four warning tones: lethal, lethal in range, lethal lock, and status change. The BC MP hosts a CDU page which allows the operator to individually enable or disable the ESM warning tones. The four ESM warning tones are described below. 7.3.12.1. Lethal. The 9lethal9 warning tone is issued when specified by the emitter parameter file. This warning tone indicates a lethal threat that is not within lethal range.
7-3
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 The 9lethal9 warning tone consists of two alternating tones of 455 Hz and 555 Hz. The switching rate between the two tones is 2.0 Hz. 7.3.12.2. Lethal In Range. The 9lethal in range9 warning tone is issued when specified in the emitter parameter file and a real-time lethal condition is detected. This warning tone indicates a lethal threat that is within lethal range. The 9lethal in range9 warning tone consists of two alternating tones of 455 Hz and 555 Hz. The switching rate between the two tones is 6.0 Hz. 7.3.12.3. Lethal Lock. The 9lethal lock9 warning tone is issued when specified by the emitter parameter file and indicates the most lethal condition. The 9lethal lock9 warning tone is a single on-off modulated tone of 555 Hz with an on-off modulation period of 0.166 second. 7.3.12.4. Status Change. The 9status change9 warning tone is issued when a status change occurs with respect to the TWD. The 9status change9 warning tone is a single 455 Hz tone with a duration of 0.33 second. 7.3.13. Annunciations. The BC MP monitors the ESM on the mission data bus for the ESM NAV Alert annunciation. The BC MP also generates ESM annunciations. See Chapter 3 for detailed information on ESM annunciations. 7.3.14. Physical Countermeasures Capability. The TACDS physical countermeasures dispenser provides the capability to automatically, semi-automatically, or manually dispense countermeasure expendables. The TACDS is integrated with the ESM and with the BC MP via the ESM. In addition to the manual mode of operation, the TACDS provides the capability for semi-automatic and automatic modes of operation, where an automatic transfer of ESM detected threat files to the TACDS results in the execution of customized dispense routines for each emitter type detected. Each customized program is determined by the user and loaded into the TACDS via the MLV prior to flight. The BC MP provides an annunciation to indicate that semi-automatic program is ready for dispense initiation. This annunciator is driven by the TACDS status/inventory message which is provided to the BC MP by the ESM via the mission data bus. A READY indicator is also provided by the countermeasures control panel. Countermeasures dispensing is inhibited for any of the following conditions: helicopter is on the ground, TACDS is not powered, CMDS switch on auxiliary arming panel is set to SAFE, TACDS safety pin/flag resides within the safety switches, or fuel dumping is in progress. 7.3.15. ESM Zeroize. The BC MP monitors the system zeroize status. The BC MP issues a zeroize command to the ESM upon receiving a zeroize command from either the CDU or the ZEROIZE switch on the mission system control panel. The ZEROIZE switch on the mission system control panel is used to zeroize the active emitter file, the current tune table, and the current emitter parameter file residing in the ESM and destroys the PCMCIA flash card in the ESM data loader/recorder. The CDU zeroize command zeroizes the active emitter file, the current tune table, and the current emitter parameter file residing in the ESM. The ESM does a system reset after zeroizing its memory.
7-4
ORIGINAL
CHAPTER 8
Surface Search Radar

8.1. INTRODUCTION The APS-143(V)3 Surface Search Radar (SSR) is a multi-mode X-band radar system used for detecting and tracking surface and air targets and detecting strong storm clouds. The operator interface to the SSR system is through mission processor generated CDU pages and pull-down menus on the mission MFDs. Radar video is displayed on the mission MFDs. Features of the SSR include: Track-While-Scan (TWS) Frequency Agility (FA) Constant False Alarm Rate (CFAR) Scan Integration Sensitivity Time Control (STC) Pulse Compression Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Automatic Antenna Stabilization Manual Antenna Tilt Control Selectable Continuous or Sector Scan Selectable Receiver Noise Threshold BIT capability 8.1.1. Track-While-Scan (TWS). The basic concept of TWS is to determine position and calculate velocities for several targets while the radar continues to scan. The SSR is capable of automatically tracking up to 20 surface contacts or 5 airborne contacts or a combination thereof with one airborne track being equivalent to four surface tracks for a total target capacity of 20 tracks. The system is capable of tracking up to four contacts at a given beam pattern azimuth. The operator designates tracks by using the MSC to move the cursor to the desired radar return and selecting track control commands via mission MFD pull-down menus. The SSR displays the tracks on the mission MFD radar plot display. The SSR formats the radar contact track data into radar track files and provides these files to the mission MFDs via the mission MIL-STD-1553 data bus. The mission MFDs use the radar track files to create tactical symbols representing the radar tracks and displays the radar track symbols on the mission MFD tactical plot display. 8.1.2. Frequency Agility (FA). Frequency agility operation can be selected by the operator to effectively decorrelate sea clutter returns. With FA selected, the transmitter carrier frequency is changed on a pulse-topulse basis while the frequency remains stable during the pulse. FA acts to reduce the clutter in the radar return caused by random surface objects that are peculiarly reflective to the transmitted radar frequency being used. FA can also be used to thwart spot jamming of the SSR. 8.1.3. Constant False Alarm Rate (CFAR). Constant false alarm rate adaptive thresholding can be selected by the operator to minimize the occurrence of extraneous responses due to clutter. With CFAR selected, the receiver monitors the background noise and adjusts the detection threshold to maintain a constant false alarm rate. The goal of CFAR is to remove the range dependence and local clutter background of the radar image and make the probability of detection equal for all parts of the scan. 8.1.4. Scan Integration. Scan integration can be selected by the operator to optimize the detection of small sea-surface targets. With scan integration selected, the receiver integrates the returns from multiple scans to effectively increase the targets signal-to-noise ratio and minimize clutter under varying sea states. 8.1.5. Sensitivity Time Control (STC). Sensitivity time control operates as a range dependent gain control. STC varies the gain of the receiver as a function of time within each pulse repetition interval. The gain is reduced at close range (where maximum sensitivity is not generally required) and gradually increased for returns from farther ranges where more sensitivity is desired. STC reduces clutter at close range and increases the detectability of small targets at longer ranges. The effect of adjusting the STC is to reduce the clutter on the display in the region directly around the transmitter. The greater the value of STC, the greater the range from the transmitter in which
8-1
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 clutter will be removed. However, an excessive STC value will blank out potential returns close to the transmitter. 8.1.6. Pulse Compression. Pulse compression is a signal processing technique which provides the range benefit of a long pulse width without sacrificing the higher resolution that a shorter pulse width would provide. Basically, the technique is to increase the frequency of the transmitted pulse over the duration of the pulse width. Since each part of the transmitted pulse has unique frequency, overlapping returns can be completely separated on the basis of frequency. 8.1.7. Automatic Gain Control (AGC). The receiver has an automatic gain control function to maintain radar receiver sensitivity to within 1 dB of an operator set level. The AGC function allows the operator to optimize the display background noise level by adjusting the gain of the receiver via an MFD pull-down menu or CDU radar page. 8.1.8. Automatic Antenna Stabilization. Automatic stabilization of the antenna in the elevation plane is provided to correct for aircraft pitch and roll maneuvers. This is accomplished by supplying correction signals from the attitude heading reference system (AHRS) to the inputs of the antenna elevation servo amplifier. 8.1.9. Selectable Receiver Noise Threshold. The noise threshold is the radar return signal level under which received RF is ignored. The operator can adjust the noise threshold level to remove background noise to help minimize clutter. The noise threshold level is adjustable via a mission MFD pull-down menu or CDU radar page. 8.1.10. Built-in Test (BIT) Capability. BIT capability provides a means of self testing to determine SSR system mission readiness or to detect malfunctions in hardware or software operations. 8.2. EQUIPMENT The SSR system consists of three main assemblies: signal processor, receiver-transmitter, and antenna. 8.2.1. Signal Processor. The signal processor controls the operation of the SSR system and performs three primary functions: data communication, radar display processing, and target tracking. External data communication with mission avionics is maintained through the mission MIL-STD-1553B data bus. Radar display processing includes digital scan conversion and generation of display data such as symbols, range ring, cursor movement, and some alphanumerics for display of tableau and 8.3. OPERATION The SSR system is operated via CDU pages and mission MFD pull-down menus. Operation of the SSR system through CDU pages is described in Figure 4-190 (Radar Control Page) and Figure 4-191 (Radar Mode Page). Operation of the SSR system through mission MFD pulldown menus is described below. 8.3.1. Radar Display. Upon cold start initialization, the mission display mode is TACP (tactical plot). The icon menu at the upper left corner of the TACP display represents the tactical display top-level functions. Selectavionics system messages. Target tracking includes calculation of designated target extent, and center and ongoing prediction of the target position. 8.2.2. Receiver-Transmitter. The receivertransmitter receives command and timing signals from the signal processor to generate either 5.0 or 17.0 microseconds wide transmit pulses. Up to 11 carrier frequencies are available for either FA or fixed frequency operation. One of 11 carrier frequencies can be manually selected via the frequency select switch. Received echo returns are compressed to a 0.1 microsecond width and are converted to digital video data which is supplied to the signal processor. 8.2.3. Antenna. The antenna consists of a rectangular flat plate array mounted on a single pedestal within a rotating yoke assembly. The antenna is enclosed within a radio-transparent radome. The yoke assembly is driven by an azimuth servo within an azimuth assembly. The azimuth servo includes a rotary joint and slip-rings, a synchro transmitter, and an azimuth motor/tachometer. The azimuth motor/tachometer receives a motor drive signal from the signal processor to control the rotation of the yoke assembly. Rotation speed is sensed by the tachometer output which is fed back to the signal processor. The rotating yoke assembly is mechanically coupled to a synchro transmitter which provides azimuth position data to the signal processor. The yoke assembly contains an elevation motor/tachometer to provide antenna tilt. The electronics that control the elevation motor/tachometer are located within the azimuth assembly. The antenna tilt command is received from the signal processor through the ARINC 429 (B) data bus. This command is converted to an analog drive signal applied to the elevation motor/tachometer which tilts the antenna up or down. The antenna is tilt stabilized based on pitch and roll synchro inputs provided by a AHRS vertical gyro.
8-2
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 ing the mode select icon then selecting RADAR from the pull-down menu selects the radar display mode. Figure 3-24 shows the radar display. The icon menu at the upper left corner of the radar display represents the radar display top-level functions. Selecting the radar control icon generates a submenu with the selections: MODE, PROCESS, DISPLAY, and ANTENNA. The radar menu structure is summarized in Figure 8-1. 8.3.1.1. Mode. Selection of MODE provides a submenu with the selections: STANDBY, SEARCH, FAST SWP (fast sweep), WEATHER, and SCAN. The current radar mode text is displayed in green. Selection of a mode places the SSR system in the associated mode. 8.3.1.1.1. Standby. Selection of STANDBY places the SSR system in a power warm-up mode which disables the transmitter but allows power to the rest of the system. This mode is maintained to keep the radar system in a state of readiness. 8.3.1.1.2. Search. Selection of SEARCH while airborne places the SSR system in the normal mission mode which enables the operator to detect and track air and
MODE PROCESS STANDBY SEARCH FAST SWP WEATHER SCAN TILT ANG SCT WD RANGE GAIN FA SCAN INT CFAR CFAR VAL STC NOISE TH INTENSITY PERSIST CLEAR ORIENT STAB DISPLAY ANTENNA
CONT SECTOR
VIDEO RANGE RING
CFAR ON CFAR OFF
HDG STROBE TABLEAU
AIRCRAFT GROUND
200 100 50 25
SCAN INT ON SCAN INT OFF
NORTH UP HDG UP
FAST FA ON FA OFF MEDIUM SLOW
DEF
FQ1278
SA
Figure 8-1.
Radar Menu Structure
8-3
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 surface targets. Selection of SEARCH while on the ground allows transmission into the dummy load for system troubleshooting. 8.3.1.1.3. Fast Sweep. Selection of FAST SWP sets the radar control mode to SEARCH and sets the antenna rotation rate to 60 rpm (fast). This function is only available when 25 or 50 Nm range is selected. 8.3.1.1.4. Weather. Selection of WEATHER places the SSR system in the weather mode which is used to detect and locate storms within the selected detection range. 8.3.1.1.5. Scan. Selection of SCAN generates a pull-down menu with the selections: CONT (continuous) and SECTOR. The current scan mode text is displayed in green. Selection of CONT sets radar antenna rotation rate to the default value of 12 rpm at all range selections. At the range modes of 25 and 50 nm, the antenna can be set, via the CDU, to rotate at 60 rpm. In the sector scan mode the antenna rotates at 12 rpm only. If SECTOR is selected, the operator is required to designate a cursor position that will define the center of the sector before the radar sector scan command is issued. 8.3.1.2. Process. Selection of PROCESS generates a submenu with the selections: RANGE, GAIN, FA, SCAN INT, CFAR, CFAR VAL, STC, and NOISE TH. 8.3.1.2.1. Range. Selection of RANGE provides a submenu with the selections: 200, 100, 50, and 25. The current radar pulse repetition frequency (PRF) range text is displayed in green. Selection of a range (25, 50, 100, 200) sets radar PRF range to the selected value. 8.3.1.2.2. Gain. Selection of GAIN generates a pull-down menu with the selections: INCREASE and DECREASE. Selection of INCREASE or DECREASE increments or decrements the radar gain by one value. The valid range of gain values is integers 0 through 31. 8.3.1.2.3. Frequency Agility. Selection of FA generates a pull-down menu with the selections: FA ON and FA OFF. Selection of FA ON or FA OFF sets radar frequency agility on or off respectively. Text indicating the current FA state is displayed in green on the tableau. 8.3.1.2.4. Scan Integration. Selection of SCAN INT generates a pull-down menu with the selections: SCAN INT ON and SCAN INT OFF. Selection of SCAN INT ON or SCAN INT OFF sets radar scan integration on or off respectively. Text indicating the current SCAN INT state is displayed in green on the tableau. 8.3.1.2.5. Constant False Alarm Rate. Selection of CFAR generates a pull-down menu with the selections: CFAR ON and CFAR OFF. Selection of CFAR ON or CFAR OFF sets radar constant false alarm rate on or off respectively. Text indicating the current CFAR state is displayed in green on the tableau. 8.3.1.2.6. Constant False Alarm Rate Value. Selection of CFAR VAL generates a pull-down menu with the selections shown below. Selection of one of the menu items sets radar CFAR value accordingly: MAX (set level to maximum (255)) COARSE INCREASE (increase level by 32) FINE INCREASE (increase level by 1) FINE DECREASE (decrease level by 1) COARSE DECREASE (decrease level by 32) MIN (set level to minimum (0)) DEF (reset to default value (37)) The valid range of CFAR values is integers 0 through 255. 8.3.1.2.7. Sensitivity Time Control. Selection of STC generates a pull-down menu with the selections: INCREASE and DECREASE. Selection of INCREASE or DECREASE increments or decrements the radar sensitivity time control value by one. The valid range of gain values is integers 0 through 7. 8.3.1.2.8. Noise Threshold. Selection of NOISE TH generates a pull-down menu with the selections shown below. Selection of one of the menu items sets radar noise value accordingly: MAX (set level to maximum (255)) COARSE INCREASE (increase level by 32) FINE INCREASE (increase level by 1) FINE DECREASE (decrease level by 1) COARSE DECREASE (decrease level by 32)
8-4
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 MIN (set level to minimum (0)) DEF (reset to default value (128)) The valid range of noise values is integers 0 through 255. 8.3.1.3. Display. Selection of DISPLAY generates the submenu: INTENSITY, PERSIST, CLEAR, ORIENT, and STAB. 8.3.1.3.1. Intensity. Selection of INTENSITY generates the submenu: VIDEO, RANGE RNG, HDG STROBE and TABLEAU. 8.3.1.3.1.1. Video. Selection of VIDEO generates a pull-down menu with the selections shown below. Selection of one of the menu items sets radar video intensity accordingly: MAX (set level to maximum (63)) COARSE INCREASE (increase level by 8) FINE INCREASE (increase level by 1) FINE DECREASE (decrease level by 1) COARSE DECREASE (decrease level by 8) MIN (set level to minimum (0)) DEF (reset to default value (32)) The valid range of video intensity values is integers 0 through 63. 8.3.1.3.1.2. Range Ring. Selection of RANGE RNG generates a pull-down menu with the selections: INCREASE and DECREASE. Selection of INCREASE or DECREASE increments or decrements the range ring intensity. 8.3.1.3.1.3. Heading Strobe. Selection of HDG STROBE generates a pull-down menu with the selections: INCREASE and DECREASE. Selection of INCREASE or DECREASE increments or decrements the radar heading strobe intensity. 8.3.1.3.1.4. Tableau. Selection of TABLEAU generates a pull-down menu with the selections: INCREASE and DECREASE. Selection of INCREASE or DECREASE increments or decrements the cursor intensity. 8.3.1.4. Antenna. Selection of ANTENNA generates a pull-down menu with the selections: TILT ANG and SCT WD. 8.3.1.4.1. Tilt Angle. Selection of TILT ANG generates a pull-down menu with the selections shown below. Selection of one of the menu items sets radar antenna tilt angle accordingly: MAX (set level to maximum (+15.0)) COARSE INCREASE (increase level by 2.0) FINE INCREASE (increase level by 0.1) FINE DECREASE (decrease level by 0.1) COARSE DECREASE (decrease level by 2.0) MIN (set level to minimum (-15.0)) DEF (reset to default value (-1.5)) 8.3.1.3.2. Persistence. Selection of PERSIST generates a pull-down menu with the selections: FAST, MEDIUM, and SLOW. The current radar display persistence text is displayed in green. Selection of a persistence mode (fast, medium, slow) sets radar display persistence to the selected mode. 8.3.1.3.3. Clear. Selection of CLEAR invokes the radar clear command which clears the radar track display settings. 8.3.1.3.4. Orientation. Selection of ORIENT generates a pull-down menu with the selections: NORTH UP and HDG UP. The current radar orientation text is displayed in green. If the radar is in aircraft stabilized mode, selection of an ORIENT mode (NORTH UP, HDG UP) sets radar orientation to the selected mode. If the radar is in ground stabilized mode, selection of HDG UP displays the 9ILLEGAL AIRCRAFT UP MODE9 annunciation. In ground stabilized mode, the radar will always default to north up orientation. 8.3.1.3.5. Stabilization. Selection of STAB generates a pull-down menu with the selections: AIRCRAFT and GROUND. The current radar stabilization mode text is displayed in green. Selection of AIRCRAFT or GROUND sets radar stabilization mode to the selected mode. If GROUND is selected, the BC MP also sets the radar orientation to NORTH UP.
8-5
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 The valid range of TILT ANG values is -15.0 through +15.0 with 0.1 resolution. 8.3.1.4.2. Sector Width. Selection of SCT WD generates a pull-down menu with the selections shown below. Selection of one of the menu items sets radar antenna sector width accordingly: MAX (set level to maximum (300)) COARSE INCREASE (increase level by 30) FINE INCREASE (increase level by 1) FINE DECREASE (decrease level by 1) COARSE DECREASE (decrease level by 30) MIN (set level to minimum (60)) DEF (reset to default value (60)) The valid range of SCT WD values is integers 60 through 300. 8.3.2. Built-In-Test (BIT) Operation. Controls and indicators on the signal processor front panel provide BIT capability for preflight checkout and system fault isolation. The front panel controls include SP TEST and RADAR TEST selector switches. The SP TEST switch is used to select BIT routines that generate various test patterns on the MFD. The five-position RADAR TEST switch is used in conjunction with a front panel meter to measure four key parameters. The five-positions are labeled OFF, EL, XMIT, XTAL 1, and XTAL 2. The OFF position disconnects the meter. The EL position is used to measure the antenna elevation servo current. The XMIT position is used to measure transmitter output power. The XTAL 1 and XTAL 2 positions are used to monitor the crystal oscillator currents. The elevation servo current, transmitter output, and crystal oscillator currents are also monitored by the signal processor. If any of these parameters is not within proper limits, a yellow FAULT indicator on the signal processor front panel illuminates. The signal processor front panel has four red status indicators labeled ANT, RT, SP, and 1553. The ANT indicator is used to indicate a problem within the antenna. Antenna problem areas include elevation servo current, synchro/digital conversion, and ARINC data transfer. The RT indicator is used to indicate a problem within the radar receiver-transmitter. RT problem areas include transmitter power and crystal oscillator currents. The SP indicator indicates a problem with the CPU data link in the signal processor. The 1553 indicator indicates a communication failure with mission MIL-STD-1553B data bus.
8-6
ORIGINAL
CHAPTER 9
Data Link Communication Set, Link-11

9.1. INTRODUCTION The data link communication set supports Link-11 data link operations in accordance with North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) standardization agreement STANAG 5511, edition 2, amendment 7. Link-11 is used to exchange tactical data in real time between airborne, land-based, and shipboard tactical data systems. The exchange of data by Link-11 is accomplished by participating units (PU) configured in a net under the control of a PU acting as the net control station (NCS). Each PU in a net has a specific address number assigned to it. Each net has only one NCS. Multiple stations can either receive information or actively enter the net and send and receive data. A PU operating as a reporting unit is referred to as a picket. A net can be composed of as few as two PUs. The Link-11 operates primarily in the roll call mode. It can also operate in the broadcast mode. In the roll call mode, the NCS initiates a roll call by addressing and transmitting an interrogation message to a specific PU that then responds by transmitting its data while all other PUs in the net are receiving. The NCS then interrogates the next PU in the roll call. The NCS controls the order in which each PU is polled. Data is exchanged over Link-11 using standard message formats known as M-series messages. Link-11 messages are carried on either the HF or ultrahigh frequency (UHF) bands via the HF and VHF/UHF radio sets. When operating in the HF band, Link-11 provides coverage of up to 300 nautical miles from the transmitting site. When operating in the UHF band, Link-11 provides coverage to approximately 25 nautical miles ship-to-ship, or 150 nautical miles ship-to-air. Operation in the UHF band is used to limit detection to line-of-sight ranges. 9.2. EQUIPMENT The data link system consists of four main assemblies: Data link processor (DLP), ADLP-100F Data terminal set (DTS), MDM-2202F Data encryption device, KG-40A (Provisional) Data encryption device control panel, KGX-40A (Provisional) The systems/components which directly interface with the data link system include: HF radio set, HF-9000D VHF/UHF radio set, AN/ARC-232 MFD MPs Intercommunication System 9.2.1. Data Link Processor. The DLP supports the capability to receive, process, and transmit tactical data in accordance with the STANAG 5511 message specification for NATO interoperability. The DLP transmits and receives control and system initialization parameters to and from the BC MP via the mission bus. The DLP builds the Link-11 9M9 messages and passes them to the DTS for transmission onto the net. The DLP also disassembles link messages received from the DTS and updates the local DLP databases. The DLP then passes the messages to the BC MP via the mission data bus. 9.2.2. Data Terminal Set. The DTS converts digital information from the DLP via the data encryption device to audio tones which are passed to the HF or VHF/UHF radios for transmission. The DTS also receives data link messages from the radios and passes them to the DLP. 9.3. DESCRIPTION
9.3.1. Track Numbers. The Link-11 system allocates a track number (TN) to a track, special point, or PU to uniquely identify them at network level. A track number consists of 4 octal digits preceded by a leading digit. If a track is reported on the data link the leading digit is a 1, else it is a 0. The 4 octal digits range from 00018 to 77768. The track number that is reported on the net is 4 octal digits, therefore when voice coordinating tracks, the operator should ignore the leading digit. The MP handles the appending and removing of the leading digit for communicating network data on with the link.
9-1
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 Three methods of track number allocation are supported by the Link-11 system: pool, track block, and mixed pool and track block. With the pool method, the PUs draw the track numbers from a common pool in sequential order. The pool range is established by the operator from the force track number (FTN) pool CDU page. The pool range limits must be within the range of 02008 to 77768. With the track block method, each PU has an assigned block of track numbers which is located anywhere in the track number range of 02008 to 77768. This block of track numbers is assigned by the NCS and is used only by the PU for which they were allocated. The assignment of the track number block is performed during initialization by the operator from the FTN pool CDU page before start up of the Link-11 system. The mixed pool and track block method is a combination of the pool and track block methods. With this method, each PU draws from an assigned block. When the block is exhausted, the PU draws the track numbers from a common pool in sequential order. The Link-11 system requires the track number of own platform (PU address) to be set before allowing participation in the Link-11 network. This is done by the operator from the link setup CDU page. 9.3.1.1. Track Number Reservation. The Link-11 system automatically reserves the track numbers of all received Link-11 tracks including filtered Link-11 tracks or tracks outside of the tactical area of the system. The Link-11 system does not allocate reserved track numbers to new network tracks. A unit may manually assign track numbers within or outside of its assigned track number block. When performing this function, the track number will not be assigned until it is time for its initial transmission in order to avoid duplicate track numbers on the data link. Any legal track number (00018 through 77768) excluding the illegal and spare track numbers may be assigned, provided the track number is not currently determined to be in use by the assigning unit. Track number entries that are duplicates of existing track numbers will cause the message 9DUP FTN XXXXX9 to appear in the CDU scratchpad when they are entered; where XXXXX represents the duplicate track number. Setting a track number to 00008 will cause the DLP to automatically assign a track number. 9.3.1.2. Track Number Allocation. The Link-11 system supports the following track number allocation rules in accordance with STANAG 5511: a. A track number in the range 00018 to 00768 for own PU is allocated manually during initialization and prior to transmission. PU track numbers are allocated as received in the appropriate messages from the track number block reserved for PUs (00018 to 00768). Reporting units (RUs) (e.g. units not equipped with Link-11) are allocated track numbers from the block 01008 to 01768 as received in the appropriate message. Track number 01778 is used as a collective address for all PUs. Local tracks promoted to network level are automatically allocated track numbers from own platform assigned track pool or block.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Automatic allocation of track numbers is performed just before an own platform track is transmitted on the network. The assigned track number is taken from the assigned own platforms track number pool or block in sequential order. When the last allocated pool or block track number is assigned, the Link-11 system recycles and uses the next available track number starting at the beginning of the allocated track number pool or block. The track number of an own platform network track which own platform holds reporting responsibility (RR) can be changed manually in order to resolve possible track number conflicts. 9.3.1.3. Track Number Release. The Link-11 system releases a track number for any of the following conditions: a. Own network track gets another track number (the own platform track number is released). Own platform network track is prohibited (i.e. if an own platform network track is no longer transmitted.). Own platform network track gets another track number after correlation with a LRO track (the track number of the LRO track is always kept and the own platform track number is released).
b.
c.
9-2
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 d. Own platform exits the net (all own platform track numbers are released). e. A LRO track is dropped from the Link-11 network (see paragraph 9.3.6.5.). f. Own platform network track is wiped (see paragraph 9.3.6.6.). After a track number is released, the system waits for a certain time (duration of one net cycle with a maximum of 2 minutes) before reallocating it to another own track. During this time another PU can take over the reporting responsibility of the network track. If the track number is not reallocated to a link received track after this time, the track number is considered as free. After a track number is released, it is not available for automatic assignment until the upper limit of the track number block or pool is reached, and until its turn in the sequential assignment of available track numbers. A track number can be manually assigned as soon as it is considered free. The Link-11 system provides a periodic status message over the mission MIL-STD-1553B data bus interface indicating the percentage of own platform pool or block track numbers in use. The operator is alerted by a message on the CDU annunciation line if own platform track number pool or block is fully assigned. 9.3.2. Data Link Reference Point (DLRP). The Link-11 system can establish a fixed geographic reference point with the fleet to which all positional information is related for tactical data exchange. This common point is referred to as the DLRP. The DLRP is expressed in latitude and longitude. Each Link-11 integrated network has only one DLRP. The DLRP must be established before tactical data communication can commence. There are two modes for establishing the DLRP: manual and automatic. The mode is selected by the operator via the tactical plot CDU page. In manual mode, the operator can manually set a valid DLRP via the tactical plot CDU page during initialization and before Link-11 operation is started. The DLRP assignment mode and manual DLRP is sent from the BC MP to the DLP at Link-11 initialization and when assignment mode and manual DLRP is changed. The manual DLRP can be changed during Link-11 operations. In automatic mode, the Link-11 system accepts DLRP updates via received Link-11 messages. When the DLP receives a DLRP position message from the network which contains a different DLRP than is currently active, the DLP will send a DLRP change request to the BC MP. The operator is notified of a DLRP change request via the link message (update DLRP) CDU page where the operator responds by selecting ACCEPT or REJECT. If the operator accepts the DLRP change, the BC MP issues the DLRP change to the DLP. If at initialization, DLRP assignment mode is automatic and the BC MP does not have a valid DLRP, the BC MP commands the DTS to radio silence mode. The DLP will stop issuing tracks to the MP until a valid DLRP is received. The CDU will display an 9awaiting dlrp9 annunciation until a valid DLRP has been accepted. The Link-11 system can act as the DLRP reporting unit. Activation of reporting capability is controlled by the operator from the tactical plot CDU page. For each transmission, the Link-11 system reports the differences in latitude and longitude between the DLRP and its own platform position before reporting position information of tracks or reference positions. The own platform position with respect to the DLRP is called the own platforms tactical position. The Link-11 system can update own platforms tactical position using gridlock procedures. 9.3.3. Gridlock. Although all PUs report their positions based on the DLRP, there are errors which will make the position of the same contact held and reported by two different PUs appear in different positions. The errors may be due to: a. b. c. d. Errors in PUs navigational position Errors in tracking Compass inaccuracies Errors due to convergence
The Link-11 system can perform gridlock to align the difference in latitude and longitude between own platforms position and DLRP such that position differences between received information and measured data of the same contact are minimized. The Link-11 system supports a manual gridlock function. Manual gridlock is performed one time based on: a. b. A LRO track and an own platform track A LRO track and own platform
To perform a gridlock, the operator selects the two tracks (local track and an LRO track) to be used in the gridlock calculation, via the GRID LOCK MFD pull down menu. The best-fit latitude, longitude, and azimuth correc-
9-3
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 tions between the given track pairs, weighted according to the remote and local track qualities of each track specified, is calculated and displayed on the gridlock CDU page where the operator responds by selecting ACCEPT or REJECT. If the operator selects ACCEPT, these calculated corrections will establish the new gridlock. The gridlock corrections are transmitted to the DLP where they are applied to all received and transmitted position data. 9.3.4. Link-11 Network Control 9.3.4.1. Net Modes. The Link-11 system can be set by the operator from the link setup CDU page or the MFD pull down menu to operate in any of the following net modes: a. Roll call (including sub-modes) b. Short broadcast c. Long broadcast d. Silence e. Net sync f. Net test g. Disabled 9.3.4.1.1. Transmission in Roll Call Mode. Roll call mode is the primary Link-11 mode of operation in which each net participant transmits its data in turn when its address is polled by the PU acting as NCS. Upon recognizing its own address code, a picket in the roll call mode will automatically transmit a picket reply message which has the following structure: a. Preamble and phase reference b. Start code c. Any number of reference frames d. Picket stop code When transmitting in the roll call mode, the NCS determines the sequence in which the PUs transmits their data. This is organized by the NCS transmitting an address recognized by the PU (interrogation with or without a message). The Link-11 system can operate as an active picket or in radio silence modes. As an active picket, the Link-11 system transmits when interrogated by a NCS. In silence mode, the Link-11 system acts as a passive picket and only receives Link-11 data. 9.3.4.1.2. Transmission in Short Broadcast Mode. When transmitting in the short broadcast mode, a PU sends a single transmission of the Link-11 systems track data. The transmission has the same structure as the roll call picket reply message. The transmission is initiated by the operator by selecting BURST from the data link MFD pull down menu when the DLP mode is silence and emissions control (EMCON) mode is not active. This mode is used only when no other PU is transmitting. 9.3.4.1.3. Transmission in Long Broadcast Mode. The long broadcast mode involves transmitting a continuous series of short broadcast messages separated by two frames of silence. The roll call is suspended by the NCS while the broadcast is active. The Link-11 system can receive long broadcast messages from other PUs. Transmission is terminated manually by the operator from the link setup CDU page or MFD pull down menu. Through the use of the long broadcast mode, other PUs can receive real-time tactical information without breaking radio silence. 9.3.4.1.4. Transmission in Silence Mode. The NCS is not performing roll call polling in this mode. The Link-11 system provides the capability for the operator to interrupt silence to transmit data in short broadcast mode. While operating in the silence mode, the Link-11 system inhibits the automatic deletion (wipe) of LRO tracks which are not being updated. 9.3.4.1.5. Radio Silence State. The BC MP immediately issues a radio silence command to both the DTS and DLP when the BC MP receives the EMCON enabled status from the BC CDU. Placement of the DTS in radio silence mode inhibits the transmission of all data. The BC MP may place the DTS in radio silence at any time. While operating in the radio silence state, the Link-11 system inhibits the automatic deletion (wipe) of LRO tracks which are not being updated. The MP will also turn autocorrelation off. 9.3.4.1.6. Net Sync. The net sync mode of operation is used to establish a uniform time base from which all net data communications normally initiate. The net sync mode is usually initiated when establishing a link net after all operator entries have been properly completed. The net sync transmission is manually started by the operator on the NCS platform and continuously transmits the Link-11 preamble until stopped by the operator.
9-4
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 When operating as a picket, the Link-11 system can put the DTS into net sync mode. The Link-11 system displays the 9net sync rcvd9 annunciation on the CDU annunciation line upon successful reception of net sync. 9.3.4.1.7. Net Test. Net test provides an overall evaluation of the net and DTS performance. When operating in this mode, NCS will broadcast a digital word sequence of twenty-one 30-bit data words to all pickets within the net. The pickets DTS locally generates the same sequence. Receipt of the test signal from the NCS causes the picket to compare the received digital word sequence with the locally generated sequence. The process continuously repeats itself until stopped by the operator. Net test tests the connectivity between all PUs and the operation of the DTS. The Link-11 system displays the bit error rate associated with net test frames on the link setup CDU page. 9.3.4.2. Transmission Authorization. Link-11 data transmission is allowed or inhibited based on the operators mode selection and other conditions. Data transmission is not allowed while the network is being initialized. During network initialization, the mission processor keeps the DTS in radio silence for a period (determined by operational protocol) while track numbers and PUs are received and registered from the data link. Placing the Link-11 system into a transmissionauthorized state (roll call, broadcast) allows the transmission of status and own platform position. The transmission of local tactical data is controlled on an individual track basis with the operators selection of which tactical data is promoted to or demoted from network level. Link-11 operation is terminated when the operator sets the Link-11 mode to DISABLED from the link setup CDU page or MFD pull down menu. Upon receipt of this command, the DLP terminates all link track number assignments and transmit drop track reports for all tracks for which own platform holds reporting responsibility. Own platform position and status continue to be transmitted until all drop track reports have been issued and the network has been successfully exited. Transition from DISABLED is not allowed unless the following criteria is met: a. Own helicopter PU must be valid. b. CDU radio mode setting for VHF/UHF 1, VHF/UHF 2, or HF Mode is Link-11. c. A DLP loop test is not in progress. 9.3.4.3. Link Network Monitor. The Link-11 system calculates the reception quality (RQ) of each PU that is transmitting its monitoring messages. The RQ is calculated using the number of reception failures and the frame error rate. The calculated RQ is displayed to the operator on the link reception quality CDU page and is also reported to the other PUs. The RQ displayed to the operator and reported to the net is the average RQ for the measurement period. The RQ is reported on a scale of numbers from 0 to 7, with 0 representing no reception and 7 representing perfect reception. If no RQ is available, the DLP reports RQ as 919. The BC MP receives RQ data from the DLP and stores the data as track attribute data. The RQ of own platform transmissions as perceived by other PUs is received from the other PUs and displayed on the link reception quality CDU page. The operator is notified by a 9,, U link quality >>9 CDU annunciation if the own platform RQ is 1, 2, or 3 at any receiving PU. The RQ of a PU is periodically decreased (e.g. every minute by 1) if there is no reception of the monitoring message. 9.3.4.4. Data Update Request. The operator can manually issue a data update request to a specified PU via a pull down menu on the MFD and designation of the PU. The Link-11 system can also respond to update requests from other PUs. Upon receipt of the update request command, the Link-11 system automatically initiates a retransmission of all transmitted reference positions, bearing tracks, and the weapon status of the own platform. 9.3.5. Network Load Control
9.3.5.1. Automatic Transmission Threshold. The Link-11 system supports an automatic transmission threshold feature which prohibits the automatic assignment of own platform tracks to network tracks if the number of allocated track numbers exceeds a preset percentage (auto squawk maximum %) of the available track numbers of the allocated pool or block of track numbers. This threshold does not affect tracks which are forbidden from being filtered, as specified in paragraph 9.3.5.2. The Link-11 system provides the warning 9,, ntn block XX% >>9 (where XX is auto squawk maximum) if the allowed percentage of the available track numbers is reached and the automatic assignment of own platform tracks to network level is prohibited. The threshold level (SQUAWK %) can be changed by the operator at initialization via the link setup CDU page.
9-5
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 When 100% of network TNs is reached, the BC MP sets the auto squawk control to off, inhibits the automatic assignment of all tracks to network level, and generates the CDU annunciation: 9,, autosquawk off >>9. 9.3.5.1.1. Track Capacity. The BC MP monitors the data in the LRO section of the tactical database. When the LRO section becomes 80% utilized, the BC MP generates the annunciation: 9,, d/l dbase 80% >>9. Except for hostile, suspect, force tell, and emergency tracks, the DLP stops passing LRO tracks to the BC MP after the number of LRO has reached 100% capacity. The system accepts 100 data link objects. The BC MP can accept a combination of an additional 20 hostile, suspect, force tell, and emergency tracks into an overflow area after the LRO capacity has been reached. When this overflow area is filled, the MP generates an informational alert on the MFD to inform the operator that a track has been prevented from being displayed due to track capacity saturation. 9.3.5.2. Data Filters. The Link-11 system can filter out unwanted information to prevent system overload. System data can be filtered based on environment, range of tracks, geographical/sector areas, and track attributes. The operator controls the data filters from the filter settings CDU page and MFD pull down menus. Filter control provides on/off command for each filter as well as the corresponding required filter parameters for that filter. The same filters are used for transmission and reception except that the transmit area filters are set slightly larger. The following classes of tracks cannot be filtered out: a. Tracks with the identities of hostile or suspect b. Fighters/interceptors with friend/assumed friend an identity of 9.3.5.2.2. Category Filter. The Link-11 system provides a filter based on the category of tracks with respect to own platform. This filter exclude tracks of the relevant category (air, surface, subsurface). 9.3.5.2.3. Range Filter. The Link-11 system provides a filter based on the range of tracks with respect to own platform. This filter excludes tracks outside the selected filter range. Upon link initialization, the BC MP sets a default range filter of 64 nautical miles. 9.3.5.2.4. Attribute Filters. The Link-11 system provides attribute filters. These filters are based on the following track attributes: a. b. c. d. Special Points Bearing Tracks Non-Real Time Tracks Based on Track Identity (unknown, friend, assumed friend, pending) Non-Military
e.
9.3.5.2.5. Sector Filter. The Link-11 system provides a sector filter. This filter is based on a sector defined by a start point, bearing, and delta. Tracks entering the sector are filtered out. 9.3.6. Network Track Management. Network track management is used to build and maintain a common track store at fleet level for the compilation of an up-to-date, comprehensive, and clear tactical picture. 9.3.6.1. Prohibit Track Transmission. The operator can disable the automatic assignment of own platform tracks to network tracks by turning off the AUTO SQUAWK menu item on the MFD. A track specified as prohibited will not be automatically promoted to network level until designated by the operator. 9.3.6.2. Assignment to Network Level. The Link-11 system can manually and automatically assign tracks to network level. The assignment of a local track to network level occurs automatically for real-time point tracks if the transmission is allowed, automatic assignment is not disabled (AUTO SQUAWK is off), and the track number pool or block is not overloaded (e.g. 80% of track numbers are not already allocated). Simulated tracks are not assigned automatically. The classes of tracks specified
c. Tracks or special points with a track number below 02008 d. Tracks or special points with a status of emergency or force tell e. Participating Units 9.3.5.2.1. Geographical Filter. The Link-11 system includes a filter which allows tracks based on geographic areas comprised of rectangular areas of noninterest (e.g. areas with dense merchant shipping) and are defined by two diagonal corner positions in latitude and longitude.
9-6
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 below are not prohibited from automatic transmission unless the track pool or block track number assignment has been 100% allocated: a. Tracks with identities of hostile or suspect b. Fighter/interceptors friend/assumed friend with identity of The operator can manually correlate and decorrelate tracks by selecting CORR or DECORR respectively via the MFD pull-down menus. Correlation couples an own platform track to a LRO track representing the same object. Decorrelation dissociates the own platform track from the link received track. Correlation is performed automatically for the following conditions: a. A new own platform network track correlates with a LRO network track. A new link received track and an own platform network track carry the same track number (i.e. another PU executed the correlation and assumes the reporting responsibility).
c. Tracks or special points with a track number below 02008 d. Tracks or special points with a status of emergency or force tell The operator can manually assign tracks for transmission. A track will be transmitted when the operator selects SQUAWK via the MFD pull-down menus or if the track is selected for transmission on the associated track query/amplify CDU page. Upon designation for transmission, the MP determines if the north or east distance from own helicopter exceeds 512 Nm. If the limit is exceeded, the MP flags the operation as invalid. Local TNs are sequentially assigned by the MP and re-assignment is not allowed. Entry of an network TN for a squawked track assigns the TN manually. Entry of a zero in the network TN position forces automatic network TN assignment. 9.3.6.3. Stop Transmission. The operator can stop the reporting of a local network track to the Link-11 network by selecting STRANGLE via the MFD pull-down menus. When the operator stops transmission, the BC MP changes the track attribute to 9link disabled9 and issues a drop track command to the DLP which causes the DLP to transmit a drop track command message over the link. Stopping transmission de-assigns an own platform network track (transmitted) to own platform track with no link involvement. Stopping transmission of a local network track occurs automatically if the transmission on Link-11 is impossible (e.g. violation of filters setting, failure, transmission not allowed). The DLP automatically stops transmission of tracks which exceed the reportable range, i.e. north or east range exceeds 512 Nm from own helicopter. 9.3.6.4. Correlation and Decorrelation. Correlation is the process of combining two tracks that have been determined to represent the same object under one track number. Decorrelation is the process of establishing a new track number for a local track when a remote track report with the same track number as the local track is determined to represent a different object. The Link-11 system provides for manual and automatic correlation and decorrelation of tracks.
b.
The Link-11 system can manually correlate the following: a. b. A local track and a LRO network track An own platform network track and a LRO network track.
Manual decorrelation carried out on correlated network tracks results in: a. The Link-11 status of the network track becoming LRO A new own platform track being created Manually decorrelated track pairs (i.e. local track and LRO track that were auto correlated) not being automatically correlated
b. c.
The automatic correlation criteria is as follows: a. b. The tracks are both surface or both air point tracks. The tracks are both real-time tracks (network track quality (NTQ) 1). The identity and the primary identity amplification of the tracks are not conflicting (Refer to Figure 9-1.) The positions of both tracks are not conflicting. The tracks have not been manually decorrelated.
c.
d. e.
9-7
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 An area of predictability is situated around the LRO track. The size of this area is determined by a system parameter defining the maximum allowed separation distance. This parameter is set by the own platform operator during system initiation via the link setup CDU page. The system provides a default value of 1 Nm if no value is input manually. 9.3.6.5. Drop LRO Track. The Link-11 system can remove a link received track. The NTQ of LRO or correlated link received tracks is periodically decreased if they have not been updated. Tracks are considered 9NOT UPDATED9 if the NTQ is less than 2. Link received tracks are automatically dropped following NTQ decrementation and an additional period of 4 minutes. Receipt of a drop message for a network track results in: a. For a LRO track, the track being wiped b. For a correlated track with remote RR, own platform assuming RR.
9.3.6.6. Wipe Own Platform Track. An own platform network track (transmitted) is wiped only through operator action. Selection of the delete icon allows the operator to designate own platform tracks for deletion. If own PU has RR on the associated track, the Link-11 system issues a drop track. If own PU does not have RR, the local data is deleted. 9.3.7. Track Alert Control. The Link-11 system can report tracks as 9emergency9 or 9force tell9 or both. Each type is represented on the MFD as a separate attribute. An own platform track selected for an emergency or force tell alert is always transmitted. A track transmitted or received with a status of force tell or emergency will not be filtered out. If the status of force tell or emergency is received for an own platform network track or the reporting responsi-
Identity, Link Received Track Identity, Local Network Track Pending Unknown Neutral Assumed Friend Suspect Friend Hostile Pending A R R R R R R Unknown A A C C C C C Assumed Friend A A C A C C C Suspect A A C C A C C Friend A A A A C A C Hostile C1) C1) C1) C1) C1) C1) A
KEY: A - Accept; i.e. the Link-received identity is allocated to the network track (correlation allowed). R - Reject; i.e. the Link-received identity is rejected (correlation not allowed). C - Conflict; i.e. the system generates the warning 9Identity Conflict9 (correlation not allowed). 1) - The system generates the warning 9Hostile Track9 instead of 9Identity Conflict9.
Figure 9-1.
Identity Conflict for Network Tracks
9-8
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 bility is taken over, the alert status is assumed for that track. The status is set or reset manually via the ALERT menu item on the MFD. 9.3.8. Conflict Management. The Link-11 system detects conflicts between link received tracks and correlated own platform tracks and provides the facilities to resolve the conflicts. The following conflicts are detected on the Link-11 network between an own platform network track and a link received track on reception of link received information: a. Track number conflicts b. Position conflicts c. Category conflicts d. Identity conflicts. 9.3.8.1. Track Number Conflicts. A track number conflict is detected if a LRO track carries the same track number as an own platform network track and does not satisfy the correlation criteria on category (the two tracks dont have the same surface/air category or one of the tracks is not an air or surface track), identity (track identity is conflicting), or position. When a track number conflict is detected, the Link-11 system generates a link message (TN conflict) CDU page. The operator can resolve the track number conflict by initiating a decorrelation command which also deletes the conflict message from the message queue. The operator also has the option of only deleting the conflict message from the message queue from the link message (TN conflict) CDU page. 9.3.8.2. Position Conflicts. A position conflict is detected if an own platform network track, which is correlated to a LRO track, does not satisfy the position criteria for correlation. (Position conflict distance is set 0.5 Nm larger than the correlation distance by the DLP.) If the tracks have not been manually correlated and automatic correlation/decorrelation is on, the Link-11 system resolves the conflict by automatically decorrelating the two tracks. If a track has been manually correlated or automatic correlation/decorrelation is off, the operator can resolve the position conflict by initiating a decorrelation command from the position conflict CDU page which also deletes the conflict message from the message queue. The operator also has the option of only deleting the conflict message from the message queue. The operator can also decorrelate by selecting DECORR via the MFD pull-down menus. 9.3.8.3. Category Conflict. A category conflict is detected if an own platform network track correlated to a c. LRO track does not satisfy the category criteria for correlation (both tracks must be air or surface tracks). To resolve the category conflict the operator is required to: a. Generate a change data order via the link message (change data order) CDU page. Update local network track category by changing the track category in the associated track query/amplify CDU page. Manually decorrelate the track by selecting DECORR via the MFD pull-down menus.
b.
9.3.8.4. Identity Conflict. An identity conflict is detected if an own platform track correlated to a LRO track does not satisfy the identity criteria for correlation. The Link-11 system automatically generates a difference report and sends it over the link. The identity conflict table for network tracks (Figure 9-1.) applies in the following situations: a. An update for a correlated LRO network track is received. The LRO track of a correlated track changes its identity during correlation.
b.
To resolve the identity conflict the operator is required to: a. Generate a change data order via the link message (change data order) CDU page. Update local network track category by changing the track identity on the associated track query/amplify CDU page. Manually decorrelate the track by selecting DECORR via the MFD pull-down menus.
b.
c.
9.3.8.5. Orders to Change Category, Identity, and Identity Amplification. Any PU can transmit an order to change the category, identity, and identity amplification information for a track. Upon receipt of a change data order for an own platform track, the Link-11 system passes the new information to the mission processor via the mission MIL-STD-1553B bus interface. The mission processor then updates its data base for the indicated own platform track and provides a tactical data
9-9
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 update to the DLP. The DLP re-transmits the track if it has the reporting responsibility for the track. The operator can manually generate and transmit a change data order via the link message (change data order) CDU page. On receipt of a change data order, an alert is generated which informs the operator about the new category, identity, and identity amplification information for the track as ordered by the change data order. 9.3.9. IFF/SIF Reporting. The Link-11 system exchanges IFF / selective identification feature (SIF) data. The Link-11 system can transmit IFF/SIF data for own platform network tracks and receive or accept IFF/SIF data for LRO tracks. The IFF/SIF management report message is used for reporting of IFF/SIF data differences, IFF/SIF data update requests, and the clearing of erroneous codes. The Link-11 system supports the functionality of the IFF/SIF management report message as described below. 9.3.9.1. IFF/SIF Management Difference Report. If own platform has reporting responsibility, upon receipt of an IFF/SIF management difference report, the IFF/SIF information is accepted into the track data base and the data is transmitted to the other PUs in an IFF/SIF data report. No action is taken for a LRO track. 9.3.9.2. IFF/SIF Management Report (Update Request Order). The BC MP periodically provides all Link-11 enabled data in the tactical data base to the DLP via the mission data bus. The DLP provides the capability to respond to a received data update request message. Upon receiving a data update request message, the DLP automatically re-transmits all local network data. The operator can request an update from a participating unit via the UPDATE/IFF menu item on the MFD and designation of the participating unit. The BC MP then provides the PU address and sends it to the DLP for transmission. 9.3.9.3. IFF/SIF Management Report (Clear Request Order). When a clear request order is received, the Link-11 system clears the IFF codes. 9.3.9.4. Receipt of an IFF/SIF Data Report. The Link-11 system can report IFF/SIF surveillance data for tracks for which it has the reporting responsibility. The Link-11 systems can receive IFF/SIF surveillance data. 9.3.10. EW Coordination. The Link-11 system supports EW operations using the electronic warfare coordination and control message. This capability allows the coordination of EW investigation requests and replies. Capabilities include: a. Request periodic report (EW report) of a particular network track Request update then watch, of a particular network track Cancel the given orders.
b.
c.
9.3.10.1. Request Periodic Report Message. Upon receiving the request periodic report message, the Link-11 system acknowledges the request and starts the periodic EW reporting on the identified network track. This reporting continues until the order is stopped or the contact is subsequently lost. If the requested track is not held by own platform, the Link-11 system generates and transmits an automatic CANTCO (cannot comply). 9.3.10.2. Request Update Then Watch. Upon receiving this message and if the track is held locally, the Link-11 system makes an initial EW report on the requested track and then monitors the EW track and reports only tactically significant changes. If the requested track is not held by own platform, the Link-11 system generates and transmits an automatic CANTCO. 9.3.10.3. Cancel Request/Cease Report. The Link-11 system, upon receiving a cancel request/cease report message stops the operation commanded in the indicated request periodic report message. 9.3.11. ASW Aircraft Status Reporting. Every two minutes, the MP automatically reports aircraft/weapons status from the tactical data base to the DLP using the ASW aircraft status message. Information contained in the status report includes: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Own helicopter PU track number Total fuel Fuel alert time remaining Aircraft type (ASW helicopter, weapon carrying) Radar overall status ESM overall status FLIR overall status
9-10
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 h. i. j. Sonar overall status Conventional torpedo inventory Conventional missile inventory g. Engagement Broken
9.3.12. EW Intelligence. The Link-11 system can transmit and receive messages containing EW intelligence data. The operator can enter EW intelligence data for a track via the query/amplify track CDU page. EW intelligence data includes: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Category Nationality Specific Type General Type Mission Current Activity Operational Status
When the MP has determined that a firing has been completed, the operator is prompted for a battle damage assessment report via the link message (battle damage report) CDU page, which allows reporting of the following W/ES states: a. b. c. d. Heads up Effective Partially effective Not effective
9.3.14. Command Orders. Operational commanders transmit command orders to control weapons and coordinate anti-submarine warfare (ASW) operations using the Link-11 command message. The S-70B6 helicopter does not function in the command role and therefore will only transmit receipt/compliance messages as a response to received command orders applicable to own PU. The DLP automatically discards all command orders that are not addressed to own platform or the general address 1778. For command orders that cannot be processed and for those that concern tracks not contained in the MP database, the Link-11 system will automatically respond with CANTPRO (cannot process). The own platform operator is not notified of these command orders and no action is required. For all other command orders, the DLP accepts the message and automatically responds to the command message with a receipt message to the link. The DLP passes the command message to the MP, where an arrival alert to the operator is created and displayed in the bottom line of the MFD. The actual command order message content together with WILCO (will comply), HAVCO (have complied), and CANTCO (cannot comply) options are displayed on the link message (command message) CDU page. The operator is required to select either a WILCO, HAVCO, or CANTCO response by selecting the corresponding LS key on the CDU. The MP passes the operators response back to the DLP, which will transmit a command order receipt/compliance message to the original message sender. 9.3.15. DTS Parameters
9.3.13. Weapon / Engagement Status Reporting. The Link-11 system can inform the other PUs about the availability or the engagement status of onboard weapon systems for force engagement planning and coordination. The operator has the capability to enable automatic reporting of W/ES via the link message (weapon / engagement status) CDU page. If automatic reporting is not enabled, on-board weapons are reported as not available. Upon Link-11 initialization and upon change of W/ES, the BC MP determines hot and cold inventory of torpedoes and air to surface missiles (ASM) and provides the current W/ES to the DLP. When automatic reporting of W/ES is enabled, the MP automatically determines and reports the following W/ES states: a. b. c. d. e. f. Unavailable Available Investigating Engaging Ready To Fire Firing
9.3.15.1. Waveform. Link-11 messages are transmitted using either the conventional Link-11 waveform (CLEW) or the single-tone Link-11 waveform (SLEW) also referred to as Link-11 single-tone waveform (LESW).
9-11
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 SLEW and CLEW are not compatible waveforms. While the option exists to operate in either CLEW or SLEW, all participants in a given Link-11 net must select the same waveform to achieve connectivity between units. CLEW provides a parallel transmission of data and control frames. CLEW is composed of 16 audio tones: 14 data tones, 1 sync tone, and 1 Doppler correction tone. The 14 data tones are quadrature phase shift keying (QPSK) modulated and spaced every 110 Hz (935 Hz to 2585 Hz). The sync tone is binary phase shift keying (BPSK) modulated at 2915 Hz. The Doppler tone is 605 Hz and is not modulated. The Doppler tone is used to correct for Doppler frequency shifts in the received tones caused by the relative motion between the receiver and transmitter. Data is transmitted in two 30-bit frames, each consisting of 24 information bits and 6 error detection and correction (EDAC) bits. The information message is essentially a 48-bit word. Data and control frames are transmitted in parallel on 15 multiplexed tones. The sync tone is used to identify frame timing. Data speed is selectable between bit rates of 1364 (HF/UHF) or 2250 (UHF) bits per second (bps). SLEW is an improved Link-11 waveform that uses a single octal phase shift keying (8-PSK) modulated 1800 Hz tone to provide a serial data stream. With SLEW, Link-11 can operate more effectively in HF single sideband channels in the presence of skywave multipath interference. SLEW provides increased propagation and a more powerful EDAC (error detection and correction) algorithm. The operator can select between CLEW 2250 bps, CLEW 1364/18, CLEW 1364/9 and SLEW waveforms via the link parameters CDU page. 9.3.15.2. Diversity Combining. For a Link-11 net operating in the HF band, the DTS employs diversity combining to improve reliability of Link-11 data transmission over fading channels. Diversity combining is a technique in which a single received signal is derived from a combination of, or selected from, a plurality of transmission channels or paths. The diversity principle takes advantage of the fact that the fading characteristics of a given signal generally vary, at any given instant, between the upper sideband (USB) and lower sideband (LSB). Diversity combining is accomplished by the DTS by combining the information received from both the USB and LSB or selecting the strongest signal at any given instant. The operator can select between linear combining (AVG) and selective combining (SELECT) via the link parameters CDU page. 9.3.15.3. Error Detection and Correction. Error detection and correction (EDAC) is a processing technique which automatically tests for and corrects errors in transmitted Link-11 data. The operator can toggle DTS EDAC between DETECT and CORRECT via the link parameters CDU page. 9.3.16. Link-11 Loop Test. The Link-11 system provides a loop test facility for the DTS. The loop test is controlled and initiated via the data link loop test CDU page. Loop test results are provided on the data link AMTP test page 2/2. Refer to avionics test manual SA4047S70B6-ATM-000 for instructions on testing the Link-11 system. 9.4. OPERATION
The Link-11 system is operated via CDU pages and MFD pull-down menus. Operation of the Link-11 system via CDU pages is described in Chapter 4. Operation of the Link-11 system via MFD pull-down menus is described below. 9.4.1. Initialization. The DLP and the DTS require parameters that can only be set prior to enabling the link. These parameters are: a. b. c. d. DLRP or Auto DLRP mode Track block allocation method Own Network Track Number Automatic transmission threshold percentage (auto squawk maximum %) Correlation Distance (note that the position conflict distance shall be set 0.5 Nm larger than the correlation distance by the DLP)
e.
The default for DLRP mode is manual. Automatic DLRP mode can be selected via the tactical plot CDU page. With DLRP mode set to manual, a DLRP must be set via the tactical plot CDU page. The default for track block allocation method is block. Pool or pool/block method can be selected via the FTN pool CDU page. Own network track number has no default and must be set via the link setup CDU page. The default for ATTP (auto squawk maximum %) is 80%. A different value can be set via the link setup CDU page.
9-12
ORIGINAL
SA4047-S70HN-NFM-010 The default for correlation distance is 1 data mile (DM). A different value can be set via the link setup CDU page. Note that the position conflict distance is set by the DLP to 0.5 Nm larger than the correlation distance. The default values for the Link-11 system at initialization are listed in Figure 9-2. 9.4.2. Data Link Menu. Upon cold start initialization, the mission display mode is TACP (tactical plot). The icon menu at the upper left corner of the TACP display represents the tactical display top-level functions. Selecting the data link icon generates a submenu with the selections: ALERT>, SQUAWK, STRANGLE, GRIDLOCK, FILTER>, CORR, DECORR, CONTROL>, UPDATE>, and BURST. The data link menu structure is summarized in Figure 9-3. 9.4.2.1. Alert. Selection of ALERT generates the submenu: EMERGENCY and FORCE T. 9.4.2.1.1. Emergency. Selection of EMERGENCY, then the hooking and activation of a position display item (PDI) sets, the associated PDI to emergency status. If the status of the associated PDI is already set to emergency, status is set to not emergency. If the status transitions to emergency, the associated transmit status is set to transmit and the force tell status is set to no force tell. 9.4.2.1.2. Force Tell. Selection of FORCE T, then the hooking and activation of a PDI, sets the associated PDI to force tell. If the status of a PDI is already force tell, it is set to not force tell. If the status of a PDI transitions to force tell, the associated transmit status is set to transmit. 9.4.2.2. Squawk. Selection of SQUAWK, then the hooking and activation of a track or contact (ASW or ESM) sets the transmit status of the track or contact to transmit. Selection of SQUAWK, then the hooking and activation of a waypoint, generates a waypoint marker at the FMS flight plan waypoint position and sets the marker transmit status to transmit. Selection of SQUAWK, then the hooking and activation of a marker (with the exception of reference points) sets, the marker transmit status to transmit. Selection of SQUAWK, then the hooking and activation of the PIM, sets the marker transmit status to transmit. 9.4.2.3. Strangle. Selection of STRANGLE, then the hooking and activation of an object, sets the track transmit status to 9dont transmit9 with the exception of PDIs that are set to force tell or emergency. 9.4.2.4. Gridlock. Selection of GRID LOCK allows cursor entry steps for defining a grid lock pad. Hooking and activation of a system or LRO track or own helicopter sets the gridlock local track, then hooking and activation of the other track type (system or LRO or own helicopter) sets the gridlock remote track. Upon completion of these steps, the gridlock error (north and east in yards) is calculated using latitude/longitude to grid X, Y conversion. If the grid coordinate difference between the two tracks is less than 15 Nm for both the north and east error components, the BC MP prompts the display of the gridlock CDU page on the appropriate CDU. 9.4.2.5. Filter. Selection of FILTER generates the submenu: GEOGRAPHIC, RANGE, SECTOR, IDENT >, TYPE >, ASW BRG, SPL, ESM, and RESET. For those menu selections that provide filter control, the menu text is displayed in green if the filter is on. Selection toggles the control between on and off. In the case of RESET, all filter controls specified above and below are set to off. For those menu selections that provide access to lower level filter selections (i.e. identity filters and type filters), if any of the lower level filters are on, the menu selection on this menu is green. 9.4.2.5.1. Range. If the range filter control is off, selection of RANGE prompts the display of the filter settings CDU page at the associated CDU to allow entry of the range value and the ability of the operator to turn the filter on. If the range filter control is on, selection of RANGE toggles the range filter control to off. 9.4.2.5.2. Sector. If the sector filter control is off, selection of SECTOR prompts the display of the sector filter CDU page at the associated CDU to allow entry of the sector filter data and the ability of the operator to turn the filter on. If the sector filter control is on, selection of SECTOR toggles the sector filter control to off. 9.4.2.5.3. Geographic. If the geographic filter control is off, selection of GEOGRAPHIC prompts the display of the geographic filter CDU page at the associated CDU to allow entry of the geographic filter data and the ability of the operator to turn the filter on. If the geographic filter control is on, selection of GEOGRAPHIC toggles the geographic filter control to off. 9.4.2.5.4. Identity. Selection of IDENT generates the submenu: ASSM FR, FRIEND, UNKNOWN, and PENDING. The menu text is displayed in green if the filter is on. Selection of one of the menu items toggles the associated filter control on and off. 9.4.2.5.5. Track Type. Selection of TRK TYPE generates the submenu: ALL, AIR, SURFACE, SUB, NON-MIL, and NRT. The menu text is displayed in green if the filter
9-13
ORIGINAL
Control State DLP Air Track Filter Control DLP Assumed Friend Filter Control DLP ASW Bearing Filter Control DLP Auto Correlation Control DLP Auto Correlation Distance DLP Auto Squawk Control DLP Auto Squawk Maximum DLP DLRP Reporting Control DLP ESM Filter Control DLP Friend Filter Control DLP Geographic Filter Control DLP Geographic Filter Lower Right Position DLP Geographic Filter Upper Left Position DLP Gridlock Correction DLP Mode DLP Neutral Filter Control DLP Non-Military Track Filter Control DLP Non-Real Time Track Filter Control DLP Own Helicopter W/ES DLP Pending Filter Control DLP Range Filter Control DLP Range Filter Value DLP Sector Bearing Delta DLP Sector Filter Bearing DLP Sector Filter Control DLP Sector Filter Start Point DLP Special Markers Filter Control DLP Subsurface Track Filter Control DLP Surface Track Filter Control DLP Track Filter Control
Default Value Off Off Off On 1 DM Off 80 % Off Off Off Off N0/E0 N0/E0 N0, E0. Disabled Off Off Off Not Available Off On 64 DM. 1 0 Off N0/E0 Off Off Off Off
Figure 9-2.
Data Link Initialization Default Values (Part 1 of 2)
9-14
ORIGINAL
Control State DLP Unknown Filter Control DLP W/ES Reporting Control DLRP Method DTS Diversity DTS Error Correction DTS Station Mode Control DTS Waveform FTN Block Bottom FTN Block Top FTN Pool Bottom FTN Pool Top
Default value Off Off Manual Linear Combining Correction Picket CLEW 2250 bps 02018 77768 02018 77768
Figure 9-2.
Data Link Initialization Default Values (Part 2 of 2) Transition from DISABLED is an invalid operation if the following criteria is not met: a. b. Own helicopter PU must be valid. CDU radio mode setting for V/UHF 1, V/UHF 2, or HF is Link-11.
is on. Selection of one of the menu items toggles the associated filter control on and off. 9.4.2.6. Correlation. Selection of CORR allows cursor entry steps for performing a manual track correlation. Hooking and activation of a system track, then hooking and activation of a LRO network track issues an correlation command with the associated track numbers. 9.4.2.7. Decorrelation. Selection of DECORR, then the hooking and activation of a system track that is track link correlated, issues an decorrelation command with the associated track number. 9.4.2.8. Control. Selection of CONTROL generates the submenu: MODE >, AUTO SQUAWK, AUTO CORR, REPORT DLRP, and REPORT W/ES. For those menu selections that provide control (i.e. AUTO SQUAWK, AUTO CORR, REPORT DLRP, and REPORT W/ES), the menu text is displayed in green if the function is on. Selection of a menu selection that provides control toggles that control between on and off. 9.4.2.8.1. MODE. Selection of MODE generates the submenu: DISABLED, SILENCE, ROLL CALL, BROADCAST, NET SYNC, and NET TEST. The menu text for the current DLP Mode is displayed in green. Selection of one of the menu items sets the DLP mode to the associated selection.
The remainder of the link setup parameters will default to valid values. If the DLP loop test command is test, transition from DISABLED is an invalid operation and generates a 9TEST IN PROGRESS9 local MP type annunciation. 9.4.2.9. Update. Selection of UPDATE displays the submenu: TRACK and IFF. 9.4.2.9.1. Track. Selection of TRACK, then the hooking and activation of a system track or LRO track with a track PU status equal to PU, issues an track update request command to the specified PU. 9.4.2.9.2. IFF. Selection of IFF, then the hooking and activation of a system track that is track link correlated or a LRO track, issues an track IFF update request command for the specified track. 9.4.2.10. Burst. Selection of BURST when the DLP mode is silence issues a DTS short broadcast command.
9-15
ORIGINAL
ALERT SQUAWK STRANGLE GRID LOCK FILTER CORR EMERGENCY FORCE T DECORR CONTROL UPDATE BURST
GEOGRAPHIC RANGE SECTOR IDENT TYPE ASW BRG SPL ESM RESET
TRACK IFF
MODE AUTO SQUAWK AUTO CORR REPORT DLRP REPORT W/ES
ALL AIR SURFACE SUB NONMIL NRT
ASSM FR FRIEND UNKNOWN PENDING
DISABLED SILENCE ROLL CALL BROADCAST NET SYNC NET TEST

FQ1279
SA
Figure 9-3.
Data Link Menu Structure
9-16
ORIGINAL
INDEX
Page No. A Active Mode Alerts and Annunciations Annunciations ASC Station Inventory ASO Displays ASW Aircraft Status Reporting Audio Monitoring B Bomb Racks C Cable and Reel Assembly Cable Angle Cable Interface Power Supply CBIT CDU Commands CDU Data Entry CDU Display CDU Display Brightness Adjustment CDU Display Layout CDU Keyset CDU Page Organization And Details CDU Page Selection CDU Pages CDU, MFD, SCU, and Sonar Display Brightness Adjustment Communication Function Communication Page Group 5-4 5-9 5-1 5-9 7-2 3-1 3-1 6-1 3-1 3-1 4-1 3-1 3-5 6-1 2-3 4-1 6-3 5-6 3-7 7-4 6-3 3-8 9-10 6-2 Data Display Data Entry Data Link Command Orders Data Link Conflict Management Data Link Description Data Link Equipment Data link EW Coordination Data Link IFF/SIF Reporting Data Link Initialization Data Link Loop Test Data Link Management of Sonar Contacts Data Link Menu Data Link Operation Data Link Network Control Data Link Processor Data Link Reference Point (DLRP) Data Link Weapon / Engagement Status Reporting Data Management Data Page Group Data Recording (Provisional) Configuration and Assignment Constant False Alarm Rate (CFAR) Control and Display Function Crew Intercommunication (ICS) Crew Responsibilities Cursor Control Device D 3-4 3-1 9-11 9-9 9-1 9-1 9-10 9-10 9-12 9-12 5-10 9-13 9-12 9-4 9-1 9-3 9-11 7-2 4-1 5-9 Page No. 6-2 8-1 2-3 6- 1 1-1 5-1
Index-1
ORIGINAL
INDEX (Cont)
Page No. Data Terminal Set Data Transfer-Preflight Dip FTP Direct-To Page Display Control Panel DTS Parameters E Edit Page Group EICAS Emitter Geo-location Emitter Parameter File Emitter Report and Emitter ID ESM Annunciations ESM CDU Commands ESM Data Management ESM MP Control ESM Navigation Data ESM Operational Software Program ESM Status ESM System Interfaces ESM Warning Tones ESM Zeroize EW Intelligence F Flight Plan Page Group Frequency Agility (FA) Fuel Configuration G Gridlock I 9-3 Radar Antenna Radar Automatic Antenna Stabilization 4-1 8-1 6-3 4-1 3-5 7-2 7-1 7-2 7-4 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-2 7-1 7-2 7-1 7-3 7-4 9-11 Passive Mode Physical Countermeasures Capability Position Page Primary Flight Display R 8-2 8-2 Navigation Data Navigation Displays Navigation Function Navigation Page Group Network Load Control Network Track Management P Page Organization And Details 4-1 5-6 7-4 4-1 3-5 Lower M Manual Emitter Classification MFD Display Brightness Adjustment Mission Overview Mission Page Group Multifunction Slew Control N 7-2 3-5 2-3 4-1 9-5 9-6 7-3 6-1 1-1 4-2 3-4 9-1 6-2 5-9 4-1 3-4 9-11 ICS And Monitored Audio Volume Adjustment IFF Page Group Index Page Group Initial Time and Date Initiated Built-In Test (IBIT) Integrated Navigation Page Group L 5-5 Page No. 6-1 4-1 4-1 6-4 6-4 4-1
Index-2
ORIGINAL
INDEX (Cont)
Page No. Radar Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Radar Built-in Test (BIT) Capability Radar Built-In-Test (BIT) Operation Radar Display Radar Equipment Radar Operation Radar Pulse Compression Radar Receiver-Transmitter Radar Selectable Receiver Noise Threshold Radar Signal Processor Radios Raise Reeling Machine Reference Material S Scan Integration SCU Display Brightness Adjustment Sensitivity Time Control (STC) Sensor Function Sonar CBIT Sonar Control Unit Sonar Data Recording Sonar Display Sonar Display Brightness Adjustment Sonar Dome Control Sonar Equipment Sonar Interface Unit Sonar Operation Sonar Operator Bit Procedures Sonar Tests 8-1 6-1 8-1 2-3 5-9 5-1 5-9 5-1 6-1 5-2 5-1 5-3 5-4 5-4 6-4 Tactical Capabilities Tactical Data Tactical Displays Tactical Processing Function Test Displays Track Alert Control Track Numbers Track-While-Scan (TWS) Tune Table U Underwater Voice Communication V V/UHF and HF Radios Channelization VOR And Marker Beacon Audio Volume Adjustment 6-2 6-1 5-7 8-2 8-2 8-6 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 6-1 5-7 5-2 1-1 Sound Velocity Profile Station Descriptions Status Monitoring Status Page Group Status, Monitor, and Test Displays Steer Page Group Stores Stores Management Function Submersible Unit System Functions System Interfaces System Management and Control Function System Operation System Start And Initialization T 5-9 5-9 3-6 2-3 3-10 9-8 9-1 8-1 7-1 Page No. 5-6 1-1 6-3 4-1 3-5 4-1 6-3 2-3 5-3 2-1 7-1 2-4 7-1 6-3
Index-3 (Reverse Blank)
ORIGINAL
FO-0 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL
LF / ADF RECEIVER
SIN MOD COS MOD RF LF / ADF AUDIO
LF / ADF ANTENNA PILOT CSC
MODE C DATA
ENCODING ALTIMETER P/O EICAS P / O PILOT CDU
COPILOT CSC HOIST OPERATOR HEADSET
IFF TRANSPONDER
MODE 4 REPLY MODE 4 CHALLENGE VIDEO MODE 4 AUDIO RF M4 AUDIO
TRANSPONDER COMPUTER (PROVISIONAL)
IFF
MODE 4 HOLD
P / O COPILOT CDU
ASO CSC CREW HOVER CONTROL PENDANT
TSO CSC DF ENABLE COMM RF DATA CIPHER RX AUDIO AUDIO PTT TOD TOD PTT AUDIO P/O EGI P/O ADU PTT CRYPTO PTT CRYPTO DECRYPTED AUDIO DECRYPTED AUDIO
RESCUE HOIST AND CARGO HOOK PENDANT
DATA
NO. 1 VHF / UHF RECEIVER TRANSMITTER
UPPER ALU COMM RF
ANT BIAS UPPER VHF / UHF / IFF ANTENNA BEARING P/O COPILOT OUTBOARD MFD
KY58 NO. 1 (PROVISIONAL) P/O ASU
DF ENABLE DF RF DF AUDIO
DIRECTION FINDER ANTENNA
TERNARY BEARING
NO. 2 VHF / UHF RECEIVER TRANSMITTER
KY58 NO. 2 (PROVISIONAL)
COMM RF
CIPHER RX AUDIO DATA COMM RF DF ENABLE MARKER BEACON AUDIO 2 VOR / LOC AUDIO 2 MARKER BEACON AUDIO 1 VOR / LOC AUDIO 1 DATA LOWER ALU ANT BIAS
LOWER VHF / UHF / TACAN ANTENNA
P/O EFIS JUNCTION BOX
BEARING TERNARY
P/O PILOT OUTBOARD MFD
ID TONE TACAN RECEIVER TRANSMITTER RF TERNARY UPPER TACAN ANTENNA P/O CDUS
RF
PT / CT CONTROL
MB RF
MARKER BEACON ANTENNA COUPLER
MARKER BEACON ANTENNA
LEFT VOR / LOC ANTENNA
VOR / LOC RF
VOR / LOC RF
RIGHT VOR / LOC ANTENNA
USB AUDIO LSB AUDIO PTT AUDIO PTT ANDVT BASIC TERMINAL UNIT (PROVISIONAL) AUDIO PTT P / C MODE SELECT ZEROIZE CONTROL
P / O MISSION SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL
ZEROIZE CONTROL
GS RF
GLIDESLOPE ANTENNA NO. 1 VOR / LOC FILTER MB RF GS RF VOR / LOC RF VOR / LOC RF VOR / LOC DIPLEXER COUPLER VOR / LOC RF RCVR V/L VOR / LOC PHASE COUPLER DATA TRANSFER UNIT (FMS)
HF RECEIVER TRANSMITTER
P/O AVIONICS RELAY PANEL
VOR / LOC RF
NO. 1 VOR / ILS RECEIVER
NO. 2 VOR / ILS RECEIVER
FIBER OPTIC CONTROL RF
NO. 2 VOR / LOC FILTER
HF ANTENNA COUPLER
RF
HF ANTENNA DUAL FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM MILSTD1553B BUS

FQ1295_1
SA
FO-1.
Mission Avionic System Component Interrelationship (Sheet 1 of 6) FO-1 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL
INDUCTION COMPASS TRANSMITTER
SLAVING DIFFERENTIAL SYNCHRO P/O TSO MFD
COMPASS CONTROL PANEL DIRECTIONAL GYRO SLAVING SYNCHRO HEADING SYNCHRO DG / SLAVED HEADING VALID
HEADING 2 HEADING 2 VALID HEADING 2 / SLAVED ATTITUDE VALID PITCH / ROLL ALTITUDE RELIABILITY PLT DH
PILOT INBOARD AND OUTBOARD MFDS
HEADING DIFFERENTIAL SIGNAL
SYNCHRO TRANSFORMER
PILOT VERTICAL GYRO
ATTITUDE VALID PITCH / ROLL
COPILOT VERTICAL GYRO
ATTITUDE VALID PITCH / ROLL COPILOT INBOARD AND OUTBOARD MFDS CPLT DH
DOPPLER RECEIVER TRANSMITTER ANTENNA
VALID DATA (Vda) (Vha) TEST INHIBIT TEST INITIATE
DIGITAL AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
COPILOT RAD ALT HEIGHT INDICATOR
DECISION HEIGHT AUDIO WARNING
SELF TEST AFCS ENGAGED RELIABILITY AFCS SELF TEST ENABLE
ATTITUDE RELIABILITY
RAD ALT RECEIVER TRANSMITTER
RF OUT RF IN
RAD ALT TRANSMIT ANTENNA (LEFT)
ON / OFF
P/O MISSION SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL
COPILOT RAD ALT HEIGHT INDICATOR
DECISION HEIGHT AUDIO WARNIG
P / O ADU
RAD ALT RECEIVE ANTENNA (RIGHT)
DUAL FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM MILSTD1553B BUS
FQ1295_2
SA
FO-1.
DUAL MISSION SYSTEM MILSTD1553B BUS GPS ANTENNA EGI ON / OFF SATELLITE SIGNALS LEFT HAND WOW SWITCH GPS POWER DIVIDER GPS ANTENNA WOW P / O AVIONICS RELAY PANEL WOW ZEROIZE PT / CT CONTROL (NO. 1 KY) BB / DP CONTROL (NO. 1 KY) PT / CT CONTROL (NO. 2 KY) BB / DP CONTROL (NO. 2 KY) ANDVT PT / CT CONTROL V / UHF DF RADIO SELECT DF SELECTED FLAG V / UHF ANTENNA SELECT TOP ANTENNA SELECTED BOTTON ANTENNA SELECTED M4 CODE HOLD LINK 11 MSB LINK 11 LSB OVERHEAD CONSOLE
WOW ZEROIZE
P / O AVIONICS RELAY PANEL P/O MISSION SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL
P/O MISSION SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL P/O EGI P/O PILOT CSC
DIGITAL FLUX VALVE
RS 422
GPS FILL PORT
LOAD / REFERENCE
DOPPLER ON / OFF CONTROL EMCON COMMAND IFF EMERGENCY COMMAND DCU NO. 2 P / O DCU NO. 2 DCU NO. 2 RADIO NO. 1 SELECT RADIO NO. 2 SELECT RADIO NO. 3 SELECT RADIO NO. 4 SELECT RADIO NO. 5 SELECT PILOT OUTBOARD MFD STATUS PILOT INBOARD MFD STATUS PILOT FMS LRN ADC 2 ARINC
P/O PILOT CDU
P/O COPILOT CDU
DOPPLER ON / OFF CONTROL EMCON COMMAND IFF EMERGENCY COMMAND DCU NO. 1 P / O DCU NO. 1 DCU NO. 1 RADIO NO. 1 SELECT RADIO NO. 2 SELECT P/O RADIO NO. 3 SELECT COPILOT CSC RADIO NO. 4 SELECT RADIO NO. 5 SELECT COPILOT OUTBOARD MFD STATUS COPILOT INBOARD MFD STATUS COPILOT FMS LRN ADC 2 ARINC
P / O EFIS JUNCTION BOX
P/O AVIONICS RELAY PANEL
ARINC OUT
PILOT OAT PROBE
OUTSIDE AIR TEMP
COPILOT OAT PROBE P/O ASU
OUTSIDE AIR TEMP
PITOT PORT
PITOT PRESSURE P/O PILOT ADC
PITOT PORT
PITOT PRESSURE P/O COPILOT ADC
TSO CDU
STATIC PORT
STATIC PRESSURE
P / O IFF TRANSPONDER
STATIC PORT
STATIC PRESSURE
PILOT ACCELEROMETER
ACCEL
P/O ICS
COPILOT ACCELEROMETER
ACCEL
ADC 2 CPLT ADC 1 PLT PLT PFD ARINC BARO SET ADC 1 ADC 2 ADC 1 BARO SET P/O EFIS JUNCTION BOX P/O COPILOT OUTBOARD MFD
ADC 1 CPLT ADC 1 PLT CPLT PFD ARINC BARO SET
ADC 1 ADC 2
P/O COPILOT INBOARD MFD
ADC 1 ADC 2 ADC 2 BARO SET
P/O PILOT OUTBOARD MFD
ADC 1 ADC 2
P/O PILOT INBOARD MFD

FQ1295_3
SA
DUAL FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMMILSTD1553B BUS
FO-1.
DUAL MISSION SYSTEM MILSTD1553B BUS
DATA LINK PROCESSOR
ATDS LINK
KG40A (PROVISIONAL)
ATDS LINK
DATA TERMINAL SET
USB AUDIO LSB AUDIO DATA KEY
P / O ADU RED VIDEO GREEN VIDEO BLUE VIDEO RIGHT AUDIO LEFT AUDIO SUMMED AUDIO MICROPHONE AUDIO UQC KEY
VIDEO CONVERTER (PROVISIONAL)
CONVERTED VIDEO
ACOUSTIC VIDEO TAPE RECORDER (PROVISIONAL)
DATA TRANSFER UNIT (MSN)
KGX40 REMOTE CONTROL PANEL (PROVISIONAL)
SONAR AUDIO P / O AUDIO DISTRIBUTION UNIT
RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSOR
ARINC 429 (B) DPRSV PULSE GATE TTL GRID PULSE PRETRIGGER CONVERT STC CLOCK XTAL 1 TEST XTAIL 2 TEST XMIT TEST VIDEO DATA AZ DRIVE ARINC 429 (B) AZ EXC AZ TECH EL CUR AZ SYNCHRO AZ REF DATA LOSS
XMIT INHIBIT RADAR RECEIVER TRANSMITTER XMIT INHIBIT RF RF
MISCELLANEOUS RELAY PANEL
AUDIO
P/O ASO CSC MASTER SHEAR RELAY (MISCELLANEOUS RELAY PANEL)
CABLE CUT 1 CABLE CUT 2 RF SWITCH CAD LONG CABLE DRIFT LAT CABLE DRIFT CABLE SELECT DOME SUBMERGED CAD FADE CONTROL CABLE ENGAGE LONG CABLE FAIL LAT CABLE FAIL DIM CONTROL DEPTH > 20 FEET
SONAR ARMING SWITCH
MASTER SHEAR
RADAR ANTENNA
DUMMY LOAD
SONAR SET, HELRAS
AFCC
PITCH / ROLL
P / O COPILOT VERTICAL GYRO
STATUS / CONTROL RAW VIDEO
FLIR TURRET UNIT PENGUIN / HELLFIRE LAUNCH SYSTEM
MODE RESET LAMP TEST RELEASE CONSENT
AFCS CONTROL PANEL
HCU INTERFACE
FLIR HAND CONTROL UNIT
PILOT SUB / SNAG SONAR SUBMERGED
P / O DCU NO. 1
GIMBAL DISABLE
GIMBAL DISABLE SWITCH
WOW AFT RELAY PANEL WOW
P / O DCU NO. 2
FLIR ELECTRONICS UNIT
LASER ARM INTERLOCK
AUXILIARY ARMING PANEL P/O PILOT INBOARD MFD
DC LONG CABLE ANGLE DC LAT CABLE ANGLE
P/O TSO MFD LONG CABLE ANGLE LAT CABLE ANGLE P/O COPILOT OUTBOARD MFD P/O COPILOT INBOARD MFD P/O PILOT OUTBOARD MFD P/O PILOT INBOARD MFD
COMPOSITE VIDEO
LONG CABLE ANGLE LAT CABLE ANGLE
COMPOSITE VIDEO
P/O TSO MFD
FG1318_4
SA
FO-1.
BIT / CAL RF CHANNEL A RF CHANNEL B CONTROL / POWER FORWARD LEFT ANTENNA
BIT / CAL
RF CHANNEL 1 RF CHANNEL 2 LEFT CONTROL RIGHT CONTROL POWER
INFRARED COUNTERMEASURES CONTROL PANEL (PROVISIONAL)

CONTROL / POWER
CONTROL CONTROL
UPPER IRCM TRANSMITTER (PROVISIONAL)
MASTER CONTROL JUNCTION BOX (PROVISIONAL)
CONTROL
LOWER IRCM TRANSMITTER (PROVISIONAL)
P/O AFT RELAY PANEL RF CHANNEL A RF CHANNEL B ANTENNA INTERFACE UNIT RF CHANNEL A RF CHANNEL B AFT RIGHT ANTENNA FORWARD RIGHT ANTENNA
WOW INTLK UPPER IRCM FAIL LOWER IRCM FAIL P/O NO. 1 DCU
P/O NO. 1 DCU
ESM RECEIVER PROCESSOR UNIT
CONTROL / POWER RF CHANNEL A RF CHANNEL B BIT / CAL TRANSMIT DATA RECEIVE DATA ESM RECORDER / LOADER
CONTROL / POWER AFT LEFT ANTENNA BIT / CAL
WOW
P/O AFT RELAY PANEL
WOW BYPASS
TRANSMIT DATA RECEIVE DATA
GROUND STATION RECEPTACLE
PILOT COLLECTIVE STICK GRIP
P/O MISCELLANEOUS RELAY PANEL FIRE 130 GEN X POWER MAG ID MAG PRESENT
ARM / SAFE SEQUENCER 1A
DISPENSER 1A
WARNING TONE
P / O ADU
COPILOT COLLECTIVE STICK GRIP CMDS PROGRAMMER
AUX ARMING PANEL JETTISON SDL (+) / CH BYPASS DISP SDL () / FL BYPASS DISP BYPASS 01 DISPENSE BYPASS 02 DISPENSE BYPASS LOGIC POWER FIRE 130 GEN X POWER MAG ID MAG PRESENT
SAFETY SWITCH NO. 1
THREAT WARNING DISPLAY
MLV PANEL
MANUAL DISPENSE SEMIAUTO DISPENSE CDL SDL
DISPENSER 2A
COUNTERMEASURES CONTROL PANEL
SEQUENCER 2A
SAFETY SWITCH NO. 2
EW MILSTD1553B BUS
FG1318_5
SA
FO-1.
TSO MULTIFUNCTION SLEW CONTROL
P/O TSO MFD MISSILE CONTROL SYSTEM
DISCRETES
DISCRETES
PILOT MULTIFUNCTION SLEW CONTROL
ARMAMENT CONTROL PANEL
PILOT DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL COPILOT DISPLAY CONTROL PANEL
PILOT DISPLAY CONTROL COPILOT DISPLAY CONTROL PILOT ATT REV PILOT ADC REV PILOT DCU REV PILOT FMS REV PILOT HDG REV COPILOT ATT REV COPILOT ADC REV COPILOT DCU REV COPILOT FMS REV COPILOT HDG REV
PILOT DISPLAY CONTROL PILOT ATT REV PILOT ADC REV PILOT DCU REV PILOT FMS REV DCU 1 DCU 2 PILOT FMS LRN PILOT INBOARD MFD STATUS PILOT DISPLAY CONTROL PILOT ATT REV PILOT ADC REV PILOT DCU REV PILOT FMS REV DCU 1 DCU 2 PILOT FMS LRN PILOT OUTBOARD MFD STATUS
P/O PILOT INBOARD MFD
MISSILE DATA BUS
DISCRETES AGM119 B PENGUIN MISSILE
SELECT JETTISON PANEL
ASC
PILOT REVERSION SWITCHES
M299 HELLFIRE LAUNCHER P/O PILOT OUTBOARD MFD
COPILOT REVERSION SWITCHES
MK46 TORPEDOES
DISCRETES
DISCRETES
EMERGENGY CONTROL PANEL
NO. 1 ENGINE SENSORS
NO. 1 FUEL QUANTITY
COPILOT DISPLAY CONTROL COPILOT ATT REV COPILOT ADC REV COPILOT DCU REV COPILOT FMS REV COPILOT HDG REV DCU 1 DCU 2 COPILOT FMS LRN COPILOT OUTBOARD MFD STATUS
FUEL TANK P/O COPILOT OUTBOARD MFD LOB BOMB RACK (MISSILE / TORPEDO / TANK) LIB BOMB RACK (TORPEDO / TANK) RIB BOMB RACK (TORPEDO / TANK)
NO. 2 FUEL QUANTITY
P/O NO. 1 DCU
MAIN TRANSMISSION SENSORS
CAUTIONS, ADVISORIES, WARNINGS
DCU 1 PILOT DCU 1 COPILOT
COPILOT DISPLAY CONTROL COPILOT ATT REV COPILOT ADC REV COPILOT DCU REV COPILOT FMS REV COPILOT HDG REV DCU 1 DCU 2 COPILOT FMS LRN COPILOT INBOARD MFD STATUS
DCU 2 PILOT DCU 2 COPILOT P/O NO. 2 DCU NO. 2 ENGINE SENSORS
COPILOT MULTIFUNCTION SLEW CONTROL
FQ1295_6A
SA
FO-1.
SONAR DISPLAY
SCU
LIGHTS / KEY SELECT CONTROL PANEL
CSC
LS1
LS5
SONAR DOME CONTROL SONAR CCD CABLE ANGLE CONTROL PANEL
SONAR POWER PANEL
LS2 LS3
ASO DIMMING PANEL
LS4
BRT
DATA LINE 1 PAGE TITLE LINE DATA LINE 2 INFORMATION LINE DATA LINE 3 ANNUNCIATION LINE DATA LINE 4 [SCRATCHPAD ]
LS6
LS7
LS8
ASO CONSOLE
COM NAV IFF M3 STR FPLN PSN DIR
FIXED FUNCTION KEYS
1 4
2 5 8 0 _
3 6 9
A G M S /
B H N T
EDIT
C I O U
IDX
D J P V Y
STAT
E K G W Z
MARK
F L
NUMERIC KEYPAD
7 R X
ALPHA KEYPAD
CLR
MSN
DATA
INAV
CSC
DIMMING CONTROL PANEL
CDU
MFD CDU
MSC
TSO CONSOLE
FQ0984
SA
FO-2.
ASO Console, TSO Console, and CDU FO-7 (Reverse Blank) ORIGINAL
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Effective Pages ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL Page Numbers 1 (Reverse Blank) 3 (Reverse Blank) 5 thru 21 (Reverse Blank) 23 (Reverse Blank) 25 (Reverse Blank) 27 thru 31 (Reverse Blank) 33 (Reverse Blank) 35 thru 37 (Reverse Blank) 1-1 (Reverse Blank) 2-1 thru 2-12 3-1 thru 3-107 (Reverse Blank) 4-1 thru 4-293 (Reverse Blank) 5-1 thru 5-10 6-1 thru 6-27 (Reverse Blank) 7-1 thru 7-4 Effective Pages ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL ORIGINAL Page Numbers 8-1 thru 8-6 9-1 thru 9-16 Index-1 thru Index-3 (Reverse Blank) FO-0 (Reverse Blank) FO-1 (Reverse Blank) FO-2 (Reverse Blank) FO-3 (Reverse Blank) FO-4 (Reverse Blank) FO-5 (Reverse Blank) FO-6 (Reverse Blank) FO-7 (Reverse Blank) LEP-1 (Reverse Blank)
LEP-1 (Reverse Blank)
ORIGINAL

Sa4047 S70HN NFM 010

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sa4047 S70HN NFM 010

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sa4047 S70HN NFM 010

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INTRODUCTION 1

AIR SUBSYSTEM OPERATORS MANUAL HELLENIC NAVY MODEL S70B HELICOPTERS

DATA ENTRY DATA DISPLAY

PAGE ORGANIZATION 4 AND DETAILS

ASW SENSOR SUBSYSTEM

ESM SYSTEM OPERATION

SURFACE 8 SEARCH RADAR

DATA LINK SYSTEM

INDEX AND FOLDOUTS

1994 SIKORSKY AIRCRAFT CORPORATION

Page No. CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION

1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5.

1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1

CHAPTER 2 - FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

2.1. 2.2. 2.2.1. 2.2.2. 2.2.3. 2.2.4. 2.2.5. 2.2.6. 2.2.7.

2-1 2-1 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-4

CHAPTER 3 - DATA ENTRY/DATA DISPLAY

3.1. 3.2. 3.2.1. 3.2.2. 3.2.3. 3.2.4.

3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-1

CHAPTER 4 - PAGE ORGANIZATION AND DETAILS

Page No. CHAPTER 5 - ASW SENSOR SUBSYSTEM

CHAPTER 6 - SYSTEM OPERATION

CHAPTER 7 - ESM SYSTEM OPERATION

7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.3.1. 7.3.2. 7.3.3. 7.3.4.

7-1 7-1 7-1 7-1 7-1 7-1 7-2

CHAPTER 8 - SURFACE SEARCH RADAR

CHAPTER 9 - DATA LINK COMMUNICATION SET, LINK-11

CHAPTER 2 - FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

Figure 2-1. Figure 2-2.

CHAPTER 3 - DATA ENTRY/DATA DISPLAY

CHAPTER 4 - PAGE ORGANIZATION AND DETAILS

Figure 4-1. Figure 4-2.

Page Organization ............................................................................... Index 1 Page ........................................................................................

CHAPTER 5 - ASW SENSOR SUBSYSTEM

CHAPTER 6 - SYSTEM OPERATION

6-5 6-7 6-8 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-16 6-21

CHAPTER 7 - ESM SYSTEM OPERATION

CHAPTER 8 - SURFACE SEARCH RADAR

Radar Menu Structure ...........................................................................

CHAPTER 9 - DATA LINK COMMUNICATION SET, LINK-11

Figure 9-1. Figure 9-2. Figure 9-3.

9-8 9-14 9-16

Temporary Revisions Outstanding - to be maintained by the custodian of this manual:

TEMPORARY REVISION NUMBER(S)

ORIGINATOR/DATE (or DATE/TIME GROUP)

Countermeasures System Civil Navigation Communication

Sensitivity Time Control Submersible Unit Surveillance Sound Velocity Profile

USB UTC UWT V/UHF VAB VG VHF VNAV VOR/ILS

VOR/LOC VOX W/ES WFOV WILCO WOD WOW WRA

TACTICAL CHANGE RECOMMENDATION

[CHECK IF CONTINUED ON BACK Justification

Signature Address of Unit or Command

Manual No. SA4047-S70B6-ATM-000 SA4047-S70HN-NFM-000 SA4047-S70HN-NFM-800

Title Avionics Test Manual Flight Manual Aircrew Pocket Checklist

1-1 (Reverse Blank)

b. IFF (identification, receiver/transmitter c. d. e.

The sensor subsystem consists of the following equipment:

STORES MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

TACTICAL PROCESSING FUNCTION